Books by Dr. Carver 

Applied Psychology Roycroft Edition . $[o.oo 
Rough Nuggets DeLuxe .... 5.00 
Carver's Chiropractic Analysis 10.00 
Psvcho-Bio-Phvsiology . . . 10.00 



Digitized by the Internet Archive 
in 2011 with funding from 
The Library of Congress 



http://www.archive.org/details/psychobiophysiolOOcarv 



PSYCHO- 
BIO-PHYSIOLOGY 

Consisting of Applied 

Psychology, Biology as the Cause of Histology 

and Anatomy and a Description of the 

Conduct of Anatomic Parts, 

which is Physiology 



By Willard Carver, LL. B., D. C. 

President of Carver Chiropractic College of Oklahoma 

City and also of New York City; 

formulator of the Science of Chiropractic; 

Instructor in Anatomy , Physiology, Pathology, 

Biology and Psychology; 

Member of the 

Iowa Bar 



Price $10.00 Delivered 

For Sale By 

Book Department 

Carver Chiropractic College 

Oklahoma City; New York City 






^ 



Copyright, 1920 
By Willard Carver 



MAR '£ 1320 



©CI.A565353 






Preface to the Present Work 

THIS is a compilation of parts of several books that I 
have furnished to the profession. 

These books it seems to me have been gladly received 
and I would not do justice to their many readers, who have 
written me concerning them, if I did not believe that they 
have gratified a real desire, and been of value as tools of 
efficient service. 

I think I have observed a growing need for a book — literary 
and scientific, instructive as well as entertaining, both for 
professional preparation and use, and for the use of the 
layman so so 

Chiropractic principles need to be disseminated as carefully 
and fully, in certain ways, to growing children and society in 
general — as they do to the professional Chiropractor. This 
book is formulated to meet that need. 

To the professional person it is a text book of incalculable 
value. To the non-professional person it is a mine of simple 
and exact truth that cannot be found in concrete form else- 
where so so 

In the production of this book I have included, practically 
unchanged, "/Applied Psychology " published by me in 1914 
and which was received with such enthusiastic approval, 
that it met with no criticism anywhere. 

I have included here the complete Physiology deduced from 
the basic principle of Chiropractic, with certain corrections 
of spelling, punctuation, paragraphing and selection of words, 
as found in " Carver's Chiropractic Analysis," which I 
published in 1915. 

Between the Psychology and the Physiology I have built 
the Biologic bridge that scientifically connects these two very 
important departments of human experience, using much 



that I have already published in my Preparatory "Outline for 

Chiropractic Study," and adding thereto much that I have 

not published before. 

The Embryologic portion is sufficiently illustrated for study 

purposes $+■ a«» 

At the opening of each Physiologic department there is an 

Anatomic Synopsis of the organs involved in the discussion, 

with sufficient cuts of the same to render the discussion 

perfectly clear and easily understood. 

It is my earnest hope that this book will be as well received 

as those that preceded it, and when it is, the author will be 

repaid for this strenuous, though self-imposed, task. 

WILLARD CARVER. 



DEDICATION 

"^^^^0 all that have patiently, per- 
€ J sistently and honestly striven 
^^^ to know truth and in their 
efforts for such acquisition have 
understood that in the Universe — all 
that is — is essential and necessary 
and that each attribute, organism, 
organ, segment, atom or thing has 
its place and relatio?iship in the 
great harmony — and to all that shall 
come in like spirit and recognition 
in the future — this book is most 
respectfully dedicated. 

By the Author 



Table of Contents 



Lecture No. i. 



" ' 


' o_ 


(< ( 


3- 


i i i 


4- 


" 


5- 


c< < 


' 6. 


<l < 


' 7- 


<c < 


' 8. 


ipter N 


o. 9. 


it < 


' 10. 


<< i 


' 11. 


tt < 


' 12. 


d i 


13- 


<< < 


14. 


<< < 


' i5- 


(i < 


' 16. 


<< < 


' i7- 


t< < 


' 18. 


<< < 


19. 


" * 


' 20. 


c ( < 


' 21. 


c< < 


' 22. 


c . 1 


23- 


a < 


24. 


(< < 


25- 


H i 


' 26. 


a i 


' 27. 


" ' 


' 28. 


a ( 


29. 




30- 


" 


' 3 1 - 



Basic Terminology 25 

Attributes of the Soul 39 

Suggestion — Defined — Applied 50 

Language of the Soul — Telepathy 66 

Suggestion Applied — Hypnotism 86 

Rational Psychology 105 

Healers — Ancient and Modern 121 

Psychology and Health 146 

General Discussion of Biology 167 
Physical Laws — Relative to Distribution 170 

Morphology — Vegetable — Animal 175 

Histology 179 

Bio-Anatomy 187 

Forming of Zygote 192 

Embryology — to Embryo 197 

Embryo — Nutrition and Protection 204 

Embryo — Folding off — Delivery 211 

How to Study Anatomy 217 
Descriptives — Anatomic and Physiologic 221 

The Human Organism 226 

Anatomic Arrangement for Physiology 230 

Basic Principles of Physiology 235 

Anatomic Synopsis of Nerve System 240 

Physiologic Analysis of Nerve System 251 

Physiologic Analysis of Alimentation 255 

Digestion — Mouth 260 

Digestion — Stomach 266 

Digestion — Small Intestine 272 

Digestion — Large Intestine 286 

Physiologic Phases of Absorption 293 

Physiology of Lymph System 298 



32. Physiology of Blood System 305 

23. Physiology of Blood Transportation 313 

34. Physiology of Respiration 324 

35. Physiology of Kidneys 331 

36. Physiology of Skin 337 

37. General Depuration 345 

38. Assimilation 350 

39. Physiology — Touch, Taste and Smell 355 

40. Physiology — Seeing and Hearing 359 

41. Physiology — Male Procreation 367 

42. Physiology — Female Procreation 375 



Part One 

Applied Psychology 

A Series of Lectures 

presenting an Analysis of 

Psychology in a Simplified 

Terminology; with Special Attention 

to Biologic Phases of Physiology and 

Demonstrating the Separateness 

of the Entities Mind 

and Soul 



By Willard Carver, LL. B., D. C. 



Preface to Psychology 

IN the final and last consideration, there is but one import- 
ant fact that presents itself to us, and that is our existence. 
The highest proof that we may have of this fact is only 
our consciousness of it. For if asked to prove our existence, 
we are in a more helpless condition than with respect to 
almost any other subject. We can make some show of tracing 
our ancestry; of following out the history of nations; of 
getting reasons for conditions ordinarily considered to be 
within the scope of science, but as to our individual existence, 
our highest proof is but our consciousness of it. 
The next most important fact is our knowledge of self. Pope 
has said that "The greatest study of mankind is man;" but 
I would say that the greatest study of mankind is to learn 
how to study himself. 

Human beings generally conceive that they are learning about 
themselves when they are studying history and science, but 
really all they are doing, in such study, is getting farther from 
self, for after all, the study of history and the sciences furnish 
nothing of value as to self, for history always fades into 
tradition and tradition becomes lost in the night of time; and 
the so-called sciences when investigated with sufficient care 
and analysis resolve themselves into theories and the theories 
finally resolve themselves into the misty substance of 
phantasm and lose themselves in the vortex of dreams. 
The individual therefore that would study self; that would 
understand self , must confine his investigations to self. He must 
recognize the fact of his existence as paramount to all other facts 
and must bring himself to understand that all that he can 
know of self must be ascertained by means of introspection 
through the processes of deduction. He must come to understand 
that in the analysis of self lies his only field of research, except, 
solely immediate comparison with his fellows. 

ii 



The following lectures were delivered entirely from the stand- 
point herein disclosed and assumed to enter no other field. 
It was the highest object to show the complete separateness 
of Mind from Soul. The lectures present and sustain the 
proposition that the relation of Mind to Soul is the same as 
that sustained by the function of any organ to the Soul. That 
is to say, the production of Gastric Juice, from the walls of 
the Stomach, sustains the same relation to the Soul, that the 
production of Mind, in the Brain, sustains to the Soul. 
This preface is presented because it is the belief of the author 
that it is upon the points herein presented that writers on 
Psychology, as well as people generally, have gone astray, 
and he has therefore taken this opportunity to attract special 
attention to these thoughts in advance. 

WILLARD CARVER. 



12 



Foreword to Psychology 

THE lectures herewith presented for consideration were 
delivered in the auditorium of Carver Chiropractic 
College as a part of my regular work as Dean of the 
faculty, to the student body and the public, that is each year 
invited to attend during the course of psychic lectures. 
At the time of their delivery there was no intention that they 
should be published in book form but I had intended and had 
arranged to have each lecture preserved and multigraphed 
in sufficient numbers to supply the students desiring them s©» 
Atter the delivery of the second lecture, I was importuned by 
friends to preserve the lectures with great care and to publish 
them in book form. 

I acceded to these requests and since the transcripts of the 
lectures were returned to me, I have given them careful 
consideration, to make certain that they contain in clear, 
terse language what I said at the time of delivery, as well as 
what I intended at that time should be conveyed. 
The lectures were delivered from synopsis outlines. 
I had prepared these outlines with the intention of covering 
the entire field of psychic research with the exception of that 
branch of it properly referred to as Spiritism. 
I purposely refrained from especially discussing the subject 
of Spiritism, because to do justice to that subject would 
require much more scope than a lecture and more space than 
I have in this book. And then Spiritism is an incident to a 
religion presenting a health phase; and in this course of 
lectures it was not my intention to enter the realm of the 
controversial, but to keep clearly within the scope of analysis 
and deduction; addressing myself more particularly to the 
health phases of religions; and that more especially for the 
purpose of criticism — to shock the mind into a realization of 
truth — rather than to present a basis for controversy. For 

13 



this purpose, I have reverted at some -length to Christian 
Science, because of its relation to healing that is peculiarly 
within the limit of thought that I have sought to present in 
the succeeding pages, and I have addressed myself to Spirit- 
ualism more briefly but in the same way. 
It was my intention to reduce the voluminous and scattered 
fragments of psychologic truth to a simple and concise state- 
ment, giving to the student a basis of truth for deduction and 
experimentation rather than an hypothesis for inductive 
inquiry and speculation. 

I sought to give the student a ready, comprehensive and terse 
terminology, so clear and exact and so perfectly illustrated as 
to render error of understanding substantially impossible and 
to make application under any circumstance a matter of the 
greatest ease and certainty. 

It was my purpose to remove from the subject of Psychology 
all unnecessary, unwise, and useless suggestions of mystery; 
to reduce all phenomena presented to the simple basis of 
actuality — to the real and palpable — to bring the subject 
near to the student and make him feel its intimacy in his 
every thought and action. 

It is unnecessary to say that such work was a stupendous 
task, when one pauses to consider the eminent modern writers 
upon this subject such as James, Hudson, Warman and many 
others; and then recalls the earlier writers whose works all 
told run into hundreds. And yet the real work of such an 
accomplishment was very much easier than one would im- 
agine, for it must be remembered that all of these writers 
wrote from the standpoint of induction with the exception of 
part of the writings of Warman — therefore their works have 
been voluminous; but I have treated the subject by the pro- 
cess of deduction and deduction is always brief and exact £•> 
As I look over these lectures in giving them to the press, I 
desire to say that upon the themes they cover they are suf- 
ficiently comprehensive. I am very certain that the principles 
disclosed could have been rendered more understandable by 
a wider range of illustration. Those, however, were supplied 
by voice and gesture in the delivery of the lectures, but I am 
14 



persuaded that without these no student, actuated by an 
earnest desire to know, will fail to understand what I have 
intended to convey. 

I am aware that much that is said is wholly new; that many 
positions taken are clearly opposed to the most eminent 
authors that have written upon such subjects, and especially 
in very recent years; but for these I offer no apology. I have 
followed the dictates of my mind unswervingly and my mind 
has unswervingly followed the dictates of demonstrated truth. 
T| Let me here caution the student that Psychology is the 
most comprehensive and important theme that can engage 
the attention of a human being and that it is of the first 
importance that he shall be able to isolate the basic principles 
and fix them correctly in mind before attempting to pursue 
the subject further. 

The basic principles are few and simple, and for that reason 
if the student gets a misunderstanding about them or fails 
to clearly separate them and thoroughly impress them on his 
mind he may never be able to know that he is in error and, 
therefore, never become proficient in an understanding of the 
Science so so 

At this juncture let me say that it is not the amount you read 
in psychology that makes you a psychologist, but it is the 
amount you understand and know that determines your right 
to that title. Go slow — be careful and painstaking, for the 
subject is beset on all sides by wild, distorted, injurious 
theories and fancies. Keep to the plain and common sense, for 
the science of psychology consists in nothing but simple truth. 
The very question the student should investigate is some- 
times difficult to ascertain. These questions are carefully 
propounded in the quiz following; with the page and some- 
times the part of page, when important, referred to. 
I publish these thoughts trusting that they will save thou- 
sands of individuals the necessity and pain of going through 
years of toil and mental agony, as I have done, in reaching 
the wondrous passivity that comes with the certainty of 
truth so so 

WILLARD CARVER, LL. B., D. C. 

15 



Psychology Quiz 



i — What is the purpose of the study of Psychology? 
Ans. It is threefold: (a) To inform us of the material con- 
struction of the body. A. P. 25, 3d p. (b) To understand our 
minds. A. P. 26. (c) To understand what we can of the soul 
and its qualities. A. P. 26, 3d p., and pages 27-28. For greater 
detail, reference is made to Biology and Embryology herein. 

2 — What have been the ways of studying the soul? 
Ans. It has been studied as mental philosophy or metaphysics 
and demonstrated in all religions. A. P. 26-27-28. 

3 — What is Psychology? 
Ans. Psychology consists of the truths concerning the soul. 
A. P. 28-29, 1st p. 

4 — What is the Science of Psychology? 
Ans. A. P. 29, 1st p. 

5 — Why should we be very careful in the selection of 
language in discussing Psychology? 

Ans. There is no soul language. A. P. 29, 2nd p. and 30-31 to 
last p. 

6 — What is the soul? 
Ans. A. P. 32, 4th p. 

7 — What is the history of the word? 
Ans. A. .P. 30-31. 

8 — What is the mind? 
Ans. It is the function of the physical brain. A. P. 34, 6th p., 
and 35-36-37> to 3d p. 

9 — Has the soul a mind? 
Ans. It has not. A. P. 32, 5th p., 33-34. 
10 — Why have Psychologists erred? 
Ans. A. P. 30,-32-33. 

11 — Biologically, what is the mind as a function compared 
with? 

Ans. Functions of all organs of the bodv. A. P. 36-37. 
16 



12 — What are the offices of the mind? 

Ans. A. P. 36, 4th p., and 37-38. 

13 — Ot how many parts does the intelligence department of 

man consist? 

Ans. Two, mind and soul. A. P. 38, 1st p., 39, to 3d p. 

14 — What character of terms should be used to indicate or 

refer to the soul? 

Ans. A. P. 34, 3d p., 35, to p. 2. 

15 — How did we come to have the word, soul? 

Ans. It is the result of the inventive genius of man. A. P. 

3°, p. 31- 

16 — What are our means for ascertaining knowledge of the 

soul? 

Ans. Through the mind. A. P. 40, p. 1. 

17 — Does this fact make prominent a duty? 

Ans. Yes, to study the machine thoroughly that produces the 

mind. A. P. 26-35-40-41, to last p. 

18 — What characterizes all of the attributes of mind but one? 

Ans. They are limited by the physical. A. P. 43, first p., 

40-26-32. 

19 — What attribute of mind is not limited by the physical? 

Ans. It has deduction. A. P. 42. 

20 — Has mind attributes that we may conceive could be 

perfected? 

Ans. A. P. 43, p. 2, 44, p. 8. 

21 — Does the fact that the mind has the quality of deduction 

with the qualities mentioned in the last answer prove its 

relationship to anything superior to the physical? 

Ans. A. P. 41, p. 6-7, and 46-47. 

22 — May we apply the same test to soul that we have 

applied to mind? 

Ans. A. P. 45, p. 2. 

23 — What remarkable fact does this question bring to our 

attention as its answer? 

Ans. That the soul does not possess any quality not capable 

of being conceived perfect. A. P. 45-46-47. 

17 



24 — What are the distinguishing attributes of the soul? 
Ans. A. P. 46, p. 2-3. 

25 — If the attributes mentioned in the last question were 
conceived as being multiplied to perfection, what would that 
fact necessarily prove to us? 
Ans. A. P. 46, p. 5-6. 

26 — Does the fact that the soul of man possesses the qualities 
mentioned in the last question potentially prove anything 
respecting it? 
Ans. A. P. 46, p. 5. 

27 — Does the possession of omnipotence, omnipresence, 
omniscience and creative love negative the possession of 
lesser qualities? 

Ans. Yes, certainly. A. P. 47, p. I. 

28 — If the soul of man is potentially like the great soul that 
possesses these qualities in perfection, may we conceive that 
it possesses qualities of a lesser nature? 
Ans. A. P. 46, p. 6, 47, p. 1, and 68, p. 2. 
29 — Since the mind is the physical agent of the soul, what 
important truth must we learn affecting our minds, from soul 
relationship? 

Ans. A. P. 48, p. 1, 69, p. 9, and 70, p. 1-2. 
30 — What is the mind's relation to the soul? 
Ans. A. P. 38, p. 2, and 32, p. 5-6-7, and 49, p. 1, and 107, 
p. 5-6, and 112, p. 2, and 113-114, and 117, p. 3-4. 
31 — Do we here have revealed the necessary truth for evolution ? 
Ans. A. P. 48, p. 7, and 45 and 120, p. 1. 
32 — What is suggestion? 
Ans. A. P. 51, p. 4. 

33 — What are the general errors as to suggestion? 
Ans. A. P. 50-51-52-53-54. 

34 — Generally, when is suggestion accomplished? 
Ans. A. P. 53, p. 3. 

35 — Suggestion — defined as a technical word of Psychology? 
Ans. A. P. 51, p. 4. 

36 — What are the two classifications of suggestion? 
Ans. 1. Auto suggestion. 2. Suggestion from all extraneous 
sources. A. P. S3j P' 5-^>, an d 54, p. 1-2. 
18 



37 — Is the soul ever amenable to control by suggestion? 

Ans. A. P. 55, p. 5-6-7, and 56, p. 1. 

38 — When is the soul not amenable to control by suggestion? 

Ans. A. P.55, p. 3-4. 

39 — What lesson does the last answer teach us? 

Ans. A. P. 56, p. 1. 

40 — What are the two modes of giving suggestion ? 

Ans. A. P. 56, p. 3-4. 

41 — For the purpose of distinguishing it, what do we mean 

by a specific suggestion? 

Ans. The thought here is directed to the giving of a suggestion 

for the accomplishment of a definite, as distinguished from a 

general, purpose. A. P. 58, p. 4, and remainder of chapter. 

42 — What is telepathy? 

Ans. A. P. 67, p. 5-6. 

43 — When is suggestion telepathy? 

Ans. A. P. 68, p. 1, and 57, p. 1. 

44 — How must the suggestion in telepathy be given? 

Ans. A. P. 57, p. 1, and illustration beginning with p. 2. 

45 — Is telepathy common experience? 

Ans. A. P. 72, p. 7, and 73, p. 1-2-3-4-5-6. 

46 — W T hat is the relation of belief to telepathy? 

Ans. A. P. 70, p. 1-2-3-4. 

47 — In recent years, has invention added faith in telepathy? 

Ans. A. P. 72, p. 2-3-4-5-6-7. 

48 — What are the two kinds of telepathy ? 

Ans. A. P. 74, p. 2. 

49 — What is involitional telepathy? 

Ans. A. P. 74, p. 3. 

50 — What is volitional telepathy? 

Ans. A. P. 74, p. 7. 

51 — Which is the most used, and why? 

Ans. A. P. 75, p. 2, and 75, to p. 5. 

52 — What is the value of volitional telepathy? 

Ans. A. P. 75, p. 5-6, and pages 76-77. 

53 — Is this form of telepathy an aid to diagnosis? 

Ans. A. P. 77, p. 1-2. 

19 



54 — Has intention anything to do with telepathy? 
Ans. A. P. 78, p. 1-2-3-4. 

55 — What is the relation of willingness to intention? 
Ans. A. P. 90, p. 6-7-8-9, and 91, p. 1 -2-3-4. 
56 — Is telepathy a special or general ability? 
Ans. A. P. 78, p. 3. 

57 — What are the steps for volitional telepathy? 
Ans. Faith. A. P. 78, p. 1-2-3-4. Honesty. 79, p. 3. Persis- 
tence. 79, p. 4. The message. 80, p. 1. Time, to send. 81, p. 
1-2. Wording the message. 80, p. 3. Conduct after sending. 
81, p. 5. Illustration. 82, p. 4. 
58 — When will there be no involitional telepathy? 
Ans. A. P. 83, p. 6, to end of chapter. 
59 — What is hypnotism? 
Ans. A. P. 87, p. 1, and 88, p. 1. 
60 — What are the two modes of the sleep? 
Ans. A. P. 87, p. 5-6-7. 
61 — W 7 hen can hypnosis be accomplished? 
Ans. A. P. 90, p. 3, and to p. 4, 91. 
62 — When can hypnosis not be accomplished? 
Ans. A. P. 91, p. 4-5, and 93, p. 1. 

63 — What are the erroneous concepts as to hypnotism? 
Ans. As to the will. A. P. 88, p. 3-4-5-6-7. As to the operator. 
89, p. 2-3. The thing itself mysterious. 89, p. 5-6-7. Against 
fixed desire. 90, p. 3. Divulging a secret. 92, p. 2. Against 
fixed principle. 92, p„ 5. Weakens will. 94, p. 3. Destroys 
mind. 94, p. 4. 

64 — What are the different methods of producing hypnosis? 
Ans. A. P. 98, p. 6, and 99. 
65 — Is hypnosis of value? 

Ans. A. P. 103, p. 3, and remainder of chapter. 
66 — What is the sane thought respecting the material being 
and the soul? 
Ans. A. P. 106, p. 1-2-3-4. 

67 — W 7 hy must we begin with the mind in the investigation 
of psychic things? 
Ans. A. P. 107, p. 4-5. 
20 



68 — What is knowledge? 

Ans. A. P. 108, p. 6. 

69 — What are the two ways to acquire knowledge? 

Ans. A. P. 108, p. 8, and 109, p. 2. 

70 — W 7 hat is included in the dogmatic method? 

Ans. A. P. 109, p. 3, and no, p. 5-6-7-8, and in, p. 2. 

71 — What is the other method of receiving knowledge? 

Ans. A. P. in, p. 3-4. 

72 — What is the caution that must be observed as to intuition ? 

Ans. A. P. 112, p. 2-3-4-5-6-7. 

73 — When is intuition — deduction possible? 

Ans. A. P. 113, p. 4-5-6-7-8. 

74 — What preparation is necessary to receive intuition? 

Ans. A. P. 114, p. 2. 

75 — Are intuitions — deductions — always truth? 

Ans. A. P. 115, p. 4. 

76 — W T hat is the caution test? 

Ans. A. P. 116, p. 3. 

77 — W 7 hat is our only channel of receipt of universal truth? 

Ans. A. P. 117, p. 1, and 4 and p. 7. 

78 — Through what does universal truth come to us? 

Ans. A. P. 117, p. 5. 

79 — W T hat is premonition? 

Ans. A. P. 118, p. 2-3-4-5. 

80 — W 7 hat do we mean by memory — and what by impression ? 

Ans. Memory is to the mind what impression is to the soul. 

A. P. 36, p. 4-5, and 37, p. 1-2-3. As to soul. 37, p. 4-5-6. 

81— As to receipt of intuitions, what is our most important 

duty? 

Ans. A. P. 118, p. 7, and 119, p. 6. 

82 — What is the rational attitude? 

Ans. A. P. 120, p. 1-2-3-4. 

83 — W 7 hat is the most prominent thing in all history? 

Ans. A. P. 122, p. 2-3, and continuing to 124, p. 7. 

84 — W 7 hat has been the mistake in the use of the word 

" healing? " 

Ans. A. P. 125, p. 1. 

21 



85 — Have all systems of so-called " healing " been related? 
Ans. A. P. 125, p. 2, and 148, p. 1-2, and 149, p. 2-3. 
86 — As to quasi-religions of healing, what may be said of 
truth? 

Ans. A. P. 125, p. 6-7, and 152, p. 5-6-7-8, and 153, p. 1. 
87 — What is the basis of the value of suggestion as applied 
to so-called healing? 

Ans. A. P. 125, p. 4, 126, p. 1, and 127, to p. 6, and 149, p. 2, 
and 150. 

88 — As to the matter of faith, is the Christian Bible an 
exception? 

Ans. A. P. 127, p. 2-3-4-5. 

89 — What is the relation to the value of suggestion in so-called 
healing of " works? " 

Ans. A. P. 127, p. 6-7-8, and 129, p. 3 and 4, and 130, p. 
i-2, and 149, p. 3-4-5, and 150, p. 6, and 151, p. 5-6, and 
152, p. 1-2, and 150, p. 2-3. 

90 — Is suggestion the basis of all systems of healing? 
Ans. A. P. 149, p. 1-2-3, an d 152, p. 6, and 151, p. 3-4-5. 
91 — Is there curative property in medicine? 
Ans. A. P. 150, p. 5. 

92 — How shall we remove faith in error or the influence of 
adverse suggestion? 
Ans. A. P. 151, p. 1-2. 
93 — What is psycho-therapy? 
Ans. A. P. 151, p. 6-7-8. 

94 — What is the limitation of healing by suggestion? 
Ans. A. P. 153, p. 2 to p. 3, 154, and 159, p. 1-2-3. 
95 — As to suggestion, what mistake have all psychologists 
made? 

Ans. A. P. 154, p. 3-4. 

96 — When is so-called healing by suggestion possible? 
Ans. A. P. 154, p. 5-6-7, and 155, p. 2-3-4-5-6-7-8. 
97 — What material agency must convey the influence of a 
suggestion ? 

Ans. A. P. 158, p. 2, and 154, p. 5-6-7. 
22 



98 — What can obstruct the transmission of the influence of 

a suggestion? 

Ans. A. P. 158, p. 5-6-7. 

99 — What effect must follow occlusion of suggestion? 

Ans. A. P. 159, p. 1-2. 

100 — What is the situation called that produces occlusion? 

Ans. A. P. 159, p. 6, and 160, p. 1. 

101 — How may occlusion be removed? 

Ans. A. P. 161, p. 5-6. 

102 — What is the science that furnishes the system to remove 

occlusion of the influence of suggestion called? 

Ans. A. P. 162, p. 1 to end. 



23 



APPLIED PSYCHOLOGY 

LECTURE NO. i. 

June ii, 1913. 

Basic Terminology 

MY Friends, I am. very grateful to you for your presence 
here this morning to listen to the beginning number 
of this course of lectures. 
Psychology is always a subject of interest. It is a subject 
that grasps and holds the attention of the human family 
more than any other. Strange as it may seem, however, it has 
been a subject that has had the least definite, painstaking and 
careful study of all other subjects that appertain to human 
existence so so 

I say, " strange to say," because at first we do not catch the 
importance of the thought that our recognition of intelligence 
began at the mortal end of living, and not at the psychic end. 
In other words, that the beginning phases of intelligence were 
closely confined to material existence and did not go far into 
things relative to the immaterial. 

Any one would say at a glance that this was essential; that 
this was necessary; that evolution could not have been 
attained in any other way. All things that we do are done for 
a specific and definite purpose. The more we become evolved 
mentally and physically, the more we give definite, specific, 
and careful attention to all that we undertake to do. 
The purpose of the study of Psychology is threefold. It is: 
First — To inform us as to the material construction of the 
body; and relatively, as to the construction of all animate 
things or entities. This, of course, goes into consideration of 
brain, nerves and tissues generally, and this branch of study 

25 



has been incorrectly relegated to the studies of the doctor, the 
medicine man, the individual that sets himself up as a healer; 
as one giving definite, specific attention to the human body. 
Tf This is not as it should be, and not as it will be, but is only 
incidental to the beginning phases of our evolution, and 
intelligence. There will come a time when all human beings 
will study their bodies and will understand the relation of the 
Soul to the body as definitely as the doctor should, because they 
will know that it is an essential part of information, if they 
expect to acquire all that is best and highest in and for them. 
Second — We desire to understand what we can of Mind; 
and in the study of that we come again to a study of the brain, 
and especially the function of it that produces Mind, the 
scope of that function, and the capacity tor impression, and 
the means and character of impression. 

Third — We desire to know something of our Psychic exist- 
ence, its scope, its relation, its continuity; that is to say, the 
length, breadth and depth of its existence, and to understand 
our means of ascertaining knowledge of Psychic existence at 
all; and to inform ourselves as to the value of Psychic things 
as they appertain to this living, here and now. 
As to our knowledge of the Psychic, there have been very 
many different ways of study. Indeed, it has been incident 
to the history of human existence, this continual study of the 
Psychic. We have studied the Psychic in every period of 
which history furnishes any account. We have it as illustrated 
in the Christian religion; for at bottom and in the last 
analysis, Christianity is nothing more nor less than a mode 
of Psychic development, limited in its scope, but nevertheless 
— a mode of Psychic development. 

All religions of which the world has ever given us any account, 
ancient or modern, have at basis, been the study of the 
Psychic side of existence. 

That which has appealed to different peoples; that which has 
developed religious thought; that which has developed relig- 
ious literature, has been nothing but that intuitive desire to 
study and to know Psychic relationship. 
Spiritualists have studied this problem, together with, rela- 
26 



tive to, and co-existent with, all other forms of investigation. 
^f In its broadest and general sense, all forms of study of the 
Psychic include what we are pleased to call, in this modern 
day — Psychology. 

All religionists, in the last analysis, have been learning what 
they could of the Soul. They have been investigating, in one 
way or another, the Soul, and therefore, our endeavors along 
this line, our purpose in this investigation, is to find out all 
that we may learn about the phenomena of the Soul, particu- 
larly because of its interest to us in this environmental exist- 
ence; and the relative interest and value it may be to us in 
any other existence. 

Clearly it is of the very first importance, in endeavoring to 
investigate a subject of this kind, that we shall have a general 
understanding of the terms that we are about to use ordinarily 
called terminology. 

Every student that enters any school for the purpose of 
learning any definite branch of science, literature or art, first 
familiarizes himself, or at least should do so, with the ter- 
minology of that particular branch of information. 
One of the things that is especially criticisable in our present 
advance toward intellectual effort and progress in that 
direction, is the fact that we have no definite way, in any of 
the great universities of this country, in any of the colleges 
or academies, of instructing students in terminology as a 
preparatory study to the further investigation of the educa- 
tional phase they desire to develop. 

It is bootless to say that an intelligent and comprehensive 
knowledge of the terminology of any subject must be acquired 
by any student before he can be versed at all in that particular 
thing. Therefore, if we hope to go far in this investigation of 
the Soul, we must have a terminology that we can use, and 
that we may all understand. 

First of all, let us understand what the Science of Psychology 
is, and in the language of the Yankee, "in order to under- 
stand what it is, let us first understand what it is not." s«* 
In the first place, it is not metaphysics. It is not mental 
philosophy. It is not the study of material. That is to say, the 

27 



Science of Psychology does not relate primarily to Mind, 
nor mental aspects. It does not relate to the body in any of 
its aspects. It does not relate to the physical or material, in 
any of their aspects. 

Psychology is primarily a study of the expression of that imma- 
terial, intelligent force, that we have learned to call the Soul. 
T[ How shall we proceed to study this phenomenon? How 
shall we direct our attention to the Soul? We must study it 
from our present position. We are material beings. We are 
material essence. We have a Mind. We live, breathe, speak, 
act and are controlled to a large extent by the physical 
environment about us. 

For the reasons stated we shall study the Soul: 
First — through the function of the material body. This may 
not, at first, seem very clear to some of us; the meaning will 
be clear when the thought is developed. 
Second — we shall study the Soul through the Brain-Mind. 
That is to say, through the Mind-impressional, or through the 
impressional aspects of Mind. In this way we shall arrive at 
some truth. 

Therefore, you should understand that what we mean by the 
study of Psychology is the study of the Soul, as it expresses 
itself through the physical. 

Then, what do we mean by the science of Psychology? And, 
first, what do we mean by the science of anything? There is a 
great deal of misunderstanding today among students, and in 
general as to what science is. I have defined that for you 
many times; those of you that have been here as students, 
but I shall define it again. 

Science consists in the systematized and classified truths apper- 
taining to any department of thinking. 

You will understand, therefore, that science is not a general- 
ization of opinion. It is not the consensus of opinion of a few 
individuals. It is the classification and systematization of 
truth relative to a given thing. 

So long as statements in regard to anything are theories, 
they can take no part in a science. Only that can be part 
of a science that has been demonstrated, by the highest and 
28 



most approved methods, to be the truth. ^[In passing, permit 
me to say that it the human family had a better and broader 
appreciation of what science is, there would be very much 
less difference of opinion respecting various questions that 
are now before us. 

The Science of Psychology consists of the systematized and 
classified truths touching upon or related to the expression of 
the Soul, not the Human Soul but the Soul of the human. I 
desire you to understand that there is a very great difference 
between these terms. We are wont to speak of the Human 
Soul. There is no such thing. There is the Soul of the human 
being, but not the Human Soul. 

Therefore, let us investigate this subject from the standpoint 
of an acquisition and systematization of the truths that are 
capable of demonstration with respect to the Soul of a human 
being so s» 

In the first place, in no other relationship of human existence, 
do we so fully come to realize our incompetency, our limita- 
tions, as when we attempt to discuss, in material language, 
the Soul; when we come to attempt to conceive Psychic 
things. Then, indeed, do we stand in the presence of that 
immaculate thing, as it were, with palsied tongue, for in the 
Psychic realm there is no language that Mind is fully able to 
comprehend, or tongue express. 

But in an investigation of Psychology, in finding out what we 
know of it, in learning what we may express of it, we must 
either agree upon the terms that we shall use, or we must 
expect to be continually at strife and difference. 
Language, whether English, Latin, Hebrew, German, French, 
or what not, is most remarkably limited and defective. The 
best one may say of it, is that it is bound up in the limitations of 
material existence, and must remain so. Language can never 
even be abreast of latest thought; but is always lagging 
behind with the stragglers. 

Language, especially the language of science, is — after all, 
nothing in the world but a matter of compromise; a matter of 
consensus of opinion; a matter of consent to call things by 
particular names as they most peculiarly come within the 

29 



purview of the impressional sense, that we call intuition. 
If However, when these things are considered as we are doing, 
at the beginning, of a discussion like this, they furnish means 
for an understanding, absolutely essential in order that all 
shall fully appreciate what is being said, and what is meant 
by what is said. 

All our woes, all our sorrows, all our differences in the general 
subject of religion, in our concepts of humanity, in all our 
Psychic relationships of life, grow out of our failure to under- 
stand each other when we talk; grow out of the fact that we 
are separated by linguistic misunderstandings. 
We are incomprehensible to each other because we have no 
language medium by which we may be understood. Therefore, 
as we proceed, we shall attempt to establish at each step a 
terminology about which we agree. At least, the lecturer will 
present to you his meaning of each term that shall be used, so 
you need not be at difference with him; provided you will 
tentatively consent to the meaning that he presents. 
Having reached the place that we understand what we are 
about to take up, that we are undertaking to construct or 
review the Science of the Soul, the very first question that 
presents itself to us is: What is the Soul? 
The word Soul has had more common use, I presume, than 
almost any word in our language. You may read the most 
ancient literature, you may even go back to the hieroglyphics, 
and you will find that the human family commonly used the 
term Soul. It was one of the most common words. It has been 
one of the most common words and has been a part of 
language so long as there has been a fragment of history of 
human beings; and yet, today, there is a wonderful distinction 
and difference, and probably an irreconcilable dispute, as to 
what this word really means. 

You can understand that, what the word Soul really means is 
only the consensus of conception regarding it, of the members 
of the human family using the word. 

The word Soul was not furnished to us originally. It was 
invented. It is a product of imagination. It came into being 
by an attempt to express a thought that had welled up, as 
30 



we say, inside of some human being; until by the urge, he 
became physically able to form a syllable that gave meaning 
to his thought, and others about him grasped that intuitive 
sense and joined him in that thought. 

So the word Soul grew; but because this happened at differ- 
ent places on the earth's surface, a discrepancy, a difference 
with regard to it, came into existence, and when the people 
that grew up in these forms of imagination came together 
and began to use this word in common, they discovered that 
there was a difference that they could not reconcile; because, 
incident and relative to all imagination there is prejudice, the 
desire to maintain that which has been imaged, rather than 
a desire to listen to, hear and understand that which others 
have evolved, or even what is true. 

Now let us review, for a moment, the various concepts that 
are held as to the word Soul. 

Ancient religions all have words that mean the same thing 
as Body and Soul. 

All primitive people, in all parts of the world have these two 
terms, Body and Soul or Spirit. The savages that once lived 
where we are now used terms that indicated the same as these 
words s* . t» 

The uncivilized people of ancient times used words that 
indicated Body and Soul. In the jungles of Darkest Africa 
today, where white men have only recently ventured, they 
find that the people living there have the concept of Body 
and Soul. 

Christians generally, the world over, use terminology that 
indicates Body, Soul and Spirit, the belief in the triune. 
Spiritualists, in general, the world over, use the terms, Body 
and Spirit, and this is not intended to mean that they con- 
form to savagery. It is only their form of concept, generally, 
as touching the human being in this particular respect. How- 
ever, justice dictates that I should say that the more eminent 
authorities in spiritualism believe in the triune, and include 
the Soul s^ &* 

Psychologists, should at this time, conceive it in this form: 
Body, Mind and Soul. 

31 



For the purposes of this course of lectures I wish to say that 
I shall apply this last order of statement as meeting definitely 
the results of our most recent demonstration, Body, Mind, 
Soul. These are stated in the order of our investigation; but 
in the order of their manifestation and power they should be 
stated, Soul, Body, Mind. 

We find that in development we began with the Body; and 
a little more removed from the material we recognized Mind, 
and going still further into the unseen, we recognized Soul. 
As to the last we desire to make inquiry. What do we mean 
by the Soul? 

We mean that the Soul is the indestructible part of a human 
being; that which we cannot conceive can die; that of which we 
cannot express death; that which, try as we may, we are 
entirely incapacitated to imagine can pass out of existence; 
the first cause of individual being, because it stands as the 
immediate cause of that which we know as separate existence, 
that which we conceive to be the core, the life, the intelligent 
force, causing all animation that we are capable of witnessing 
or realizing as taking place. 

W 7 e should go further and state the conclusion at this time 
that the Soul is that somewhat of life that stands between 
material man and his Creator, related to both, necessary to both. 
\ So far as our individual considerations and investigations 
are concerned, we should take up a very pertinent question 
at this juncture of agreement of terminology. 
Has the Soul a Mind? Again this strikes at once at the root of 
the doctrine of metaphysicians — mental philosophers, be- 
cause, if the Soul has not Mind, then, of course, all that they 
have said, with relation thereto, is as naught. Hence, this is 
a very pertinent inquiry to us in all Psychic research and 
investigation. 

It has been the concept of all so-called psychologists up to this 
time, that the Soul is possessed of, or is Mind; and this, 
undoubtedly for the reason that they have observed the 
transmission of intelligence, from which the idea of Mind 
is difficult to separate. They have, therefore, inadvertently 
held the unjustifiable position that, in the radiation of intel- 
32 



ligence, the Soul is thinking, and is therefore possessed ot 
Mind $— s»» 

This position is not so strange when we remember that all 
knowledge originally came into recognition through the process 
of imagination, and that imagination is the human side of 
intuition. That is to say, imagination sustains the same rela- 
tion to Mind that intuition sustains to Soul. Imagination, 
however, requires activity of Mind, while intuition only 
requires inactive reception by the Soul of the human being 
from the Great Soul. 

In this connection it is well to remember that it is quite 
immaterial what we may believe dogmatically as to the 
thought: "Angels are hovering near." It is quite immaterial 
what our experience has been as to the transmission of intel- 
ligence by decarnate souls; it is quite immaterial how com- 
plex and intricate, or even mysterious, the experience of the 
human family has shown the transmission of intelligence to 
be — yet the fact stands out clearly that all we know has come 
into human cognizance through the medium of imagination^ 
It makes no difference how many million times it may have 
been transmitted since it originally came; that does not 
change, nor influence the channel or mode of its coming. It 
must also be remembered that the Soul's only relation to the 
transmission of intelligence is the radiation of the substance of 
it to memory. 

Soul has been confused with Mind, because, forsooth, the 
Soul is intelligence. It has been referred to as Mind by sub- 
stantially all psychologists, because the Soul is the immediate 
source of our intelligence. Yet you can understand that these 
erroneous conceptions present no argument, tending to' 
sustain the theory that the Soul is Mind, or has Mind s«* 
Now what are some of the erroneous terms that have been 
used by psychologists to express their thought? For, by 
examining the erroneous terms, we shall be more able to 
grasp the terms that should be used. 

You will find in history and literature, relative to Psychology, 
such terms as " subconscious mind," " subliminal mind," 
and " subjective mind." 

33 



What is the objection to all such terms? The first objection 
is that all such terms declare the Soul to have a Mind. While 
the reference in all such terms is intended to be to the Soul, 
in reality it is to Mind, and before it will be proper to use 
such terms in referring to the Soul, it must be established that 
the Soul has, or is, a Mind, and since it clearly appears that 
// has not, and is not, all such terms should be abandoned. 
The second objection to such terms is, that they indicate 
that Soul is less than Mind, for with each term there is the 
use of "sub," which means under, less than, or below, and 
surely no psychologist, no human of ordinary intelligence, 
would ever be willing to concede that the Soul is less than 
Mind, for it must undoubtedly be true, if all intelligence is 
transmitted to us by intuition and recognized through the 
process of imagination, that the Soul is parent to Mind, and 
as such must be superior to it, so the term "sub" in this 
connection is wholly incorrect. 

But the last and most potent of these objections is that such 
terms are too incomprehensive to express what is intended 
to be conveyed. All of them indicate this phenomenon as 
being subject to, less than, or incidental to the Mind of man, 
the function of the human brain. This is a conception which, 
when viewed in all its nakedness must, at once, by its very 
terms, be abandoned by each individual. 
We must, therefore, apply some term to the Soul that relieves 
it of this relationship, this subjectiveness to Mind — and for this 
purpose it can be referred to as " intelligence," as " power," 
as " psychic intelligence," or by any term which, in itself, 
stands alone and related to nothing that carries with it 
material limitations. We will understand when we are talking 
further in this particular, that when we use the words "intel- 
ligence," " power " " psychic " we are referring to the Soul. 
\ As psychologists, when we use the word " Soul " we simply 
refer to that non-seen, intelligent entity that we conceive to 
be the primary individuality; that is superior in all things to 
that which is material and limited by the material. 
By way of further inquiry, if what has been described is the 
Soul, then what is Mind? For we must take these steps in the 
34 



order in which they come. Mind is a function of the physical 
brain s©» £•• 

That brings us to a consideration of what is meant by a 
function of the physical brain. Of course, students of anatomy 
and physiology will readily understand the statement, when 
we say that the brain, acting as an anatomic and physiologic 
organ, in some way produces Mind as a part of its operation. 
In other words, that the brain, or the portion of it, which is con- 
structed for that purpose, in its operation produces Mind, just 
as all other organs of the body perform their functions, and 
produce the results they are constructed to accomplish. 
It is not hard for us to understand this when we refer to any 
other phase of functional existence, because we have learned, 
through long years of folk-lore, to understand, in an indefinite 
way, that the action of the heart, the action of the lungs, the 
action of the stomach, or the action of any other part of the 
body, just takes place; that it is just a very common, ordi- 
nary affair; that there is nothing difficult, whatever, to 
understand about it; that it is all material. 
This is the general concept — the materialists of the world 
have taught us that these things are accomplished by power 
that emanates from material; that they are performed by a 
sort of disconnected but relative chemistry. They do not 
seek to give us the cause of the operation of those chemicals 
and their elaborations. They do not seek to tell us how these 
operations are performed, but only give us to understand 
that they are simple, common and sublunar; that anybody 
ought to understand them. As a result, children with their 
wonderful imaginations, and their uninstructed Minds, grasp 
the fantasy that these things are easy to understand; never give 
the subject any more consideration during their lifetime and, 
therefore, continue to think that the functional activities of the 
stomach, heart, lungs, etc., are just simple physical operations 
and that everybody understands them. 

However, I wish to interpolate this: The function of the heart 
is just as difficult to grasp, to know, and to consider as is the 
function of the brain in that part of it that produces Mind. 
The function of the lungs, by which they take in the 

35 



atmosphere, transmit certain parts of it to the material 
elements of the body, and in this way act and produce 
gaseous compounds, is just as difficult to understand as 
that the brain, in its functioning, in certain parts of it, 
produces Mind. 

It is just as difficult to understand how the stomach receives 
and retains elements taken from the extraneous environment 
and delivers to them, from its walls, substances of chemical 
consistence that will disintegrate and preserve and free the 
elements contained in the ingested substances, thus furnish- 
ing the elaborations out of which the organism, by further 
processes, may be built. 

When we stop to think of these things and think of the awe- 
someness of them, we are simply stricken modest, because 
at once we know that in each of these wonderful functions we 
are standing in the very presence of eternal formation, 
because, in considering each of these functions, we come to 
know that it is as utterly impossible for us, through our material 
essence, to understand how the stomach junctions, as it is to 
understand how the brain junctions, and in junctioning pro- 
duces Mind, with its attributes, memory, sensation, conscious- 
ness, reason, passion, love, will, etc., and all the wonderjul 
phenomena that appertain thereto. 

So that, although it is somewhat difficult to understand, yet, 
by having striven for it, we have obtained a very complete 
congeries of phenomena regarding brain function in this 
respect, which leads us to know that Mind is, after all, nothing 
more nor less than a junction of the physical brain. 
Now what is the primary office oj Mind? Can you understand 
that when Mind was produced it was produced primarily 
for the use of the Soul? If the Soul had had no use for Mind 
it would not have produced it. If it had had no use tor Mind, 
in an individual, it would have made the brain and con- 
structed it to have gone on performing all of the offices 
necessary without that one remarkable function — Mind. 
The Soul, having produced Mind as well as all other junctions 
of the human organism, for its use, continues to use it and 
them s^ s^ 
36 



The primary use of Mind in a human being is to receive intel- 
ligence from the Soul. This is called impression. Memory could 
not be established without impression. The intelligence 
received constitutes the substance of memory. It is impressed 
by the primary individuality — the Soul — upon a part of the 
brain to constitute memory , consciousness — the basis of Mind. 
^[ Incidentally, impression is accomplished by the same force 
and in precisely the same way in the brain to produce Mind, 
that, acting through the brain and nerves, produces the 
impression in the walls of the stomach, causing them to 
produce the elements necessary for digestion; the impression 
to the tissues of the lungs, causing them to produce respira- 
tion, and thus to receive atomic elements of the atmosphere 
and convey them in proper solution to the various liquids of 
the body, and then causes them to continually enter into the 
construction of the organism. 

The production of Mind as a brain operation is no more 
wonderful than the function of any of the various organs of 
the body, and is performed in exactly the same way, for you 
understand that the Soul, back of the body, as easily, as readily, 
and as necessarily, impresses the intelligence upon each atom 
of us to perform its office as it impresses upon the substance of 
our brain the processes of Mind. 

Since servitude to the Soul is the primary office of Mind, and 
it is the primary office of Mind to receive intelligence from 
the Soul, it is then the secondary office of Mind to receive, 
through its five senses, information as to the physical environ- 
ment, and to convey that information to the Soul. 
The Soul, you can understand, without this mind office, 
would be absolutely sight-less, smell-less, taste-less, hear-less, 
feel-less. That is to say, it would be without a single avenue 
by which it could receive any information as to this environ- 
ment s©» $+ 

If it were not for the fact that it is the secondary office of 
Mind to receive information from the material side and to 
convey it to the Soul, the Soul of man would never be advised 
of man's physical existence, for the Soul would have no avenue 
through which it could receive that fact. 

31 



Mind has been referred to in many terms by psychologists. 
It has been suggested that it is the " objective " Mind, the 
" active " Mind, the " environmental " Mind, the Mind 
with some sort of limiting or qualifying adjective used in 
relation with it. Why should this be? Why should it ever have 
been ? When you have used the word — Mind — you have used 
the most comprehensive term that you can use with respect to 
the human being, you have comprehended all that appertains 
to his intelligence materially; and when you have said — 
Soul — you have indicated all that appertains to his intelli- 
gence Psychicly. When you have used these two terms, you 
have said all, with regard to the intelligence of a human being, 
that can be said. 

As to the two phases of man's intelligence, in the further 
discussion of this subject, when I refer to the channel of 
original intelligence, you will know that I mean the Soul, 
and when I refer to Mind, you will know that I am referring 
peculiarly and specifically to that junction oj the brain. 
My friends, in closing, permit me to say that my remarks 
have been necessarily academic. They have been necessarily 
involved in terminology, and much of this discussion may 
have been dry to you, but it has been for the purpose of giving 
you an avenue of terms through which you may understand 
all that I shall say in the further discussion of Psychology $+■ 
In closing, let me remind you of a wonderful fact — that it is 
possible to keep your Mind open and ready to receive at any 
time this immaculate intelligence, coming at once through 
that individual center, the Soul, and beyond that, from the 
Great Soul of the Universe. 



38 



M 



LECTURE NO. i. 
June 12, 1913. 

Attributes of the Soul 

Y FRIENDS: — We desire again to pursue our 
investigation for the acquisition of knowledge rela- 
tive to the Soul of man, and by way of 



RECAPITULATION 

I wish to say that the principal things we learned in the 
preceding lecture are that the Soul is the essential, inde- 
structible part of man; that part of the human being which 
we cannot conceive can die; the primary individuality. 
We found that Mind is a function of the physical brain, and 
that its primary office is to receive Soul impressions, and that 
its secondary office is to transmit information from this 
environment, or physical relationship, to the Soul. 
We found that the Science of Psychology is the classification 
and systematic relation of the truths of the Soul, as they are 
expressed through the physical. II The subject for this morn- 
ing brings us to an investigation of phenomena, the most 
remarkable that are within human capacity to consider s+ 

ATTRIBUTES OF SOUL 

In attempting an investigation of this kind we are first con- 
fronted with this important and vital question: How are we 
advised of the Soul — what means have we for knowing any- 
thing at all about the Soul? I am aware that it is a matter of 
common thought, that in some peculiar and indefinite way, 
that it is not necessary to consider; we have knowledge of 
the Soul s* s»* 

Most people rely for their knowledge of Soul upon what is 
told them, and they do not think that, in itself, constitutes 
anything remarkable, or requires them to make any particular 

39 



investigation of the means of knowledge; but it will at once 
be apparent to the inquiring Mind that there is a way by 
which we have knowledge of the Soul, through which we can 
make inquiry; and if that is not a specific and reliable way, 
then our belief is unsupported and perhaps does not amount 
to knowledge at all. 

It is very clear that the only means that we have of investi- 
gating the Soul is through the medium of Mind. Indeed, 
regardless of how much information, power, etc., our Soul 
may possess — so far as we, as individuals are concerned — our 
knowledge of it can only be commensurate with the acquisi- 
tion of our Mind. 

In brief, all inquiry must be prosecuted, all phenomena taken 
note of, through Mind; and through that medium we must 
estimate, we must weigh, we must measure, we must ascer- 
tain the height, breadth and depth of human conception of 
the Soul. 

We must, therefore, make some investigation of Mind before 
we are prepared to investigate the Soul, for it is very clear, as 
an introductory proposition, that Mind stands on this side 
of Soul; that Mind is the initiative agent through which we 
must act, and by means of which we must accomplish all 
investigation $* &+■ 

It is very apparent that any individual in attempting to 
handle any piece of machinery must understand it. You 
would not think of attempting the simple matter of running 
an automobile, a self-binder, a washing machine, or even a 
tub and wash-board without having a full and comprehensive 
knowledge of the machine that you are about to operate s+ 
It is of the first importance that we shall know the funda- 
mentals of Mind, in order that we shall be able to follow out, 
scientifically its comprehensiveness, its deficiencies, its scope, 
its limitations and its abilities. 

Now in the first place we are overwhelmed with the proposi- 
tion that Mind is capable of being utterly and absolutely 
destroyed. Therefore, we are at the first confronted with 
the phenomenon of the frailty of Mind, with the fact that it 
is of the earth, earthy; that Mind exists only when the 
40 



machine, the brain, of which it is the function, acts in such 
manner as to produce Mind; but if that machine is not 
normal, then Mind is in ratio lost, and when that machine 
is so abnormal as to cease to produce it, then Mind is gone — ■ 
is utterly and absolutely lost. 

This is also true, if that part of the brain which produces 
Mind or should produce it, by its proper function, is not 
developed by formative energy to a sufficient degree of per- 
fection to produce the processes of Mind, which condition it 
is safe to illustrate and to understand in what we call idiocy. 
T[ We also observe this phenomenon in that phase, under as 
many names as you desire to follow out, properly classified 
as brain degeneracy, or softening of the brain, and by these 
means Mind may also be wholly lost; which proves to us in 
the beginning, the instability of Mind. 

As to its operation, Mind is possessed of certain attributes, 
each of which indicates limitations; each indicating that it is 
peculiarly of this environment, or does not transcend the 
physical relation; does not in any respect, transcend the laws 
of physical being. That is to say, Mind had the power to con- 
ceive the existence of circumstances, that may or may not exist. 
This is the operation called imagination. 7/ is also, the opera- 
tion of induction. It is limited to physical capacity and material 
frailty s* $—■ 

Mind has reason — comparison. For reason consists in com- 
parison. Reason consists in taking that which we know — and 
comparing it with something else that we know; or taking 
two things that we know and by comparison and imagina- 
tion, inducting a proposition that we may or may not have 
known before, and that may or may not be true. Therefore, 
reason consists wholly in comparison, aided by imagination; 
and reason is peculiarly a mental trait, an attribute of Mind s& 
Mind is capable of performing deduction, the means of 
accomplishing intuition. That is to say, translating intui- 
tional impression. More of this later. This, in passing, I 
desire to say, proves Mind's relationship to a Power that is 
superior to it, and that causes it to be. 

Now Mind, with its attributes, presents for our consideration 

4i 



a dual aspect. In the first phase, it is limited to physical 
existence: and in the second phase, it presents an attribute 
not physically limited — the capacity for deduction — intuition. 
T[ Mental philosophers have undertaken to make a difference 
and distinction between deduction and intuition, but there 
is nothing to the fancy whatever. Deduction is the mind phase 
of intuition. 

Inductions are always limited in their correctness to the 
power of Mind to comprehend the subject to which it is 
directed; are limited by the power of Mind to fully compare, 
to completely inquire into; to exactly imagine; and Mind 
thus failing in comprehensiveness, generally fails to take into 
any single consideration all of the elements necessary to it; 
and therefore, inductive conclusions are substantially always 
erroneous s& s* 

This limitation of Mind accounts for the fact that the vast 
lore of human thought, the great tomes that are laid away 
in our libraries, reek with junk of an intellectual character, 
simply because, as I have said, all information has come into 
cognizance through the avenue of imagination; and the 
human family has not yet learned much deduction. 
The human family has not learned the frailty of induction. 
It has continued to induct propositions, which it chooses to 
call theories. It has chosen, by the processes of induction, to 
construct thought castles, which may or may not be sup- 
ported by any truth. 

Information is only such as Mind can obtain by the process 
of inquiry. In other words, that which we think we know, we 
have been compelled to learn by inquiry. 
We come into this world without any Mind knowledge at all. 
We instantly begin a process of inquiry. We instantly begin 
to store memory to produce knowledge. We instantly begin 
image-ing and it is a trite saying, " the wonderful imagination 
of the child." The reason the child is possessed of a wonderful 
imagination is because he has so many things about which 
he must inquire. He has not yet learned his limitations and 
in his struggles to know, he is rife with imagination. 
As the years go by, and as by experience the individual 
42 



becomes wiser, that is to say, as by experience he comes to 
know better and better his limitations, he ceases more and 
more to revel in that form of inquiry which we call imagina- 
tion; and learns more and more to use that quality which we 
call reason; that is to say — comparison of all that is presented 
to him by and with those things which he has imaged and that 
he has come to believe to be true. 

The principal attributes of Mind are limited to that which is 
imperfect. Instead of using the word " principal " perhaps I 
should say the greater number of the attributes of Mind. 
However, I mean principal attributes considered from the 
number of attributes, and these are peculiarly prominent by 
the fact that they are limited to physical existence, and that 
only s«* s^ 

How shall we test the attributes of Mind? How shall we 
proceed mentally to inquire into and test whether these 
attributes are limited or not? There is but one way that this 
may be done. It will be seen at once, that in order to test an 
attribute, we must try to conceive whether or not that 
attribute could be perfected. That is to say, whether that 
attribute, no matter how weak it may be in its manifestation, 
could be multiplied to perfection; could that particular 
attribute, by any process of addition, be conceived to become 
perfect? That is the test of the value of each attribute; and 
that is the test also of whether it appertains solely to physical, 
existence; or whether it is superior to environmental existence. 
\ Now, let us see by this form of inquiry, which of the 
attributes of Mind may be added to until perfection is: 
reached. That is to say, let us see which of them may be per- 
fected — which of them it would be possible to perfect. 
We shall begin with that attribute — reason — about which so 
much has been said, and go on through the list. 
Reason — The pseudo-scientists of the world have run mad 
on this subject. Reason has been exalted above all other 
attributes. Students of our great universities and colleges 
have been taught that reason is the most superior quality 
that may be possessed. 

Each individual that starts out with the ambition to acquire 

43 



learning, becomes exceedingly proud of the fact that he is 
learning " to reason." He longs for the accomplishment of 
that dream. He struggles for that chimera day and night, 
seeking and struggling to know how he shall increase and 
perfect his reasoning qualities. 

Now, let us see! Can reason be made perfect? What shall 
reason be compared with in the last analysis? If knowledge 
is perfected, where is the scope for reason? So soon as an 
individual arrives at knowledge in any respect, he ceases to 
have power to reason on that thing, because there is no 
possibility of comparison; and without comparison there is 
no reason. So we find reason is limited to Mind — Mind that 
cannot know perfectly, that must be limited in the scope of 
its knowledge a«» $+■ 

Imagination — If one had perfect knowledge, what would be 
left for imagination? And to perfect imagination would be, 
to make it possible to do what? It cannot be conceived. One 
cannot think of a perfect imagination; because the very 
thought immediately brings to Mind the barrier — perfect 
knowledge, which would leave no room for imagination; 
would leave nothing to be imaged about. 
Ambition — Could you have perfect ambition? In the last 
and ultimate in omnipresence, omnipotence and omniscience 
there would be nothing to acquire, and therefore, nothing to 
be ambitious for, so that ambition is impossible in the last 
analysis so so 

Pain — In its ultimate analysis is annihilation. Therefore, it 
could not be perfect. You could not experience perfect pain. 
Anger— In its last analysis is destruction. Therefore, you 
could not perfect anger. 

Hate — In its last analysis is destruction. You could not 
perfect hate. 

Jealousy — Is destruction. You do not have to wait for the 
last analysis. 

So you see Mind, in its principal attributes, is limited to 
imperfect concepts of a purely mental, physical, limited 
existence. But Mind has other attributes, and these may be 
raised or multiplied to perfection. 
44 



Mind has presence, which, multiplied to perfection, is omni- 
presence, or all presence, Mind has power, which multiplied to 
perfection is omnipotence, or all power. Mind has knowledge, 
which, multiplied to perfection, is omniscience, or all knowl- 
edge. Mind is capable of love, which multiplied to perfection 
is perfect love, or creative intelligence. 

These qualities prove that Mind is the product of, and is 
related to the Soul of man, provided we can first prove that 
the Soul of a human being is possessed of these qualities in 
greater degree than Mind and that the Soul is not possessed 
of any physically limited attributes. 

This brings us to a consideration of the attributes of the Soul; 
but first, for the purpose of clarity, to a consideration of 
attributes which the Soul does not possess. 
I cannot refrain, at this point, from suggesting that the fact, 
that the Soul has not these attributes, has had small influence 
upon the human family, because it is the general and common 
conception that the Soul does have these attributes, and yet 
it is self-evident, and its most profound argument is its 
simplest statement, that the Soul is incapable of possessing 
either potentially or otherwise, any of the qualities that I 
shall name. 

The Soul is not possessed of the quality or attribute of reason, 
because it has not the power or quality of inquiry. It has not the 
power to compare. It only knows. It is intelligence, and being 
intelligence, it does not function as does Mind, but just 
knows. It just has intelligence; it just receives and transmits 
information. It as readily receives a falsehood as the truth. 
It knows no difference between a lie and the truth. 
The Soul is utterly and absolutely without capacity to reason: 
First — because the Soul is not of the earth, earthy and 
therefore is not bound by the limitations of that which is 
material so so 

Second — because the Soul is potentially like an Intelligence 
that cannot reason, because it is omniscience. 
The Soul does not have imagination, because that requires 
inquiry — investigation. It is without the capacity to perform 
that function. It is incapable of being destroyed. Its existence 

45 



is eternal. Its maintenance is provided for. *^ There is abso- 
lutely nothing the Soul can acquire, and therefore, it is utterly 
and absolutely without the power or quality of ambition, exist- 
ing without the necessity of acquiring anything. 
The Soul is utterly and absolutely incapable of pain, anger, 
hate, jealousy, or other limited attributes, because all tend 
to destruction, and its life is eternal. Its power is potentially 
absolute. It is incapable of death. 

This brings us to consider those qualities of the Soul; those 
attributes that are capable of being multiplied to perfection, if 
it is possessed of such, and we find that it is. 
Soul has presence, and therefore, has potential omnipresence. 
It has power, which I have told you is telekenetic, or kenetic 
energy, and this, multiplied to perfection is omnipotence. 
It has knowledge, and this, multiplied to perfection is omni- 
science. And it has the quality of love, the potential quality 
of perfect love, which, multiplied to perfection is original 
formative intelligence. 

And I have learned, while developing the Science of Chiro- 
practic, that, as remarkable as it may seem, the Soul is 
constantly forming or reforming the body, and must continue 
to do so until adverse anatomic, or chemic circumstances shall 
render that no longer possible. 

If each of the attributes just named were multiplied to 
perfection, they would constitute the Great Soul of the 
Universe — the God. Therefore, we find the Soul of man is 
possessed of the potential attributes of God, and that the 
Soul produces for itself Mind, upon which it impresses the 
same attributes with less capacity, I grant you, but never- 
theless, it has implanted them there for the use and glory of 
man, in that they prove his relationship to the God — his 
Creator $*■ s^ 

I think there is no individual that would question the fact 
that God is omniscient, omnipotent, omnipresent, and pos- 
sessed of love in its perfect sense, or formative power; that 
God is all these in perfection. All of our ideas of perfection are 
drawn from our conceptions of God. Outside of our thought 
that God is perfect, we know no thought of perfection. We 
46 



are utterly incapable and incapacitated to conceive perfection 
disrelatcd from the God of the Universe. 

I think it will follow as absolutely conclusive, by the simple 
and wonderful process of deduction — which is the intuitive 
conception of universal law and nothing else — that the Great 
Soul, having these four qualities I have named, in perfection, 
is not possessed of other attributes. That is to say, the pos- 
session of these four attributes in their perfection, comprehend 
the universe and leave no room for attributes necessarily less and 
opposed in their nature. 

It is inconceivable that God could be possessed of reason. 
God's knowledge is perfect. There is nothing in the universe 
God does not know. God could not imagine, because all 
things are already imaged. 

Being perfect there is nothing to which God could attain, 
and therefore, ambition is an impossible thought with rela- 
tion to God. 

There is nothing for God to be angry about, because anger 
results only from the recognition of inability, shortcoming, 
incapacity, and therefore, the conception is impossible so 
God could not hate, because hate is based upon a lack of 
comprehensive knowledge. 

God could not suffer, because pain is only the result of 
improper action, and having all of the qualities that I have 
mentioned in perfection, God could not act improperly. 
^[ God could not be sorrowful, because sorrow is the recogni- 
tion of shortcomings; the recognition of something that is 
about to be done that we do not want done, or something that 
has been done that we did not want done; the recognition of 
incapacity, which cannot be ascribed to God. 
Jealousy indicates a lack of perfection, a lack of knowledge, 
a lack of confidence, an unqualified fear of possible loss or a 
doubt concerning possession which cannot be ascribed to 
God sv a«* 

The fact that God is not possessed of these qualities, but is 
the perfect qualities — is omnipotence — is omniscience — is 
omnipresence — is formative love — is creative intelligence 
and power, proves that the Soul of man is the product of the 

47 



Soul of the Universe, and that it is potentially like the Great 
Soul, and is related to and is of the Great Soul. 
Now there are some simple lessons that we should learn from 
these facts, for without the lessons which apply to us in our 
everyday walk and conversation, investigation of a subject of 
this character is absolutely without value. 
We should learn the far-reaching and comprehensive fact, 
which all must come to realize; that the Soul is not possessed 
of the power to reason. It is incapable of determining in any 
manner whatever, truth from error, and therefore, the Soul 
reflects to us every instant of our existence the error that we 
have permitted to be transmitted to and impressed upon it. 
1[ It must be remembered that from the God side the Soul 
only receives impressions that are immaculate; but that from 
the earthy or environmental side it continually receives im- 
pressions true and false as they come. 

We must not forget that we would never have an incorrect or 
erroneous conception if we constantly brought into our Minds 
and translated into our thought and walk and conversation 
nothing but the truth that is continually being transmitted 
to us from the God side of our Soul. 

We must keep conscious that our errors; our shortcomings; 
our failures to accomplish, our failures to do what we should 
do, occur because we have permitted to be transmitted 
through our Minds to our Souls from earthly conceptions, 
error and untruth. 

It is because of these erroneous transmissions that our 
physical bodies have suffered throughout the ages of 
history, and before histories were written. From these false 
impressions the physical body has suffered anatomically; that 
is to say, as to its structure; physiologically, that is to say, as 
to its function; hereditarily, that is to say, by inheritance 
from ancestors that have erred preceding us. 
Mind production has suffered thus, suffered ,and will continue 
to suffer until we have unloaded from the process of Mind- 
ing, the burdens of error; until we have so arranged it that 
there is a stream of unbroken truth, coming from the God 
side, and also from the earth side, and being translated into 
48 



the warp and woof of our beings, fl We must know that till 
such time we will be obsessed by all phases of insanity, 
occurring under those names that are commonly known 
and recognized in therapeutic terminology of disease, and 
under the additional names of fear, anger, hate, sorrow, 
jealousy, and all other attributes, which, in themselves 
declare that they are solely and only of earth environment s» 
The great lesson, therefore, for each of us to learn is, that 
Mind should stand, like a sentinel at the gateway to the Soul, 
and continually watch that nothing shall enter therein but 
absolute, immaculate truth, in order that our Bodies and 
therefore our Minds may continue to develop in harmony, 
with that which can be multiplied to perfection. 



49 



LECTURE NO. 3. 

June 13, 1913. 

Suggestion — Defined — Applied 

MY FRIENDS: Suggestion is one of the important 
subjects of this, and all times, but before we take up 
that subject here, let us review a few of the thoughts 
of the previous lesson, and by way of 

RECAPITULATION 
We found, by the deductive process used, that a human being 
is possessed of Mind, the greater number of the attributes of 
which proclaim it to be limited to physical existence. But we 
found Mind also possessed of qualities that proclaim its 
relation to the Soul, because such qualities are capable of 
being perfected. 

We found the Soul to be possessed, only of attributes that 
may reach perfection, and by this process of deduction we 
reached the conclusion that the Soul is not human, but is 
related to, is of, and is like the Great Soul, which is perfect 
knowledge, perfect power, perfect presence, and perfect love, 
or formative intelligence. 

We learned that the first office of Mind is to receive Soul 
impression and translate it into thought and language; and 
that it is the second office of Mind to inquire into physical 
things, receive earthly information, and to transmit the same 
to the Soul, and translate such information for the Soul. 
These deductions have brought us, step by step, to the subject 
of the present lesson. 

SUGGESTION 
Generally speaking, the world at large has a very inadequate 
knowledge of suggestion. It is the general concept that when 
one speaks of suggestion with relation to Psychic subjects, he 
is talking about something mysterious and occult; that he is 
5o 



referring to something that is apart from the usual — ordinary, 
and in the sense that we have learned to use the term — com- 
mon s* $•» 

That is not true. In all the intelligent relationships of man, 
there is nothing so absolutely common and general as sug- 
gestion. It is suggestion that we come in contact with upon 
our first entrance into this environmental existence, and 
suggestion is the last recognition we have of this material 
existence, when its shadows are about to close upon us. 
Suggestion is commonly held to be not only mysterious, but 
to be a circumscribed and limited thing, used very seldom, 
and then only by a very peculiar set of professional people, 
and that it does not apply to our everyday thought, conversa- 
tion and life. No concept could be more erroneous. 
It is also thought that, whenever there is an endeavor, an 
effort to suggest, suggestion is accomplished. This is also 
erroneous — as erroneous as it is possible to conceive. 
Speaking from the standpoint of Psychologic things, a sug- 
gestion is the transmission of intelligence through the Mind to 
the Soul, in such manner, that it is evolved into cognizance s+ 
From the standpoint of biologic things with reference to 
human beings, suggestion is the unconscious transmission of 
intelligence, from the material being to the Soul and the con- 
veyance of intelligent energy from the Soul, through the 
nerve system, to all parts of the organism. 
It will be understood that suggestion has many and varied 
aspects; many that ordinarily we have not paused to con- 
sider; many that we have not thought of; and many that we 
have not attained the basis or preparation to think about. 
^f First — I desire to call your attention to the most won- 
drous phenomenon — the transmission of intelligence from 
the tissue elements, or cells of the body to the Soul. This phase 
of intelligence in passing through the brain may produce 
consciousness of its substance, or it may only produce vibra- 
tion, in cortical areas not constructed for the production of 
consciousness. 

Now I am sure that each auditor this morning knows that 
the body is composed of tissue elements, that we may call 

5 1 



cells; that all animate cells are in relation with nerve ends 
that at the other end extend from the brain, and that in some 
way — of which we are only intuitively cognizant — the Soul 
is in immediate relation with the brain end of all nerves, and 
that through and by means of this wonderful machinic 
relationship each element or cell of the body — so long as it is 
normal or approaches the normal — continually suggests its 
condition and the relationship it sustains to its fellows, to 
the Soul. 

I wish to impress you, if I can, with the wonderful value of 
this thought, in relation to the strength, health and vigor of 
your Body, and to an understanding of your adverse physical 
conditions and mental processes. 

\ Second- — Suggestion consists in the transmission of any 
form of intelligence, extraneous to the Body, from the physical 
environment to the Soul. 

It will be seen that we obtain general information of our 
environment through that department of transmission, which 
we call common sensation or feeling. 

By common sensation we are also apprised of irritation, that 
is to say — application of any form to our bodies, or through 
our bodies, in such manner as to cease to be pleasant. 
Irritation, of course, might be common sensation produced in 
any manner, but is here more definitely referred to atmos- 
pheric disturbance, such as cold, heat, dry, wet, and to the 
various other things that we can feel. 

Then, as to the other forms of feeling — special senses, as we 
are pleased to call them — to take them out of the category of 
the ordinary — we have that wonderful vibration of the optic 
nerves and brain which reaches the Soul in the form of that 
suggestion that we call seeing; another vibration, as marvel- 
ously performed, through the auditory nerves and brain, 
reaching the Soul in the form of that suggestion that we call 
hearing; still another phase of vibration, reaching the Soul 
through the olfactory nerves and brain in the form of that 
suggestion, we call smelling; and lastly vibration that reaches 
the Soul through the gustatory nerves and brain in the form 
of that suggestion, we call tasting. 
52 



And still further, by combination of these senses we have 
conveyance of specific suggestion by affirmative signs, such 
as: gestures, facial expression, signs, tokens, representations, 
etc., all of which require, on the part of the individual 
receiving the suggestion, the use and operation of that 
wonderful department of intelligence called memory. 
Of these signs, tokens and symbols, I desire to call attention 
especially to that called writing or printing. I am certain 
that very few individuals think when they pick up a book, 
a periodical, or any kind of written or printed matter to read, 
that they are preparing themselves to receive suggestion, and 
yet that is true. This is no less true of the examination of 
pictures, signs or tokens of any kind. 

Again we have suggestion, conveyed through the immaculate 
medium of speech. This requires the use of practically all of 
the senses at the same time; and is immaculate, in that 
human beings are the only creatures that are able to perform 
the wonderful phenomenon speech, in the transmission of 
independent intelligence. 

The lesson we are to learn at this juncture is, that all these 
wonderful phenomena fail of their office; and cease to arise 
to the dignity of suggestion, unless intelligence reaches and 
impresses itself upon the Soul understanding^ ; and in such 
manner as to be evolved into the realm of consciousness. 
As to the application of suggestion, beginning from the least 
and going to the greatest I would remind you : 
First — That the power of suggestion is the one and only 
means that we have for building that wonderful agent that 
we continually use, called memory. Without suggestion it 
would be utterly and absolutely impossible to establish 
memory. I cannot pause to illustrate the building of memory 
by suggestion; but only wish to say that this method is most 
appropriately applied to children of all ages, from thirty 
seconds to seven hundred years or more — if such age is 
attained s— s* 

Second — Suggestion is exceedingly important for the trans- 
mission of intelligence from an individual's Mind to his 
Soul, and than this phase of suggestion there is no more 

53 



valuable office in our everyday walk and conversation. In 
the Science of Psychology this phase has received the name, 
auto (self) suggestion. 

A great many people think that in order to use auto-sugges- 
tion, they must sit in some quiet place apart; that they must 
go into their closet and close and lock the door; that they 
must pull down the shades of their bedroom windows and go 
into " the silence; " that they must withdraw themselves 
from the busy world, all of which is amusingly erroneous. My 
friends, there is not a moment of our waking hours that we 
are not busy with the transmission of suggestions to self ;♦ 
It is an utter impossibility to check the stream of auto-sug- 
gestion that is constantly reaching your Soul through your 
Mind. Therefore, when we speak of auto-suggestion being 
the most wonderful means for individual improvement we 
do not mean that you shall suggest more to your Soul, but 
that you shall only suggest that which is fit and proper; that 
you shall make your Mind a winnower of that which shall be 
transmitted s*> s^ 

Third — Suggestion is used for the communication of intel- 
ligence from the Mind of man to and through his Soul to 
the Soul of his fellow-man and thence to his Mind. We are 
wont to think that we talk to each other from head to head; 
that we talk to each other from Mind to Mind; but that is 
not true. When we give a suggestion to another — if that sug- 
gestion is received — that result demonstrates the transmis- 
sion of intelligence from the Mind of the suggester to his Soul, 
and thence to the Soul of the receiver, in such manner as to 
evolve and be impressed in his Mind as consciously or uncon- 
sciously produced memory. If consciously produced it is a 
present reality. If unconsciously produced it remains and 
may evolve into consciousness, as though an independent 
recollection or original thought. 

Now incidentally, and as an important lesson, this must be 
remembered: the Soul always radiates to Mind all Great Soul 
truth and information generally, that Mind will receive — and 
always gives back to Mind, everything exactly as the Soul 
received it from Mind, absolutely unchanged. 
54 



Regarding the law of suggestion, psychologists of all time 
and especially our modern psychologists, have been at great 
variance; and this for the reason that nothing arising to the 
dignity of the Science of Psychology had been evolved or 
formulated until very recently. The first printed formulation 
of the Science of Psychology was — " The Law of Psychic 
Phenomena," that Thompson J. Hudson published to the 
world in 1893. 

Hudson and other psychologists, who wrote in his day, and 
since, have made some very remarkable mistakes in their 
application of the law of suggestion, to which I desire at this 
time to call attention. 

Hudson and the others have announced that the Soul — 
to which they have referred as the subjective mind, the 
subconscious mind, the subliminal mind, etc., is always 
amenable to control by suggestion. 

That is absolutely not true. If the Soul was always amenable 
to control by suggestion, Mind would not be the sentinel at 
the gate; would not be the censor to prevent the entrance to 
the Soul of that which it should not permit. To proclaim the 
constant amenability of the Soul to suggestion, would be to 
say that the avenue of transmission of intelligence from this 
environmental existence to the Soul is always wide open — 
unguarded; which the experience of each individual demon- 
strates is not true. 

The Soul is amenable to control by suggestion: 
First — When the brain is functioning with sufficient normal- 
ity to transmit vibrations — from the physical environment 
to the Soul — in such manner that they are or may be evolved 
into Mind as conscious memory. 

Second — The Mind of a person being able to receive impres- 
sion and transmit intelligence, the Soul is amenable to control 
by suggestion, unless that Mind refuses to receive or transmit 
what is presented. 

Third — The Soul is amenable to control by suggestion, from 
the extraneous environment through the medium of common 
and special sensation; and from the tissue elements or the 
cells of the organism, in what, for want of a better term, we 

55 



shall call — tissue sense — which is the medium through 
which the Soul is constantly informed as to the condition of 
each animate atom of the body while the brain and nerve 
system is sufficiently normal to be in communication with the 
seat of sensation; without which information the Soul would 
be unadvised as to the health of the person and would not 
know when it must withdraw from the clay, in the act we 
call dissolution. 

So we must remember, at this juncture, that the Soul is not 
laid bare to this world. The Soul has at its threshold the 
human organism, which through Mind; through common 
and special sense; and through tissue sense, protects 
the Soul, so long as the material remains animate, and 
through these avenues advises the Soul of the body's adverse 
anatomic relation and chemical consistence. When adverse 
conditions render these agencies no longer able to protect the 
Soul, it withdraws from the influence of the physical environ- 
ment, by the process called dissolution — death. 
In a specific sense, there are two ways of giving suggestion: 
First — To one that knows, suggestion is being given and is 
willing to receive it. This includes suggestion from the organ- 
ism, such as I have spoken about in relation to the physical 
environment, such as cold, heat, etc., but especially, to 
specific intelligence conveyed by means of written and 
spoken words, gestures, signs, tokens, etc. This phase of sug- 
gestion may be given positively, affirmatively, and in the 
form of direction or command. 

Second — Suggestion to an individual without his knowledge 
and consent, which may be the conveyance of specific infor- 
mation from his organism, through the medium of sensation 
of all kinds, or by written and spoken words, gestures, signs, 
tokens, etc. 

In the science of Psychology we deal particularly with these 
two phases of suggestion. 

In the department of Psychology called Hypnotism, the 
subject must always know that he is receiving and be willing 
to receive the suggestion, and the suggestion must be given in 
the form of a direction or command. 
56 



In the department of Psychology called Telepathy, the 
subject must not know that the suggestion is being given, 
and the suggestion must always be given in the first person 
singular, " I," as though the individual himself spoke. 
To illustrate the mode of suggestion in Telepathy: I was once 
in Washington, D. C, and found myself with barely enough 
money to pay my hotel bill, and with less than enough to get 
from there to New York, where I was going. I made up my 
mind that I would cash a check at a bank on Pennsylvania 
Avenue s^ $+■ 

I did not know a banker there, and I did not know an indi- 
vidual in Washington. I sat down and waited until the im- 
pulse came to go in a certain direction; then went down the 
street in that direction; presently I felt impelled to go into a 
certain bank — I had been a banker, knew the rules of bank- 
ing, and knew what a ridiculous thing it would be for a 
stranger to ask that a personal check be cashed without 
identification and endorsement. 

I had a small draft to have cashed. I took the draft out, 
approached the cashier, introduced myself to him, endorsed 
the draft and laid it down, telling him that I wanted it 
cashed. That much I did with his knowledge and consent. 
He picked up the draft, smiled, and as he was smiling and 
reading the draft, I was holding over him, on him and in him 
this thought: " W'ell, this draft is all right, I will cash it." $+■ 
" Well," is a term of compromise, and if you have ever 
noticed, at the end of a discussion or contention the one 
convinced, or yielding, will nearly always say: " Well, all 
right then," — -finishing with terms of acquiescence. So I held 
this thought as and for the cashier — " Well, this draft is all 
right, I will cash it." Pretty soon he looked up and said: 
" Well, this draft is all right, I will cash it; but, of course, 
you know that it is unusual." So he wrote his O. K. across 
the back of the draft. 

Then I said to the Cashier: " I will need some more money. 
I wish to have a personal check for so many dollars, (naming 
the amount), cashed." Then without waiting for him to 
reply, I walked across the lobby, presented the draft at the 

57 



window, got the money, came back, and he said: " Why, 
Doctor, this is absolutely unheard of." I replied that I knew 
it was, but that the emergency was great, and then I went on 
and explained to him who I was, where I was from, and the 
nature of my embarrassment. 

And right here I desire to call your attention to one important 
thing: unless you are absolutely honest in the transaction, 
you cannot succeed. Then I walked over to the center of the 
lobby to a desk, counted my money and remained engaged 
for some time. While standing there I was holding this 
thought over, on and in the cashier: " Well, he is all right, I 
will cash his check." I had become so passively concentrated 
as to have lost for the time all consciousness but that thought. 
I do not know how long I stood there. Finally, some one said: 
" Doctor! " I looked around and saw the cashier standing 
near me; he had come out into the lobby. Touching my arm, 
he said: " Excuse me! — Well, you are all right, I '11 cash 
your check." He put his endorsement on the back of my 
check and I went over to the window and got the money s+ 
Notice the importance of the transaction and the form of 
language used in the suggestion: the first person, singular, as 
though he were speaking; not as though I spoke, but as 
though he spoke; as though he was making up his Mind to 
do what I wanted him to do; as though he was quieting his 
fears and infusing confidence into his Mind that the transac- 
tion was all right. Remember that I never allowed him to 
reach the conclusion that it was not all right. It is hard to 
remove such a conclusion, although groundless. 
So much for the two phases of suggestion. We now come to a 
consideration of the modus operandi, or plan of giving specific 
suggestion s» s* 

First — Secure conditions in yourself and to accomplish this 
rid yourself of all that is selfish, unworthy and untrue. Then 
proceed to obtain, step by step, the following conditions s^ 
Second — Have the individual come to you. If you cannot 
have him to come to you, then have him do something at 
your request. For instance, you go into the place of business of 
an individual to whom vou wish to give a specific suggestion, 
58 



and after you have talked with him a while, as he sits 
in his office, if you wish to succeed, you must manage, before 
you come to the point of offering the important suggestion, 
to have him do something for you at your request, if it is no 
more than to walk across the floor and hand you a chair, or 
do you some little courtesy — it makes no difference what — 
so long as at your request he does something for you. Then, 
having secured his proper attitude, give him the suggestion. 
H As to those that are contemplating a doctor's career, I 
desire to say in this connection, that you will find it very 
frequently necessary in your work, to use this plan. For 
instance, an individual is lying in bed, and has the attitude 
that he cannot get up. You are going to have him get out of 
bed. You are going to put him on your table for the purpose 
of attending to the needs of his body. His concept of it is that 
he cannot get up. Therefore, you must get him to do some- 
thing for you before you give the final suggestion to him to 
get up. It is quite immaterial what he does if it is nothing 
more than at your suggestion to turn his head, raise his arm 
and extend it, put his foot down, draw it up, or some inci- 
dental thing like that. When he has performed at your request 
one thing that he thought he could not do, he is ready for you 
to proceed with the suggestion that he arise, and it will 
surprise you how quickly the individual will grasp the 
thought that he is able to do so, and will come to the proper 
attitude to accept any suggestion, within reason that you 
may desire to offer. 

Third — You should obtain absolute confidence on the part of 
yourself and the subject. Never undertake to give a specific 
suggestion until you have established in your mind absolute 
confidence in yourself as to that thing. You will understand 
that this is incidental often to relieving yourself of anything 
that is untoward and improper. 

Let me bring your attention to this fact, especially the young 
people. If you will observe this statement carefully, you will 
never get the " mitten." Before you " pop " the all-important 
question, if you will wait until you have established absolute 
confidence in the dear one's mind and yours, you will never 

59 



be disappointed. Never ask an important question of that 
kind without proper thought and preparation. It is always 
unadvisable *•► £•» 

Fourth — The next step is even more important. You must 
not only become absolutely confident, but you must see that 
the other individual become absolutely passive. Absolute 
passivity is, for the moment to cease to think. Willingness is 
often confused with passivity. Willingness always precedes 
passivity which could not be attained if it did not prepare the 
way so- s<* 

This matter of passivity is a very important one to the human 
family, and one very difficult to attain. The Yoga or Hindu 
fakir spends the half or more of his lifetime in teaching him- 
self to be absolutely passive under any circumstance. 
If you would be passive, you must cease to expend mental 
effort. That is, you must cease to offer to control your mind 
or your body in any of its parts. You must be as one utterly 
without power. 

Professor Edward B. Warman tells a story to illustrate this, 
of which I am very fond. He says that on the New England 
coast there is a lighthouse many miles from the mainland, on 
a little rocky island, absolutely without vegetation. There is 
nothing on that island but the lighthouse. The keeper lives 
there all alone, his only diversion is to move around the 
lighthouse as the sun seems to move, keeping in the shade $•» 
Some visitors went to the lighthouse once upon a day and 
found the old man sitting in his chair in the shade. They said 
to him: " My good sir, how can you live here all alone, for 
years at a time, only occasionally seeing a human being; 
what in the world do you do to pass the time? " " Well," the 
old man said, " I will tell you, my friends, what I do. I just 
' set ' and think, and then sometimes I just ' set.' " The old 
man had learned passivity. 

Passivity is necessary to relaxation, and this fact is applicable 
to the work of Chiropractors. It is also applicable to the 
maintenance of health under all circumstances. Willingness 
will not suffice. Willingness must precede and passivity follow, 
if relaxation is to be attained. 
60 



Fifth — With passivity, you must secure, at the right time, 
concentration; not. that concentration that requires affirmat- 
iveness, but that form of concentration that is more peculi- 
arly illustrated in prayer. There is something you desire, but 
are willing that it shall or shall not be given you. That kind 
of concentration must be produced in the individual to whom 
you would give a suggestion. This form of concentrated 
passivity is beautifully illustrated in the prayer of Jesus 
Christ upon the Cross. 

Sixth— Before you accomplish these, as a prefatory step in 
many instances you will have to unload your individual. That 
is to say, you meet a man on the street to whom you desire 
to talk. He is angry with you. You must hold your temper and 
let him unload. You must let him fume, and fret and snort, 
and call you a " scamp " if he desires. Let him go right on 
until he is done. Do not " badger " him, for if you do he will 
never get unloaded; because when you " badger " you are 
only loading him up again. You must wait in that passivity 
that the old man illustrated when " he just set," and let him 
wear himself out. This requires the most profound control, 
but it can be done, and one that would properly apply sug- 
gestion must learn to exercise such control. 
When the man is unloaded, he will cease to be positive, 
active, aggressive, and will immediately become passive and 
negative. He has emptied himself, as it were, and is now ready 
for you to fill, and you should lose no time in commencing. 
Instantly he comes to that attitude, you assume the positive 
attitude, concentrate actively, and proceed to fill him up 
with the suggestion that you have been waiting to give; and 
as he assumes a more profound negative you may become 
more positive. 

I shall never forget an illustration of this that occurred when 
I was practising law in Northwestern Iowa. Incidentally I 
was also guilty of conducting a newspaper. I shall not tell 
you the politics because that is none of your business. 
Although it was a newspaper, it contained birth, death and 
marriage notices. 

I had written up a wedding. A young man about forty-eight 

61 



years old had married a bachelor girl reasonably close to his 
age — a good match, and perfectly satisfactory to me and to 
them 5^ .-•»• 

The families were quite wealthy, on both sides, and I had 
done the best I could in the matter of write-up. You know 
newspapers are never paid anything for wedding, birth and 
death notices, although they are the most important events 
that occur. Newspapers are only paid for advertisements of 
those unimportant things that nobody cares enough about to 
read, unless they are so peculiarly worded as to make the 
public notice them. 

I had learned that the most valuable wedding present was a 
twenty dollar gold piece. The young man was mad because I 
had said: " None of the presents were especially rich, but 
all were very nice and appropriate." So the next day, but one, 
he came to my office. When he came he intended to lick me, 
but he looked me over carefully and I saw that he was rapidly 
changing his mind. He seemed to read something in my 
attitude that made him hesitate on that branch of the subject, 
but he was loaded to the guards with indignation. 
I sat at my desk, with my legs crossed — and that is a thing 
that should be remembered; cross your feet and your hands — 
lock yourself in, as it were. He just fumed and cavorted and 
ripped and tore. I let him go, just let him sail on. Finally he 
began to get short of breath, physically and mentally. When 
he first came in he told me he would take his name off the 
subscription list — and I do not know what all, but finally he 
came out of that attitude and sat down to talk. He talked 
and talked, but I did not say a word. 

Finally the man became almost silent. Then I commenced 
to look at him and to hold this thought over, on and in him: 
" Well, I have made an awful fool of myself." " I have made 
an awful fool of myself." In about half a minute he became 
entirely silent. Then I opened up on him. I shall not under- 
take to tell you what I said, but I told him enough, all in the 
most kindly way, too, trying to make him see himself. I 
revealed the grovelling side of his nature to him, talked to 
him as I know no other human being had ever talked to him. 
62 



He took it as passively as a little child, and finally took up 
the conversation, turned it to other things, congratulated me 
upon my editorship of the paper, and before he left paid the 
cash lor a year's subscription in advance. 
Seventh — In giving suggestion to an individual that does 
not know you are doing so, always use language of impulsion 
— not compulsion. Never say to an individual: " you must." 
The better method is to request something and accompany 
the request with the silent suggestion of acquiescence, in the 
first person, singular, as though the individual answered as 
you wished. 

I saved my life once by knowing these things and having them 
where I could control them. I was locked in a room with a 
man that declared he intended to kill me. He had a weapon 
in his hand. I was unarmed. Instantly I became passive and 
began to hold over and in him this thought: " Well, I would 
be a murderer. I would ruin my life. I would be destroyed." 
In less time than I can tell you the attitude of murder passed 
out of his mind, he became passive, apologized and we parted 
friends s«* s& 

Eighth — After having given a suggestion, always wait in the 
silence to clinch the thought; that is to give it time to become 
fixed in the Mind of the subject to whom you have given it s^ 
I could give you many illustrations of the value of these eight 
propositions; but time will not permit. However, I cannot 
resist giving you one, because it very completely illustrates 
the value of the eight propositions to which I have just 
addressed myself. 

Shortly after President McKinley was assassinated, you will 
remember excitement ran high. I had the misfortune to be 
the chairman of the Democratic Central Committee of the 
county in which I practised law in Iowa. 
During my administration the county, usually Republican 
by fifteen hundred, became Democratic, in the campaign 
that closed immediately before the assassination took place. 
I was, therefore, the object of a great deal of political hatred. 
If Through one of the henchmen of the opposite party, the 
report was circulated about the court house one morning, 

63 



thatlhad said that I would defend the murderer of McKinlcy; 
six or eight men, somewhat under the influence of liquor, 
stopped me on the court house steps and began cursing me. 
A crowd began to gather and in a moment I was surrounded 
by more than three hundred angry, desperate men, insisting 
upon taking my life. 

You may imagine something of the sensation of such a situ- 
ation, but you cannot fully understand unless you have been 
thus placed. If you have never heard the roar of an angry 
mob, pray earnestly that you may never be compelled to 
hear it; especially if the attention of that mob is directed 
toward you. 

I at once stood still and became absolutely passive. I remem- 
bered to fold my arms and bow my head, the attitude of 
passivity. Remember that attitude is in itself a silent, im- 
pulsive suggestion. 

I looked the men near me steadfastly in the eye. They kept 
coming closer and closer, being forced on by those behind. I 
held the thought for them that no man in the front rank of 
the oncoming mob would touch me. I held the thought this 
way: " I will not strike." " I will not strike." 
The open space about me kept constantly getting less; those 
in the front rank holding the crowd back. I held them thus 
for some time and no one struck me. Eventually, if assistance 
had not arrived, they would have overcome me; because 
those behind were not influenced by my thought; and they 
were pushing on the front ranks in spite of themselves; and 
finally would have pushed them against me, and physical 
contact would have broken passivity and precipitated my 
death so . ** 

Note one peculiar fact proving the influence of the suggestion. 
Those in the front were resisting with every bit of power they 
had and were trying to stand back from me, while those behind 
were crowding forward. 

The County Attorney, a Republican leader, came from 
within the court house and saw what was taking place. He 
laid off his coat, not saying a word, folded his arms and 
marched directly down through the center of that crowd 
64 



toward me, entered the ring and stood beside me. On seeing 
him the men instantly came to their senses and began to 
back away. In less than a half minute there was no one 
present but the County Attorney and myself. You may 
understand that I thanked him with a good deal of pleasure 
and warmth. 

Thus again the wonderful power of suggestion, saved my 
life. I shall not multiply illustrations. I only call it to your 
attention in this way that you may see the value of acquiring 
this power; that you may understand what an immaculate 
thing the power of suggestion is; that you may understand 
its practical use and value. It is the most ready, constant 
and valuable power within the capacity of human beings s«* 
In the further discussion of the Science of Psychology, I shall 
have many illustrations of the practical application, and the 
wonderful power of suggestion. 

May you learn to correctly use it, and may its use become 
one of the most valuable agents in your life. 



65 



LECTURE NO. 4. 

June 16, 1913. 

Language of the Soul — Telepathy 

MY FRIENDS: Before pursuing the thought in con- 
nection with things respecting the Soul of a human 
being and that phase of it considered under the title, 
" Telepathy," I desire to say by way of 

RECAPITULATION 

that we found that suggestion is the commonest of our 
experiences, and is the transmission of intelligence from the 
physical being, First, from the cells of the body of the indi- 
vidual to his Soul, and second, from the Mind of the indi- 
vidual to his Soul in what we know as auto-suggestion $+ 
We found that by auto-suggestion we build memory, mind, 
will, and all of the various qualities that give us strength and 
definiteness in this physical existence. 

We found also, that by auto-suggestion we build health, 
strength; secure proper mental attitude; the power to grasp 
the situation, and to cope with those things that stand in 
the way, as opposed to our advancement in this life. 
We found that by, and through, the means of suggestion we 
obtain information from the extra-environment — that is, 
from the earth relationship of the human being and transmit 
that: 

First — Through the five senses, classified as common appre- 
hension, or feeling, and by seeing, hearing, tasting and smell- 
ing, which are classified as special senses, but which, after all, 
when we give them second thought, are nothing but common 
sensation. 

Second— We found that aside from these, there is the con- 
veyance of intelligence through the Mind of the individual, 
66 



to his Soul, and at the same time the conveyance of informa- 
tion to the Souls of others by and through the medium of the 
Minds of others, by the common means of transmission of 
thought in what we call signs, tokens, pictures, written and 
printed language, etc. 

Third — We found that our immediate means for transmission 
of intelligence by the power of suggestion is by spoken lan- 
guage, and that in this particular, man is the only animal that 
has this specific power of transmission of intelligence. 
We observed that in all these methods the thing that is 
paramount and seemingly of greatest importance, is the fact 
that all of these methods are encumbered by the limitations 
of physical transmission of intelligence, by and through the 
medium of one sense, or the combination of two or more of 
our so-called special senses. 

Therefore, these methods are the very most ordinary means 
of transmitting intelligence and do not, by any means, 
comprehend the phenomena of transmission of intelligence 
from one human being to another. 

The steps indicated bring us to that congeries of phenomena 
relative to the transmission of intelligence, which is not 
accomplished by or through any of the senses, and is not 
limited to the physical scope of transmission of intelligence, 
which brings us to the subject for this lecture, 

LANGUAGE OF THE SOUL— TELEPATHY 

The word Telepathy signifies, " telling afar." The thought 
seems to have been impressed upon the Minds of those that 
formulated this word, that this means of communication is a 
telling afar; that there is not the nearness about it that there 
is about the transmission of intelligence by physical means s«» 
It is a word coined for the purpose of distinguishing, in the 
thought of human beings, two phases of transmission, of 
intelligence so so 

First — That phase discussed under Suggestion, in which 
information is transmitted by and. through the medium of 
the senses, and close at hand; and, 

Second — That phase of transmission of Intelligence in which 

67 



distance makes no difference, and physical senses are not 
involved in the transmission. 

I desire to call your attention to the fact that telepathy is 
nothing more nor less than a differentiated suggestion^ for you 
must understand that, after all, the transmission of intelli- 
gence telepathically is not more than suggestion, with the 
difference that in telepathy we do not have the intervention 
of the physical limitations, while in suggestion, ordinarily 
considered, we always have the intervention of physical 
limitations eo» 59- 

One attribute of the Soul of man is potential omnipresence. 
The Soul has the potential quality of being present at any 
place at any time. When you stop to think about the value of 
this'thought, you will understand that it is not wonderful, by 
any means, and will realize that when the Soul is unhampered 
by Mind, for the purpose of transmitting intelligence, it may 
be at any place that is desired. 

The Soul is incapable of desire. It will, however, carry out any 
command of Mind as far as possible, and for that purpose, 
the Soul when freed from the burden of Mind which neces- 
sarily means weakness of flesh, has the capacity to be 
instantly at the place directed or commanded. 
It is as though we could conceive ourselves mentally able to 
be present by an impulse of Mind where we saw fit. If we 
should think London — we are there. If we should think New 
York — we are there. If we should think the opposite side of 
the globe from where we are standing — instantly we are 
there. We instantly direct Mind to that point of the com- 
pass, but Mind does not go there. It only goes there in imagi- 
nation $9* 69- 

The Soul, however, may be sufficiently at that place to take 
cognizance of universal truth, or deliver to a Soul, or Souls, 
the message it is given to bear at that time and place, no 
matter where it is. So, as a matter of fact, it makes no dif- 
ference what the distance may be, if the transmission is 
without the intervention of physical sense, it is telepathy, 
whether the distance between Souls is one foot, one thousand 
miles, or any distance. 



The striking feature of this fact comes to us when we think 
of the limitations of the Soul. Mind is limited in that it has 
no power to grasp the things of the Soul. It has no power to 
supervene material existence. It emanates from material, 
and is limited by material. 

The Soul, on the other hand, is not material. It is immaterial. 
It is the medium or avenue through which Mind of the 
individual must communicate with the Great Soul, and must 
receive intelligence and energy from the Great Soul. 
As striking as it may seem — the Soul has no Mind. From the 
physical side it can be and is slowly taught the language of 
Mind. Teaching the Soul the language of Mind is one of the 
most potent agents in the construction of memory. 
You begin with the little child. You pick up a baby and begin 
to croon over it and talk to it, and it begins to respond in like 
sounds and words. What is taking place? You are teaching its 
Soul the language of Mind. 

The language of Mind is being conveyed to the child's Soul, 
and is being radiated to the child's Mind and impressed there 
in what we call memory. This we may also classify as the 
translation of language into Soul understanding. 
However, the difficulty is, that from the Soul side we have 
more to overcome. That is to say — we have less opportunity, 
for from the Great Soul side, our Soul is only impressed with 
universal truth. The Soul continually reflects that truth to 
Mind; but before Mind can grasp it, before it may be of any 
use to us, it must be translated into human intelligence; be 
made capable of expression in language. 
The primary translation of universal truth into language is 
original thought, and can only be accomplished by the slow pro- 
cess of human experience. 

However, much of the intelligence we receive from the Soul 
side, does not come to our Soul directly from the Great Soul, 
but from the Souls of others that have learned translated 
truth, through the remarkable medium of telepathy. 
When we stop to think of it, all that a human being knows has 
reached and impressed itself upon his Mind telepathic ally st- 
All that we receive from the Soul side of being is called influx, 

6 9 



or impression, and much of it does not come to us in the form 
of language — that is in words; but comes to us as an entirety, 
in the form of tokens, symbols and pictures, the meaning of 
which must be ascertained and reduced to words before it is 
of any value to us. \ Definitely the human being must learn 
to translate the " still small voice " before he can know what 
is being impressed upon him. 

This calls for the earnest, and life -long struggle of an indi- 
vidual if he would arise to the highest knowledge of which 
he is capable. 

The individual that says, " I do not believe in the transmis- 
sion of such intelligence," closes his mind to such impressions, 
and shuts off his opportunity to know; absolutely closes the 
fountain of universal knowledge which he could enjoy, by 
refusing to place himself in the mental attitude to receive so 
As the result of disbelief, we have the most remarkable 
demonstration of resistance to universal truth. Even today, 
in our civilized, modern life, about which we brag, and upon 
which we vaunt ourselves so much, we are so materialistic 
that the majority resist this means of transmission of intel- 
ligence so so 

Such persons will tell you, when you speak to them about the 
possibilities of telepathy, that it is bosh, nonsense, foolish- 
ness, idiocy. When you ask them why they think so, they 
simply say because, they cannot understand how it can be 
accomplished so so 

My friends, any phenomenon tested in that way, would have 
to be disbelieved. We cannot understand how the grass 
grows, how the birds sing, how the ice melts on the snow 
capped peaks and the water trickles down the mountain side 
in rivulets and streams and finally in rivers to the sea. We 
cannot understand how the earth revolves upon its axis. 
We cannot understand the matchless movements of the 
heavenly bodies according to an absolute system and law. 
We understand no more of these than we do the more 
common and ordinary phenomena about us, which are a part 
of our every-day walk in life and which for that reason we 
have ceased to think about. 
70 



The most wonderful thing that occurs is the fact that food, 
after its various elaborations, is transmuted into animate 
flesh; is builded into a machine that clothes our Soul, and 
draws from the Soul knowledge and translates it into every 
day intelligence by means of which we are able to cope with 
our surroundings; which makes it possible for us to evolve 
mentally, and by great effort, in a lifetime, to think one or 
two, and sometimes perhaps several original thoughts so 
Did you ever stop to think what an original thought is? It is 
the most immaculate thing that this life illustrates. The 
individual that has formulated one original thought must 
first have gone over all information upon that particular 
subject. He must have reached the very end of all that had ever 
been thought upon that subject, and waiting in the attitude of 
that last thought, he must have heard the " still small voice " of 
universal truth, beyond anything heard before and must have 
translated a portion of it into human speech. 
We hear a great deal about original thinkers. We may con- 
sider ourselves fortunate if we have seen one. We have 
occasionally an independent thinker, we have very few 
original thinkers. 

Those who would become original thinkers, may do so only 
by accepting this wonderful medium for the transmission of 
the substance of original truth — telepathy — substance that 
is constantly being telepathed to them, it they will only put 
themselves in the attitude to receive it. 

It has always been a matter of greatest wonderment to me 
how any one could resist this intelligence, why any one should 
doubt the truth of telepathy, because it is the most common 
of all phenomena. It is a part of our everyday things. It is 
incident to every mental operation. 

You can understand how the attitude of disbelief could have 
prevailed in the Dark Ages, and when I speak of the Dark 
Ages, I am not talking about a period a thousand or five 
hundred years ago. I am talking about a period two hundred 
years ago, when I would not have been permitted to stand 
before an audience even in this country and deliver this 
lecture, for before I could finish I would be in the hands of 

71 



the law, either as one insane, or as a dangerous citizen s^ 
In times of such mental darkness and materialism it is not 
strange that there was little faith in that which, in the last 
few years, has been incorrectly classified as the occult. But in 
this day of general revelation, there is no such thing as 
justifying a disbelief in telepathy, it can only rest upon the 
basis of a willing ignorance. 

A marked impulse to psychic development began something 
like one hundred and fifty years ago; progress, however, was 
very slow until the discovery of telegraphy. 
Telegraphy brought to the minds of human beings forcibly 
the suggestion that there were other phases of transmission 
of intelligence, which had not yet been thought out and 
brought into use. 

Then came the telephone and that still further widened the 
view and made the thought of other phases of transmission 
still more capable of practical consideration. 
Then came the wonderful wireless telegraph, by which intel- 
ligence is transmitted without any machinery of trans- 
mission, within the ordinary meaning of that term, aside 
from the atmosphere. 

Then belief in telepathy began to take hold of the people as 
never before, and especially in the last few years. I well 
remember, fifteen or twenty years ago, when the statement of 
belief in telepathy met with laughter and ridicule. Today no 
one that desires to be recognized as intelligent, will deny the 
fact of telepathy. 

There are many that have not learned the method by which 
telepathy is accomplished, that have not practised it, that 
know nothing about its practical phases; but nevertheless 
understand that it is a common fact, not a subject for 
argument, and that to assert a disbelief in telepathy is to 
admit utter and absolute ignorance. 

Because of lack of belief there has been much difference on 
this subject; but when we stop to think how common tele- 
pathy is, we are surprised that this should exist. 
All have experienced telepathy in its ordinary phases. How 
usual it is to be sitting with a friend — you are both silent — 
72 



you are both passive — directly both begin talking about the 
same thing at the same time. 

Again, you are walking with a friend and you are thinking of 
asking him a question; presently, without your having asked 
the question your friend begins answering it. 
Many illustrations of the commonness of telepathy could be 
given, but time will not permit. It is sufficient for the occasion 
to discuss it in its practical phases. 

Because of disbelief, the accomplishment of volitional tele- 
pathy is very difficult, because absolute faith is essential to 
anything in which the Soul is related. 

You can understand that under favorable conditions the 
Soul constantly impresses information upon Mind; but just 
the moment we become careless about it — just the moment 
we do not wish the transmission of information — that moment 
the Soul withdraws, because it has no way of understanding. 
It is incapable of reasoning about what we want or need s«* 
The Soul is incapable of reasoning about our attitude and 
therefore of course instantly we offer it an adverse suggestion, 
it acts upon it and withdraws and ceases to impress the truth 
that we would like to have evolved into our consciousness. 
Disbelief has rendered telepathy difficult indeed to attain; 
that is to say, well-defined, complete demonstrations of 
volitional telepathy. 

However, I desire to say that if improvement goes on for the 
next fifty years as rapidly in this direction as it has in the 
immediate past in this country, telepathy will soon be a 
very common means for the transmission of intelligence. 
It will be as common at least as wireless telegraphy is 
now so so 

If you were in the Orient and were acquainted with the ways 
of the Hindus, you would find that telepathy is a very com- 
mon means of communication with them now. They transmit 
intelligence of political upheavals, war, and other important 
news, telepathically instead of waiting for the slow medium of 
letter, courier, telegraph or any such means. 
A Hindu specifically transmits telepathically to another 
Hindu at the place where the news is desired, the facts as 

73 



they take place and that Hindu makes it public and the 
people at that place instantly know the news. 
But you say, " that is done in the Orient by people that have 
practised that sort of thing for thousands of years." When 
the dominant race that has evolved in the temperate zone of 
North America, shall turn its refined intellect, ingenuity and 
unconquerable determination earnestly to the development 
of telepathy, then that means of transmission of intelligence 
will advance with a rapidity that we are not now able to 
conceive s«* a«» 

We have by the present analysis two forms of telepathy. 
One, involitional and the other, volitional. 
Involitional telepathy is the transmission of intelligence with- 
out specific intention, without effort even on the part of the 
individual. For instance, in the intelligence transmitted from 
a mother to a son in a far distant clime. Love tokens and 
messages are continually reaching him from her. 
A person away from home finds the mental picture of wile, 
husband, sweetheart or other loved ones continually tele- 
pathed to him. He finds that he is continually receiving 
telepathically specific messages of love, affection,' sickness, 
etc., from those at home. 

You will also find the same character of telepathy from one 
individual to another in the same town — between individuals 
in the same house — between individuals in the same audience. 
Everywhere there is this common transmission of intelligence 
without intention. 

The individual from whom the message goes is willing that 
the intelligence shall be transmitted, and because he is willing, 
and is en rapport, with the other individual the transmission 
is accomplished without intention or effort on his part, or on 
the part of the one that receives the message. 
Volitional telepathy is the transmission of intelligence by 
specific intention. This has been classified by Psychologists 
under different names. In reading books on Psychology you 
will find volitional telepathy has been classified as mental 
telegraphy, mind transference, mind reading, thought 
transference, etc. 
74 



I desire here to emphasize the fact that it makes no difference 
how intelligence is transmitted, so long as the transmission 
occurs without the intervention of physical means, the trans- 
mission is telepathic, and when it is accomplished by specific 
intention, it is volitional telepathy. 

Involitional telepathy, as I suggested, is the method most 
frequently used and is the method by which we have com- 
munications from those that are sick — those of our family 
that are away from home, etc. They are thinking of their 
loved ones with the desire that the knowledge of their situa- 
tion shall be transmitted to them. They have no intention of 
sending a message to them but the attitude establishes rap- 
port and the message is transmitted. 

Individuals have in all times experienced this kind of trans- 
mission. The trouble has been that until recently people have 
paid no attention to this phase of transmission of intelligence. 
They called it dream, delusion, vision and resisted it. They 
have thought it was not practical, not reliable, nor important. 
Let me direct your attention to the fact that this means of 
transmission of intelligence is the most important, and often 
the most reliable which we possess. 

The intelligence we receive by involitional telepathy con- 
stitutes the major portion of all that we know. Of course we 
have not understood this. We have never thought about it — 
have never analyzed it but the greatest fund of information 
that we have upon any subject has come to us, by involitional 
telepathy so so» 

Without involitional telepathy we would be absolutely 
incapacitated to carry on our ordinary business affairs. 
Without it we would be absolute ignoramuses. 
Today you are utterly incapable of stating where you got 
the greatest part of your information, but I desire to say to 
you that you got it through involitional telepathy. 
As to volitional telepathy, or telepathy by specific intention, 
this is a valuable method for the transmission of intelligence 
secretly. By this means you do not have to tell in words, what 
you wish to convey. 

There is much information that one desires to convey — 

75 



much that one desires to learn, that one cannot speak — that 
the very putting into speech would destroy the relation 
desired. For instance, you wish to learn the attitude of an 
individual toward you, whether he is friendly — whether he is 
opposed to you, or is willing to help you. You cannot go to 
him and say " are you my friend? " That would be obnoxious 
to him. Human perverseness is so great that after that he 
would likely not be your friend; or if you went to him and 
told him that you wished him to be your friend, or that you 
needed him for a friend, he would be repulsed. The relation- 
ship would be strained and the result would be unsatisfactory. 
1[ But through the means of volitional telepathy you can ask 
the individual to help you — you can ask him to be your friend 
— you can ask him to bear with you — you can ask him for 
favors — you can suggest to him that he be your friend — that 
he will favor you. You can encompass him in all the multifold 
ways that make up the relationship of our everyday life — you 
can inquire into the attitude of his mind upon certain sub- 
jects — you can receive the answers to these inquiries as 
clearly and as absolutely as if he told you, and yet he will not 
know that you are communicating with him at all. 
Suppose the help of an individual is desired. I have used this 
method many times in legislative campaigns. I wanted the 
help of a particular man. I could not go and ask him to help 
me because that would be indelicate as well as dangerous, 
but I have gone and sat in his presence and talked to him 
about the subject that I wanted his mind to dwell upon — 
discussed it in a general and abstract way and while doing so 
held this thought over, on and in him — " this is a worthy 
thing I will help it." And many times on starting to leave him 
the man has taken my hand and said — " Well that proposi- 
tion is a worthy one I will help you with it." He had received 
the message from me by means of volitional telepathy, but 
did not know it and just supposed that it had evolved it in 
his own mind. 

You can see the difference in ultimate value between securing 
a certain attitude on the part of an individual telepathically, 
and securing that attitude by asking in words. The difference 
76 



is that by telepathy he arrives at the attitude that he will 
help, because it is a worthy proposition. You have in such a 
one a friend that will stay by that proposition because he 
thinks he thought of it himself. He does not know you had 
anything to do with it. He thinks he is so big, noble and 
magnanimous that he thought of it himself, therefore, his 
mind is inalterably fixed in that attitude. Whereas if you had 
asked him in words and he had agreed to the same attitude, 
there would have been that half-heartedness of following the 
plan of another, and not the enthusiasm of an originator $&■ 
H Again to you as students, telepathy is one of the best means 
of diagnosis that you can acquire. You will remember that the 
Soul is constantly receiving information from the tissue 
elements or cells of the Body as to their condition. The indi- 
vidual that can learn to receive telepathic communication 
from his own Soul can know the physical condition of every 
cell in his Body that is in relation to nerves capable of trans- 
mitting vibrations to the brain. 

The doctor that understands how to secure rapport can 
receive from the Soul of the individual that is sick, telepathic 
communication as to the exact condition of his Body, and 
can in that manner be advised as to what must be accom- 
plished in order that the individual may get well. 
I have made this statement in audiences where I was not 
known and have seen the smile of derision pass over the 
countenances of many individuals. Those that know me, 
know that telepathic diagnosis is practically demonstrated 
by me daily. 

Those who have honestly tried diagnosis by means of tele- 
pathy have not been wholly disappointed, at least they need 
not have been, provided they devoted to the effort that 
degree of intelligence, care, patience, thought and loving 
determination necessary to acquire that proficiency. 
The law of the Soul's relation to this material environment is 
to obey the commands of Mind. Mind is in charge. Mind is 
the sentinel at the gateway to the Soul for the purpose of 
determining what shall pass. 

Therefore, if you desire to receive telepathic communication 

77 



— if you desire to receive psychic influx; if you desire to 
receive psychic impression, you must assume the attitude of 
desire to receive — you must continually hold yourself in an 
attitude to receive. That is to say, you must make yourself 
passive to communication. 

Now, as to the modus operandi of telepathy — if you desire to 
send a telepathic communication, the first thing is to estab- 
lish in Mind absolute faith that it is a possibility — not only 
that it is possible for another to accomplish; but — that you 
can accomplish it. 

Now another thing is necessary in order that volitional 
telepathy shall be accomplished, and that is, that the indi- 
vidual to whom the message shall come shall be willing to 
receive it. He must not only be willing that messages shall be 
sent, but he must also be willing that messages shall be 
received, and in the willingness to receive telepathic com- 
munication lies the greater assurance of success. 
People imagine that telepathy is a gift of certain individuals. 
That is not true, it is a -power incident to the intelligence 
department of all human beings. Successful telepathy depends 
more on the willingness to receive than anything else. 
In other words, if you are skeptical, if you do not believe in 
telepathy, if you declare that there is nothing in it, that it is 
abjectly ridiculous and foolish, you can never receive tele- 
pathic communication; because, by that mental attitude you 
have closed the door. You have shut the gateway between 
Mind and Soul on that subject, and while the Soul will 
continually receive telepathic impressions, it will not evolve 
them into your consciousness. And why? Because it has 
received your disbelief as a command from Mind, and it obeys 
that cofnmand. 

Then, the other individual must have secured mental passiv- 
ity, a willingness that the message shall be received, and that 
requires the same degree of faith on his part. 
When you stop to think of these two propositions, you can 
understand why specific, volitional telepathic communication 
is so seldom accomplished. Think how difficult it would be to 
select, haphazard, an individual that has sufficient faith and 
78 



is ready to receive a telepathic communication. Also think 
how difficult it is for you to arise to that degree of faith that 
you can send a telepathic communication. 
Many have said to me: " If you believe in telepathic com- 
munication, if you believe it can be done so easily, then why 
is it not more frequently accomplished? " My answer is that 
faith is minus. I am aware that faith is looked upon as being 
common, but let me call it to your attention that we are a 
race of disbelievers. We are particularly disbelievers of that 
which has not been made common to us by having been con- 
tinually a part of our environment and relationship. 
It has always been a matter of astonishment to me how far 
people will go out of their way to believe the impossible, and 
how they will resist belief in that which is common and is 
continually happening in their very presence, only they 
refuse, because of disbelief, to recognize that fact. 
Therefore, faith must be the first thing. Skepticism renders 
telepathy absolutely impossible. 

Then, there must be absolute honesty of purpose. No tele- 
pathy can be accomplished if it is to result in unfair advan- 
tage, either to yourself or another. It must be for a normal or, 
an honorable purpose, and unless it is, it will fail. 
You must persist with faith until you succeed; until the com- 
munication has been accomplished, for failure to persist is 
proof that you lacked faith in the beginning. 
Many persons imagine they have sufficient faith to send a 
telepathic communication. They try it once, twice, or per- 
haps, even three times, but do not succeed; then they say — 
" I just knew all the time that it could not be accomplished." 
^[ That reminds me of the faith of the old woman that went 
out and prayed that the mountain in front of her door might 
be removed; prayed earnestly, expressing the thought that it 
was promised if one had faith equal to a grain of mustard 
seed they could remove mountains. The next morning, when 
she looked out of the door, she said — " There you are. Mr. 
Mountain just as I expected." It is evident that she did not 
have faith. 

I do not know whether faith would have removed the moun- 

79 



tain, but I do know that the same lack of faith, will prevent 
the sending or receiving of a telepathic communication. 
As to the message itself, first, secure conditions — that is to 
say, select the best time possible for sending the message. 
Select a time when the individual to whom you are going to 
send the message is least likely to be mentally employed; 
that is to say, least likely to be busy. 

The best time ordinarily, to send the message is when the 
individual is about to fall asleep or at the time he is waking 
up. Of course, these conditions cannot always be known, but 
in so far as possible, you make success more sure by selecting 
the proper time to send the message. 

I have received telepathic communications in the interim of 
court proceedings. I once received an involitional telepathic 
communication from my wife during such an interval. It was 
necessary for some incidental matters to be taken up by the 
court, and the trial I was engaged in was suspended for a few 
minutes. I stepped into the sheriff's office, sat down at a table 
and laid my head on my arms, a position I assumed a great 
deal at that time for resting. Instantly I relaxed and became 
passive, I heard the voice of my wife, just as if she had stood 
by my side, say — " Willard come home, I am sick." I not only 
heard her voice pronounce the words, but I saw her lying 
upon a surgeon's table. I stepped out into the court room and 
told the lawyer that was in the case with me that he would 
have to finish the trial as I had to go home; that I had received 
a message that my wife was sick. He looked at me in utter 
astonishment and said he had not seen a messenger boy. I 
told him I had received the message all the same. I took the 
next train home, and when I arrived in town, I at once tele- 
phoned my house and asked how my wife was. The neighbor 
woman that answered the telephone wanted to know how I 
knew my wife was sick, and asked if she had telegraphed. I 
told her that she had not telegraphed me, but that she had 
sent a message just the same. I had not only received the 
message in words but had received it in a picture, for at the 
time I received it she was lying on a surgeon's table in an 
office adjoining mine. 
80 



Now if I had not been passive, if the trial of the case had not 
been stopped at just that particular time, I might never have 
received that telepathic communication. That is to say, I 
might never have known it. It would have reached my Soul, 
of course, but it might never have been evolved above the 
threshold of my consciousness, and for that reason I would 
not have known of its receipt. Had I been busy, had I been 
engrossed in the trial of the case, I should not have been in 
condition to have received the message, although possibly 
at the end of the trial it might have evolved into conscious- 
ness, but that is not by any means certain. 
So you see how easily a telepathic communication may go 
astray; how easily it may reach the Soul of the individual, but 
never reach the consciousness of the individual. 
Prepare your message with the same scrupulous care that 
you would use in the preparation of a message that would 
cost two dollars a word. Be just as chary of words as possible. 
Write the message again and again until you have reduced it 
to the fewest words that will convey the thought. 
Then a good method for beginners is to place the message 
against the forehead. There is nothing in that except that it 
brings the individual in touch, as it were, and aids in con- 
centration; then, hold the thought of the message not in 
words, but as an entirety. Impress it upon the Soul with the 
prayer-like desire that it shall be conveyed to the individual 
it was designed for, and shall be evolved into his conscious- 
ness. Hold the message on him, over him and in him, coupled 
with the desire for evolvement, until you feel that the mes- 
sage has been delivered. 

I cannot describe the sensation of delivery of the message. 
I can only attempt to make it understood by illustration. No 
doubt, you have often been in mental competition with an 
individual — for instance, you are trying to prevent a quarrel 
and find yourself talking with an individual, trying to dis- 
suade him from doing some particular thing and while his 
last statement is a declaration of his determination to do that 
thing, still you feel a sense of rest and victory, you feel that 
he is not going to do it, but is going to do what you are trying 

81 



to persuade him to do. ^j It is just that same sense of having 
accomplished — of having succeeded, that you are to wait 
for, in the silence, when you are sending a message, and the 
period of thus waiting may be a moment or it may be many 
minutes or hours. Do not strive for the sensation of victory. Do 
not affirmatively try to reach it, but just hold the thought of the 
message with care, concentration and passivity until you feel 
that sense of relaxation and success pass over you and then you 
may be sure that the message has been delivered. 
You may not be able to tell that it has been immediately 
evolved into the consciousness of the one to whom sent. 
However, you will not feel the sense of rest in its completeness 
until it has been evolved above the threshold of consciousness, 
or until preparation has been made for it to be evolved £•» 
Many times it is not evolved at once, but is so impressed that 
it will be the first thought of the person when he awakes, if 
he is sleeping or when he quits doing what is absorbing his 
attention at the time and becomes passive. In either case you 
will have the same sensation of success as though it had been 
immediately accomplished. 

Now my friends, I would like to illustrate the success of 
telepathy to you by many examples that I have known, or 
that have occurred in my life but time does not permit. 
However, I desire to say this in passing, I have demonstrated 
specific telepathy in many instances, and I will not retrain 
from giving you one of them. 

At one time a man owed me, on a judgment, two hundred 
dollars. He was " execution proof." I made up my Mind that 
I would collect that money by telepathy. 
So one night I went to my office, turned on the light, sat down 
at the desk and wrote him a long letter, covering the subject 
in all its details, showing him why he should pay this debt 
for his own welfare, arguing all the proposition kindly and 
patiently. Then I folded the letter and enclosed it in an 
envelope, which I addressed to him. Then I wrote a message 
just as if I were going to transmit it by telegraph. He was a 
railroad man and I knew when his train would reach his town, 
and that it was his habit to retire as soon as he got in. 
8a 



So shortly after the time of his train arrival, I took the letter 
and message in my hand, turned off the light and holding the 
message to my forehead sent these words: " Well, I will pay 
you the two hundred dollars." I held the message over him, 
on him and in him, every moment I had opportunity for 
three days and nights, except when I was asleep. 
However, almost at once I felt the sensation of relief about it 
that I have endeavored to describe as following successful 
delivery of a message; but I continued to hold the thought to 
insure against later adverse suggestion. 

On the fourth morning after sending, I received a letter from 
him and the very first thing stated in it was: " Well, I will 
pay you the two hundred dollars. Meet me at such and such 
a place and I will pay the money." I went to that place at the 
time stated, did just what I said I would do and that is an 
important point, to have failed to keep the appointment by a 
minute would probably have been fatal to the experiment, for 
it is more than probable that, responding to the suggestion, 
he had promised himself to be there with the money at the 
appointed time and if I had not arrived it would have acted 
upon him as an adverse counter-suggestion, which coupled 
with his interest would have overcome the suggestion of the 
telepathic message. 

However, when I kept the date, it added to the force of the 
suggestion, and he proceeded to do what he had said he would 
do, although his lawyer was there trying to dissuade him 
from paying the debt, insisting that the payment was unnec- 
essary, could not be enforced, etc., but the telepathic com- 
munication had done its work on him. His concept of the 
situation was that he had thought it all out and had made up 
his mind to do the honorable thing and pay me, and nobody 
could have persuaded him to turn aside from that intention. 
*[ This only illustrates the practicability of telepathy and 
what may be done by those that will be sufficiently persistent 
and patient. The great difficulty about it is that it requires 
time, effort and persistence far in excess of that which the ordi- 
nary individual will bring to a task. 

I shall not further illustrate at this time. However, in closing, 

83 



I desire to call your attention to one very important thing. 
In telepathy Mind stands as sentinel to the Soul. It is the 
master of the situation; it permits to evolve from the Soul, to 
our consciousness only what it is willing to receive; it im- 
presses on the Soul only what it is willing shall be impressed; 
it permits to escape from the Soul telepathically only what 
it is willing shall escape. 

In other words the law governing telepathy is such, that we 
can at all times maintain our absolute, distinct and inviolable 
individuality. No other human being, can by any means, 
change us, or take advantage of us. We are given the power of 
a free agent. We can do or think what we desire and the fact 
cannot escape us by means of telepathy against our will. 
^[ An individual that is not willing that one shall receive a 
telepathic communication from him upon a specific subject 
has only to close that avenue. He has only to say to his Soul : 
" Do not transmit injormation on this subject to anybody; 
This must be kept secret "and the Soul will absolutely obey the 
command so> s«* 

It may be asked: "If telepathy can be accomplished so 
easily as you say, then why do not people take advantage of 
each other in business transactions by use of it? Why is it 
that a person apt in telepathy, does not by that means 
inquire into business secrets, and having acquired a knowl- 
edge of them take advantage with respect to them? " The 
answer is that it is absolutely impossible to receive telepathic 
communication from an individual upon a subject about 
which he has instructed his Soul, that there shall be no com- 
munication s«* $& 

People have erroneously supposed that they could follow a 
murderer; a criminal, telepathically. They have supposed that 
they could actually follow and read telepathically from that 
individual upon the subject of his criminal acts or other 
wrongful conduct. 

The wonderful tragedy: " The Bells " in which Henry Irving 
made his great success was based, as you will recall, upon the 
erroneous hypothesis that an individual in complete hypnotic 
sleep may be made to reveal the fact that he is a murderer. 
84 



Such things are absolutely impossible. If No human being 
ever communicated telepathic? ly, any fact or circumstance 
which he had instructed his Soul should not be transmitted. 
To say otherwise, is but to announce that man is not possessed 
of an individuality and a free and independent agency. 
Now, let us remember the importance of this lesson. If we 
desire to receive the highest form of intelligence, to wit: the 
intelligence from the Soul side of existence, we must always 
keep ourselves in an attitude to receive. W must believe in 
the influx of universal intelligence, and ma^t continually 
keep our Minds open for that transmission. 
Then, if we desire to receive from the phys oal environment 
around us the highest form of telepathic suggestion, the trans- 
mission of the most valuable thought, we must make our- 
selves passive, at all times, to the reception of telepathic 
communications. 

If we desire to bring our bodies to the highest development 
possible, we must learn to understand, that our Souls are the 
bases of transmission of knowledge, as to every condition, and 
that if we continually keep ourselves in the attitude to 
receive that form of intelligence, we can know our physical 
existence, our physical condition from day to day. 
If we desire friends; if we desire that no human being shall 
have ill will toward us, we can continually control these 
conditions by telepathic radiations of friendship, good cheer, 
good wishes, love and strength. May you come into a realiza- 
tion of these truths. 



85 



LECTURE NO. 5. 
June 17, 1913. 

Suggestion Applied — Hypnotism 

MY FRIENDS: From the lectures on suggestion and 
telepathy, I wish to state by way of 
RECAPITULATION 
we learned that beyond the limitations of the physical we 
are still able to carry out the laws of suggestion entirely 
divorced, in a particular and circumscribed sense, from the 
physical being, under what we call telepathy, which is the 
transmission of intelligence from Soul to Soul, through the 
medium of the Mind of the sender to the Mind of the receiver. 
\ The peculiar phase of this phenomenon, lies in the fact 
that there must be Mind at each end of the communication; 
but that with the transmission, Mind has nothing to do. 
We found that in order to send a telepathic message one 
must have faith. He must also have concentration and 
persistence. In other words, he must persist with concentra- 
tion until he has accomplished the desired result. 
We learned that in order to receive a telepathic communica- 
tion, one must have faith that he can receive such communi- 
cation, and that he must then persistently wait in the attitude 
of receptivity. 

We learned that through the medium of telepathy we build 
memory, mind, will, health, friendship and the power to love, 
and that through the influence of telepathy we attract or 
receive good will, friendship, help and love of others. 
We found that telepathy, so far from being unusual, is the 
remarkable power that we continually rely upon and use, 
notwithstanding the fact that many, if questioned, would 
say that they do not believe in telepathy. 
However, we found that the accomplishment of all these 
86 



things requires a concentrated passivity bordering upon 
sleep, and this thought brings us to a consideration of 

HYPNOTISM 

The word hypnotism is from the Greek word " hypnos," 
meaning sleep. 

The word hypnotism was coined as a name for this phenome- 
non in the year 1843. 

Most people suppose that hypnotism is old, and that its name 
is probably as aged as history, and it will astonish many 
to know, that its day is only since 1843, when it received its 
name from so common a thing as sleep. 
From the standpoint of the individual, there are two meth- 
ods of obtaining hypnosis: 

One is by auto-suggestion, and is self produced sleep, 
induced by a suggestion directed to the Soul commanding 
it to put the Mind to sleep. 

The other is from extraneous suggestion, that is suggestion 
coming to us through one or more of the senses addressed to 
the Soul in the same way, commanding the same result. 
Hypnosis is nothing but sleep, but it is not induced in the 
same way that ordinary sleep is. 

The difference between hypnosis and ordinary sleep is that 
ordinary sleep is induced without specific intention, while 
Hypnosis is induced by specific intention. 
Most people do not understand that there is any intention 
to secure sleep at all. They just get ready at night and retire. 
They go to bed for the purpose of sleeping. They do not give 
themselves any specific suggestion of sleep. They only assume 
the attitude which they have habitually assumed for the 
purpose of sleeping. It makes no difference whether that is 
lying on the back, on the side or how, when ready to go to 
sleep they assume the attitude that they have formed the 
habit of assuming when they desire sleep, and they sleep as 
the result of the suggestion of position. There is general 
intention to sleep, but the sleep is not induced by specific 
intention so» s«* 

The individual has only become passive and has assumed the 

87 



ordinary attitude; the habitual attitude that suggests sleep. 
If Hypnosis is sleep, acquired by specific intention, by a sug- 
gestion given for the express purpose of inducing sleep, and 
that suggestion may be offered by the individual himself, or 
it may be offered by another. However, it is no more than the 
result of the suggestion to sleep given specifically and with 
intention so so 

There are a great many erroneous concepts as to hypnotism. 
I do not know of any subject today about which there is 
such a wide diversity of thought; about which there are more 
strange, incongruous, ridiculous, adverse and foolish notions 
than about hypnotism. 

The first erroneous conception that I desire to call to your 
attention is, that hypnosis can only be accomplished by an 
individual of strong will in an individual of weak will. You 
must understand that this is not true. Per se hypnotism has 
absolutely nothing to do with what is ordinarily termed the will so 
Will is nothing but the result of mental habit. It is an 
attitude-habit, and in that relation stands no higher than 
anything you think, and continue, habitually to think. 
The will is another of the bugaboos of this life. 
Usually the individual that thinks he is possessed of great 
will power is greatly mistaken. He has mistaken consummate 
animal stubbornness for will power. Any one can be stubborn, 
but it is quite a different thing to develop will power. 
Will consists in the ability to secure concentration, receptivity, 
passivity and continuity. This is not the general, but it is the 
true conception. 

The general conception is, that the will stands out by itself 
and is in a peculiar sense an entity of Mind. It is not. The 
will is a developed quality of Mind. 

One may develop the art of painting; may develop the art of 
music; may develop the power of analysis. In like manner one 
may develop the will. 

The baby has no will. It begins instantly and continues to 
develop will, by forming mental habits, and thus it comes 
to be an individual of strong will, or an individual of weak 
will, as we say depending upon its surroundings, education, 



habits, heredity and a multitude of things. In attempting 
to understand what will is, let us keep away from the thought 
of stubborn, non-reasoning resistance. 

The essentials necessary to the building of what is ordinarily 
called will-power are — passivity to receive suggestion — con- 
centration to fix upon the suggestion — and continuity in the 
suggestion or thought. These qualities are essential to the 
induction of hypnosis. 

Another of the remarkable errors so common, in the minds 
of people is, that a hypnotist is some sort of a green-eyed 
monster; that he is possessed of some occult and mysterious 
power and that somehow, by the lightning flashes of his green 
eyes he is able to grasp and hold human beings; to bring 
them out of the environment in which they have lived, 
breathed and had their being and transform them into just 
what he would have them to be. 

I have been in the homes of people in whom this erroneous 
idea was so strongly implanted that the subject of hypnotism 
and hypnotists would be mentioned with bated breath and 
with trembling lips, as though referring to or mentioning the 
name of some destroying monster. 

I am glad to say that a great deal of this foolishness is passing 
and yet, the other day, at this institution, some of the 
students remarked to a woman that had been here, that I 
would deliver a lecture on hypnotism in a few days, and the 
woman said: — " Is Dr. Carver a hypnotist? " This in such 
tone and manner as to imply that, if he is, then he is surely 
the incarnation of the devil. 

I desire to call your attention to the fact that there is nothing 
mysterious, nothing occult, nothing strange, nothing strained, 
nothing ridiculous about hypnotism. It is the simplest 
phenomenon that occurs, the very sweetest phenomenon that 
comes to our attention. 

It is that phenomenon that we witness in the little babe 
when, for the first time it is laid to rest beside its mother. 
If It is that phenomenon that kisses down the eyelids of 
childhood at the crooning of the mother's voice. It is that 
wondrous phenomenon that closes each day of toil in this 

89 



work-a-day world, ^flt is the phenomenon that makes it 
possible for us to go on day after day exercising intelligence 
and power, and taking care of the duties and obligations of 
this life. 

I desire that you come to realize that the sweetness of sleep 
is nothing but the demonstration of hypnosis. 
We have sleep induced by suggestion from what we call 
anesthetics. For those I cannot say so much, but for sleep 
at proper times, induced by specific intention, by passivity, 
too much, in favor, cannot be said. 

It is supposed, as another erroneous concept, that one may 
be hypnotized against his fixed desire. It seems hardly neces- 
sary to add that such a thing is impossible. 
I have been surprised at the remarks of people relative to 
this subject. It is a common occurrence for one to say: " I 
do not believe I could be hypnotized." Right, so long as the 
individual keeps that attitude he cannot be. 
It requires a certain degree of intelligence on the part of an 
individual before he can be hypnotized, and one that " swells 
up " and makes that kind of a remark is usually short on that 
particular quality. 

Any individual may be hypnotized, who has intelligence 
enough provided he is willing, and no one can be hypnotized 
under any circumstance against his fixed desire. 
I say "fixed desire" because he may not be conscious of 
desire in the matter at all, one way or the other. Indeed, he 
may have no desire on the subject, and in that degree of 
passivity he may be hypnotized and he may imagine that he 
was hypnotized, without the question of desire entering into 
the matter. 

However, the point is that no individual can be hypnotized 
against h\s fixed desire. In definite words, if one does not wish 
to be hypnotized, he cannot be. And that is why, it is difficult 
to find hypnotic subjects. 

A person may think superficially, that he is perfectly willing 
to be hypnotized, but upon the test being made, find that 
more deeply impressed there is opposition — unwillingness. 
Such a person cannot be hypnotized. 
90 



A person may come to a hypnotist and request to be hypno- 
tized, but when the test is made finds that he fails to respond 
to the suggestion because unconsciously he is unwilling, and 
in such an event, unless he can change his attitude, it is an 
utter impossibility to hypnotize him. 

I can illustrate this to some of you that have been taking 
adjustings. The adjuster tells you to lie on the table and 
relax as though you were going to sleep. You say, all right, and 
you lie down and you superficially relax. That is, you think 
you relax, but when the operator tells you again to relax, 
you say you are relaxed. He says that you are not, and you 
say that you are doing your very best to relax. That is 
mentally — outsidely, but not insidely. You have not 
relaxed down through your body at all. You have only 
turned relaxation to the outside. You think you are willing 
to relax outside; but inside you find you are not willing to 
relax and cannot and the operator cannot adjust you, for in 
the fullest sense complete relaxation is necessary to complete 
adjusting s©» s«» 

Now, if you have the same kind of willingness to be hypno- 
tized you cannot be, and for the very same reason. 
The reason you do not relax on the adjusting table is because 
you have a suggestion of fear lodged in your Mind. You have 
permitted yourself to say to your Soul: " I am afraid I shall 
be injured. I am afraid it will hurt," and the Soul is radiating 
that caution to your Mind all the time, and therefore, you 
cannot relax. 

It is the same with an individual that has said to his Soul — 
" I am afraid to be hypnotized. Do not, I caution you — do 
not let me be hypnotized." Afterward he forgets that and 
says to a hypnotist — " Oh! yes, I am perfectly willing to be 
hypnotized." But the Soul has the caution he so carefully 
gave it and instantly the endeavor is made, it thrusts that 
caution into consciousness, rendering hypnosis impossible s<* 
One of my greatest disappointments is, that I cannot be 
hypnotized beyond the second stage. From childhood I have 
had a peculiar averseness to sleep. Therefore I can only be 
put into the second phase of hypnosis. My eyes can be closed 

9i 



and I can be rendered motionless, but when the hypnotist 
attempts to go further and put my Mind to rest, instantly 
all his efforts are put aside and I am as wide awake and as 
much master of myself as it is possible to be. I have tried 
vainly to overcome this and I will succeed some day. 
Now, all these stories about individuals that have been 
hypnotized, and taken away and destroyed are fabrications, 
pure and simple. There is not a word of truth in them, not 
one single solitary word. They are the imagery, the fantasy, 
the folk-lore, that is as wild and ridiculous as was that of 
witchcraft and the Inquisition. 

There is another erroneous conception, that one, under 
hypnosis, can be made to divulge a secret. 
When an individual has cautioned his Soul that a particular 
thing is not to be divulged under any circumstance, you may 
hypnotize him to the somnambulic state and he will never, 
by look, work or sign divulge any part of that secret. That 
thing is utterly locked in his Soul and it is not given over 
because there stands that last command to the Soul. 
The Soul is without reason, and has not the power to displace 
the command or put aside the caution that has been given it, 
and instantly when the call comes for the forbidden fact, the 
command or caution comes from the Soul: " Do not divulge," 
and the hypnosis is instantly at an end. 

Another erroneous conception still more remarkable is to 
the effect that, under hypnosis, one can be made to do what 
is against his fixed principle. 

It is easy to understand why such an idea has obtained such 
a strong foothold. // is impossible to tell, extraneously, what 
are one' s fixed principles. 

I might hypnotize a person and induce him to do what would 
be contrary to what he professed when awake; but he might 
prove to be a hypocrite. It is utterly impossible to tell how 
many hypocrites are here this morning. It is just as impossible 
to tell how much of a hypocrite I am. We all have power to 
hide ourselves. 

We are given the power to hide our fixed principles in order 
that we may be free agents. If we did not have it, we could 
92 



not be free agents. We could not exercise our individuality 
in relation with others. We would continually be the subject 
of obsession by our fellow-beings in all respects, and therefore, 
we are given the power to hide our fixed attitudes. 
The error in conception is that one can be hypnotized and 
against his fixed principle be made to commit theft; to infract 
chastity; to commit murder, etc. To prove this, persons that 
in ordinary life exercise a degree of honesty within the law have 
been hypnotized and given the suggestion to steal, and they 
have stolen. Individuals that have a reputation for chastity 
have been given the suggestion, under hypnosis, to perform 
an act that would be unchaste, and they have performed such 
act. Individuals that have shown no disposition to kill have 
been given the suggestion, under hypnosis, that they commit 
murder and they have demonstrated apparent willingness to 
perform the act. 

Those stated and almost innumerable other illustrations 
prove that those individuals were, at bottom, thieves, unchaste 
and murderers; that it was not against their fixed principles 
to commit such acts. 

It has been demonstrated, under hypnosis, in many cases, 
that individuals that have been properly reared and edu- 
cated, and at bottom are absolutely opposed to theft, and 
would rather die than take what belonged to another, have 
thrown off hypnosis and become normal upon it being 
suggested to them that they steal. 

Individuals that have lived chaste lives and have demon- 
strated an absolute disposition to chastity have been hypno- 
tized, and it has been suggested to them, under hypnosis, to 
commit an act of unchastity but instantly they have awak- 
ened and refused. 

It has been suggested, under hypnosis, that an individual 
commit murder and he has been made to go through the form 
of murder to the very point of grasping a " tin " dagger, and 
rushing at the victim and striking at him as though he would 
stab him through the heart. 

However, you must remember that there are two phases to 
that demonstration. The individual knew as well as anybody 

93 



that it was a " tin " dagger, and that it would not puncture 
the body. He also knew it was a play, and like all subjects 
under hypnosis, he played his part with exact fidelity. But 
in case where the dagger was real the individual has awakened 
and refused to act. 

Do you know that any individual who is willing that the life 
of a fellow being shall be taken, is a murderer? I want you to 
understand that. If that thought could be sensed over this 
entire earth it would be the greatest civilizer the world has 
ever known. Any Individual that, at Bottom, is Willing, 
Under Any Circumstance that the Life of a Human- 
Being Shall Be Taken, is at Bottom a Murderer. 
The foregoing statement includes nearly the whole human 
family. Therefore, is it strange that under hypnosis, murder 
may be suggested to an individual and the suggestion be 
accepted? Yet, if it is against fixed principles to kill, the 
subject cannot under hypnosis be induced to kill. 
It is also supposed that the practice of hypnosis weakens the 
will. There is nothing so well adapted to the cultivation of 
strong will as to be hypnotized; not to be the operator, but 
to be the subject; for this reason: that in order to be hypnotized 
one must acquire the habit of concentrated passivity held in 
continuity, and there is no stronger exercise of will than is 
necessary to reach that attitude and maintain it. 
It is also thought that hypnotism destroys Mind. I have 
already reverted to the fact that hypnosis strengthens 
mentality; that it prepares Mind for comprehensive suggest- 
ion. It trains Mind to continuity in passivity, the attitude 
necessary to receptivity and the establishment of profound 
memory s«* so 

Hypnosis increases the capacity for deep impression and 
breadth of comprehension, essentials to the building of accurate 
meynory and quick recollection. 

Of course, an individual could tamper with hypnosis until 
it became injurious. He could be hypnotized under circum- 
stances that might render the result injurious. He could 
practise hypnosis so continuously as to become injurious. 
That is, an individual could form such a habit of allowing his 
94 



Mind to be put in abeyance as to weaken it. A person while 
under hypnosis is subject to any suggestion that does not 
contravene fixed principles and therefore is a prey to the care- 
less and unthoughtful. 

For the reason that one is subject to the suggestions of the 
thoughtless, one should always be very careful in the selection 
of an operator to hypnotize him; never selecting any but 
persons of refined mind and habits and of the best intentions. 
In other words, every precaution should be taken against the 
possibility of adverse suggestion and to insure that only proper 
suggestion shall be given. For reasons of this character, and 
others too many for enumeration, I wish to say that I am 
opposed to careless and indiscriminate demonstrations of 
hypnosis as an entertainment. 

Demonstrations of hypnosis should never be attempted except 
with the greatest seriousness and earnestness of purpose, and 
solely for the benefit of those involved. 

As to history, hypnotism has been known and used, under 
various circumstances and relationships of the human family, 
from the night of time. It is one of the common things that 
has always been known, but not as hypnotism. It was 
recognized as an incident to the human family and looked 
upon as a mystery. 

We find many facts in history that can be explained upon no 
other hypothesis than that of hypnotism. I cannot go into 
the details of these; but must leave them to your research s& 
The first definite history we have of hypnotism was in 1776. 
In that year Franz Anton Mesmer, who lived in Paris, 
announced that he had found a way to put individuals into a 
peculiar and health-giving sleep. 

Mesmer's idea was that the sleep was induced by magnetism. 
He secured the sleep by rubbing magnets over the body of 
the individual, at the same time suggesting to him orally 
that he become passive; that he sleep. He called it a magnetic 
sleep, and there are people to this day that think there is 
something magnetic or mesmeric incident to hypnotism $0 
I call your attention to the fact, my friends, that there is 
nothing magnetic about it. There is nothing mesmeric or 

95 



material about it. Magnetism is a power coming from the 
earth. Hypnotism is a power emanating from the Sou/, and has 
nothing to do with, and is not in any way related to magnetism. 
^f Get the idea of magnetism everlastingly out of your Mind, 
because it will cause you a good deal of disquiet unless you 
understand it. 

It is being taught that the body is a magnet, that the body 
exercises a peculiar magnetic influence upon others and there 
is a certain amount of truth about that; but you should be 
careful how far you go with that idea. 

You must keep it in mind, that the law governing magnetism 
applies to material only , and in that sense applies to your body 
but hypnosis is accomplished by the operation of psychic law. 
\ The method of Mesmer in producing sleep was called in his 
honor, " Mesmerism." At about that time he began to treat 
the sick s«* s» 

Up to that time, you will remember, there were no very 
definite ways of treating the sick. Surgery had not obtained 
its grasp on the people and the administration of decoctions, 
herbs, extracts of animals, and all of the most vile conglom- 
erations that could be conceived, constituted the then practice 
of medicine. 

People of all countries were crying out for something to 
relieve their physical infirmities, and therefore, the very 
moment that Mesmer secured the sleep, he began experi- 
menting to see if he could not use it for the relief of disease s+ 
He found that by the sleep he was able to remove many 
phases of abnormality, and he was especially successful with 
individuals that were excitable; with those subject to hysteria, 
nervousness and all such phases of abnormality. 
When Mesmer made the announcement of success, the medi- 
cal profession looked into the matter, as they always do. They 
appointed a commission to investigate. In fact, they actually 
appointed an honest committee. The committee investigated 
and reported that Mesmer was doing just what he claimed to 
do; was actually curing people and causing them to walk in 
newness of life. 

When the august Medical Society of Paris received the com- 
96 



mittees's report it said, to the nether region with such a 
report. We will not accept it, for to accept such a report 
would be to admit that Mesmer has superseded us. If a 
thought of this kind must come to the world ', it must come through 
the proper channel. It must come through us. Thoughts, as you 
know, may only come through channels characterized by 
sufficient intelligence to transmit them and this particular 
thought had sufficient reason for not coming through the 
medical channel. 

The august members of the Medical Society of Paris said: 
Is it not likely, if there was any phenomenon of that kind, 
we would have discovered it long ago; we that look after the 
health of society at large? Is it likely that this ignoramus of a 
Mesmer should have discovered it? So they refused the 
report, and selected another committee. 

The second committee was selected, like all committees of 
that kind are selected, because of the peculiar fitness of its 
members NOT to investigate. That committee did not investi- 
gate, but did ascertain that whatever it was that Mesmer was 
doing, they could not learn to do. So the committee reported 
that they could not discover Mesmer's secret and that it 
considered it unsafe to report his success to the public so 
You are aware that the medical profession has always been 
the guardian of the public. So the Society passed a resolution 
condemning Mesmer, charging that what he purported to do 
was a fraud. 

The Society also said that Mesmer himself was a fraud and as 
a result, in 1815, Mesmer, a man of wealth, a man of educa- 
tion, a man of culture and refinement, had his estates taken 
from him. He was anathematized, ostracized and finally 
exiled from France. 

When Mesmer was old, broken and decrepit, he was permitted 
to return to France. // is with such kindness and consideration 
that the medical profession has always treated the world 's 
health benefactors. 

About the time Mesmer came back to France, Dr. Braid of 
Manchester, England, made a wonderful discovery. Mesmer 
had said that the Mesmeric sleep was caused by a magnetic 

91 



fluid which, in some way, left the magnets and entered the 
body of the individual. 

Now, according to medical science, if there is fluid anywhere — 
it is a medicine — it could be nothing else. Hot water is a 
medicine and so is cold water, so is ice and so is vibration, 
even though of a universal nature. 

In view of this fact Dr. Braid reached the profound conclu- 
sion that there was no magnetic fluid and therefore, that there 
was no medicine and that the practice of Mesmerism was 
not the practice of medicine. The Medical Society of Man- 
chester accepted his word and permitted him to practise it s* 
Dr. Braid induced the sleep by having the individual sit 
down and look at a bright light, at the same time giving the 
suggestion of sleep. By this means he " got by " the medical 
profession, for they could find no particular objection to 
Dr. Braid's having a fellow sit down and look at a bright 
light while he told him to go to sleep, because the members 
of the medical profession practised that on themselves. You 
know they have a fashion of looking at something bright in a 
glass and then going to sleep. 

About eighty years ago, in the United States of America, 
hypnotism began to be practised sporadically. 
About forty-five years ago it was quite commonly practised 
over the country, to such an extent that school teachers in 
the common country schools lined their pupils up to test 
them to see how many were hypnotic subjects. 
A great many teachers got into trouble about that, and many 
of them were discharged, because there were people in nearly 
every school district that were as wise as the medical doctors 
in Mesmer's time, and they knew that hypnotism was a 
fraud and not right and that hypnotists were in league with 
the devil. % So the experimenting teacher would be given the 
" hay road " and would go out of the community with all the 
aspersions of an aroused and ignorant public cast upon him. 
The modus operandi of inducing hypnotic sleep has had as 
many changes, almost, as the periods of time and the various 
forms of social advancement during its growth and develop- 
ment. I shall describe but a few of them. 
98 



As stated, Mesmer's plan was to stroke the body with 
magnets, at the same time giving the suggestion of sleep, 
not only in one way but in all ways he knew. He finally 
learned that to stroke the body with the bare hands, while 
giving the suggestion of sleep, was just as efficacious as 
stroking it with magnets. 

Dr. Braid had the individual sit down in front of a bright 
light and gaze steadfastly at it, and in every way that he 
could, offered him the suggestion of sleep, giving the sugges- 
tion verbally in a loud commanding voice. 
The plan of Dr. Bernheim was to begin by removing all fear 
of the sleep from the individual. He would begin by giving 
him the suggestion that he would be protected and cared for 
and no injury would come to him — nothing adverse would 
occur to him. Then he would offer the suggestion of sleep in 
its various steps. He would have the subject sit down, lean 
back, breathe deeply, close the eyes and thus take advantage 
of all those usual aids to the induction of sleep. 
Dr. Warman's method is to have the individual sit down 
before him, place his knees in touch with those of the indi- 
vidual, take hold of the hands, place his thumbs over the 
ulnar nerve on the back of the hands and gaze fixedly into 
one eye, at the same time suggesting orally — rhythmic, 
diaphragmatic breathing. He suggests dilation of the pupil, 
following that with the suggestion of relaxation of the eyelids 
and at the proper time, by the suggestion of sleep. 
It is quite immaterial which of these methods, or what method 
is adopted. The first thing that must be done is to secure the 
attention of the individual. Then the operator must have the 
subject understand what he is going to do and consent to it, 
and have the subject know what he is to do, and concentrat- 
edly enter upon its accomplishment. 

If the subject has any fears, and he usually has, even though 
he does not know it, they must be removed. He must be 
induced to become passive and as he does so the operator 
must become positive. At this juncture the operator must 
suggest sleep. It is usually best to do so orally and while he is 
positive in continuity upon the suggestion of sleep, the 

99 



subject must be passive in continuity upon the thought of 

sleep s©» s«* 

The desire that the subject sleep must be mutual, continuous 
and unbroken, if success is to be attained. You will see, from 
this that hypnosis is a very simple matter indeed. 
Years ago I had a considerable experience with the induction 
of hypnosis. Since I took up the profession of Chiropractic I 
have had no experience with it, on account of the unreasoning 
prejudice of the people. I knew that if they thought I was in 
any way connected with hypnotism they would not give me a 
chance to demonstrate Chiropractic. 

Chiropractic was new. It had burdens enough and as I 
expected to stand in the forefront and do battle for it. I did 
not feel that I had the right to bring to it any further burdens 
than it already had. I thought that there were others that 
could fight the battles of Psychology and incidentally of 
hypnotism, so I ceased to make hypnotic demonstrations $+■ 
However, before taking the field for Chiropractic, I had 
induced hypnosis in many subjects. In the days when I 
practised law I was just as interested in Psychology as I am 
now. We had societies and clubs in which we carried on 
psychic study and demonstration and let me tell you, my 
friends, if there was no other reason in the world but the one 
I shall give you, I should love hypnotism and have confidence 
in it s& s& 

From a time when my mind does not run to the contrary, I 
was a slave to tobacco in every form, and I continued to use 
it to excess all through the years until I was thirty-three years 
of age. Then Dr. Burdette came to our town and organized 
a class in hypnotism. My friend, the editor of the daily paper, 
was there and was a member of the class. It happened 
that I knew nothing about it, and did not belong to the class. 
Tf Dr. Burdette had explained that he could cure the drug 
habit by hypnosis. There were a number of medical doctors 
in the class, and of course, they could not believe that. They 
were just like the medical doctors of Paris and would not 
believe anything unless it came through the medical profes- 
sion; unless they had instituted it themselves, 
ioo 



In the discussion Dr. Burdette said to them — " Do you know 
of any man that is addicted to the tobacco habit, that my 
curing would convince you?" My friend, the editor, had 
heard me say that I would like to be rid of the tobacco habit, 
so he suggested my name as a subject. The medical fellows 
said it would be all right if he cured me for they knew that 
they never saw me at night that I did not look like a loco- 
motive, the smoke and fire flew to such an extent, and they 
never saw me in the daytime that I did not look like a double- 
header, with a chew of tobacco in each side of my mouth and 
puffing at a cigar. So they agreed that if the Doctor could cure 
me of the tobacco habit they would be convinced. 
The next day my friend came to me and told me there was a 
hypnotist in town who would cure me of the tobacco habit if 
I would come down that night. I asked him what the expense 
would be, and he replied that there would be no charge; that 
I would be a clinic. I told him I would be on hand. 
The Doctor put me in the second phase of hypnosis and sug- 
gested to me that there was a smell and taste about tobacco 
that I had never known before, and that the next time I 
smelled or tasted it, I would notice that smell and that taste 
and that these would be so strong as to be paramount to 
every other smell and taste, and that they would be so 
obnoxious, so repulsive and horrible as to cause revulsion. 
He gave me that suggestion in the most positive manner in 
every form that it was possible to express it, for a period of 
about five minutes. 

All the time he was giving me those suggestions, I was sitting 
in the chair; could not move, nor open my eyes; yet, I knew 
everything he was saying, just as you, sitting here know 
what I am saying. When he released me, I looked up at him 
and said — " That was a beautiful speech you made, Prof. 
Burdette, but do you think I am going to be affected by 
that? " He said — " That is all right. All you have to do is to 
report tomorrow night." HThe next morning I started to my 
law office as usual. I had forgotten all about the transaction, 
which shows how frail is Mind; but my Soul had the impres- 
sion of the facts as they occurred. 

IOI 



I pulled out a cigar and bit off the end. The taste was horrible. 
I looked at it, supposing that I had got the end of it into 
something and, not thinking of the events of the night before, 
I bit off a little more, spit it out and put the cigar in my 
mouth. It tasted just as bad as before. 

Then I remembered what had occurred. I said to myself — Is 
it possible that I am such an idiot that I will let a little talk 
like that have so much influence on me. Why, the first thing 
I know I will let a jury look me in the face and stop me from 
arguing the case. 

I held that cigar in my mouth all the way down to my office 
and I might as well have held a stick of quinine, the taste was 
so horrible. When I reached the office I threw the cigar into 
the " slobber-box," — that is the proper name tor it, and 
should be used instead of the dignified word — " cuspidor." s«» 
I went to work. Directly I took out my pipe and tried that. 
It was worse than ever. My partner sat and smoked and 
looked at me. He had heard the whole story, and was greatly 
amused *•• so 

Finally I went home to luncheon. We had three meals a day 
then. We did not know any better. We did not live Chiro- 
practicly $* s& 

After luncheon I thought I would go into the drug store and 
get a good cigar — so I bought a twenty-five cent one. I never 
committed that offence before. I bit the end off and put the 
cigar in my mouth. I shall never forget that cigar. It was a 
" Moose " — a " twenty-five cent 'Moose.' " It tasted just 
as nasty as the cigar I had that morning. 
However, I took out a match and lighted it and before I got 
around the square I had let that cigar go out and relighted it 
several times. I smoked about one-third of it and threw the 
rest into the spittoon. I did not have the courage to try any 
more tobacco that day. 

I went down to the class that night and made my report. 
You should have seen those medical doctors. Their astonish- 
ment can only be imagined — not described. 
The doctor put me into the sleep again, gave me the same 
suggestions as the night before. He then gave the additional 
1 02 



suggestion that if I ever touched tobacco again it would make 
me deathly sick and that I would vomit till I nearly threw 
my boots up. 

It had always been the greatest delight of my life to go into 
a tobacco store and look at the tobacco as it lay in the open 
caddies, or to gaze at the cigars in the open boxes. You know 
when an individual has a habit, he loves everything that is a 
part of that hahit, just as the insane love their insanity. The 
tobacco habit with me was an insanity and I loved all of its 
sensations so so 

About three years later I went into a tobacco store to look 
at the caddies; I went to the back of the store to begin and 
believe me, I had a race with Jonah to get to the sidewalk so 
Hypnotism is the most positive form of cultivation of the 
will, especially in children, and later I shall say more on that 
subject. It is the best method known for correcting bad 
mental habits, such as temper, fear, doubt, drug, tobacco 
and other habits. 

I wish to talk to you for a moment about mental habits. 
Temper can be controlled and educated by hypnotism. The 
mother can sit down by the crib of her child, that has been 
showing evidences of temper, after it has gone to sleep, take 
hold of its hand, move it just enough to get the attention of 
the child, but not enough to wake it up and then tell it the 
beautiful story of control, of passivity, of continuity in 
passivity and thus build in that child's Mind the power to 
control the temper; to control the impulses that are adverse 
to the welfare of that child. 

All individuals subject to that engine of destruction — fear 
can have it utterly and absolutely removed by means of 
hypnosis in conformity with the law of suggestion. 
Also, as I have explained fully, there is no stronger aid to 
telepathic communication than hypnosis. 
Hypnotism is the coming anaesthetic and will, at no distant 
day, be used for that purpose in all necessary surgery. 
Now, my friends, let me beg of you that have fear of hypno- 
tism, to lay aside ignorance, the mother of tear and be in- 
formed so so 

103 



Learn that hypnotism presents the commonest phenomena 
with which you come in contact in life. Understand that it 
reaches back to the cradle — is incident to the cultivation of 
all worthy desires and qualities. Understand that it is neces- 
sary to health and strength. Then fearlessly and in proper 
attitude investigate it and you will never regret it. You will 
come to appreciate its wonderful efficacy and will use it as 
you use all other common powers, without any thought of 
its being mysterious or occult. 



104 



LECTURE NO. 6. 
June 18, 1913. 

Rational Psychology 

MY FRIENDS: In a sense these lectures have con- 
cluded. That is to say, the terminology has been 
given and explained and we now go to the more 
definite and specific parts of the work, that which is of value 
to us in the application of what has been said; and as to the 
phase of application that I wish to develop in this lecture 
let me 

RECAPITULATE. 
We have learned that the Mind is the physical or material 
agent of the Soul and that its scope and limitations are 
bounded by this life. 

That the greater number of Mind attributes, such as reason, 
comparison, imagination, induction, memory, anger, jealousy, 
etc., are as transient as this existence is transient. 
That Mind relations to the Soul are: 

First — to receive universal intelligence from the Soul; 
Second — to transmit information from this environment to 
the Soul. 

That the Soul has no reason, but always gives back to Mind, 
in the form of its impressions, that which is given it, the false 
as well as the true. 

That Mind has that one remarkable , attribute — deduction 
— sometimes called intuition — which is the potential power to 
instantly recognize universal law or truth. 
That so far as we are concerned, Mind — our Mind — is the 
only intelligence; for we must take note of all phases of intel- 
ligence through the medium of Mind, as well as all other 
phenomena so a«* 
This brings us to the subject for consideration this morning: 

IOC 



RATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY 

Viewing this field as we have developed it, you will at once 
be impressed, especially following this recapitulation, with the 
wonderful importance to us of Mind, and while descanting 
upon it and impressing you with the wonderful importance 
of Mind, I am not attempting, either by direct inference, or 
by innuendo, to recall your appreciation from the remarkable 
and comprehensive value of the Soul. Indeed, I am not talk- 
ing about the Soul. I am now addressing myself exclusively to 
Mind, and for that reason which must appeal to each one of 
us as being paramount, that Mind is the place where we 
begin all intelligence development. 

Mind is not the avenue through which we commenced existence, 
by any means; but it is the avenue through which' we begin 
intelligence development. 

Our knowledge of individual existence dates back only, to the 
beginning of our individual memory. 

You will see therefore, that it is of the utmost importance 
that we give more attention, more careful consideration to 
Mind and its attributes, than has heretofore been the habit 
of people in general. 

There has always been a lack of earnest attention given to 
Mind. It has received from the human family a vast amount 
of neglect. It is entitled to a most profound consideration, 
and it is a plea for Mind that I bring to you especially. 
As to Mind, the human family has, from the dawn of history, 
exercised two peculiar attitudes; one of them representing 
that vast number ol humanity that fall within the scope of 
materialism so so 

I refer to those that cling tenaciously to this environmental, 
physical, seeable, hearable, tastable, smellable, touchable, 
handleable thing, we call our material world; those who 
believe that in some mysterious way which they do not find 
it possible to explain; life comes into existence and is main- 
tained; that all forms of animation spring into existence 
because of certain relative phases that they have denomi- 
nated kenetic energy. 
1 06 



These materialists talk of Mind, but talk of it as including the 
Soul. For in their explanation they refer all phenomena to 
the inter-relationship of material essence, and of course, their 
explanations are unsatisfactory, shortsighted and incapable 
of demonstration. 

The other class referred to, that do not believe in material 
exclusively, take the other tangent, and as remarkable as it 
may seem talk almost continuously of the Soul, of psychic 
congeries of phenomena, disrelated from material things, as 
though matter really had no existence. 

The teaching of this class therefore, is as full of error, as 
inexplicable, and as incapable of demonstration as is that of 
the abject materialist. 

It would seem, without pausing to go into any analysis, that 
the truth is to be found somewhere between these antipodes; 
that the truth must lie in the golden mean, between the 
extreme material and the extreme psychic; in other words, 
that the truth must consist in the harmony of relation be- 
tween the Soul and the material. 

Now, in every form of Psychic inquiry, no matter what it may 
be, I declare to you; that it is the first duty of each individual 
that would make investigation, to begin with Mind, for you 
must understand that Mind is our only avenue to the Soul. 
It furnishes us the capacity by which we shall measure, weigh, 
and know all that is possible for us to know of the Soul. 
1[ Each student that would investigate Psychology must, 
first turn to an investigation of the machine that must 
produce Mind, through the medium of which all investigation 
must be made, for if one does not know the machine, he is not 
likely to have a well-defined knowledge of its function or 
action, and if he does not know its function or action, he will 
be incapable of telling whether or not it measures up to the 
standard that it should, and this, being translated, simply 
means that each human being should make a searching and 
earnest study of his brain — his nerve system — in order that 
he may come to know Mind — what it is — how it acts — and 
what are its limitations. 

It is only by a well-grounded knowledge of the brain, then 

107 



that one is in position to investigate Mind and through it, the 
Psychic realm that lies beyond. 

What has been the habit in this respect? The habit has been, 
that those who have made Psychic investigation have been 
those that know the least about the brain machine which by 
its function produces Mind. 

What has been the habit with respect to the investigation of 
the Psychic? This investigation has been attempted by those 
who had no knowledge of Mind, its production or operation. 
^ Is it strange then, that the world is rife with error upon 
these two important phases, when we consider the media 
through which it has received its information? 
A further investigation of this subject requires that we shall 
make inquiry as to what knowledge is. Having learned that 
Mind is but the junction of a physical machine ; the brain , and 
that in some marvelous way, or perhaps, to style it better, 
in some immaculate way, knowledge comes to us through it; 
the next logical step for us, is to inquire, what is know/edge? 
% I presume there is no question that could be put, that 
would be less likely to be answered than this one question — 
what is knowledge? I presume that of all the millions ot 
answers we might get to different questions, this question 
would draw from the human family a wider discrepancy of 
response, for I am quite sure that no two, at this time, have 
exactly the same conception as to what knowledge is. 
It is the general conception I believe, that it is possible to 
know to the infinitesimal detail, to the exclusion of the very 
last doubt — a given thing. I desire to say, that from such a 
standpoint there is absolutely no knowledge in this world $» 
We are living, relying upon transmission of truth to us. There- 
fore, that which we conceive to be knowledge, can rise no higher 
than our faith in the medium of transmission of intelligence 
to us; than our faith in what is transmitted to us. 
Therefore, in its simplest definition, knowledge consists, only 
in that which we conceive to be true. Knowledge consists in 
that which by the best exercise of our intelligence we believe 
to be true. 

As to knowledge, at the present time, with all the diversity 
108 



of opinion, with all the divergent thought, with all the 
expense of energy upon the subject that is taking place, there 
are but two general attitudes upon the subject; and therefore, 
for the purpose of our investigation, the whole matter is at 
once simple and plain. 

Upon the subject of knowledge people are divided into these 
two classes: First — those that are willing to receive and are 
waiting to receive truth from others; and Second — those that 
are looking for the transmission of truth from universal 
sources through the medium of intuition. 
In other words, the one class that rely upon dogmatic trans- 
mission; and the other class that wait for universal instruction. 
Of these two classes, the first, at this time, forms the vaster 
number because, as I told you, knowledge comes info cog- 
nizance primarily through the medium or avenue of imagina- 
tion; is clothed and surrounded with prejudice; because there 
has always been the inseparable desire of those that imagined 
and formulated theories, to reduce them to permanent record, 
and to have them transmitted to and believed by the genera- 
tions that follow. 

It was because of this, I told you, our libraries teem with a 
vast lore of theories — dogmas — imaginations, under which 
there is absolutely no support nor prop of truth, and yet 
those of the human family, that rely on information from 
others, are continually receiving this form of intelligence as 
truth, and continuing to perpetuate it, and so long as they 
thus rely on this kind of information, they will continue to 
perpetuate the theories and the lore of ages related only to 
darkness, error and superstition. 

It is a matter of regret that, to a large extent, we are all on 
the dogma side, because, from the cradle to the grave, we 
are all absolute believers in things that come to us through 
certain avenues; for unto those things we do not apply our 
analytical, comparative reason. 

The soft murmured stories of mother oyer the cradle left in 
your memory are evolved above the threshold of your con- 
sciousness again and again, and you do not attempt to wrest 
them from their place and destroy them if they are not true. 

109 



You rather relegate them to your emotional nature and cling 
to them as though they were sacred. It is quite immaterial 
how false they may be. 

Where is there a man so disciplined that he can wrest from his 
inner nature all of the sweet nothings that his mother told 
him, and cast them from him, because, forsooth, they are not 
true? Where is the individual that can rid himself of parental 
counsel, of parental teachings, of the stories and folk lore, the 
fairy stories, the sweet superstitions of childhood? All the 
impressions borne to his inner nature in his infancy through 
the avenue of fantasy and dreams? 

All those errors are existing in the warp and woof of our being 
as truth, and let me call it to your attention that these im- 
pressions, so long as they exist, will warp, injure, and control 
our reason, our analysis, our logic, and the truthfulness of our 
physically limited conclusions. 

When I make these statements it is with the lull memory and 
consciousness that to be relieved of all of those things, would 
be to lay away the major portion of that which we have held 
to be true, noble and sweet as appertaining to this life; and 
yet that does not lessen our profound duty in the emergency. 
The other reference is to all forms of religion. It is quite 
immaterial to what age, or clime, or people we apply the 
thought. It as readily applies to the savage, in his unwritten, 
traditional religion as to civilized man, for there the boy is 
dependent upon his father for information as to the Great 
Spirit, and as to all of the related propositions and tenets of 
religion s» s«* 

The boy only receives them; he does not attempt to analyze 
them; he does not attempt to ascertain their truth; he sits 
silently and passively receiving all that the father transmits 
to him as to the religion of the tribe; and then he, in his turn, 
at the proper time, transmits that religion to his posterity s+ 
So it is with all the Bibles that have ever come to us, from the 
most ancient, to our present time. 

You must understand that, in the study of that wonderful 
department of literature, the Bibles of all ages; the evidences 
that you are examining are but the efforts of those producing 
no 



that form of written and printed matter, to make it relate to 
and connect with Great Soul authority. 

That is all that Biblical evidence, regardless of the religion to 
which it is applied, amounts to in the final and last analysis so 
As to whether the one or the other is the proper method, I 
leave entirely to you. Yet, I cannot resist the importance of 
the necessity, in this connection of cautioning you that, to 
rely upon the transmission of any phase of information that 
has been announced as truth, through human agency is 
always accompanied with the most pronounced danger. If 
the longing for truth that wells up in a human being means 
anything to us, it means that we should pursue our investiga- 
tions until we arrive at that degree of development where 
we have power to connect with universal intelligence, and 
continually receive universal truth, unalloyed and undis- 
turbed, as it shall come to us. 

That brings us to that phase of receiving information, that 
we have called intuition; for you will understand that intui- 
tion is the one quality of Mind by which universal truth is 
connected with Mind attributes, reason, comparison, imagi- 
nation, analysis, and systematization. 

The quality that we refer to as intuition, when considered as a 
mind attribute, may be properly called deduction. Society at 
large is guilty of a very peculiar and remarkable error with 
respect to intuition or deduction. 

The reason for the error is that it has been announced, as 
it has been in these lectures, that intuition — deduction, is the 
direct acquisition of universal truth from the Soul, which is 
in touch at all times with the transmission of universal truth, 
and it is supposed that this quality of Mind is incapable of 
error so so 

In discussing this subject, you will have this question put to 
you: Well, if deduction is the mind phase of intuition, and 
intuitionis the immediate recognition of universal truth, then 
why is it not easy for us to be always possessed of universal 
truth? Why should it ever be possible for us to go astray? Why 
should it ever be possible for us to commit error? And why are 
we not always in possession of a knowledge of universal law? 

in 



^[ The answer to these questions is that we are only able to 
receive at one time a fragment of truth, and you must remem- 
ber that we are receiving that fragment of truth, through the 
attributes of the material — the Brain produced Mind, which 
is subject to all physical weaknesses. 

I desire you to get this thought fully — intuition-deduction 
and from the human standpoint they are the same — must be 
accomplished through Mind, and Mind is susceptible to all 
physical weaknesses, and can never be more accurate than the 
functions of the brain that produce it. With this under- 
standing, you will better comprehend the conclusions I am 
about, to reach. 

By physical weaknesses I mean improper construction of the 
human brain, which, as you know, is influenced by heredity; 
influenced by innumerable adverse human relationships, 
which I cannot pause to discuss at this time, to such extent 
that the brain so produced cannot function to produce 
normal Mind, and yet Mind is produced that has potential 
deduction, but which is obstructed — clouded — weakened, in 
transmission by the very relation of the elements through 
which it is produced; and you must remember that even the 
most powerful Mind is not capable of much deduction. 
All Minds are subject to disturbance by atmospheric condi- 
tions and by animalistic tendencies. By animalistic tendencies 
I simply refer to all of the things by which we are connected 
to physical existence, to wit: the necessity for food, air, sun- 
shine, exercise, all physical necessities to sustain animation 
are nothing but animalistic tendencies. These environmental 
conditions exercise an influence upon the attributes of Mind 
by changing the physiology of the brain, thus affecting the 
capacity for intuition — deduction. 

Then again — ordinary sensation — special sensation — tissue 
sense — books — pictures — etc., continually obtrude them- 
selves upon the deductive ability of Mind. 
If it were not for all of these we have a character of dis- 
turbance that is graver — the obtrusion of mental processes. 
\ You say you find it difficult to secure concentration, 
because, just as you are about to concentrate upon one thing, 
112 



in pops another. Do you understand what that means? Do 
you understand the significance of that? It means that there 
are concomitant mental processes that necessarily oppose 
each other. 

For example comparative analysis is an affirmative process, 
and is opposed to the passive process of deduction. 
Then there is the obtrusion of belief that is opposed to the 
truth to be intuitively received. Give this thought your best 
attention so so 

Just about the time you have reached the attitude in which it is 
possible for the Soul to give you, through the process oj deduction, 
a universal truth, you close the avenue, by an adverse faith, 
dogma, or belief, and the universal truth is held back and you 
may never receive it. 

Space will not permit me to go far into these details. I can 
only point out and indicate them to you, that you may follow 
the further consideration of them. I must leave it to the 
emergency of experience for you to make application of these 
principles and to apply this knowledge. 

Proceeding with the inquiry, when is it possible for a human 
being to exercise that wonderful quality of Mind called 
deduction? It is only when all obstructions are removed. 
When you consider this proposition from the aspect of 
removal of all obstructions, you can understand why the 
human family has grown in intelligence so slowly. 
Think just for a moment of your own experience. Can you 
remember a single moment in your life when intuition-deduc- 
tion, would have been possible for any considerable length of 
time? so so 

When have you been willing to receive truth that might 
annihilate the fondest hope for future experiences? When 
have you been willing to have transmitted to you a truth 
that would destroy every belief that you have held to that 
moment? so so 

I desire to say that I question whether you have lived one 
second in that attitude, and there are very few individuals 
that ever evolve to the place where they can look eternal 
destiny in the face and say truthfully: " / am ready to receive 

"3 



the truth, regardless of what effect it may hade upon me and 
miner so so 

However, that is the attitude for intuition, tor deduction, for 
transmission of immaculate truth. 

Because of these things, another grave error is indulged, by 
the people. It is thought that great preparation must be 
made to receive intelligence intuitively — deductively, but 
strange as it may seem, the simplest preparation is the most 
profound so so 

We see the most wonderful manifestations of intuition in the 
babe, but an hour old. It is prepared for intuition and is 
receiving intuitional influx of intelligence. 
It almost immediately knows that it must perpetuate its 
existence by respiration. It must perpetuate its existence by 
food. It must perpetuate its existence by muscular activity, 
and all of the other processes of life. This intelligence is given 
solely by intuition — the impression of universal truth. 
When you understand that, you will know what the meek and 
lowly Nazarene meant when he said: " Unless you become as 
little children." 

And I say to you, unless you become as a babe, you cannot 
be the recipient of intuitive information. For the time you 
must render your Mind completely blank. You must render your 
desires absolutely nil, it you would receive universal truth 
through the means of intuition-deduction. 
For further illustration, the phenomenal children that have 
been observed at different times, have come into existence 
peculiarly, for the purpose of emphasizing this wonderful 
fact so so 

You have known, or read accounts of children that at a very 
early age, have produced wonderful improvisations on the 
piano, violin, or in song, equalling the masters, but when they 
were educated mentally, they lost their musical superiority, 
because, forsooth, in acquisition of things mental, they lost 
the quality or power to listen to the " still small voice " of 
intuition so so 

The mathematical wonder, Zerah Colburn, a little child, at 
the age of eight or nine years, playing with his blocks and 
114 



toys upon the floor, could solve the most remarkable and 
intricate mathematical problems. As soon as the proposition 
was stated to him, he gave the answer, not waiting for mental 
calculation, but instantly the answer came, many times con- 
sisting of six, eight and ten figures. 

When they attempted to educate this child in mathematics 
and he learned to add, subtract, multiply and divide, he 
could no longer solve these wonderful problems, but was a 
mathematical nonentity. 

Thus, again was demonstrated to the world in a most remarkable 
manner the law of intuitional transmission of intelligence so 
The law of intuitional transmission is demonstrated to us in 
our everyday walk and conversation; in our everyday exper- 
iences, in the moment of emergency, when no mental or 
material aid is at hand or can be used; the wonders of 
intuitional transmission of intelligence in the matter of self- 
preservation is illustrated to us. I have experienced that 
several times, and I believe it to be a common experience of 
all. It undoubtedly has been so with you, if you have been 
observant of it. 

Now, if intuition can be thus obtruded upon, if it can be so 
easily occluded, if the loss, or even partial loss, of Mind pre- 
vents intuition, if intuitional transmission must be accom- 
plished through means that are so frail, what answer shall we 
give to the question — are intuitions always the truth? 
The answer is — yes, absolutely. But it must be remembered, 
with caution that the difficulty comes in separating that 
which is intuition from that which is not. 

Intuition is always truth; but the individual must be exceed- 
ingly careful to separate intuition from that which is not; but 
which may be influxed at the very same instant, and in that 
particular phase lies the danger of error. 
Errors in this respect have caused much sorrow and adversity 
to the human family; have held back mental evolution and 
Psychic development for centuries. 

This arouses another inquiry — is there a way that we may 
know intuition? Is there a way that we can know truth that 
is transmitted to us through the process of intuition? Again, 

"5 



I say to you, without any fear whatever — absolutely — yes «» 
Now, let me stop at this point and interpolate this thought. 
You understand, we have arrived at a place of investigation 
that requires the most profound, intense, careful analysis and 
discipline £•» s^ 

The novice could not tell the difference between intuitional 
intelligence and intelligence that is only reflected as memory 
from the Soul. 

It is for this reason that I made the statement, that prepara- 
tion — development — is essential. That is to say, a study of 
brain and a study of Mind is necessary, to prepare the indi- 
vidual to investigate at this stage. 

This is the test — anything that is transmitted to you, while 
you wait in the attitude to receive; in the attitude of the little 
child; the passive attitude, that produces the slightest doubt, 
the least disposition to inquire further, you may at once register 
as not being universal truth. 

On the other hand, while you thus wait in the passive con- 
dition ready to receive, and with no obstruction to the 
receipt of intelligence, that which comes to you and does not 
arouse in you any impulse to make further inquiry, you may 
register as being universal truth, or intuition. 
Now, laying all other things aside — is this knowledge ot any 
value to us, and first of all, when can we acquire this kind of 
information? Can we acquire it while we are involved in the 
daily walk and conversation? May we accomplish receipt of 
this kind of information while busy with practical things? 
I answer — yes, most assuredly. 

You must remember that in the eternity of Soul existence, 
an instant is as a million years, and a million years is as an 
instant. An influx of universal intelligence can come to you in a 
space of time so short that it would be impossible to measure it, 
and completely fill you from head to foot and surcharge yon with 
its value and power. 

It is possible for an individual to learn to be so synchronous, 
so continually a listener in passivity for the transmission of 
universal intelligence, and environmental intelligence, that 
both forms may be constantly coming to him, fillins, evolv- 
116 



ing, regenerating and bringing him nearer and nearer to 
universal harmony. 

We are limited in our acquisition of knowledge to intuition — 
deduction. There is no other, there has never been another, 
there never will be another channel through which we may 
receive universal intelligence. We must get universal truth, if 
at all, through intuition. 

And the statement last made does not negative any form of 
religion that exists in the world today. For if any Bible is 
truth, the substance of that truth was transmitted through 
the process of intuition. 

Intuition — deduction is the only way universal intelligence 
may be transmitted to us. // is the only way it has ever been 
transmitted, the only way it can ever be transmitted. 
These statements become perfectly clear, when we look the 
situation squarely in the face, for you will understand that 
all the religions of the world hold that they obtained their 
basic principles from the God of the Universe, called by what- 
ever name, which is, after all, nothing but the transmission 
from the Great Soul, of universal truth through the process of 
intuition to human beings. 

How does universal truth come to us? It comes through all 
of the multifold avenues of our being, that have been 
described in this course of lectures; that is to say, through 
tissue sense, common sensation, and special sensation. It 
also comes through our four other senses, and this is but the 
equivalent of saying that it comes through all media of sug- 
gestion so so 

And aside from these usual and, therefore, more common 
ways universal truth also comes through clairvoyance, which 
means clear-seeing — clair-audience, which means clear-hear- 
ing, or to use a term that combines all of these, clairsentience 
— telepathy so so 

It is perfectly clear that all universal truth that hu?nan beings 
have ever received has come to them through telepathy or Soul- 
communion; that is to say, by influx from the Great Soul 
through the medium of the Souls of individuals. 
Intelligence received in this way is sometimes referred to as 

117 



coming through an individual in a state of trance, in con- 
nection with which I desire to make myself clear. 
Trance is a form of hypnosis which may be self-induced, or 
induced by extraneous influences. The information received 
will, of course, be telepathic, for trance puts Mind in abey- 
ance, and leaves the channel of the Soul open. 
There is a way by which knowledge of events that have not 
yet taken place, it is said, may be known, through what is 
called premonition. 

As to this phenomenon, I desire to say, by way of explana- 
tion, that the transmission of intelligence of this character, 
by premonition is the most difficult for us to understand of 
any that has been referred to, or discussed. And this is true 
because we have been so definitely and carefully schooled to 
our material limitations. The impossibility of acquiring 
knowledge of events before they occur, through a means 
common to all, has always been carefully, and most impres- 
sively taught to us. 

However, if you believe that God is possessed of omniscience, 
omnipotence and omnipresence, and that your Soul possesses 
those powers potentially — you must also believe that God's 
knowledge is from the beginning; is comprehensive of everything 
and that your Soul, having these powers in potentiality; is 
possessed of the means of receiving all knowledge. 
Believing in the named God attributes, you must also believe that 
an event which has not yet taken place is as much a part of 
universal truth as though it had. And, therefore, under the very 
most favorable circumstances, you must admit that your Soul 
may receive from the Great Soul a fragment of such truth 
comprising one event that has not yet been enacted, and evolve 
it into your consciousness. 

You would not expect such an immaculate event to occur in 
every life, or to occur with any degree of frequency, but you 
would expect that, under the exactly proper circumstances, 
such transmission would occur. 

There is a caution that each should observe in the investiga- 
tion of these remarkable psychic things, and this should more 
especially be observed with regard to telepathy, trance and 
118 



premonition. /;/ order that phenomena can be accomplished by 
these means, the sentinel at the gateway of the Soul, must for 
the time be dismissed. 

To secure such transmission that wonderful guide and pro- 
tector in this physical realm; the reasoning, comparing, 
analyzing Mind, must be put to sleep. And it must be remem- 
bered to what awful dangers the individual is exposed while in 
such condition. 

In the first place, when Mind is in abeyance the individual is 
to a large extent, the plaything of those he loves and through 
their rapport and his willingness, they may sow seeds of 
adversity that will produce many fold. In such condition he 
may be the recipient of much information, which may be 
wrongly construed and impressed upon his Mind, either by 
those with whom he is in rapport, or by himself. 
There is also the general likelihood that an individual will 
not understand the truth received, for it must be remembered 
that it comes by influx and as an entirety and will have to be 
translated into language, a task of the greatest nicety, as any 
one may see, by an individual in the fullest possession of 
mental powers. 

From what has been said, it should be perfectly clear that 
human beings should not meddle idly with the Soul side of 
their being and should approach it, and the phenomena 
presented by it, with a sense of the sacredness of it and the 
importance of the task. 

The phenomena presented to us through these means must 
never be considered as being for our pleasure, but solely for 
our instruction, in order that we may have a means of knowing 
our relationship to the Great Soul, and therefore, should be 
esteemed by us as being holy and not to be approached, 
except in that spirit and attitude. 

When we have in the proper spirit obtained information, 
through any of these means, or universal intelligence through 
any means, we must remember that it is our first duty to use 
all of our Mind powers in a complete understanding of the 
information received. 

That is to say, we must bring to bear upon the information, 

119 



the powers of deduction, reason, analysis, comparison and 
systematization to the end that we may form a correct con- 
struction of what we have received, secure its correct impression, 
and application to the material environment in which we must 
use it. This phase of occupation is after all the fundamental 
basis of education. 

My friends, in closing, let me assure you that it is my hope 
that as you pursue this study: that as you seek to learn from 
the Soul, you will first come to a full recognition of the 
wonders and powers of Human Mind; that you will come to 
understand Mind, its exalted place — the sentinel of the Soul. 
^ I hope you will come to recognize that Mind is your first, 
nearest and best friend; for through it you must learn all that 
you will ever know in this life. 

And having realized these important things I trust you will 
devote sufficient study to the brain that must produce Mind, 
to comprehensively understand it and therefore, to better 
understand Mind. 

I caution you to keep Mind, that matchless guardian of 
yourself, the translator of Soul intelligence, the censor to 
yourSoul, in the highest esteem, always in its place, in order 
that you may accomplish the beautiful synchronous lite, 
matchlessly illustrated in the story of Jesus. 



1 20 



LECTURE NO. 7. 
June 19, 1913. 

Healers — Ancient and Modern 

MY FRIENDS: The subject for discussion this morn- 
ing is relative to those that I have taken up before; 
but it needs no recapitulation, because the reference 
is broadly to all that has been developed to the present time, 
^f The lecture this morning is historical; it is also scientific 
and analytical. 

A student of history is always struck with the fact that so- 
called healing is always a religion. 

It is quite immaterial how far back you go, indeed, if you go 
back to tradition, the healing-religion element is just as 
pronounced, just as marked, as it is in society today. 
We are prone to conceive the idea that as time passes we 
change remarkably; that old conditions are left entirely 
behind and that we assume new modes of life and relative 
intelligence so $&' 

I desire to call your attention to the fact, that the different 
periods ol history of which we have any accurate account, are 
only presentations of the Human family under different, but 
related, circumstances, that reveal to us and overwhelm us 
with proof that humanity has been much the same in all 
periods of the world. 

I have tried to show you, that the human family has been 
peculiarly a religious family. It has been interested, aroused, 
animated in its search, for that which was superior to it, 
by which it could account for its existence. 
Most of the time — most of the thought — most of the effort of 
the human family in all times and in all climes has been to 
trace its origin back and connect it with that conceived to 
be the God. 

121 



So, in taking up the subject of healers, all those things 
remain unchanged. We must expect to find the human family 
the same respecting this subject as we found it respecting 
other subjects. 

The subject of healing is one of the pronounced and prominent 
parts of the history of all peoples, ancient and modern. 
The phase of devising new rules, new forms and new methods 
are always a part of the history of healing, and when we 
scrutinize health history with earnestness and care, we find 
that healing has always been a religion. 

If you stop for a moment and only materialistically view the 
situation at the present time, you say that the last statement 
is not true. You say that you see no relationship ot a religious 
nature between medicine ot modern times and religion. 
Tl I declare to you that the system called " the science of 
medicine " is just as completely a religion as any other system 
of so-called healing. There is this difference, however, the 
votaries of this system do not know that it is a religion, while 
in others, and in some especially, they know the religious 
aspect and that alone, but do not know that there is con- 
nected with their religion of healing the same phase of 
material incidents that there are relative to medicine, and 
in some instances even more. 

If you will investigate history generally, you will be sur- 
prised to find that one of its most pronounced phases, is with 
relation to healing. 

You will find healing a prominent phase in the history of 
China, Japan, Egypt, Greece, Rome, etc. It will be found 
true of Greek mythology and Roman mythology. You will 
find the same to be true of all mythology and the history of 
all peoples. 

Again, when you turn your attention to the aborigines of any 
country, you will be surprised to find that healing is the most 
prominent thing in their citizenship; in the laws and customs 
of the tribe. 

It you will investigate the reports given by Livingstone and 
Stanley as to Darkest Africa and the people inhabiting it, 
you will learn that the most striking feature of their social 

122 



condition consists in their belief as to healing. Each tribe has 
its peculiar religion of healing. 

All healing systems are part of a religion. And all systems 
ascribe their power to heal to the God, whether they conceive 
it as the Great Spirit, the Divine Mind or any of the multi- 
tudinous names for the Deity. 

In the history of Old Mexico as given in " The Fair God " by 
Lew Wallace, you will be astonished by the remarkable 
religions revealed and the fact, that for health they sacrificed 
many persons and performed incantations and services of 
one kind and another to appease the anger of some god, for 
the purposes of bringing that god to look kindly upon the 
people of Mexico, restoring their health and strength. 
You will find that the aborigines of Ireland, Wales and Scot- 
land had a belief not particularly different from the American 
Indians. They believed in the Great Spirit; not in the God of 
civilization, but in the God of savagery. They believed in 
sprites and fairies, and that the air was peopled with such 
life, to many of which were ascribed the power of gods, to 
control the health and life of the people. 
Again, among the peoples that have lived in the more 
inaccessible portions of the earth; the plateau of Thibet; the 
fastnesses of the Orient generally, and indeed, the fastnesses 
of our own United States, you will find beliefs in tokens, 
signs and sayings that are as religiously superstitious, and 
to which their votaries look for healing as completely now, 
as in the most ancient days. 

We remember the various signs, tokens, soothsayings, medi- 
cine men, incantations, etc., that belonged to the religion of 
healing of our American Indians. Longfellow has made 
literature bright and beautiful with these old things; with 
these old signs, symbols and tokens, and I need not stop to 
expatiate upon them. 

It is sufficient to say in passing that they were all a part of 
the health-religion of those peoples, and the power to accom- 
plish the health results, that they did, was because they 
believed that by the means used they could invoke the favor- 
able action of the Great Spirit. 

123 



If an individual was sick, it was because the Great Spirit was 
displeased. Therefore, certain sacrifices, certain dances, 
certain song services, certain destruction of property, certain 
lacerations of the flesh, certain prostrations must be accom- 
plished to bring the Great Spirit out of His anger, so that He 
would again look with favor upon the individual and restore 
him to health. 

These customs persist among the Indians of our country to 
this time, and are still a part of their religion. One of the most 
difficult things in the civilizing of these people, has been to 
rid the Indian Mind of these old religious customs and faiths. 
% Likewise you will remember the stories of Hindu mothers, 
on the banks of the Ganges, throwing little innocent babes to 
the crocodiles to appease the wrath of an angry god and 
again bring themselves or their people into favor that they 
might have health and life and something upon which to 
subsist s«* $& 

This same phase appertains to the so-called civilized religions. 
You will find that healing is a part of Brahmanism; of 
Buddhism; of Confucianism, of Mohammedanism. I do not 
mean to stop by saying that it is a part of these religions. I 
mean to impress you with the fact that healing is a prominent 
part of all religions. 

The Christian religion, which is also Oriental, is not an 
exception. Healing, next to salvation, is its most prominent 
and important theme. It assumes to have presented to the 
world the greatest Healer it has ever known. 
I need not pursue this theme further than to call your atten- 
tion to the fact that the Christian Bible teaches, as parts of 
the system of healing, the laying on of hands, bathings, 
anointings with oil, soothsayings, casting out devils, etc. All 
of these are but different characters, methods and modes of 
restoring health, by appeasing the anger of God. 
Having advanced so far in our thought, we have undoubtedly 
realized as never before that healing has always been a 
religion. In other words, healing has never been divorced, in 
conception, from the power that may be caused to emanate 
from God. In some peculiar and indefinite way, there has 
124 



always been demonstrations of belief going on that healing is 
accomplished by securing favorable emanation from God. 
II The difficulty is that people have never understood what 
healing really is. They have failed to grasp the important 
tact, that instead of the word healing; instead of the thought 
of healing; instead of the thought of removing disease, they 
should think of unobstructed formation in which there is 
no need for healing. That is to say, as to a normally formed 
organism, living according to the laws of its being, healing is an 
impossible thought. This fact is entirely overlooked by people 
with regard to the subject of health. 

If, without this introduction, I had said, there is a similarity 
between the health religion of Mohammedanism and Chris- 
tianity; between the religions of the savages of Darkest 
Africa, and the Christian religion as respects the subject of 
health, you would have repudiated the statement and perhaps 
would have disparaged my intelligence. 

As I have developed the subject, I trust that you can see, 
that there is the closest similarity among all these; that as 
to their healing phases they all rest upon exactly the same 
foundation; and that as to their basis for healing there is no 
difference -ex* s«* 

In the religion of all times, peoples, races and climes, one 
thing always stands out predominant, and that is faith. It is 
quite immaterial whether you are a Mohammedan, a Chris- 
tian or a savage, you have faith in the religion of your people. 
You have faith in the tenets of your own religion. It makes no 
difference what they are, you believe in them respecting 
all subjects, including healing, and in as far as you believe the 
tenets of your religion, with regard to healing, you are 
precisely like the votary of any other religion, on the subject 
of healing. 

Let us consider another important fact that applies to all 
religions. It is quite immaterial whether there is any truth 
in the religion, or not, its healing phases are just as successful. 
\ Indeed, it is immaterial, and unimportant whether the relig- 
ion be true or not, if you have faith in it, believe its tenets, believe 
its teachings as to the healing of the sick, and with full faith act 

125 



upon them, you will derive the same benefits as though the 
religion were true. 

You think there is nothing in all the dances, fandangos and 
faith in the superiority of the medicine man of our American 
Indians. You are very positive about that. You are positive 
that there is absolutely nothing in their religion. You say 
it is founded upon imagination and tradition; that it possesses 
no authority except that it was handed down from father to 
son; that it does not rest upon a foundation of fact, and all 
your conclusions may be correct. 

However, if you will go among the Indians, and examine 
the evidence, you will find that the Medicine Man of each 
tribe has performed things for health that can be explained 
upon no other hypothesis than that of religious belief or that 
of miracle. 

The Medicine Man had only to make one of his peculiar 
incantations, songs, prayers; one of his endeavors of whatever 
character over the sick, and in many cases the sick were 
immediately well. Why? Was the Medicine Man a represent- 
ative of God? Not at all. W 7 as he even a representative of the 
Great Spirit of the Indian people? Not at all. Then what was 
the cause of the remarkable results? — The individual had 
absolute faith in the health religion of his tribe and, therefore, 
in the power of the Medicine Man to heal him. 
If you will investigate the records of Ancient Mexico, you will 
find proof of the most wonderful return of individuals to 
health under their religious rites, and still that religion has 
long ago passed away with the people that believed it. 
The religion of Ancient Mexico consisted in paganism; in 
idolatry. It set up gods, to which it gave names, and to 
which it referred certain powers; and for the pacification 
of which many human sacrifices were made, resulting many 
times in marvelous restorations of health. Why? Because the 
people of that country absolutely believed that the restorations 
would follow upon the sacrifice. 

A Hindu will sit for days gazing at one object, without moving 
a muscle of his body or blinking an eye, for the purpose of 
accomplishing ascendancy over his flesh; for the purpose of 
126 



acquiring mastery over his body, and driving out of it all 
that is obnoxious to health. He believes that he can do that, 
and to a great extent he does it. He becomes a master. He 
rises superior to his body. 

The Hindu lives for weeks and months without food. He per- 
forms feats that mayiy people would classify as miraculous, and 
he does it solely through faith that he can do it. 
We all know that the Christian Bible is full of the teachings 
of prayer, fasting, bathing, anointing with oil, and dipping in 
the Pool of Siloam, the river Jordan, etc., for healing. We now 
know that the river Jordan was about such a stream as the 
North Canadian; that there was nothing healing about its 
waters, but that faith in the promise caused health in the indi- 
viduals who obeyed the injunction and dipped in the river Jordan. 
\ You remember that certain persons were instructed that if 
they dipped three times in a certain manner in the Pool of 
Siloam, they would be cleansed and upon this dipping they 
were healed. 

It was not the Pool of Siloam itself that caused the healing, 
tor it still lies there in its rocky walls, its waters still bubble 
over the edge; but today, we do not imagine, there is any- 
thing curative in the waters of that pool. 
The results in Bible times were because the people of that time 
believed that if they obeyed the injunction, health would follow 
the obedience. 

Now there is one other very important fact that we must 
take into account at this particular juncture. Healing requires 
more than faith. // also requires works. 

The individual must not only have faith in the particular 
tenet of his religion, but he must walk, guided by that faith; 
must follow his faith with works that prove his faith. 
If the devotee adds to his faith works, then it makes no dif- 
ference whether the religion is savage or civilized, ancient or 
modern, false or true, the result is that he will attain, in some 
degree, that which he believed would follow; that which is 
promised to follow. 

What are our representatives today of ancient religions? 
Have we any representatives of the ancient religions that have 

127 



largely passed, with their votaries, in our modern civiliza- 
tion? I say, yes. We have Mohammedanism, Buddhism, Con- 
fucianism, Brahmanism, etc.; but I will not stop to discuss 
these so so 

The Christian religion has come down to us also; but let me 
interpolate at this point, that although its Bible contains some 
very valuable teachings on the subject of healing, yet there are very 
few professed Christians that pay any attention to them. 
The Christian Church, in all denominations, has left its Bible, 
regarding the subject of healing, and has gone off after false 
gods. It has taken up medicine, and ?nade of it a religion of 
healing so so 

The professed followers of the Christian Bible, today, do not 
rely upon its teachings for the recovery of their health in any 
respect, and especially with regard to healing. They have adopted 
instead the M. D. and his dope. 

Aside from those that I have named, as being representatives 
of ancient religions of healing, we have those that I shall dis- 
cuss for the purpose of showing their relation to each other, 
and their relation to the religion of healing that I have been 
developing in this lecture. 

I shall for this purpose confine myself to the period classified 
as modern times, and to subjects with which we are all 
familiar as being a part of the common discussion and folk- 
lore of our times. 

Mesmerism was founded in 1776. It was practised by Mesmer 
until his exile from France. It was then practised by Braid in 
Manchester, England, and generally, in a sporadic way by a 
great many, and it exists among us today in what is called 
psycho-therapy upon the one hand, and magnetic healing on 
the other. I shall have more to say as to psycho-therapy in 
the next lecture. 

Magnetic healing developed from Mesmerism. When Mesmer 
dropped the idea of the use of the magnets to induce sleep he 
evolved the theory of animal magnetism from observing the 
work of a Catholic priest. 

The priest secured mesmeric sleep by manipulation with his 
hands, and proclaimed that a fluid left his body and entered 
128 



the body of the patient. Mesmer adopted that doctrine and 
it has gone on getting a greater hold and broader construction 
until it has become what we call today magnetic healing, 
which is practised exactly as the Catholic priest practised it, 
except that the sleep is not produced. 

It is still believed that the magnetic healer casts from his 
body a magnetic force that enters the body of the individual 
and drives out ot him pain and sickness. 
It is a common belief among the followers of that system that 
magnetic healers have a peculiar way of driving the pain or 
sickness into some part of the body, and then rolling it up as 
though it were a ball, and lifting it out, and that sometimes 
the healer for the time being is compelled to take it into a 
part of his own body, and then cast it from himself. I do not 
know where they think it goes. We can only conjecture s* 
Spiritualistic healing came into existence in about the year 
1850. It consists in the belief that the healer is in immediate 
rapport with the discarnate soul of some individual that 
understood healing while in this life, and because of the 
ability to go about more rapidly on the spirit plane, can 
furnish better and more comprehensive facts as to the sub- 
ject of disease, and as to the methods to be employed for its 
removal than is known on this plane of existence. 
Spiritualistic healers adopt all kinds of fantastic methods 
which, they say, they receive from spirit communications, 
and we are not privileged to deny what they say. Many of 
them use methods of ancient times, that would not be 
recommended by our common sense at this time. Yet, there 
is that same peculiar religious belief, and the same definite and 
marked results following the efforts of those individuals in many 
instances. I cannot pause to give you, in detail, all that might 
be said upon this subject. I can only give you something of 
its scope s«* $* 

This brings us to the subject of so-called divine healers. They 
imagine that they can heal the sick by the laying on of 
hands, by affirmations of health, etc., and the individuals to 
whom they have applied these methods; the individuals upon 
whom they have laid their hands, that have had faith and have 

129 



done what the divine healer told them to do, have, in many 
instances returned to health, and many remarkable cures are 
claimed as following in the train of such services. 
Mental science is substantially the same thing, and consists 
in holding the mental attitude of health, in opposition to the 
attitude of sickness or disease. Individuals that believe this 
kind of treatment cures, achieve many wonderful results. 
Now all of these methods or systems are based on the same 
thing. Each and all of them, as you can plainly see, are based 
upon the proposition of faith, willingness to do what is neces- 
sary, and then by works, doing that which is required. 
The last of these that I desire to take up is that most peculiar 
and remarkable association of individuals of our modern 
times that has existed since 1876, called Christian Scientists. 
\ The most remarkable thing about Christian Science is, that 
there is absolutely no science about it. Also that there is no 
truth about it, and yet today, it has the largest number of 
followers, in proportion to the time it has existed, of any 
religious body that ever came into existence. 
I think I could not deliver a more complete indictment of the 
human family, if I should try for forty years, than that which 
I have just pronounced in your presence. Now I am going to 
show you that what I say is absolutely true, tested by the 
evidence of environmental demonstration. 
Before introducing this proof, I desire again to call your 
attention to the fact that we must stand by Mind, the function 
of the human brain, because it is the beginning of the channel 
through, and by means of which, we may know anything. With- 
out our poor, frail human Mind we would not even know of this 
existence. Let us remember that. 

Christian Science was founded in about 1876 by a woman 
that had possessed very many different names, but who was 
known quite generally over the world, before her death, as 
Mary Baker Eddy. 

I do not know that it is against any individual that he, or she, 
has had many life partners, as did this woman; but in passing, 
I would suggest that the multiplicity of partners does not 
tend to strengthen our faith in her supposed belief in the non- 
130 



existence of matter, but rather tends to show, that she took 
a pretty keen interest in the genus homo maleo. 
There is a great deal of cloud, mist and darkness covering the 
period of her acquisition of the so-called knowledge that forms 
the basis of this religion. Indeed, it is gravely questioned 
whether she herself got the information. It is absolutely 
proven that it did not originate with her; that what she said 
and how she said it was borrowed from others. However, this 
much must be said for her; she directed how it should be put 
together s«* s» 

I take off my hat in willing admiration of Mary Baker Eddy 
when I say this: that for sheer, abject, consummate, scintillating 
deception, she stands today above all of the people that have ever 
lived on this earth. She has directed the production of a book 
that contains more untruth, that the ordinary mind is incapable 
o f isolating and discovering, than can be found in any other 
literature that has ever been produced. 

I defy any human being to read one paragraph from the book 
ascribed to Mary Baker Eddy, " Science and Health, With 
Key to the Scriptures," and find in it either truth or falsehood 
separately stated. 

I will show you that this book, from beginning to end, con- 
tains the most consummate falsehood. I will also show you 
that each falsehood is inseparably connected with an undeni- 
able truth, and that the true and the false are so intricately and 
delicately interwoven that it is absolutely impossible for the 
unprepared mind to separate the one from the other. 
This book has gone out to the world and has chained in dark- 
ness and ignorance a larger number of people than any other 
one secular book has ever done, and those people must live 
in that error until they evolve to such mental ability that 
they can winnow the truth from the error of this book and come 
to understand its falseness. 

The way to test the value of anything is to investigate its 
basic principles. 

If you wish to find out whether some one is lying to you, you 
institute a careful cross-examination. And why do you insist 
upon cross-examination? You do that for the purpose of 

131 



resolving what has been said to sec if it rests upon the truth. 
^ It is perfectly clear that if the basic principles contained in 
Mary Baker Eddy's book are not true; are not believable; are not 
reconcilable , then all that she predicates upon them must be just 
as untrue. 

Fellow students, if I should announce, the basic principle of 
Chiropractic, and you should, by analysis, find, that it was 
absolutely untrue; that it was absolutely unbelievable; that 
it could not be demonstrated, you would say to me — Chiro- 
practic is a lie. 

If I should assert anything to you, it makes no difference 
what, and you should ask me for the basic principle upon 
which my assertion rests, and I should tell you; and, it, after 
analysis you should find, that the basic principle was abso- 
lutely untrue, then it would make no difference how profound 
or logical my conclusions, thus based might have been, you 
would declare each one of them to be false, because the basic 
principle was false. In that you would be right. 
Now just by way of test, we will examine " Science and 
Health, With Key to the Scriptures," in detail. By cross- 
examination we will investigate the basic principles of 
Christian Science. 

I desire to read from " Science and Health, With Key to the 
Scriptures," and in the beginning I desire to call your 
attention to this very subtle title — ■" Science and Health, 
With Key to the Scriptures." There is not a human being 
living, who can take this key and unlock a single statement in 
the Scriptures. \\ read from page 113: " The fundamental 
propositions of divine metaphysics are summarized in the four 
following, to me, self evident propositions." 
W 7 hat does that mean to you? It means the same as if I were 
to say to you that Chiropractic rests upon one fundamental 
biologic principle, " that radiation of nerve stimulus through 
organized channels causes all animation." 
This one statement of the four fundamental propositions is 
the absolute, ultimate of Christian Science. Mrs. Eddy says, 
that the whole superstructure rests upon them, and that they are, 
to her, self evident. 
132 



" Even if reversed, these propositions will be found to agree 
in statement and proof, showing mathematically their exact 
relation to Truth." That is to say, if you read the four state- 
ments the other way, they become mathematics and prove 
their relation to truth. Do they? 

" De Quincey says mathematics has not a foot to stand upon 
which is not purely metaphysical." Everybody knows that 
fact, but notice how subtly she interweaves other things that 
are true, as though De Quincey had said that these four 
propositions are not only mathematical \ but that they are 
true. De Quincey never heard of such propositions in his life. 
1[ Here are the four fundamentals of Christian Science: 
(i) " God is All-in-All." 

(2) " God is good. Good is Mind." 

(3) " God, Spirit, being all, nothing is matter." 

(4) " Life, God, Omnipotent Good, deny death, evil, sin, dis- 
ease — Disease, sin, evil, death, deny Good, Omnipotent God, 
Life." 

The trouble begins with the second part of 2. If " Good is 
Mind," and God is good, what does God think about: How 
does God think? Is it possible that God should be, or have 
Mind? God is Soul; God is omnipotence; God is omniscience 
and hence, it is impossible that God has or is a Mind. God is 
father of Minds. God is the builder of brains in which by 
functional operations Minds are produced, but God is not 
Mind. Mind is a means to knowledge: God is all knowledge. 
11 (3) " God, Spirit, being all, nothing is matter." Where does 
she get that word spirit from? The first proposition states 
that " God is All-in- All." If God is All-in-All — there is no 
Spirit so so 

" God, Spirit, Mind," and as many other things as you want 
may be thrown in and stirred around so that they can come in 
later, just at the proper time. In fact, the author's method is 
to throw in all the junk you want, on the ground that it may 
come in handy somewhere. 

" God, Spirit, being all, nothing is matter." If God is all, of 
course there can be no matter, unless some of God is matter, 
and some of God may as easily be matter as spirit, may He 

133 



not? *[f Of course, if "God is Good and Good is Mind," and to 
reverse it, " Mind is Good, Good is God; and God is All-in- 
All, " then matter does not exist, but where does Mind come in ? 
Why should there be Mind any more than matter? Notice 
the subtle reference, and bear in Mind that " God is All-in- 
All, " and that human beings have, neither Mind nor body, 
unless they are God. That is what Mary says; but you know, 
I feel a sly doubt creeping in. 

(4) "Life, God, Omnipotent Good, Deny Death, Evil, Sin, Dis- 
ease. — Disease, Sin, Evil, Death, Deny Good, Omnipotent God, 
Life." I submit to you that Mary Baker Eddy did not know 
what she meant by this fourth proposition any more than 
I do. This is an example of her junk stirring, to have anything 
she wanted, bob up at the right place and time. 
There is one remarkable thing about these four propositions. 
You never saw a Christian Scientist in your lite that would 
argue to sustain them. They will not discuss them at all, and 
really I cannot blame them. If my religion had such a flimsy 
basis, I too, would keep still about it. 

If you press them for discussion they will tell you, you have 
not the power; that you have not arrived at the refinement; that 
you are under the influence of mortal mind. Seeming to forget 
for the nonce that they are talking to you and avoiding dis- 
cussion by use of Mortal Mind. Christian Scientists seem to 
forget, when pressed for discussion that they see " through a 
glass darkly " and still they say you have not arrived. You 
are riding a freight, so to speak. You have not arrived. You 
are on a cold bumper; are out of the fold, in other words, and 
until you have arrived at the refinement you must not talk. 
I submit that after one has arrived, there is no occasion to 
talk. It is during the journey that one wishes to talk. It makes 
no difference by what route you come, it is along the journey 
that you would like to discuss these very disconcerting things. 
\ A Christian Scientist will not discuss these propositions 
with you. He will tell you to come to their reading circle, but 
not to talk — just to, go into the silence — let the shadows tall 
upon you — be rejuvenated — be happy — forget disease — -con- 
sider yourself nothing — become a naught — become a cipher 
134 



to fill a " vacant order " — loosen up — cut your suspenders 
and ascend into the glories of nothingness. 
Now let us take proposition 4, and examine our animal 
existence with its propositions in Mind. Let us investigate it, 
if you please, as we investigate any other subject that comes 
before us. Let us not become frightened. Let us not think 
that we are entering into the shady zone of unreality. 
In this examination let us throw back our shoulders and poise 
our heads, remembering that coursing through this clay there 
is Soul energy, that has given us Mind, with which to investigate 
phenomena about us. Let us, in all the pride and vigor that 
comes through our Soul, from God, investigate what this woman 
has published. 

I have stood by and observed Christian Scientists, in silence, 
now for many years. I have known them intimately. I have 
transacted business with them. I have doctored them. I have 
been on boards of which they were members. I have been in 
business relationship with them. I have met them in all rela- 
tionships of life. I have fought their battles in legislatures and 
paid the bills myself, because they professed to believe in 
non-resistance so $+ 

I have stood and held my arm over Christian Scientists, 
metaphorically speaking, that they might not get hurt, 
because while they " had a claim " that they did not exist 
and would not get hurt, I knew they did, notwithstanding 
the " claim," and were in danger. For this I received their 
thanks, but no other form of compensation, for they do not 
believe in wasting money, even though " nothing is Matter " 
and in such a case they take the benefit of the doubt. 
Incidentally, I have noticed that Christian Scientists are 
very industrious in one particular, and that is in their animal- 
istic tendencies. I notice that they are very active in bringing 
into existence, " nothing is matter " that they name Bobby, 
Tommy, Willie, Sallie, Mary, etc., just as other humans do. 
Somehow this makes me think that they believe that" some- 
thing is matter," or that something is the matter, or they 
would not do it. 

The Christian Science mother looks into the eyes of her 

US 



child with the same loving devotion that any mother would 
look. The Christian Science father dotes upon his children 
and educates and cares for them as well usually as other 
fathers care for their children. 

/ say to you that it is what you do, under intuitive knowledge, 
under divine instruction, not what you say with your lips, that 
proves what you believe. 

Christian Scientists have societies for discussion of dietetics, 
exercise, culture, refinement, education, art, music and 
science. Do people attempt to acquire what does not exist? 
Do they attempt to store what they know does not exist? 
Will they attempt to put something that is n't, into a place that 
" ain't? " so s» 

Imagine a person trying to educate a Mind that does not 
exist. Imagine him trying to store a memory that never 
existed. Oh, what rotten bosh! I agree with the sentiment — 
" Oh, consistency thou art a jewel! " 

Christian Scientists, in an emergency, have an obstetrician, 
at their homes when the " stork comes," bringing a baby. 
Is n't it strange that the coming of " nothing " must be 
attended with such tremendous care? Is n't it remarkable that 
matter and the laws controlling it, takes such a hold upon those 
that do not exist? And to whom " nothing is matter." 
Occasionally Christian Scientists take a little " dope " on 
the side. Oh, just some salts, you know, just some apples to 
move the bowels; just a little something, you know, to help 
the old machine along; the old machine that has " no exist- 
ence but an erroneous thought oj Mortal Mind." 
Then, sometimes, Christian Scientists slip in at the back 
stairway, down the alley, or through the lane to their Chiro- 
practic friend. He does not know they do not exist, and he 
says: " Would you like an examination and diagnosis? " And 
they reply, " Oh, no, there is nothing the matter with me. 
I only want some exercises." Then the Chiropractor knows 
that he has a fellow that " ain't " so he puts nothing 
down upon the adjusting table and proceeds to exercise what 
could n't was, and gives to what " is n't " such an adjusting 
that " nothing " will be matter, and know it for many days. 
136 



Indeed, under such circumstances, I have brought tremendous 
groans and grunts out of nowhere. 

Now, my friends, I submit, it I were going to write a book, 
especially if I were going to found a religion upon it, I would 
not, announce the basic principle on one page and on another 
page contradict it. 

I have not the time to give you all the contradictions that 
occur in " Science and Health, With Key to the Scriptures." 
I can find more than one thousand contradictions of the basic 
principle of Christian Science in this book, stated by the 
author herself, over her own signature. I am only going to give 
you a tew. 

I now read from page one hundred and three, a portion of the 
book preceding the basic principles, yet you will admit, I 
believe, that all the statements in a work of this kind should 
conform to the basic principles, no matter whether stated 
before or after them. 

' The destruction of the claims of mortal Mind through 
Science, by which man can escape from sin and mortality, 
blesses the whole human tamily. As in the beginning, however, 
this liberation does not scientifically show itself in a knowl- 
edge of both good and evil, for the latter is unreal." 
That is, evil is unreal. If it were unreal, she should not be 
talking about it, should she? Why is she talking about some- 
thing that does not exist? How does she know it ever existed? 
How does she come to be in possession of the fact of its 
existence? Do you know of anything that ever existed that 
is unreal? Could you talk about the existence of some- 
thing that never existed? You could not. Neither could 
Mary Baker Eddy. She was just an ordinary " clodhopper," 
like the rest of us, born and reared in New Hampshire, as 
I understand. 

" On the other hand, Mind-Science is wholly separate from 
any halt-way impertinent knowledge, because Mind-Science 
is of God and demonstrates the Divine Principle, working out 
the purposes of good only. The maximum of good is the infi- 
nite God and His Idea, the All-in-All. Evil is a suppositional 
lie." so* £©► 

137 



Because Mind-Science is of God." This statement seems to 
indicate that there is science that is not of God? What is 
science? // is systematized truth. Is not all truth of God? 
" Evil is a suppositional lie." Well, it must exist, or it could 
not be even a " suppositional lie." There would have to be 
something to it. All existence is truth, therefore, either evil 
never existed or else it is truth and not even a " suppositional 
lie." And if evil does not exist, why talk about it? 
"As named in Christian Science, animal magnetism or hypno- 
tism is the specific term for error, or Mortal Mind. It is the 
false belief that Mind is in matter, and is both evil and good; 
that evil is as real as good and more powerful." 
Now notice — she says, hypnotism is the false belief that 
Mind is in matter. Now, if, "God is All " and "All is God " and 
" nothing is matter " — how can she say, " it (hypnotism) is 
the false belief that Mind is in matter? " Does she not thereby 
admit that matter exists? She is talking about " Mind " being 
in matter." 

If " matter does not exist, Mind could not be in it, and if 
matter does not exist, it never did and she could not be talking 
about anything being either in it or out of it. 
" That Mind is in matter, and is both evil and good; that evil 
is as real, as good and more powerful. This belief has not one 
quality of Truth. It is either ignorant or malicious." Accord- 
ing to Mrs. Eddy then, ignorance and maliciousness both 
exist, and if they exist they are a part of truth, and it " God 
is All-in-All," then they are a part of God. By her own state- 
ment she makes them so. 

" The malicious form of hypnotism ultimates in moral 
idiocy." That is just a plain statement, without any proof of 
any kind anywhere, and without any reference to proof. 
Still it admits the existence of " idiocy " which is a matter- 
defect s* St 

" The truths of Immortal Mind (an impossible conception) 
sustain man, and they annihilate the fables of mortal Mind, 
whose flimsy and gaudy pretensions, like silly moths, singe 
their own wings and fall into dust." This statement admits 
the existence of brain to produce mortal Mind,jand such 
138 



common forms of matter as moths, wings and dust. 
In reality there is no Mortal Mind." She has just finished 
talking of "the fables of Mortal Mind " and now says it really 
does not exist. If it did not she could not talk about it. 
She says that " in reality there is no Mortal Mind." If that is 
true, then there are no "fables " of mortal Mind to have 
"flimsy and gaudy pretensions" for unless there is mortal 
Mind, there could be no "fables " of mortal Mind. 
" In reality there is no Mortal Mind, and consequently no 
transference of mortal thought and will-power." Of course 
not. If there is no Mortal Mind, then there is no mortal 
thought or will-power, and, there could be no transference of 
what does not exist; but she speaks of mortal thought and will- 
power, and therefore must have believed in their existence $t> 
On page 104: " Life and being are of God. In Christian 
Science, man can do no harm, for scientific thoughts are true 
thoughts, passing from God to man." A part of that sounds 
true. Of course, all intelligence passes from God to man, 
through the medium of the Soul, but not in thought. Our 
power to think, emanates from God; but it must be remem- 
bered that thought is and that all that is, is truth, even though, 
because of our limitations, it does not seem so. 
" When Christian Science, and animal magnetism are both 
comprehended, as they will be at no distant date, it will be 
seen why the author of this book has been so unjustly per- 
secuted and belied by wolves in sheep's clothing." Here we 
have animal magnetism which is a matter-emanation and 
wolves in sheep's clothing, two other phases of matter, existing 
outside of God, by the author's statement, that God is All-in- 
All $* $& 

" Agassiz, the celebrated naturalist and author, has wisely 
said: • Every great scientific truth goes through three stages. 
First, people say it conflicts with the Bible. Next, they say 
it has been discovered before. Lastly, they say they have 
always believed it.' " She speaks here of the Bible. If " God 
is All-in-All " and "All is God," then there is no Bible, for 
it is admitted that the Bible was written by man, by the power 
of Mind, and if mortal Mind is an erroneous thought, there 

139 



was no result, and there is no Bible. It is a "fable of mortal 
Mind " that has " no real existence." 

Bibles are printed on paper and other material. If there is no 
matter, then there is no Bible. When you think you pick up a 
Bible you just pick from vacuity an imagination made of 
nothing. It is not there. It is an " erroneous thought " of 
" mortal Mind" that " in reality has no existence." 
Again, on page 149: " Mind as far outweighs drugs (matter) 
in the cure of disease as in the cure of sin." Well, it seems 
from that statement that sin must have existed somewhere 
and I should think that if it did, it was the result of the 
wrongful conduct of " matter " things. 

" The more excellent way is Divine Science in every case. 
Is materia medica a science or a bundle of speculative human 
theories? " According to that, materia medica exists, no matter 
what it is, and " materia," means matter. 
" The prescription which succeeds in one instance fails in 
another, and this is owing to the different mental states of 
the patient." Mary Baker Eddy should have stopped at this 
juncture and told us how that prescription succeeded, even 
though it never succeeded but once. For if it succeeded, it 
did so because of its existence and conformity with law, and as 
a scientific step, she should have told us, but she did not. 
She could not, and maintain her cult. 

" The prescription which succeeds in one instance fails in 
another, and this is owing to the different mental states of 
the patient." It is quite immaterial about the mental state 
of the patient, if the prescription succeeds, for it must have 
existed to have done so. 

If the patient had a mental state, and " God is All and All is 
Mind," where did he get it? If the patient had a mental state, 
he must have had a Mind, and if so, he must either be God or 
else there is Mind aside from God. 

A little way back the " key " says " there is no Mortal 
Mind," and consequently " no transference of mortal 
thought." If there is no Mortal Mind, there could be no 
mental state, then how can she ascribe the effect of a prescrip- 
tion to a particular mental state? 
140 



" These (mental) states are not comprehended, and they are 
left without explanation except in Christian Science. The 
rule and its perfection of operation never vary in Science. 
If you fail to succeed in any case, it is because you have not 
demonstrated the life of Christ, Truth, more in your own life 
— because you have not obeyed the rule and proved the 
Principle of Divine Science." Yes, but what of the " mental 
state? " It seems to me that must be largely controlled by 
matter &— s& 

"A physician of the old school remarked with great gravity: 
' We know that Mind affects the Body somewhat, and advise 
our patients to be hopeful and cheerful and to take as little 
medicine as possible; but Mind can never cure organic 
difficulties.' The logic is lame and facts contradict it. The 
author has cured what is termed organic disease as readily 
as she has cured purely functional disease, and with no power 
but the Divine Mind." I must say for that medical brother, 
that he was a " cracker-jack." 

His advice was good for any one. Now, let us see, in the last 
statement she admits, there was a matter physician, 
that had a mind, and had announced that patients had existed 
somewhere and they had Minds, and that he had advised 
them to be cheerful. This statement is an admission that they 
could be cheerful, and that is an existence; and so on through 
all of the material relationship she continues to make such 
statements and admissions, but at the end she knocks the 
whole thing in the head and denies all that she has stated 
and admitted. 

But mind can never cure organic difficulties.' The logic is 
lame, and facts contradict it. The author has cured what is 
termed organic disease as readily as she has cured purely 
functional disease, and with no power but the Divine Mind." 
That leads to this question: Was the author a divine Mind? 
That is what she says in this statement. I do not know 
whether that is what she meant or not. I am not in telepathic 
rapport with her at this time and am not in position to advise. 
\ She says in the last quotation that she has cured what is 
termed organic disease as readily as she has cured purely 

141 



functional disease, and with no power but Divine Mind. That 
either means that she had a divine Mind when she was doing 
the " curing " or else it means that in some way she directed 
divine Mind and had it do it. 

If Mrs. Eddy could direct divine Mind and have it cure 
organic disease, she must have been superior to divine Mind, 
for I submit that it takes a stronger power than divine Mind 
to control and direct it, and have it do such a thing as cure 
disease &** $+ 

What do you think of her assumption, when she says, " I 
cured," — "The author has cured? "—That statement shows 
that she was possessed of the same animalistic tendencies y the 
same human selfishness, the same desire for aggrandizement 
that marks the existence of any human being. What lack of 
information Mrs. Eddy shows when she says she has cured 
organic disease as readily as purely functional disease; as if 
such a thing as purely functional disease were possible. 
This shows her to have been possessed of the same limited 
Mind that we all have, and shows that anything that she ever 
succeeded in doing was done because of that wonderful power 
that radiated through her material body, giving her animation so 
Again, on page 152: "Anatomy describes muscular action as 
produced by Mind in one instance and not in another. Such 
errors beset every material theory, in which one statement 
contradicts another over and over again." It is absolutely 
impossible to find in any anatomy, a statement of that kind 
relative to the control of the muscles. 

No " Scientist " has ever found such a statement in anatomy. 
You will find statements that may be construed that way in 
therapeutic physiologies, but with the many egregious errors 
of " standard " text books on anatomy, they make no such 
statement as that. 

" It is related that Sir Humphry Davy once apparently cured 
a case of paralysis by introducing a thermometer into the 
patient's mouth. This he did merely to ascertain the tempera- 
ture of the patient's body; but the sick man supposed this 
ceremony was intended to heal him, and he recovered accord- 
ingly." Doubtless when Sir Humphry Davy pushed that 
142 



patient's head back to insert the thermometer, he accidently 
adjusted some cervical vertebrae that were occluding nerves, 
and thereby relieved the paralysis. 

' The author's medical researches and experiments had pre- 
pared her thought for the metaphysics of Christian Science. 
Every material (note the admission) dependence had failed 
her in her search for truth; and she can now understand why, 
and she can see the means by which mortals are divinely 
driven to a spiritual source for health and happiness." All of 
us know that material dependence would fail us in a search for 
truth. We all know that we have to take hold of this power 
that is being transmitted to us from the Soul in order that 
we shall acquire truth, and that we take hold of it through 
this same Mortal Mind, that she says does not exist; that 
same Mortal Mind that she says is an " erroneous thought," 
the same Mortal Mind that must reach out and advise us of 
all that we know, and outside of which there is absolutely 
nothing that we can know. 

Now it would seem very strange to me that an individual 
should spend the length of time, the amount of thought, the 
tremendous effort that this woman spent in the preparation 
of this " Key," and then permit it to go to the world such a 
consummate ambassador of ignorance and misrepresentation. 
H In this connection it must be remembered that by this book 
this woman raised herself from the very depths of poverty to 
the very pinnacle of wealth and position. You must remember 
that this woman, through the influence of this book, filled her 
coffers with hundreds of thousands of dollars. You must 
admit that this woman by the use of this book came to be 
known in every country of the civilized world. You must 
•know that this woman, through this book, produced such an 
influence as to have her book translated into substantially 
every civilized tongue, and to have had it distributed widely 
over the earth much like the Christian Bible. 
You can understand that there was a most definite and con- 
summately selfish reason for the writing of this book; an 
ambition as selfish and strong as ever animated any individual 
in life, and in these things you will find the explanation for 

H3 



this conglomeration of error and contradiction. It rises no 
higher than that and I can give it no higher place. 
In closing my remarks in regard to this phase of the subject 
I desire to say that I defy any Human being to find one para- 
graph in " Science and Health, With Key to the Scriptures " 
that is all truths or to find one paragraph in it that is all 
untrue. I defy any Human being to find five Human beings, 
who WAX fairly investigate it, that will agree as to what is said 
in any one paragraph, or to find one paragraph that does not, 
either contain contradictions or else contradicts some other 
paragraph; permitting me to cross-examine. 
Now, for the lesson. Laying aside all momentary contentions, 
we find, that all of these religions of healing, in ancient and 
modern times, have been efficacious, not even excluding medi- 
cine, the proud boast of which is, that it is not a religion s+ 
Each system of healing has required for its efficacy, a belief, 
on the part of the individual, in a higher power than himself; 
not necessarily a belief in God, as we accept that term, but 
nevertheless, a belief in power not possessed by himself, if it 
was not more than a belief in his doctor, or in the curative 
powers of a drug. 

So we find that faith on the part of the subject is absolutely 
essential to all healers, whether ancient or modern. All of 
them, in order that they shall succeed, require that the indi- 
vidual shall have faith; that he shall believe in his Mind; in 
his Body in all of its parts; Christian Science, as well as the rest. 
If The very highest development that any Christian Scientist 
acquires, or can ever acquire is absolute/*?///; in his own being. 
\ In passing I must say for Christian Science, that it has 
filled a niche in evolution, superior to that of any other error 
that has ever been taught; because it has unshackled the- 
Minds of Human beings from dogma and written record, and 
has turned attention to an investigation of Mind; the human 
attributes, and to tracing them through the Soul, to the God of 
the Universe. 

Each system of healing requires works; requires not only 
faith, but works; a doing that which is believed, in order that 
what is desired may be accomplished. 
144 



Now, my friends, think with me for just a moment in passiv- 
ity at the close. Let your Minds go back through the entire 
course of lectures. Draw to yourselves for a moment the 
thoughts that have been expressed. Conceive what has been 
declared to be Psychology, the Science of the Soul. Again, 
think of your Mind. Think of that channel; Mind — Soul — • 
Great Soul. Think where we begin functioning. 
Think whence we immediately receive power to function. 
Think whence that power is immediately derived. 
Remember that we begin accumulating intelligence in the 
Mind, from Soul relationship — then Great Soul relationship. 
Understand that all there is of a human being came through 
this channel, x^nd you will see, that all these different religions 
of healing, simply tend to one great, common center, and are 
all comprehended in what we call Modern Psychology $* 



H5 



LECTURE NO. 8. 
June 20, 1913 

Psychology and Health 

MY FRIENDS: We have come to the most important 
lesson of the entire series. 

We are peculiarly interested, usually in the discus- 
sion of what we have been led to believe is mysterious, and 
interest is likely to flag when we come to the application of 
what has been considered mysterious to what is- considered 
commonplace «•» $& 

You will notice that our audience this morning is not quite 
so large, and the reason for that is, we have finished, the 
analysis of all that was supposed to be mysterious; and it 
was generally known that this lecture would deal with the 
application of the truths we have brought forward, to the 
human body, a subject incorrectly thought to be very dull 
and uninteresting. 

It would be of little avail, indeed, to know all that we have 
reviewed if, at the end we should stop without making 
application of it to our use and benefit. 

The lessons so far have developed, that it is possible for us 
to know the source of health and strength. They have also 
developed that we may know how to apply that knowledge. 
As to these propositions, let me 

RECAPITULATE 
We have learned that the Great Soul is the reservoir of all 
intelligence and power. 

We have learned that the Soul of man is the specific and 
immediate reservoir of intelligence and power to us. 
We have also learned that the radiation of that intelligent 
power from that immediate reservoir, the Soul, to our bodies, 
through the medium of brain and nerves, properly referred 
146 



to as the nerve system, and scientifically designated, organ- 
ized channels, causes all animation, incorrectly conceived to 
be life, a word, which considered in its proper significance 
and relationship means health, for without the thought of 
health we cannot get a full conception of life. 
We have learned that the condition of each cell of the body, 
so long as the nerves related to it are sufficiently unobstructed, 
is continually being conveyed to the Soul. 
We have learned that all experiences of tissue elements, 
or cells, are immediately impressed to the Soul side 
exactly as they occur; and all such information, that goes 
with the command that it shall be, is evolved into conscious- 
ness as soon as possible. 

We have learned that all other information respecting the 
body, as to its condition and relationship, that is not com- 
manded or requested to evolve, is retained by the Soul, 
except that which is necessary for immediate and general 
body advices. 

Transmission of this kind radiated from the Soul forms the 
basis of sensations, such as fatigue, uneasiness, lack of pas- 
sivity to a distressful degree; nervousness, which is the same 
thing — the lack of passivity; moodiness, which we have 
learned to charge to glandular inactivity; melancholia, which 
is assigned to the liver; destructiveness, which we charge to 
anomalous formation impinging nerves. 

These are common sensations, and these, because of immedi- 
ate necessity are constantly being crowded forward by the 
Soul, and in a way thrust above the threshold of our con- 
sciousness, so we are in constant recognition of them; but 
this would not be true if it were not for the fact that they 
are necessary for our advice, in order that we may preserve 
our body machine. 

Aside from these, there is the vast reservoir of retained infor- 
mation,, that we have received, when unconscious of it; such 
as we might receive through our open, though sleeping eyes, 
looking toward the partly curtained window of a sleeping car, 
receiving a kaleidoscopic impression of the scenery through 
which we are passing. 

H7 



Usually we are never conscious of that vast store of informa- 
tion, because the Soul is not impressed, at the time of receiv- 
ing it, that it is, or will be, of any value, and, therefore, 
never evolves it into our consciousness; but nevertheless, it 
retains that information always. 

1 he myriad of things that we see when we gaze upon the land- 
scape that are indelibly fixed upon the Soul, and yet of which we 
are never conscious, furnish other illustrations by which we can 
form some idea of the vast lore that the Soul holds, that it does 
not give over to us. 

When we look at the landscape, we are impressed with the 
picture as of a oneness — however, we see and are made 
conscious of but a very few things in that picture. Much that 
we have unconsciously received through sight, if it should 
become valuable to us will be evolved into our Minds. But 
much the vaster amount of such impression will remain in 
that great reservoir, the Soul, wholly unused by us. 
What has been said of sight applies, as fully, to all other 
means of acquiring information, which fact brings us to 
understand, how meager is our Mind information, compared 
with that of our Soul, even from the material aspect, to say 
nothing of that from the Soul side. 

Information such as indicated, conveyed by the Soul to that 
part of Mind prepared for that office, constitutes the seat of 
tissue sense, whereas information that becomes a part of our 
memory, constitutes the seat of conscious sense. 
It will be fully realized, by those that think carefully about 
it, that the department of tissue sense is very extensive com- 
pared with that of conscious sense, and that both are very 
important factors in our subject this morning: 

PSYCHOLOGY AND HEALTH 

In considering the subject of this lecture we find that the 
basic proposition is, that suggestion has power to control 
sensation and indeed, the functions and operations of the 
physical body. 

In other words, that intelligence applied to the human organ- 
ism through that all inclusive term — suggestion — may influ- 
148 



cnce the Soul to radiate its energy through the Body in such 
way as to cause health. 

The thought that, suggestion has power to remove obstruc- 
tion to transmission of this formative, intelligent energy, is 
not new by any means. It is a belief that has obtained, at all 
places and in all times of the world's history. All that is new 
about it is its immediate understanding, recognition and 
specific and intelligent use. 

I need only refer, in the beginning, to the belief of the ancients 
in all forms of mysterious removal of disease. This, in its last 
analysis, is nothing more than a belief in suggestion, for it 
makes no difference whether the belief is fixed upon the 
Medicine Man, his formulae, and mysterious actions, or 
whether it is the belief that some sacrifice will appease some 
God, and therefore, remove abnormality. These are not dif- 
ferent. They are the same, and are the removal of disease as 
the result of suggestion. 

Suggestion was in general use in what is called civilized com- 
munities, before the introduction of medicine. I refer to 
healing among the Greeks, Romans, etc.; to their manipula- 
tion; their fastings, their prayers, their anointings with oil 
and perfumes, their bathings, washings, etc., all according to 
rote, and all for the purpose of maintaining or restoring their 
health, and each of those methods was calculated to secure 
the effect of suggestion in their bodies. 

Suggestion has always been the basis of the practice of medicine. 
Its entire twenty-four hundred years, proves this fact. I need 
only pause, to refer to the inculcation into the minds of its 
votaries that there are curative properties in medicine. 
The belief, that there is curative value in medicine, was so 
generally and so forcibly impressed upon the Minds of the 
human family during the first six hundred years of the use of 
medicine that the following eighteen hundred years — though 
failure has marked the entire pathway — has not served to 
banish that faith. 

Today most of us here, if not all of us, have adopted means, 
aside from medicine, for our restoration, and yet nearly all of 
us occasionally, in moments of weakness, find ourselves 

149 



dominated by the old faith in medicine. This, of course, is 
transient and we soon throw it off; but it is sufficient to reveal 
to us the tremendous hold, that faith in medicine has upon 
the human family. 

This is not strange, when we remember that faith in medicine 
has clung to our ancestors, as a religion, for hundreds of 
years, and has come to each of us with our mother's nourish- 
ment, and is therefore a part of the very warp and woof of 
our being. 

When this phase of the power of suggestion is examined under 
this searchlight of intimacy, we can easily understand, that 
it will require the best part of our lives to fully eradicate this 
belief in medicine. 

I speak from experience. I have devoted thirty years to the 
eradication of any faith in medicine, and yet, in moments of 
weakness, I sometimes catch my mind reverting to that 
chimera of my childhood. ^ We are all prone to hark back in 
moments, when off guard, to the faith of our childhood and 
to things as we then believed them to be. 
To illustrate how prone we are to go back to original sug- 
gestion. I was in the bath room this morning getting ready to 
shave, and the thought occurred to me that I would need a 
light. I immediately retired to the kitchen, got a match, came 
back and reached up to the electric fixture, to light the lamp. 
I had harked back to my boyhood and the old wall kerosene 
lamp of my mother's kitchen. 

Thus you will feel yourself reverting to the old suggestion 
received in childhood that there is curative property in medi- 
cine, but after thirty years of careful investigation of this 
subject, aided by the most enlightened minds of the world, 
I declare that there is no curative property in any medicine, 
aside from its influence as larvation to a suggestion. 
The same phases of suggestion form the basis of magnetic 
healing. It is believed that some sort of magnetic fluid escapes 
from the body of the operator and enters the body of the 
subject and drives disease from it, and there are many people 
who believe that fallacy today, simply because of the larva- 
tion to that suggestion, 
150 



You say, " How are you going to know when you have 
eradicated fromy our memory false suggestion ? How are you 
going to know that you have given to the Soul a sufficiently 
powerful command that it shall no longer convey information 
that has been impressed upon it? " You must give to the Soul 
a sufficiently powerful and continuous stream of suggestion to 
obscure and render negative that which was there before. 
When I told you of being restored from the tobacco habit, I 
meant to have you understand that when the hypnotist gave 
me the suggestion, while in the passive mode of mind, that 
he and I together had secured, he did not remove that habit; 
but he did transmit through my mind to my soul, a suf- 
ficiently powerful suggestion with command of continuous 
evolvment that when I revert to the subject of tobacco, the 
first thought that comes is that I do not like it; that I loathe it 
with all my nature, whereas, before there was in that part of my 
Mind, the thought that I liked tobacco and that I had to have it. 
T[ What I said of magnetic healing, is true of all manipulative 
systems. I speak especially of vibration, massage, Swedish 
movement, osteopathy, mechano-therapy, and all methods 
of that character. 

All such systems are based upon manipulation, and to these I 
shall add electricity, which, after all, is only vibration, and 
hydro-therapy, which either produces relaxation or constric- 
tion, and so in a circumscribed sense these are nothing but 
manipulation. And last of these, the modern system, called 
psycho-therapy, which, of course, is manipulation procured 
through suggestion. 

Suggestion is the basis of Christian Science, which I referred 
to in the preceding lecture. 7/ consists peculiarly in the belief 
that God is all that exists; that, therefore, human beings do not 
exist, and of course, cannot suffer pain. It will be seen that this 
is the most potent suggestion, although the most untrue, that could 
be given to a human being. 

Psycho-therapy is a mixture of terms. The name was intended 
to express the thought — the therapeutics of the Soul. That 
thought, however, is so strained as to be meaningless. 
The Soul is not material, therefore, there could be no such 

151 



thing as the therapeutics of the Soul. But, let us consider the 
proposition as broadly as possible, from the standpoint of 
those that named it and brought it to notice. 
The psycho-therapeutic idea is that by means of suggestion, 
properly applied, it is possible to remove all phases of ab- 
normality. This exact method came into existence about the 
year 1894. 

The method had been practised, in a sort of sporadic and 
indefinite way for some years prior; but in 1903 Thomp- 
son J. Hudson published his remarkable book, " Mental 
Medicine," in which he systematized the tenets of the sug- 
gestionists and gave to the method its name. 
In this connection it must be remembered that Hudson 
developed this theme quite extensively in " The Law of 
Psychic Phenomena." 

Since that time several large schools have been developed, in 
which psycho-therapy is taught exclusively, or at least those 
conducting the schools think so. 

I need only pause to say that each system or method has 
done much good, because they all contain a certain amount 
of truth, and no system that has any part oj truth for its basis 
will fail to accomplish some favorable results. 
All systems or methods are true, in as far as they correctly 
include the law of suggestion; and in ratio as each has secured 
the free and untrammeled operation of suggestion, has it suc- 
ceeded and been of value ? 

Each system or method has done harm. Some of them very 
much. All systems and methods injure the human family, just 
to the extent that they are untrue. It will be seen that the ratio 
of injury is different as applied to each of them, but each is 
responsible for a certain amount of harm. 

No system that teaches, what is not true, can escape the 
responsibility of having done injury to the extent of that 
untruth. It is this fact, that should prompt us to a careful 
scrutiny of any system or method, that we contemplate 
applying to our bodies, for we must remember that, in the 
application of any system, or method, there is either benefit 
or injury. And the benefits and injuries respectively, will 
152 



always be in ratio with the truth or error involved. 
ULet me caution you that, we should be very careful what 
we teach. We have had some view of the permanency and 
power of suggestion; let us remember, when we teach, that 
we are using the power of suggestion, and that if we are 
suggesting the truth we are evolving those that hear. But if we 
are suggesting that which is not true, we are devolving those 
that hear. Let us remember also that in every action we are 
suggesting to the extent of our influence. 
Now, let us observe the scope and power of suggestive- 
therapeutics, or to leave off that meaningless word thera- 
peutics, let us see the scope and value of suggestion as a 
restorative agent. 

You will understand that the basic law relied upon is that, 
the Soul is always amenable to control by suggestion, except 
under well and clearly defined circumstances. 
Within the scope of its applicability, suggestion is the most 
valuable agent, because it brings to aid, that intelligent and 
formative energy, that causes animation of our bodies in the 
first instance, and, therefore, causes us to possess health and 
strength so s» 

In connection with what has just been said, it must be 
remembered that the Soul is only amenable to suggestion, 
when the brain and nerves are in a sufficiently normal con- 
dition, to cause sufficient Mind function to be able to receive 
and transmit a suggestion. 

In other words, suggestion is only possible when the physical 
avenue is in such condition, that intelligence can be conveyed 
through it, to the Soul and transmitted from the Soul to the body. 
\ We should understand that suggestion, is in itself, of no 
value at all, and only becomes valuable when there is suf- 
ficient intelligence to receive and transmit it. 
You will observe that I include both conscious and tissue 
sense, as brain functions. I do this because there are certain 
phases of suggestion, transmitted through the brain, with 
which Mind, as generally understood, has nothing to do, 
and knows nothing about. 

I refer to suggestion, accomplished through the department I 

153 



have named — tissue sense — such suggestion, as disturbs 
the sleep of the individual when heart nerves are occluded, of 
which Mind can have no knowledge, because the heart is 
not supplied with sensory nerves. 

It clearly appears that, a suggestion will be of no value, 
it it can only be received and transmitted to the Soul; but can 
not be impressed by the Soul upon the Mind, as valuable 
memory, or upon the seat of tissue sense in the brain, and 
thence through the nerves to any part of the Body. 
For fear the last phase of transmission may not be readily 
grasped, let me illustrate: An individual who is paralyzed 
has a Mind and nerve system, sufficiently normal, to receive 
and transmit a suggestion to his soul, and yet part of his 
nerve system is in such abnormal condition, that the sug- 
gestion cannot be conveyed to the paralyzed part of his body, 
hence it is beyond aid, by means of suggestion. 
What has just been said is a criticism of all psychologists that 
have written down to my time; for they have all united in 
saying that the Soul, or what they usually refer to as the 
subjective, subliminal, subconscious, or some other kind of a 
sub-Mind, is always amenable to control by suggestion. 
The Soul is only amenable to control by suggestion when the 
machinery of intelligence of the organism is in such condition 
that it can receive and transmit the suggestion to the Soul; not 
only that, but when the machinery of intelligence and trans- 
mission is in such condition that it can receive a suggestion from 
the Soul and carry its influence into operation in any, or every, 
part of the body. 

In the ability of the Soul to reach every part of the body, 
through the machinery of intelligence and transmission, lies 
the wonderful power and efficacy of suggestion, for the cor- 
rection of abnormality. 

It will be seen that, when the machinery of intelligence and 
transmission, cannot convey the suggestion from the Soul to 
a particular part of the body, that part of the body is beyond 
aid, through the means of suggestion. 

This is the important point that has escaped observation of 
psychologists and so-called psycho-therapeutists. If Dr. 
154 



Hudson had realized this truth, he would not have made use 
of his stock phrase, " Oh, the psychic will fix that all right! " 
and would have bestirred himself to an intelligent correction 
of his Body by extraneous means, and if he had done that, in 
all probability, he would not have died a young man, just at 
the point of his greatest usefulness, but would still be with us 
— hale, hearty and valuable. 

Let us consider this matter just a little farther. I have referred 
to suggestion from the Soul, being radiated through the 
machinery of intelligence, to avoid fixing upon Mind as the 
agent, or referring to the brain indiscriminately , as so many 
have done. 

I have made these statements preparing the way to forcefully 
present the fact, that there is a department in the brain like in 
junction, except for consciousness to Mind, produced to care for 
a multitude of transmissions that we would call sensation, if we 
were conscious of them, but since we are not, I have called 
them — tissue sense. 

The existence of a seat of tissue sense in the brain may seem 
difficult of demonstration, because of the newness of the 
conception; but the demonstration of its existence will be 
found easy, if we consider our experiences with our own 
organism so s©» 

For example we know that blood and lymph continually move 
in the proper channels of our bodies, but we are wholly uncon- 
scious of any sensation therefrom. 

The glandular excretions take place according to fixed law and 
yet no sensations arise therefrom. 

The wonderful process of absorption, which is the taking into 
our body, the elements for its sustenance, all done without 
our having knowledge of it. 

The immaculate function — assimilation — which is the elabo- 
ration of chemicals, and their molecular arrangement in such 
manner as to become animate, under the force of nerve 
stimulus acting unobstructedly; without Mind being involved 
in the transaction, or our having any consciousness of it. 
We never become conscious of any function through the 
medium of sensation, so long as the function remains normal. 

155 



^| We do not have knowledge of abnormal function through 
the medium of sensation; but the failure of performance 
extends the adverse effect so widely that the seat of conscious 
sensation is reached, and we are apprised of the situation, and 
have applied to it the general term — disease or not-ease £•» 
I am sure that no argument beyond this simple statement, 
will be required to make it perfectly clear that these functions 
cannot be performed without conduct that is in some respects, 
similar to sensation. Indeed, without conduct that would be 
called sensation, if it were not for the fact that we are never 
conscious of it; but in the normal condition the consummate of 
all such action is to produce the passive and sweet sense of exist- 
ence $+ $+ 

We are all cognizant of the facts stated in the foregoing 
paragraph, but many have never thought about it. Yet, we 
all rely upon the truth therein stated and make application, 
to ourselves and others, of those facts. 

We all understand, for example, that physical contact always 
produces two effects. That is to say, there is the conscious 
effect of the contact and there is also the unconscious effect, 
that acts upon the individual as a subtle suggestion, that many 
times he will fail to understand as being in any manner 
related to physical contact. 

The intuitive understanding of what we have called tissue 
sense is made beautifully apparent in the desire of nearly 
every woman who has been a mother, to get hold of the feet 
of a baby. 

Women do that for two reasons, both of which are based upon 
intuition. First — the contact acts as a suggestion, influencing 
her maternal nature; and, Second — she does it to bring her 
motherness into such relation as to influence the child. 
Mothers do not have to be philosophers to take advantage of 
these facts — all they need to do is to follow their intuitive 
impulse, or the universal law, revealed through the processes 
of deduction. 

How genuinely we all rely upon the cool hand placed upon the 
fevered brow — the calm steady hand of the unexcited — -to 
still the one that is overwrought. Not many of us are con- 
156 



scious, that when we attempt, by touch, to secure passivity 
in others, we are going with help to the channel of tissue 
sense and through it transmitting beneficial suggestion. 
Another beautiful illustration of our recognition of the fact 
of the seat of tissue sense is seen in accidents. An individual 
falls and is unconscious. Those that first arrive to assist will, 
without any instruction, after having secured air and room, 
proceed to chafe the wrists and stroke the brow and body; 
at least to some extent. 

When you think about it, this could have no influence upon the 
consciousness of the individual, except through tissue sense cen- 
ters in the brain, reaching the Soul as a suggestion that it shall 
again arouse the person. 

What has just been said is also true of fainting, which is the 
nearest approach to, and most closely simulates, death of any 
condition a person presents. The individual in such condition 
may be wholly unconscious, nevertheless, almost any by- 
stander will throw water on the face or manipulate the body, 
and does so without any mental understanding of what he is 
trying to do. 

Here, again, the appeal is being sent through the seat of tissue 
sense to the Soul prompting it, demanding of it, that it shall 
return and revivify its royal palace. 

If those performing the manipulation in a case of fainting, 
were asked to explain their actions, they would respond that 
it was for the purpose of shocking the patient and starting 
the circulation. 

This answer, to the majority, would be so wholly satisfying 
as to leave nothing further to be asked, or desired. And yet 
such an answer is wholly meaningless and is but the babbling 
of the outside, material man, expressing in its fullness physical 
limitation so so* 

In such cases as those I have been reverting to; we wholly 
overlook the fact that we are acting intuitively, or in other 
words, under formative guidance, for the purpose of securing 
that harmonious relationship necessary to animation and are 
suggesting to the Soul that it send its kenetic energy, through the 
brain and nerves of the stricken person, causing consciousness 

157 



and all functions and operations that appertain to the normal. 
\ The thoughts presented, relative to the various methods, 
are sufficient for this occasion. They apply to us. They should 
lead us into a recognition of all truth. 

Sufficient has been said for us to know and realize, this one 
far reaching fact, that if we expect to get well or keep well, 
we must keep the channels open, through which shall be trans- 
mitted to us that wonderful intelligent energy ', that in the begin- 
ning, fashioned our Bodies, and which since that time, has 
maintained them in the degree of vigor and power which they 
have manifested. We should understand that we must not 
permit anything to obstruct the transmission of that intelli- 
gent power. 

Our next inquiry is, what is this intelligent, creative energy 
transmitted through? The answer is that it is transmitted 
through the brain and nerve system. It is not only trans- 
mitted through the brain and nerve system, but having been 
transmitted through the brain and nerve system to the most 
infinitesimal ends of the nerves, it is then radiated in some 
remarkable manner that is not well understood, for a dis- 
tance beyond the ends of the nerves through which it was 
transmitted §&■ so 

Nerve stimulus having been radiated in the manner described, 
causes the elaboration of the wonderful formulas that, are 
resolved into so-called animate, or living cells, which by 
relation produce tissue and finally the whole organism &+■ 
It is necessary to understand, what constitutes an obstruction 
of this intelligent energy, and in this connection, let me inter- 
polate, that by the term, obstruction — occlusion, as referred 
to the transmission of stimulus, it is not meant that such an 
interference necessarily stops the radiation of the energy, or 
turns it back, for this it can well be understood, is impossible. 
^[ Kenetic — Soul — energy, will not be prevented from 
radiating by occlusion, but when thus interfered with, will 
be partly or wholly deflected from its channels, the nerves, 
in which event it ceases to be stimulus and becomes a destruct- 
ive, instead of a constructive force. 

Therefore, occlusion of kenetic energy, exists when there is such 
158 



tissue displacement, whether molecular, cellular, segmental or 
organic as to change the character, consistence, place or relation 
of nerve elements, to such an extent, as to interfere with trans- 
mission of stimulus through them. 

Observe, that when what has just been described as occlusion, 
of kenetic energy — usually called nerve stimulus — takes place, 
functional abnormality must immediately ensue, beginning 
with the nerves involved and following with the tissue 
elements immediately around their periphery. 
No functional abnormality could exist without disrelation 
producing occlusion. And in many cases, disrelation that 
substantially deflects kenetic energy — stimulus — from its 
channels, and prevents the transmission of the influence of a 
suggestion that has been impressed upon the Soul, to the 
abnormal tissue of the Body needing correction. 
In such a contingency , it plainly appears that the limit of the 
influence of suggestion, as a healing agent, has been passed, and 
the elements, cells, tissues or organs, so situated are beyond the 
reach and power of suggestion, because the avenue through which 
suggestion must be conveyed is obstructed — occluded — and trans- 
mission can not be accomplished. 

In event of occlusion sufficiently grave to prevent transmis- 
sion of the influence of a suggestion to the part needing it, 
what must be done? Are we so situated that in such an 
extremity we must calmly stand by and watch the part thus 
affected or the organism, as the case may be, die because the 
nerves, the channels of transmission, are occluded as the 
result of displacement? 

I am glad to inform you, in answer to the question, that it is 
possible to replace and relate all displaced parts, removing 
occlusion, so that formative energy can be normally transmitted, 
causing normal chemical consistence to take place, resulting in 
normal tissue and function. 

The question will be propounded — if all abnormal function 
is caused by occlusion of kenetic energy — nerve stimulus — 
and such occlusion is always produced by disrelation; may 
disrelation ever be removed by suggestion? And the answer 
is — yes; but only in certain cases. 

159 



Disrelation may be removed by suggestion only so long as 
the organism is capable of transmitting suggestion to the Soul 
and conveying the influence of suggestion from the Soul to the 
organism and to each and every part of it. Any part of the organ- 
ism that cannot be thus reached, is beyond help by suggestion. 
% Many individuals treated psycho-therapeutically, and by the 
system called Christian Science, have died untimely, because 
they failed to realize this important and far-reaching truth s©» 
It will require no further discussion to show, that when dis- 
relation of sufficient gravity to substantially occlude radia- 
tion of Soul energy to a given part, has occurred, it will be 
impossible to replace that part by means of suggestion, and that 
the time has arrived for extraneous physical aid, intelligently 
applied s«» s©» 

To cling to the thought of removing disrelation of this gravity, 
by suggestion, is as ridiculous as it would be for an indi- 
vidual to attempt to right his house that has been racked 
by storm without the use of physical means externally 
applied. The parts of the house are all there, but they must 
be related properly by skillful manipulation of a builder s^ 
The parts of the house are in the same helpless situation, 
from the standpoint of a house, as the parts of an organism 
that are so gravely disrelated as to be occluded from the 
influence of suggestion. Each must have extraneous aid. 
It is not hard to understand that force which, acting through 
its normal channels is constructive, is destructive when it is 
deflected from its normal channels. 

One may easily understand, that in order to act construct- 
ively upon molecules or atoms, energy must be transmitted 
to, and reach them in a certain manner. And that energy 
reaching them in a different manner must necessarily produce 
a different result. And in this different result lies the distinction 
between normal and abnormal function in tissue production £•» 
It is somewhat strange, that the facts just stated have not at 
all times been fully known and appreciated, for at the time of 
dissolution of each individual, we have the illustration of dis- 
relation and occlusion beyond the power of suggestion to reach 
and remove. 
1 60 



If the last statement were not true, dissolution would never 
take place, for no human being ever reached and passed into 
those processes, without the expense, in his behalf, of a multi- 
tude of suggestions for the prolongation of his life, including his 
most profound auto-suggestion. 

I say no individual advisedly, for it is impossible that an 
individual could be without relatives or friends, and the 
suggestion of relatives and friends is always that the indi- 
vidual shall live, and of course, his own suggestion is always 
that he shall live. 

In this connection, it will be remembered that telepathic 
suggestion is just as efficacious as that of those nearby so 
The death of each individual, therefore, is proof of the limita- 
tion of suggestion in the correction of physical abnormality. 
Death is also proof of the limitation of all physical means to 
secure replacement of disrelated parts. 

In all cases, in which adjusting has been intelligently 
attempted and has failed to secure correct relationship, dis- 
solution may serve to furnish a comparison of the value of 
suggestion alone and suggestion aided and abetted by intelligent 
physical assistance. 

Since these things are true, it is essential that, as intelligent 
beings, we shall adopt such measures as will not only take 
advantage of the power of suggestion to the fullest extent, but to 
add to that method, a system of physical assistance adapted 
to its every principle and harmonious with its every law. That 
system should consist in a wise, judicious and careful method 
of adjusting all disrelated parts. 

That system of adjusting must be based upon such a compre- 
hensive and intimate knowledge of the construction of the 
human organism, and the relationship of its parts, as to 
enable us to know when any segment has departed ever so 
slightly from its relationship, and also to know when any part 
has lost its normal chemical consistence, which is always inci- 
dent to its relationship. When we have acquired that knowl- 
edge we must then learn to replace the parts and to secure 
normal relationship — normal chemical consistence. In other 
words, we must learn to know occlusion and its effect at a 

161 



glance and must learn to remove all occlusion at once upon 
its occurrence, in order that radiation of kenetic energy — 
nerve stimulus — shall not be disturbed. 

I desire to say that in 1895 the first steps in this direction 
were taken and the first adjusting, by specific intention, was 
performed. Other adjusting followed upon the first, and a 
system has been improvised. 

That system has been added to, developed and expanded 
until it is no longer a simple system of adjusting, but is inci- 
dent to a science so comprehensive as to substantially include 
all others. The name Chiropractic has been given to this 
Science and System of Adjusting. 

The Science of Chiropractic includes all of the principles of 
suggestion; it teaches adjusting of the physical into harmon- 
ious relation with Soul force, and it is therefore, the link of 
union between unseen force and seen material, the Soul and 
the Body. 

Such a wonderful thing has never been accomplished before 
and, therefore, Chiropractic stands today, the peerless leader of 
all systems directed to the removal of abnormality, and in the 
application of its principles will come the eventual evolution of 
human beings, to such perfection, as to eliminate functional ab- 
normality, except as the result of occasional traumatic injury. 
\ My friends, it is glorious beyond comprehension to have 
lived in the period of the last six years, while this wonderful 
science of Chiropractic has been fructifying in the Minds of a 
few human beings and by a tremendous consecration and 
effort, has been brought forth, its truths classified, systema- 
tized and reduced to tangible form in permanent record; so 
that it may be disseminated to the teeming millions of the 
world to bless and uplift them and to evolve posterity, so 
long as life shall exist on this planet. 

It is my hope that you will come into a full understanding of 
all the things that I have stated, for I have stated truths that 
are destined to revolutionize society and evolve the human 
family so sv 

At no distant day Chiropractic will be recognized, as teaching 
the universal relationship of Body to Soul, and the application 
162 



of these eternal principles, and will be adopted in all countries 
of the world, and very much of the sickness, sorrow and des- 
pair now incident to human living, will by its wonderful 
efficacy, have passed away from the human family and we 
shall generally have such joy of health and strength as has 
never before been known. 



163 



Part Two 

Biology 

Including Bio-Anatomy 



CHAPTER NO. 9 

General Discussion of Biology 

BIOLOGY is that branch of discussion of phenomena 
which deals with the action of life, through and upon 
matter, causing animation. 
Too frequently, heretofore, Biology has been conceived to 
be a discussion of life, or of living things. 
All things indigenous to the earth, are in themselves inani- 
mate, and only take on the conduct of animation when they 
are impelled in a specific way by the force of life. 
Things that move in the conduct, that we call animation are 
not alive, but life is imminent in such structures, but not 
inherent in them. 

Biology is, therefore, not a discussion of life, per se y but is a 
discussion of the formation, and maintenance of structures 
ordinarily, although erroneously considered to be alive. 
From our material viewpoint, all that is possible for us to 
know of life is what we can learn by experience, from its 
manifestation in material forms about us. 
Nothing seems more clearly settled, than the fact that life is 
in no sense material, nor an expression, or emanation from 
material &&■ so 

We have just learned from the department of Psychology 
herein, that so far as our conceptions or possible knowledge, 
confined to our being is concerned, life and Soul might well 
be conceived to be interchangeable terms. 
That is, life is a causative factor in the production of the 
human organism, in the place we have already assigned to 
the Soul. 

In this connection it should be stated, that we ascribe to the 
Soul, qualities or attributes, which are not necessarily 
inherent in the abstract thought of life; but immediately 

167 



become so, when we recur to the continuous conduct, incident 
to the expression of life. 

The Soul, is unquestionably the cause of the formation of our 
material being, it brings together the inanimate particles of 
matter and weaves them into the warp and woof of our 
material organisms, and causes all of the conduct that takes 
place, from all of which we can not isolate a conception of life. 
^[ To those not familiar with the phase of thought now being 
presented, there appears to be a difficulty in the statement 
that the Soul causes all animation, in that they, at once 
raise the question, do lower animals and members of the 
vegetable world have Souls? 

In order to avoid dogmatic confusion, which a direct answer 
to the question propounded might involve, it is suggested 
that no one knows, because no one is in position to obtain 
information by experience, the only method by which any 
one knows aught of the Soul. 

However, the matter is rendered very simple, in that we are 
unable to separate in our conceptions, life from Soul, the 
answer then is, lower animals and members of the vegetable 
world may not have Souls; but life is immanent in them, and 
from the standpoint of organisms, life is in every sense analo- 
gous to Soul. 

In the phase of the subject just stated, it may be seen that 
life, by use of its intelligence, or the Soul intelligence which 
maintains it, causes every animate structure, that ever has 
or ever will exist. 

Biology then as a discussion of the manifestations of life, 
addresses itself first to the causation of every animate 
structure, and second to the conduct of every structure. 
Biology, must be considered under two grand sub-divisions: 
I — What has been called the animal kingdom: i — What has 
been called the vegetable kingdom. It will be seen that this 
language might be simplified under the terms animal anima- 
tion and vegetable animation. 

That department referred to as the animal kingdom, is 
assigned to Zoology, while that department referred to as 
the vegetable kingdom, is assigned to Botany. 
168 



In the department of Zoology, all phases of animal animation 
is considered, and some writers have announced that this 
department takes us from the amoeba to man. 
However comprehensive Zoology may be, its first and most 
important consideration reverts to the subject of anatomy. 
Anatomy consists of the formation, size, shape, color, rela- 
tion, and description, of the parts of an organism. It therefore 
treats of the structure of members of the animal world. 
^| Botany consists of the formation, size, color, relation, and 
description of the parts of plants, and includes every form of 
animation aside from the animal kingdom. 
The next step in Biology, is a consideration, and description 
of the conduct of, either the parts of a structure incident to 
an organ, or the whole organ; which when confined to animal 
animation is called Physiology. 

Of course the conduct of structural parts, under animating 
force, in the vegetable world, is not more nor less than 
Physiology yet it has not been generally so classified. 
In connection with the subject of Biology, two other classi- 
fications are usually considered. They are Etiology, and 
distribution s^ «•» 

Etiology, has already been thoroughly considered in this 
work under the department of Psychology. 
Distribution, will be discussed under physical laws in this 
department, and will therefore, not have further attention 
here s* s& 

From what has been said, it will be seen that Biology; is 
after all only the link of connection, between unseen force 
and matter; or is a description of the action of the force of 
life upon matter in such way as to construct given forms, and 
cause conduct as different as are those forms. 
In a certain circumscribed sense, Biology connects Psychology 
with Physiology, through the medium of what we call 
anatomic structure. 



169 



CHAPTER 10 

Physical Laws — Relative to 
Distribution 

IN a consideration of the human machine, there are two 
departments of force that must always be considered in 
relation with each other: one — the force of life, which will 
be considered hereafter, and two — universal force relative to 
the human organism, which it is the express purpose of this 
chapter to detail. 

The general law of force that must always be considered by 
the student of Chiropractic is simple and not difficult to 
understand, provided that certain basic facts are always kept 
in mind. These are: 

i. At or near the surface of our earth all matter if not sus- 
tained by other substances goes in a straight line toward the 
center of the earth. This phenomenon has been called "gravi- 
tation; " the force being called "attraction." These words are 
meaningless from the standpoint of an explanation, but give 
sufficient name to the universal operation that we may 
so designate it. 

If the support is taken away from under a body and nothing 
disturbs the operation of attraction, the line which it will 
follow in its fall will be the vertical or perpendicular. The 
transverse of such a line is called horizontal, although it is 
not a curved line such as is the horizon. This novelty is 
introduced arbitrarily in order to secure exactness of measure- 
ments so So 

i. All matter is said to have ponderability or weight which 
only means that it responds to the law of gravitation. \ The 
standard of weight or ponderability and its comparisons are 
fixed at the general surface of the earth called " ocean level." 
^[ Generally speaking, matter loses in ponderability as it is 
170 



raised above ocean level but this loss is incident to relative 
phenomena and not so far as is known, because of any intrinsic 
change in the matter itself, except that as it lessens in ponder- 
ability its relative pressures are not so great and it becomes 
more porous or distended as to its particles. 
3. All particles of matter, whether considered generally or 
as parts of an organism, tend toward the center of the earth 
and if in contact, with no force to disturb, they stick together 
in ratio with their ponderability and with pressure univers- 
ally applied to them, thus expressing a phenomenon that is 
called cohesion. 

It will be seen that if the law of gravitation, that universally 
operates at or near the surface of the earth, continues from the 
surface in both directions, then cohesion of the particles of a 
body will be increased in ratio with the distance going 
toward the center of the earth and will be decreased in ratio 
with the distance going away from the surface of the earth. 
*[ Since the scope of experiment in these directions has not 
exceeded five or six miles it is not known to what extent this 
law applies, but within the scope of demonstration it applies 
and that meets with the requirements of the student in the 
present work. 

The law referred to furnishes a fundamental basis for the 
consideration of altitudes as applied to the subject of health, 
it being true that some human organisms function better 
in the higher altitudes, while others function better at ocean 
level or low altitudes. 

For the purposes here, the student will remember that 
animal life and, so far as that is concerned, vegetable life- 
can only exist in certain places on the earth and that these 
places are circumscribed and in the broadest concept of 
them, no matter how completely the globe is considered, 
such life only exists at or near the surface of the earth. 
^ In order not to be misunderstood, " at or near the surface 
of the earth" means, at the present time, substantially within 
the distance of six miles in either direction from ocean level. 
Most of the six miles from ocean level up has been demon- 
strated, but a considerable part of the six miles in the other 

171 



direction has not yet been tested. ^ Within the scope from 
ocean level there are large areas of the earth's surface where 
life is not possible and still other larger areas where life is 
very difficult of maintenance. The reference is to the Arctic 
and Antarctic and desert regions and to great elevations r+> 
The effect of altitude on function is not, however, to be 
accounted for solely from the standpoint of a greater or lesser 
cohesion, at different altitudes, but in connection therewith, 
there must always be considered the chemistry of the atmos- 
phere in the region under consideration. 

4. The earth is surrounded by a gaseous vapor called atmos- 
phere, which responds to the law of attraction and tends 
toward the center of the earth equally at all points. 
Ocean level is the place of universal measurement of the 
gravitation of the atmosphere, which is said to be fifteen 
pounds to the square inch. 

With no interfering force or chemical reaction disturbing 
the operation of the law just expressed, the atmosphere is 
said to have its greatest density at ocean level and to lessen 
in ratio with the distance vertically away from that point. 
1[ The cohesion of the particles of an organism therefore at 
ocean level is increased by substantially fifteen pounds to the 
square inch of its supporting surface. This pressure would 
be lessened in ratio with the distance vertically away from 
that point. 

It may be seen that in a great ascent from ocean level the 
divergent lines of gravitation would not only so completely 
overcome cohesion of the particles of an organism as to render 
animation impossible, but to lessen atmospheric pressure 
and so diverge its particles or its molecules as to render 
respiration of it impossible. 

The operation of these laws upon human organisms, accounts 
for the bleeding through mucous membranes of catarrhal 
persons, or persons whose mucous membranes are non- 
resistant, as it is Chiropracticly expressed; or prostrations 
of those whose respiratory organs are non-resistant and the 
swooning of those whose brain tissues are abnormal. In other 
words, the operation of the law discloses a weakness in 
172 



cohesion in any part of the body incident to the abnormality 
of the cells of that part. 

Other things being equal, therefore, it is hazardous for any 
person gravely abnormal, as to any of the organs of vital 
function, to attempt high altitudes. It would be equally 
hazardous to go to great depths within the earth for in that 
direction from ocean level the laws operate in the directly 
opposite; the resistance of abnormal organs being just as 
readily and disastrously overcome. 

5. Cohesion in solids, the molecules of which are alike, or 
adhesion in liquids, the molecules of which are different, is 
because the molecular surfaces are fitted to each other and 
therefore cease to vibrate individually but vibrate together, 
thus establishing a harmony of conduct necessary to permit 
gravity and atmospheric pressure to hold them together. 
^[ The surface of very refined substances, such for instance as 
plate glass, cohere when firmly pressed together sufficiently 
to sustain the weight of the glass. Numerous illustrations of 
the operation of this law with regard to inanimate sub- 
stances might be given, such for instance as soft putty, clay 
or wax, the molecules of which may be pressed together so 
that they cohere perfectly. Welding two pieces of metal of 
the same kind is another illustration. The commonest and 
perhaps the most complete example of adhesion is the facility 
with which mud attaches itself to any other substance. 
It must be recalled that it is in the organization of the 
molecule of solids to construct substances that are to be 
animate, that the operation of these laws present their most 
awesome aspects, for it must be remembered that cell growth 
can only be accomplished by the operation, primarily of 
adhesion in liquids and finally of cohesion in solids. 
Incidentally, it will be seen that the exact relation of molec- 
ular surfaces within the distance of the law of cohesion must 
be caused by the force of life acting upon the molecules, in 
movement and that when, responding to that force, a given 
molecule has been related to another so that it coheres; its 
vibration has, by this means been unified with that of the 
molecule to which it coheres. This produces what is called 

173 



tenacity and is functionally referred to as resistance .-*► 
It gives much scope, to the thought of the intelligence behind 
animating force, when it is understood that organisms, from 
the beginning, are produced as an entirety by the operation 
of cohesion and that final dissolution, as it is called, which 
should scientifically be termed disintegration, is but the 
lack of cohesion because of the withdrawn or occluded force 
of life. 

6. In the preceding paragraph it is stated that primarily the 
law of adhesion operates, followed by cohesion, because the 
substance out of which the organism, as to its solid parts, is 
constructed, is a liquid and it must be conceived that the 
molecules of the liquid are not alike and only become alike 
by the homogeneousness produced by the elaboration that 
must occur, in the instant of cohesion. 

It will, therefore, be understood that the molecules of a colloid 
out of which the animate body is to be constructed cling to 
each other by the law of adhesion, and that the force of 
adhesion must be overcome by the force of life in order to 
impel such molecular impact as to put in force the law of 
cohesion, and then cause the cohered molecules to continue 
to vibrate according to the law of the organism. 



174 



CHAPTER NO. u 

Morphology— Vegetable — Animal 

AS has been indicated in a preceding chapter Morphol- 
ogy, is divided for our consideration, into two depart- 
ments: A, the animal; B, the vegetable. 
Morphology, refers to structure and comprehends every 
phase of form, shape and relation, that is presented in animal 
and vegetable animation. 

Form, shape and relation of structure, is distinctly in the 
department of Histology, and will be discussed under that 
head in the next chapter. 

For the present consideration, Morphology will be discussed 
as to those phases of the subject which may be said to more 
particularly precede its detailed discussion. 
The substances that compose vegetables and animals are now 
conceived to be in, four forms, gas, liquid, colloid, and solid. 
^[ To settle and give definition to these four forms of matter; 
Gas is an invisible fluid, that does not have definite form 
and that does not have definite volume. A definition such 
as the one just given, does not carry the mind far toward 
detail, and therefore some illustration will not be amiss at 
this place. The earth is surrounded by gas, which is said to 
be somewhere between fifty and two hundred miles in thick- 
ness, and is what we call atmosphere. Air is a composition of 
invisible gases that envelopes the earth. The word air is 
usually supposed to be interchangeable with the word 
atmosphere, but it is not. Air is that portion of atmosphere 
only, in which animation can be maintained. 
The reason that gas is described as not having definite form 
is because its particles change their relation so readily. It is 
impossible to conceive that gas has not volume, and yet we 
are prone to think of gases as having the quality of being 

175 



rare, and of being dense, and of changing from the one to 
the other insensibly, and therefore we do not think, of gas 
as having definite volume. 

An extended and detailed study of gas is an essential prepara- 
tion for a full comprehension of Histology. 
Liquids are a compound of gases, sufficiently more stable 
than fluid gases to have definite volume, but to change their 
form readily and are therefore said to have indefinite form 
but definite volume. Liquids are said to be composed of 
globular elements that roll upon each other with great 
readiness, these respond to gravity generally and to all 
phases of force incidentally. Liquids have such regularity of 
volume and ponderability as to be easily capable of being 
measured and weighed. Because of the readiness with which 
the globules of liquids change their relation and respond to 
the impulsion of force, this substance is the medium for the 
admixture of all other forms of matter. 

It will not be difficult for the student to realize at this 
juncture, the tremendous importance of a definite and practic- 
able understanding of liquids. 

Colloid, is a form of liquid which may be classified as jelly. 
Colloids, are substances composed of liquids and solids 
associated in such a peculiar way that the solid elements tend 
to maintain a definite relationship to liquid globules, thus 
producing the consistence that has been called jellylike. In 
order that a colloid may be produced, the solids immersed in 
the liquid must be reduced to such small size that they are 
said to have wholly lost ponderability and to present nothing 
but surfaces and tend to retain definite relation with liquid 
globules by means of surface attraction. 
It will be observed that a colloid, as described, is the link 
between liquids on the one hand and solids upon the other. 
T[ The student should understand that his entire knowledge 
of tissue construction, growth, reproduction, physiology, 
maintenance, pathology, and finally dissolution must depend 
upon his understanding of colloids. 

A Solid is a substance or a part of matter, which has definite 
volume and a definite form which it constantlv tends to 
176 



maintain with specific resistance, which it requires a certain 
amount of force to overcome. 

It will be observed that the principal difference between a 
solid and a colloid is that the particles of matter in the liquid 
to form a solid are not so small as to have lost ponderability. 
Tl In the vegetable kingdom we may state all that is necessary 
here, in very few words, for it is not the intention to go into 
the details of analogous physiology of plant life. 
There is no essential morphologic difference, so far as it has 
yet been possible to ascertain, between the animal and vege- 
table kingdoms. The essentials are practically the same. The 
student is requested to give the matter consideration from 
this standpoint: 

A — Plants have structure not essentially different from that 
of animals. 

B — The basis of plant structure is a cell just as it is in animal 
structure. 

C — Plants grow and reach maturity. 
D — Plants have systems of nutrition. 
E — Plants have systems of assimilation. 
F — Plants have systems of depuration or elimination. 
G — Plants have systems of reproduction or procreation. 
^[ The student will observe from the foregoing that the 
principal distinctions that occur between animals and plants, 
is with regard to the systems of nutrition, elimination and 
locomotion, so far as structure is concerned. 
We are prone to feel, since we are a part of the animal 
kingdom, that there is a superiority in the animal structure 
over that of vegetable, especially that portion of the animal 
kingdom called Man. However, so far we have been unable 
to put a finger on the difference from the standpoint of 
structure. 

It would seem possible to establish a well defined line of 
demarcation between the vegetable and animal departments 
of animation, however, when the attempt is made it is found 
that certain structures can not be definitely assigned to 
either department. 

Plants grow by a gestative procedure but animals do also, 

177 



so in this respect there is not necessarily much difference o* 
Animals that present definitely the ability of locomotion, 
however, have well defined systems of digestion and in this 
respect demonstrate a marked difference from plants, which 
have no digestive systems definitely as such at all. 
Upon animals of definite locomotive ability distribution has 
its most marked effects, such animals respond to the influence 
of climate, atmospheric conditions and elevation and seek 
those best adapted to them. 

In the preceding chapter, the laws affecting distribution have 
been stated so that subject need not be followed further here, 
however it might be added that to secure the best conditions 
of plant and animal animation the greatest care must be 
given to securing the most advantageous place, considered 
from ocean level and from atmospheric chemistry and tem- 
perature and moisture. 

The student is encouraged to read widely upon the subject 
of distribution and its effects upon animal organisms, 
especially, but incidentally upon plants. 



178 



CHAPTER NO. 12 

Histology 

LIFE, as it is observed in this material existence is but 
the action of matter under the operation of force. 
It is of the utmost importance to the student that he 
familiarize himself, at least with the more usual conduct 
•of matter under the application of force in the abstract, in 
order that he may make adaptation, so far as the subject 
permits, as to the phases of the application of force, in the 
concrete, to inanimate particles of material in the production 
•of animation. 

In this view of the phenomena it will be observed that matter 
is never, under any circumstance alive, but is only animated 
and impelled to the performance of its various offices by the 
application of the force of life acting through, upon, or with 
relation to it, causing the co-ordinance and co-operation of its 
parts, in all of the wonderful and multifold movements which 
have so universally, but incorrectly, been denominated living 
matter s«* &+■ 

That life is, or exerts, force, is one of the commonest phe- 
nomena and for that very reason the consciousness of that 
fact is only had in the occasional instance, when it should be 
of common recognition. 

Few, if any, have failed to observe in the sprouting of seeds 
or the coming up of small plan s how frequently large portions 
of earth are lifted, cracked and thrown back to permit the 
escape of the top of the plant to freedom above the ground. 
Who has not stood with awe and observed this phenomenon 
in the sprouting and growth of the delicate radish or turnip? 
These delicate plants would be crushed by any other attempt 
to force their tops through the soil, but by the gentle and 
continuous application of life force they slowly penetrate 
their way to the sunshine and air above the surface. 

179 



Many persons have seen a solid rock riven by the growth of a 
tree in one of its crevices and yet it is only the occasional 
individual, witnessing such demonstrations, that thinks far 
enough to understand, that these are but the expressions of 
the force of life. 

The matter contained in the vegetation of these illustrations 
is not alive, but is animated by the force of life acting through 
it s«* so 

These thoughts are referred to for the sole purpose of inducing 
the student to understand, that a comprehensive knowledge 
of the functioning of the human machine is necessary, in 
order that he may be active to the thoughts, with respect to 
the various operations of that machine, that will be discussed 
in this book. 

The human organism presents a varying degree of heat and 
this is ordinarily called its temperature. 

The heat of the body is caused by the operation of the force 
of life upon the molecules of the liquids and gases of the 
organism. When this force acts unobstructedly it converts 
the adhesion of liquids and gases without undue friction into 
the cohesion of the molecules of the organized solids and 
continues the molecular vibration of those solids in uni- 
formity so so 

If the application of the force of life is interfered with, 
vibration of the molecules is so changed and the molecular 
relation so interfered with, as to greatly increase friction 
which greatly increases heat. 

It must not be overlooked, in this connection, that as the 
vibrations of the molecules are coarsened, in organized solids, 
the spaces between them become greater and are occupied by 
liquids and gases. 

The liquids and gases accumulating in such conditions are 
composed of negative formulae, and after a time the spaces 
become so great, that molecular friction is reduced, until a 
condition called heat minus in the organism is produced so 
Some help may be given the student in this connection when 
his attention is called to the fact, that not only does the law 
referred to operate as stated, but the chemistry of the area or 
180 



organism under consideration greatly influences the operation 
of the law, that is, the chemicals of substances respond dif- 
ferently to changed vibrations. 

Certain chemical compositions, under the same vibration, 
express a greater friction and therefore a higher degree of 
heat than others. An illustration of this fact is found, by 
comparing for instance the 21st and 22nd days of July in the 
temperate region. Let us suppose that both are clear days. 
The sun shines brilliantly, there is no wind. The 21st is 
extremely hot, the 22nd is cool and delightful. The difference 
in heat is because of the difference in the chemical formula 
ot the atmosphere in the area under consideration. 
It would be pleasing to follow this theme further but suf- 
ficient has been said for a foundation for the histologic state- 
ments about to be made. 

Histology is the first and primary subdivision of anatomy $* 
Histology is a study of those parts of structure that are 
generally classified as being microscopic in size, or even 
much smaller. However, only those parts have been dis- 
cussed that the microscope will disclose. It is held to be a 
description of the details of the units of structure. 
It will be seen that histology, therefore, deals with the 
animal cell, which is presumed to be a unit of animal struc- 
ture. A little thought will make it plain, that a cell can not 
be the unit of structure for the cell is composed of parts, 
which are described. 

The unit of structure may only be conceived, by the process 
of deduction, and must be the smallest part of matter that 
can exist. 

At present there is no name for the actual unit of structure, 
the ion, being the smallest isolation that has received a name. 
^[ For the purpose of our present discussion, however, the 
animal cell will answer the purpose, if while the student is 
using that term, he keeps in mind that it is not the unit, 
and in each instance makes deduction to the actual unit of 
structure. 

In order to understand the breadth of histology, the student 
must see that the body consists of many characters of 

181 



tissue, such as muscle, ligament, bone, etc., and that histology 
gives a description of the basic arrangement of cells of each 
of these. 

It must be understood that so far as physiology and anatomy 
go, each cell is derived from a parent cell; but the truth is 
that behind all that, a cell must originally be formed by the 
arrangement of particles of matter under the domination 
of an individual, intelligent force, which must continually 
act upon and through the matter, giving to it all of its powers 
of movement, nutrition, and reproduction. 
Not only must this be true as to the animal cell, but it must 
also be true of its immediate successors, as well as those of 
the completed organism. 

The brain and nerves of the original cell, for the impregnated 
ovum, must possess the elements from which the brain and 
nerves are finally fully developed, as well as the elements from 
which every other tissue of the body is derived. These are too 
minute for observation or isolation, yet their presence in 
such a cell can not be doubted. 

It can no more be doubted that creative and sustaining 
energy continues to act through the elemental brain and 
nerve system of such cell, causing the processes of motion, 
nutrition, segmentation and gemmation, which finally result 
in the completed organism, with its matured brain and nerve 
system, through which stimulus acts, in such a way, as to be 
easily demonstrable, upon all of the organs that have been 
and are to be described, through which the same forming and 
maintaining stimulus continues to act until the instant ot 
dissolution. 

The animal cell is a soft, gelatinous granular material, 
enclosed in a membrane containing a vesicle filled with a 
colloid, inside of which there are one or more spots of 
denser material. It is microscopic in size and differs much in 
different kinds of animals. 

In the refined organisms, among which the human is classi- 
fied as being superior, the two essential elements of a cell 
are: (i) Protoplasm, which is the soft, gelatinous, granular 
material; (2) the nucleus, which is a small spherical vesicle, 
182 



imbedded in the protoplasm, containing inside of it the denser 
spot called the nucleolus, or if more than one, the nucleoli. 
It is supposed that many cells exist without the nucleolus. 
Since the cell is microscopic in size this may or may not be 
true, and in non-reproductive cells there is no need nor 
occasion for a nucleus or for nucleoli. 

Protoplasm is a proteid which can not be distinguished from 
albumen. It is, speaking from the standpoint of tissue, the 
lowest form of organized matter. It is insoluble in water, and 
coagulates at 130 degrees Fahrenheit. 

The protoplasmic cell seems to have the inherent power of 
motion and nutrition. 

By motion is meant the changes in its shape which enables 
it to thrust out from its body an irregular process into which 
the whole of its substance is gradually drawn, so that the 
mass occupies a new position. This has been termed amoeboid 
movement. It also has a ciliary, or hair-like, vibratory move- 
ment s«* $* 

Nutrition is the process of bringing into the cell, by means 
of absorption, the materials for its maintenance and growth 
from surrounding matter. It will be observed that this is but 
another mode of motion. 

The nucleus is a small vesicle imbedded in the protoplasm, 
usually of spheroid form and in size, proportioned to the 
protoplasm. It is regarded as a portion of the protoplasmic 
substance set apart for the purposes of reproduction. It is of a 
little different chemical consistence than the ordinary cell 
protoplasm. 

It is known that the process of reproduction, so far as it has 
been observed, commences in the nucleus, and is accomplished 
by two methods, called segmentation and gemmation. 
Segmentation is that process by which the nucleus and the 
whole of the cell separates into two parts by first becoming 
constricted in its center, assuming an hour-glass shape, which 
finally results in the separation of the whole cell into two new 
cells, each of which contains some of all of the parts of the 
original cell. 

The student by a little thought will understand that tissue 

183 



formation begins with the smallest part of matter con- 
ceivable, which for the present we may call an ion; and that 
ions are related and cohered to produce an atom, and then 
atoms are related and cohered to produce a molecule and 
that finally molecules, are related and cohered to produce 
a cell. 

Each time the animal cell is thought of, the mind should also 
go to the ultimate of conception, stated in the preceding 
paragraph s^ s^ 

Cohesion has been discussed in Chapter Ten, so that it need 
not be discussed here. 

It will be observed that the various tissues of the body are 
formed by the relation and cohesion of cells which have 
been produced in the manner already described. 
The different forms and characters of tissue are produced 
by the different chemical formulae composing the cells enter- 
ing into the formation, and the different shape, size, and 
relation thereof. 

The different formulae, of chemical consistence, of course, 
refer to the molecule, atom, ion, and smaller fragments of 
matter if such exist and enter into the fundamental basis of 
cells s«» s+ 

It is not the object of the present work to produce an anat- 
omy; therefore, the arrangements of cells to produce each 
character of tissue will not be given, the purpose here being 
merely to lay the proper foundation for that work in the 
student's mind. 

For the purpose of aiding the student in understanding 
physiology, a few general statements as to tissue construc- 
tion will suffice. 

As a basic proposition all tissue is connective. This statement 
applies to glandular and brain tissue, as fully as to muscle, 
ligament, or membrane. All glands, the brain and other very 
soft tissues are held together by spicula, or strips of mem- 
brane, so arranged as to be called a net work or trabaculae. 
The components of a tissue are always so arranged as to 
provide for easy occupation, within them, of nerves, arteries, 
veins, capillaries, lymph spaces and vessels. 
184 



By the arrangement indicated, nerve stimulus is transmitted 
and applied to tissue elements; blood is carried to capillaries, 
through the winking valves of the walls of which its plasma 
is extruded to furnish the substance for tissue building and 
maintenance; veins to carry the remenant blood on, and 
finally back to the heart, receiving on the way lymph from 
various sources; lymph spaces, in which elaboration of sub- 
stances for assimilation is performed, and in which depura- 
tion is commenced, and lymph vessels which carry residuary 
lymph and depuratory substances to surfaces of the body, 
or to depuratory tubes, or back into the veins. 
All of the so-called deep tissues of the body, are by the 
arrangement just outlined, and through the channels indi- 
cated, in direct connection with eliminating surfaces, or 
depuratory tubes of tissue. 

Depuratory surfaces are always composed of epithelia. The 
epithelial surfaces are the skin, the membrane lining tubes of 
the body which are exposed to the air called mucous; and 
that lining tubes, vesicles and cavities not exposed to the air 
called serous membrane. These surfaces are rich in eliminating 
tubular orifices. 

An epithelium is composed of a basement membrane which 
of course, is composed of a dense network of small, closely 
placed cells, upon which membrance is placed a layer, or 
more than one layer, of cells. 

The cells of an epithelium are joined together by a cellular 
cement, by their edges, sides, or ends, depending upon the 
character and purpose of the structure. 

Epithelia occurs in two general classifications, i. Simple 
epithelium and 1. Stratified epithelium. A simple epithelium 
consists of one layer of cells upon a basement membrane. A 
stratified epithelium consists of two or more layers of cells 
upon a basement membrane. 

Epithelia are classified according to the shape of their cells 
into tassellated or pavement, columnar, spheroidal or gland- 
ular, and ciliated. The pavement is composed of flat cells 
varying in size. The columnar or cylindrical is formed of rod- 
shaped cells which sometimes present a different shape as to 

185 



their ends, called goblet or chalice cells. ^[ In spheroidal or 
glandular epithelium the cells are circular or polyhedral in 
outline s+ &*■ 

Ciliated epithelium may occur on cells of any of the preceding 
forms of cells, but usually is found on the columnar. That 
which distinguishes it is the presence of minute processes 
that are hair-like prolongations of cell protoplasm extending 
from a basic cell. These are constantly in a lashing motion 
like waving grass. 

An epithelium upon the inner surfaces of closed cavities, 
such as synovial, the heart, blood and lymph vessels, surfaces 
of the brain, vertebral cord, etc., is called endothelium, 
because it is within the cavity and not upon something in a 
stricter sense. 

Ciliated epithelium lines the respiratory tract; the middle ear 
and Eustachian tubes; the Fallopian tubes and upper part of 
the uterus; the first part of the excretory duct of the testes; 
the ventricles of the brain; and the central canal of the ver- 
tebral cord. 

The layers of cells are not only attached together in stratified 
epithelium, but the cells in any epithelium are attached by 
their edges, ends or sides, by a cellular cement, except at 
such places as the winking valves of the capillaries and other 
places where membranes are constructed to have fluids or 
liquids pass through them. 



186 



CHAPTER NO. 13 

Bio-Anatomy 

THE student of anatomy is confronted with two remark- 
able phases of growth or development. 
The first of these consists of the wondrous phenomena 
attendant upon the evolvement into human cognizance; or 
the arrangement of substances into such forms, as to be 
possible of recognition from the thought of organized exist- 
ence or anatomic structure. 

I shall call this Bio-Anatomy and shall discuss it sufficiently 
for present needs in this chapter. 

The second deals with that phenomena subsequent to an 
organic form, that is to say, subsequent to such structural 
arrangement as brings it within the scope of discoverable 
parts and clearly within the term — Embryology. 



Nuclear membrane. 



Linin. 



Nuclear fluid (matrix) 



Chromatin -cords 
(nuclear network) 



Nodai enlargements , 
of the chromatin. 



.'•/.*>!'/. ".'.••\'J„'%*,v.v'« 



Nucleolus. --, 




Cell membrane. 



— Exoplasm. 



Microsomes. 
Centrosbma. 

Spongioplasm. 
Hyaloplasm. 

Foreign inclosures. 



Fig. 1 — Animal Ceil 
The black line, on the outside, indicates the limiting membrane. The circle on the inside 
indicates the limiting membrane of the nucleus, which is the germinal spot. With these sug- 
gestions the student will easily detect the other elements. 

I87 



The student should at this point make sure that he has 
carefully familiarized himself with the animal cell and with 
all the details of its structure, for consideration of the subject 
now to be presented requires an intimate knowledge of the 
details of the animal cell. 

The student will recall that the animal cell is said to possess 
a limiting membrane — a cell body — a nucleus — and a 
nucleolus, or sometimes more than one — called nucleoli and 
that these cells are classified as being non-reproductive and 
reproductive. Tissues contain many cells that are without 
the office of reproduction, but remain an integral part of 
structure, their molecules that are classified as being worn 
out — disintegrating- — while their places are being constantly 
taken by new molecules. This molecular interchange con- 
stituting what should properly be called cellular maintenance. 
^[Reproductive cells are very much more numerous than those 
discussed and are necessary, in the first instance, to the 
growth of a structure, for it will be clearly seen that cells 
that are incapable of division into new cells, are by that 
limitation only able to maintain structure in its original size 
and would preclude the possibility of growth. 
Reproductive cells are also necessary for the recovery of a 
wounded part, even in adult life, where tissues have been 
torn or cut away, the correction is only possible because new 
cells are produced. This is also true of fractures, lacerations, 
contusions, etc. 

The student of inquiring mind will at once ask the question, 
if an animal cell is the unit of tissue — what are its parts 
composed of? This is a legitimate inquiry and one that should 
not be lightly passed over as it has been the habit of authors 
on this subject to do. 

As has elsewhere been said, an animal cell is just as perfectly 
composed of distinct forms and related parts as is a tissue, 
and we should understand that the reason these more infin- 
itesimal, but equally important parts of a cell are not dis- 
cussed, is that our machinery of investigation does not reveal! 
them £•» s* 

Want of machinery should not prevent us from understand- 
188 



ing that such parts of cells actually exist and are of just as 
high development and as perfect relationship as any of the 
structures with which we are familiar. 

Following the thought presented in the preceding paragraph 
— deductively — we eventually arrive at the place where we 
must juggle with imagination, as the materialists have done, 
by introducing the novelty — as though it were a neces- 
sity — that matter can not be divided out of existence, but 
can be divided indefinitely; or else we must reach the point 
where we conceive the original formation of entified or organ- 
ized matter, to be related by and in conformity with the 
force of life. 

Just at the point reached in the preceding paragraph, so- 
called scientists have permitted themselves to become greatly 
agitated and to wander from the field of the real and palpable 
in their efforts to carry out materialistic theories with regard 
to the production of what has been called animal life. 
Every animate substance in the entire realm of nature gives 
unimpeachable proof, that what we call living substance is 
not more than inanimate molecules, the relation of which 
is caused by a given energy to produce a new and different 
form of conduct, which conduct we call living. Substances so 
organized and energized we classify as being animated s©» 
In the abstract, the fact of animate substances consisting only 
in form and relationship of inanimate particles, formed and 
related according to the law of a given energy, only occurs to 
the student as being strange, because of the newness of the 
thought and not because of a possibility of its inaccuracy s«» 
Upon a little reflection it will be seen that the statement is 
based upon the truth universally accepted even by the 
crassest materialists, for they uniformly teach growth, and 
growth of an animate organism would be an absolute impos- 
sibility but for the law I have just stated. 
If an animal were composed of living tissue, it would have to 
be produced full grown, for it is unthinkable to conceive that 
life can grow, and just as much so that a living tissue might 
grow, or reproduce. 

It will be easily seen that for an organism to grow from the 

189 



weight of ten pounds to two hundred pounds will require the 
introduction of one hundred and ninety pounds of inanimate 
matter in the way of food, water, etc., substances taken from 
the environment. 

The substances taken in must, by the various processes of the 
organism, in what are classified as growth or development, 
be slowly and systematically brought within and under the 
control of the individual energy that constructed and main- 
tained that ten pound organism, producing it as individual 
and distinct from all others. 

If what I have just announced is not a law, then the phenom- 
ena I have just suggested would be impossible of accom- 
plishment s«* s& 

A short excursion at this point into the realm of animate 
things, with the thought of the preceding paragraphs in 
mind will furnish the student with an overwhelming accumu- 
lation of data, which he will find proves the universality of 
application of the law just stated. 

The evidence obtainable proves that, as to this particular 
phase, all animate things come into existence, grow and 
mature in the same general manner. 

If an organism increases from ten pounds in weight to two 
hundred, by the law of relation of elements under the 
domination of a given energy and the whole is individualized 
by that energy, then it is perfectly legitimate to conclude 
that, that organism grew from our earliest recognition of 
it to the weight of ten pounds by the operation of the same 
law and by the same individualizing energy. 
If the organism grew from its earliest existence, in conformity 
with that same energy, and if these deductions are true and 
they are most fully established by the entire congeries of 
phenomena from our earliest knowledge of an organism to 
its fullest development, then we must take the next step and 
understand that the organism begins its individual existence 
where the gametes that compose it are separated into their 
consisting particles and are re-arranged and related to con- 
stitute a separate animate entity. 

Having arrived at this point which embryologists have dis- 
190 



cussed under the head of the impregnated ovum, I must 

pause to take up the essential steps that immediately precede 

this wondrous transaction, in order that I may complete in 

the succeeding chapter that explanation. 

The steps of production of animate things have herein been 

sufficiently discussed. 

It should be clear to the student, at this time, that animal 

structures are not alive, but are just animated particles of 

matter, which without the animating force of life would be 

nothing more than inert matter. 



191 



CHAPTER NO. i 4 

Forming of Zygote 

TO fully understand this chapter the student must have 
a very accurate knowledge of human anatomy, and it 
would be better if he was proficient in comparative 
anatomy $* a©» 

The student should at this juncture turn to the chapters on 
the procreative organs of the male and female and examine 
the anatomy of them, being sure to fix upon the mind with 
great care the details of the tubules of the testes and the 
Graafian follicles of the ovary, for without a clear under- 
standing of these he can go no farther. 

By such review he will learn that from the epithelial cells of 
the lining membrane of the tubules of the testes there bud off 
certain cells which at a certain stage of maturity loosen 
from the nest cells and float free in the seminal fluid and 
are called spermatozoa. 

The student will also find that from the cells of the epithelial 
lining of the Graafian follicles of the ovary there bud off 
certain cells, that at a certain maturity float tree in the 
follicular fluid and are called ova. 

It will be seen that at this stage a spermatozoon and an ovum 
simply present to us, animate animal cells, with peculiar 
characteristics living, however, each according to the law of 
the individual energy of the organism in which it is produced. 
Tf The production of these cells presents a phenomenon not 
different from that of lymph corpuscles and blood corpuscles, 
for in lymph and blood these animate cells float free in liquid, 
but perform conduct in harmony with the individual energy 
animating the organism in which they are. 
It is one of the most remarkable facts of nature, that the 
spermatozoon and ovum, arise to animation in organisms of 
192 



which they form no tissue part. These cells taken separately 
have but one destiny, and that is to become inanimate. 
Spermatozoa and ova only enter into tissue formation through 
the processes of impregnation. If they do not meet with the 
experience of impregnation, their destiny is that of lymph 
and blood corpuscles. 

Through the various channels described in the anatomy of 
the procreative organs, the follicular fluid carrying an ovum 
and the seminal fluid carrying a spermatozoon meet in the 
organism of the female in what has been called the process of 
impregnation sv* s©» 



Uody 




Grdyj 



End piece 



Fig. 2 — Schema of Ovum and Spermatozoon 
Ovum — A, Corona Radiata; B, Zona pellucida; C, Nucleus, or germinal vessel; D, containing 
a nucleolus. 
Spermatozoon — A, side view; B, front view. 

The process of impregnation is here briefly to be described. 
The ripe ovum descends into the vagina through the 
os uteri where it meets the spermatozoon. This is not 
always the process, but is the normal one, the meeting 
may occur at any place from the vaginal orifice to the 
Graafian follicle. 

The spermatozoon pierces the limiting membrane of the 
ovum and so much of it as is essential to procreation passes 

193 



within the ovum, while the remainder, separating, disinte- 
grates. The membrane of the ovum closes behind the part 
that entered, and the process of impregnation is fairly on 
its way. 

From the instant of the entrance of the spermatozoon into 
the ovum, marked and characteristic changes take place 
in its germinal part as well as in that of the male germinal 
part. These immediately begin conduct wholly distinct and 
different from that so far performed. The elements of the 
ovum approach the spermatozoon in what is known as the 

■V 




Fig. 3 — Schema Illustrating " Cone of Attraction." It Indicates a Transverse 

Section of Impregnated Ovum 
1, Male Element; 2, Female Element; 3, Cone of Attraction, Cytoplasm apparently inviting 
the spermatozoon; 4, Oolemma of Ovum; 5, Limiting Membrane of Cytoplasm. 

cone of attraction, as though welcoming its entrance and 
attempting to make safe and easy its path of movement s+ 
The germinal elements from being concentrated separate 
into their particles, and the general cytoplasm of the ovum, 
as it is called, begins to be organized with relation to what 
are now called the male pro-nucleus and the female pro- 
nucleus, and as this arrangement takes place the gametes 
or pro-nuclei travel toward each other. 
By the time they come near to each other certain elements 
of each stand out separately and coming nearer these 
separate, individual particles merge and fuse as it were 
into each other, producing a clear field in which nothing 
appears, finally after a period of seeming quiescence, granu- 
194 



lation occurs at a point between the places occupied by 
the gametes when they disappeared. 

The granulated point is the beginning of the new person, 
and is called the Zygote or pre-embryo, the production of 
which completes the period of impregnation. 
It will be seen that where the gametes, floating in their 
fluids, differ from lymph corpuscles, for example, is at the 
entrance of the spermatozoon into the ovum. Up to that 
moment their life history and conduct present nothing 
different from that of lymph corpuscles. 
The gametes have been acting in conformity with the 
energy animating the male and female organisms in which 
they were produced. 

Upon impregnation all is changed, they cease to thus act 
and begin to act according to the law of a new energy and in 
such manner as to produce a new organism composed 
primarily of the material brought from the parents in the 
gametes s*> so 

The temptation to enter the realm of speculation as to 
what this new energy is, that manifests itself at this 
juncture, will be repressed for it has not yet been given to 
human beings to know. 

With regard to animating force it is sufficient, at this time 
to say, that it is an intelligent energy, that fashions the 
organism, and maintains it to the instant of dissolution &«» 
These cells, the spermatozoon and ovum being reproduct- 
ive, are of course from their beginning produced for no 
other purpose than that which they fulfill. 
The gametes are, therefore, never a part of tissue, where 
they are produced, any more than the blossom is part of a 
tree. 

These cells are constructed by the aggregation and rela- 
tion of elements under the energy dominating the particular 
organism and are as completely an original formation as 
any organized substance could be conceived to be. 
It will be observed that in this chapter I have not only 
explained the process of original formation, but that of 
growth and development, and have also given the exact 

195 



basis for hereditary tissue form, relation, and general 
tendency; indeed all that can be included in the general 
subject of heredity. 

This chapter has been given in simple, descriptive term- 
inology, for the purpose of preparing the student for the 
necessary technical statements that will be given in the 
next s«* s«» 



196 



CHAPTER NO. 15 

Embryology to Embryo 

THE spermatozoon and ovum supported in their fluids 
meet, it is believed, at or near the external os of the 
uterus $& s«* 
The spermatozoon enters the ovum by penetrating its 
membranous wall. In this manner what is called the head 
and body passes within the ovum while the remainder is 
cast off. 

At the time the spermatozoon pierces the membrane of 
the ovum, the inner substance called cytoplasm passes 
outward to meet the entering spermatozoon in what is 
called the cone of attraction. From this point the method 
of the approach of these prime parts and their fusion has 
been described. A marked peculiarity of the spermatozoon 
and the ovum as distinct animal cells is that they are not 
possessed of any independent reproduction. 
As distinctive cells they are non-reproductive. They are, 




Fig. 4 — Schema Illustrating Morula. Transverse Section of Ovum 
1, Oolemma; 2, Limiting Membrane of Ovum; 3, Morula, or segmentation of original cells; 
4, General Cytoplasm of Ovum. 

197 



therefore, incapable of either segmentation or gemmation; 
but when they have fused in the process of impregnation, 
all of the various processes of cell-reproduction that are 
found in the adult body are manifested. 
The most prominent of these is that of segmentation, but 
the subject is treated by embryologists as it segmentation 
was the only process of cell production at this period. 
After fusion of the germinal elements, there seems to be a 
period of quiescence which, of course, is only the comple- 
tion of fusion. This period is followed by great activity in 
the production of cells, which seem to be massed together 
and are called a morula. The morula soon assumes such 
shape as to present a cavity within the mass of cells which 
is called the segmentation cavity. 

The general cavity of the ovum, which is now a vessel, is 
called a blastula. 

In forming the morula, the cells are arranged in two layers 
with respect to the membranous wall of the ovum, in rela- 
tion to the original point of entrance, of the spermatozoon. 
The outer layer is called the ectoderm and the inner layer 
is called the entoderm. 

It will be noted that from the standpoint of an epithelium 
these constitute a stratified bi-laminar structure. By the 
completion of these layers of cells the blastula is converted 
into what is called the blastodermic vessel, and the further 
consideration of cell production will include the whole ovum. 
The cells of these two layers become differentiated as to 
shape and other characteristics, those that lie in the region 
of the entrance of the spermatozoon originally called the 
cone of attraction become columnar and form what is called 
the embryonic area. 

The remainder of the cells of the ectoderm and entoderm 
remain flat cells and form the nutritive and protective 
structures which are later known as the placenta and fetal 
membranes s*» $& 

The embryonic area, when examined, presents a somewhat 
circular dark outline on account of the thickened columnar 
cells. It soon becomes ovoid. The small end of the ovoid 
iq8 



area being that portion that is to become the part of the 

embryo away from the head. 

Toward the head end of the ovoid area a still darker 

cell structure develops, which is the formation of 

the third layer of cells, that occurs between the other two, 

and is therefore termed the mesoderm. 

At this time the cells of the ectoderm begin to thicken 

in an elongated row and extend down toward the entoderm 

upon which they finally rest in the form of a ridge. This, 

of course, is in the median line of the embryonic area and 

has received the name primitive streak. 




Fig. 5 — Schema, Illustrating Transverse Section of Ovum 
1, Embyronic Area; 2, Primitive Streak; 3, Oolemma; 4, Limiting Membrane of Cytoplasm; 
5, Ectoderm; 6, Entoderm; 7, 8, Somatopleure; 9, Splanchnopleure; 10, General Blastodermic 
Cavity or Blastula; 11, Mesoderm; 12, Segmentation Cavity. 

The student should observe that the primitive streak is many times longer than it is wide. 
Width only is illustrated in the cut. There are three layers in the embryonic region, the 
ectoderm, the entoderm and the mesoderm, a tri-laminar structure. The wall of the ovum 
inside and aside from the embryo has a quadri-laminar structure. 

I 99 



From the sides of the posterior extremity of the primitive 
streak or ectodermal ridge, cells grow out in a layer, or 
lamina which lies between the ectoderm and entoderm; 
finally covering the whole vessel of the ovum, except certain 
circumscribed areas, converting the bi-laminar, into a 
tri-laminar epithelium. 

The student will note at this juncture that the mesoderm 
is an outgrowth sidewise from the ectoderm, and that the 
extension is between the ectoderm and the entoderm. 
In this manner the blastodermic vessel grows. The em- 
bryonic area becomes pyriform and increases in length 
mostly in its caudal part, or part away from the head, 
in the region called the primitive streak. 
Without going into the technical details, which are not 
necessary for the present needs, it will be sufficient to say 
that by a re-arrangement of cells, the brain, vertebral cord 
and general nerve trunks are now formed, and that around 
them the denser and grosser tissues, constituting the 
vertebral column and skull form. 

The beginning steps in the construction of the nerve 
system is the production of what is called the cerebral 
vesicle, which soon by the changes in its shape forms what 
are called the three cerebral vesicles. 

The several parts of the vesicle are called the fore, mid and 
hind brains. They are the primitive ventricles of the adult 
brain and vertebral cord. 

At this juncture the student will observe three distinct 
areas in the enlarged ovum, now called the blastodermic 
vessel, the wall of which, is now composed of the ectoderm, 
the mesoderm, and the entoderm — tri-laminar blastodermic 
membrane. These three areas are the embryonic — the 
amniotic, and the placental. 

The Amnion is that portion of the tri-laminar membrane, 
which extends from the margins of the embryo and sepa- 
rates into two parts, one of which turns back and com- 
pletely invests the embryo, the two edges of it fusing together 
over its dorsum, to form the true amnion. 
The other subdivision is called the false amnion. It con- 
200 



stitutes the outer layer ot these two and extends out and 
completely invests the rest of the vitelline cavity, which 
the student will remember is that cavity enclosed by the 
wall of the ovum. 

The student will notice that the primitive placenta with 
the remainder ot the vitelline membrane, and the false 
amnion covering the rest of the wall of the blastodermic 
vessel, is called the chorionic area, and will understand 
that, in further reference to the chorionic area, it is to be 
considered as consisting of placental and non-placental 
portions $+■ s& 
The placental and non-placental areas must be carefully 




Fig. 6 — Schema of Uterus Nearly Occupied by Developing Embryo Within the Ovum 
a, Muco-gelatinous Plug in Os Uteri; bb, Fallopian Tube; <I, Cavity of Uterus — Small part 
left outside of ovum; ES, E.3, angles of Reflection of Decidua Vera; f, Decidua Serotina; 
g, Umbilical Vesicle; h, Allantois or body stock, Amnion; j. Chorion. 

The student should note that the embryo in this illustration is almost completely folded off 
and floats in the amniotic liquid. 

20 1 



fixed in mind, for they become very important to an under- 
standing of the subject in what is called " folding off of 
the embryo." That is, to a re-arrangement of the embryo at 
a certain time in its development, as to shape, size, and 
position, so that it becomes more distinct and the fetal 
membranes and placenta are quite distant from it. 
The Chorion is a complex membrane made up of several 
parts, the original membrane of the ovum, that is, the 
vitelline membrane; the false amnion, just described, and 
a diverticulum from the splanchnopleure, called the 
allantois. The arrangement gives us this situation, the 
embryo is inclosed in what is called the true amnion, from 
which extends the false amnion, which in relation with the 
vitelline membrane and the allantois composes a complete 
outer investment which leaves a cavity between the true 
amnion and the chorion. 

It is well, at this point, that the student caution himself 
that he is still considering the embryo as a flat tri-laminar 
structure and that the changes in that structure that are 
taking place are at first almost exclusively directed to its 
axis or the median line of the embryonic area. With this 
thought in mind he approaches the discussion of the noto- 
chord, which is the embryonic skeletal axis. 
The notochord lies between the primitive neural canal 
and the primitive alimentary canal, in exactly the same 
position that the bodies of the vertebrae in the adult 
occupy between the neural canal and the general body 
cavity s^ s& 

By certain developmental steps the notochord is converted 
into the vertebrae, intervertebral discs and skull, together 
with the meninges of the brain and vertebral cord. 
Following the formation of the primitive axis, growth accom- 
plishes the purpose of bringing the lateral margins of the 
embryo from their position, as a flat structure, together, 
below the axis of the embryonic area to enclose or construct 
the main body cavity, and in the accomplishment of this 
end, the tri-laminar structure is maintained. 
As growth of the embryo advances, the middle layer, or 
202 



mesoderm, separates into two layers, so that from this time 
on, four layers are considered instead of three. 
The outer layer of the mesoderm becomes attached to the 
ectoderm so that the two form one structure called the 
somatopleure. 

The inner layer of the mesoderm becomes attached to the 
entoderm so as to form one structure called the splanchno- 
pleure s& $&■ 

The student should here understand that, notwithstanding 
these formidable terms, the ectoderm and external layer 
of the mesoderm join together to form the wall of the body, 
generally referred to as the parietes, while the entoderm 
and the inner layer of the mesoderm together form the 
tissues that occupy the general cavity of the body, usually 
classified as the viscera. 

It will be seen that this division of the mesoderm causes it 
to extend entirely around and compose the immediate wall 
of the coelomic cavity, when it is fully formed. 
It will be remembered that on the somatic side, the meso- 
derm is in touch and connected with the ectoderm, while 
on the inner side of the cavity it is in touch and connected 
with the entoderm. 

The student will understand that the formation of the 
coelom is around the outside of the remainder of the 
original blastodermic vessel, usually called the vitelline 
cavity, which it will be understood, is now surrounded by 
the entoderm. 

That is to say, at this stage of formation the coelom is one 
part of the blastodermic vessel, now enclosed within the 
mesoderm of the embryo; while the remainder of that 
cavity is enclosed within the ectoderm, the vitelline cavity 
being within the coelomic cavity. 

These several explanations bring us to the period that the 
embryo becomes definite, and therefore terminates the 
period properly called embryology. 

In this chapter it has been sought to describe impregnation, 
fecundation, and the development up to that stage where 
the animate structure is definitely the embryo. 

203 



CHAPTER NO. 16 

Embryo— Nutrition and Protection 

AS introductory, the student, will recall that the 
human ovum is estimated as being one one-hundred 
and twenty-fifth of an inch in diameter and that 
its germinal part is estimated as being one five-hundredth 
of an inch in diameter. 

It will be remembered that all of the substance of the 
ovum outside of the germinal vesicle is classified as the 
vitellus or yolk, and that the skin or outer membrane of 
the ovum is called the oolemma, which contains numerous 
foramina so so 

After the entrance of the spermatozoon through the 
oolemma the ovum for a brief period of time floats in the 
follicular fluid in the uterus, receiving nutrition extrane- 
ously from that fluid and animation from its life source so 
The gametes or pronuclei within the ovum receive nutri- 
tion from the yolk granules of the cytoplasm and stimulus 
from the new individual source. 

Upon coming in touch with the wall of the uterus the 
impregnated ovum adheres to it, and immediately, marked 
changes begin to take place in the mucous lining of the 
uterus so so 

These changes are what would, ordinarily be called swelling 
with congestion, the mucous lining at the point of contact 
becomes thick, highly vascular and richly supplied with 
nerves so so 

The ovum beds itself as it were, into the mucous mem- 
brane which soon swells out over it and entirely encloses 
the ovum within itself. 

When embedding has been accomplished, three areas are 
apparent. The portion of the original mucous membrane 
204 



on which the ovum rests is called the decidua basalis, that 
immediately surrounding and that covering over the ovum — 
the decidua capsularis, and the remainder of the mucous wall 
of the uterus — the decidua vera. 

These three areas in the order named represent the place 
of the primitive placenta, the region of the amnion or 
amniotic membrane, and the remainder of the chorion or 
chorionic membrane. 

In order that the student shall not here become confused, 
let him remember that we are distinctly discussing develop- 
ment with respect to two things: First — the embryo, which 
of course, includes the embryonic area, and, Second — the 
remains of the ovum or original blastodermic vessel in its 
relations with the extra embryonic membranes, or that 
portion of the original tri-laminar structure now somewhat 
quadri-laminar that extends beyond the margins of the 
embryo to, and into relation with the wall of the ovum or 
blastodermic vessel. 

The student should also remember that when the embryo 
" folds off " from the wall of the ovum or vessel it is entirely 
surrounded by specialized structures, that are attached to 
the wall of the vessel, called the chorion, which consists of 
placental and non-placental parts. And that from its inner 
surface, by the separation of the ectodermal layer, from the 
entoderm, and the division of the mesoderm, into two layers, 
there is formed the somatic that joins the ectoderm and 
the splanchnic that joins the entoderm. 
There is also a fold that extends from the chorion which 
surrounds the margins of the placental area down to the 
margins of the closing embryo, which, from those margins, 
in its further extent forms the inner wall of the coelomic 
cavity s& s& 

This fold, from the chorion to the margins of the embryo, 
is called the amnion and the cavity thus constructed the 
amniotic cavity. 

It will be seen at this juncture that the cavities in the 
blastodermic vessel or ovum are the amniotic, which is the 
remains of the vitelline or yolk sac and those cavities which 

205 



are within the embryo and are the remains of the coelomic 
cavity and a portion of the original vitelline cavity. 
As the body of the embryo, by the folding of its margins, 
gradually closes up at the ventrum, there is formed, from 
its ventral and more feetward aspect, a fold classified as an 
entodermal sac, which lies beneath the embryonic area s+ 
The fold that thus projects is called the allantoic diverti- 
culum, which is really the primitive umbilical cord; but it 
is called during this period because, by the changes of 
position it seems to be behind the embryo — the body-stalk. 
% As further changes take place the body-stalk comes to 
form what would be called from the erect position, the 
inferior boundary of the umbilical orifice. 
There is incident to the body-stalk, which is also called the 
allantoic stalk or allantois, the mesodermal sheath by 
which the embryo is connected to the chorion in relation 
with the body stalk and along which the umbilical arteries 
extend to the chorionic villi of the placental area and along 
which the corresponding veins extend. 
From this allantoic stalk is formed the bladder and rectum. 
That portion of it that extends from the apex of the bladder 
to the umbilical orifice is later converted into a fibrous cord, 
the urachus. After birth of the fetus, the arteries and veins 
are also transformed into fibrous strands. 
That portion of the allantois which is outside the embryo 
and takes part in the formation of the umbilical cord and 
placenta separates from the fetus at birth. 
It will be remembered that the vitello-intestinal duct is at 
first that wide opening that connects through the margins 
of the embryo with the yolk-sac; but as these margins close 
it is said to extend through the umbilical orifice. The 
umbilical cord is the structure that takes the place of what 
is earlier called the body stalk and the allantoic stalk. It is 
formed by the fusion of these stalks with the vitello- 
intestinal duct and the remains of the yolk-sac. 
The mesodermal core of this cord is said to be fibro-mucoid 
and contains the blood vessels which are, the two umbilical 
arteries that are wrapped spirally around the single umbili- 
206 



cal vein. The umbilical cord is described as extending from 
the umbilical orifice to the center of the placenta; but the 
student will remember that this is only true in part for the 
umbilical vein extends to the liver of the embryo. The cord 
is at first short and straight but increases rapidly in length, 
so that at birth its average length is twenty inches. How- 
ever, the length of this cord varies greatly. 

THE PLACENTA 

While what has been said may seem to the student to have 
covered this portion of the subject, he must remember that 
in a way they have been prefatory to a clear presentation 
of the facts here to be set forth. 

The attention has been particularly directed to the non- 
placental portions of the chorion; but here the attention is 
specifically directed to the placental portions of the 
chorion, and first to what is called the chorionic villi so 
The chorionic villi are hair-like cell processes which begin 
to grow, in the region that is to be the placenta, and 
extend into the subjacent uterine tissue, that is, into the 
decidua basalis. 

For a time in the early phases the villi cover a wider area 
than is to be placenta; but as they increase in size and 
complexity, those outside of the placental area atrophy and 
disappear s& s«* 

By the full development of chorionic villi the placenta is 
formed s& s& 

The placenta is the mechanism that brings the organism 
of the embryo into nutritive relation with the mother s«* 
It must not be thought, although books on this subject lay 
it down as being so, that the placental arrangement is such, 
that blood from the mother ever reaches the embryo, for 
that is not true. 

In the placenta the structures that grow from the wall of 
the uterus, and those that grow from the embryo, are so 
completely interwoven that the maternal and embryonic 
systems of liquid movement are brought sufficiently near for 
lymph transmission and the transfusion of gases. 

207 



What is later known as the fetal placenta, which is an 
outgrowth from the embryo; and the maternal placenta, 
which is an outgrowth from the mucous lining of the 
uterus occurring, at the point, corresponding to the center 
of the embryonic area, interdigitate and appear as one 
structure and as such are called the placenta. If The student 
must observe that the fetal placenta is formed from the 
chorion at the center of the embryonic area, which grows into 
the decidua basalis or mucous membrane of the uterine wall. 
The maternal placenta forms in that portion of the mucous 
lining of the uterus, upon which the ovum first rested after 
its impregnation, called the decidua basalis, and is com- 
pleted by its growth into the placental area of the chorion. 
^f The student must understand that the placenta is com- 
posed of the decidua basalis, the placental area of the 
chorion, and the oolemma or vitelline membrane of the 
ovum, which by the changes designated, is considered with 
the placental chorion. 

In the changes that take place in the decidua, three layers 
or characters are classified: i, the deepest part — called the 
unchanged layer; 2, the area in which there is much 
thickening of the glands, vessels and nerves called the 
stratum spongiosum, and, 3, the most superficial thick layer 
in which there is a lessening of the glandular tissue and is 
called the stratum compacticum. 

In order to form the maternal placenta the three layers of 
the decidua are changed, as follows: 1, the unchanged layer 
retains its character throughout the entire process of 
gestation; 1, the stratum spongiosum is modified by the 
disappearance of the lining epithelium, and the spaces 
between the cells are flattened out into cleft-like slits; and 
3, the stratum compacticum is modified into a basal layer, 
and external to that a layer of blood sinuses that are inter- 
woven with the blood sinuses of the fetal placenta. 
The interwoven blood sinuses of the fetal and maternal 
placenta come to lie so close together, that the blood in the 
sinuses of the mother, and those of the fetus are only separ- 
ated by thin layers of epithelium. 
208 



Through the intercellular spaces of the epithelia between 
the placental villi, the lymph from the blood of the mother 
passes to the lymph of the fetus, carrying nutritious sub- 
stances and oxygen into the blood of the fetus. In like 
manner lymph from the blood of the fetus passes, in the 
opposite direction, carrying with it depuratory substances 
and carbon dioxide, which through the lymph, reaches the 
blood of the mother. 

In the manner described, nutrition and the transfusion of 
gases necessary to the life of the embryo and later the fetus 
are performed. 




Fig 7 — Placenta — Fetal Side 
The student should know that the Amnion, and Chorionic Membranes have been torn from 
the margins in the illustration. 

When the placenta is fully matured it is a discoid mass 
about twenty inches in circumference and one and one- 
fourth inches in thickness in its center, becoming very thin 
at its margin; where it is continuous with the non-placental 
chorion. When fully matured it weighs about one pound so 
At this juncture, in order that the student may not be 
confused, he should recall that when the placenta has 
attained its full size the amniotic membrane has so 
expanded with the growth of the fetus that it has been 
pushed back into contact with the chorion, which lines the 
whole uterus, and has completely fused with it, so that 
these membranes have become one. 

209 



In connection with the statement in the last paragraph the 
student should also remember that the decidua capsu/aris, 
which was the mucous membrane covering the ovum in 
early pregnancy, is with the development pushed back into 
relation with the decidua vera, with which it has fused, thus 
obliterating the uterine cavity except that found in the 
amniotic cavity. 

It must also be recalled that the decidua vera which was 
the original mucous lining of the uterus, aside from the 
decidua basalis, has changed, becoming less vascular and 
glandular, and finally has become a thin membrane; the 
inner surface of which is fused with the decidua capsularis 
in the obliteration of the uterine cavity as before stated $+■ 
In closing, I wish to call attention once again to the fact, 
that nutrition of the fetus is not by direct transfusion of 
blood from the mother; but is by the extrusion of lymph 
from the blood of the mother into the lymph spaces of the 
placenta and thence into the blood of the child, and that 
depuration from the child is by the extrusion of lymph 
from its blood into the lymph spaces and thence into the 
blood of the mother, so that these phenomena present us 
nothing different than assimilation generally, and while 
wonderful beyond expression, they differ in no respect 
from the every-day processes of nutrition of an organism $+ 
The student is urged to use the thoughts presented as an 
outline and guide and to investigate the details of embryol- 
ogy in the various books that treat upon it, especially 
Gray, Cunningham, Garrish, etc.; not particularly for the 
purpose of obtaining more information, but from the mul- 
tiplicity of theories and ideas presented to more fully 
saturate himself with the simplicity of these truths. 



210 



CHAPTER NO. 17 

Embryo, Folding Off — Delivery 

FOR the purpose of this chapter, the student should 
recall that the following processes have been de- 
scribed: Impregnation, fecundation, imbedding in 
the wall of the uterus, the formation of the fetal membranes 
which are for protection, the placenta which is the medium 
of nutrition of the forming child and the phases of develop- 
ment of the embryo. It is at this juncture of development 
that the remarkable process called " the folding off" of the 
embryo " should be described, this description has been so 
indifferently accomplished that students have had diffi- 
culty in understanding how the transaction occurs. 
It should be understood, "that folding off" is nothing 
more than the separation, of the now partly quadri-laminar 
embryo from the wall of the blastodermic vessel, which was 
the wall of the ovum, and later called the vitelline wall, at 
that part of it corresponding to the original cone of 
attraction a* && 

The separation from the wall of the ovum, is to give the 
embryo room for development; for so long as it remained a 
flat structure, attached to the wall of the ovum, or blasto- 
dermic vessel, it could not assume its characteristic form. 
T| There is also the further reason for the separation; that 
at this stage the machinery of nutrition has become suf- 
ficiently formed that the embryo can be maintained more 
perfectly, at a greater distance from its source of supply s+ 
In " folding off " from the wall it will be understood that the 
embryo simply drops into the cavity, away from the wall 
ol the vessel, so that it comes to float, as it were, in that 
cavity, attached to a point which was the original cone of 

211 



attraction; then the embryonic area, but now the placental 
area s«* £*> 

The student should understand that the most marked folds 
which distinguish the embryo from the fetal membrane at 
the margin will be, the primitive head and opposite end, 
or what is called the cephalic and caudal folds, and that 
there will also be folds indicating the lateral limits of the 
embryo. 

These several folds the student will understand are the 
margins of the embryo, that are passing around, in different 
directions, to meet at the ventral side of the axis to close 
the body cavity. 

It will be seen that when the embryo has in this manner 
"folded off" it contains within its innermost parts a 
portion of the original blastodermic cavity nearly sur- 
rounded by the coelomic cavity, and it will be understood 
that the inner cavity is the primitive alimentary canal and 
that the coelom, or outer cavity, is the primitive thoracic 
and abdominal cavity. 

It will be understood that neither the inner cavity nor the 
outer cavity is at first closed, but that each relate to the 
umbilic orifice which by closing finally entirely separates 
these two cavities. 

THE EMBRYO 
The embryo, after " folding off," is clearly distinguished 
from the tri-laminar structure of the general ovum. The 
head and trunk show characteristic formation but there are 
no legs and arms. But now it proceeds with rapid develop- 
ment, especially as to the head and upper body. 
All of the various characters of tissue begin to present 
themselves, and the muscles, glands, vessels -and organs 
begin rapidly to take. on shape, the details of which will be 
found quite clearly set forth, under the proper headings 
in almost any standard anatomy. 

As has been indicated the trunk cavity has already been 
formed and partly divided into two cavities, the outer, or 
coelomic and the inner, which is the remains of the blasto- 
dermic 8& s& 
ill 



It has been indicated that the coelom composes the thoracic 
and abdominal cavities and that the inner enclosure is the 
nutritive cavity and is the primitive alimentary canal £•» 
At the present stage of development, the nutritive cavity is 
referred to as the gut; that portion of it headward being 
called the fore gut, which is closed ventrally, by the cardiac 
fold: That extremity of the embryo called the caudal fold, 
bends under itself ventrally from all sides, enclosing a 
cavity, called the hind gut: That portion of the cavity 
enclosed by the lateral folds of the embryo and extending 
from the fore gut to the hind gut is called the mid gut so 
It will be understood that these guts freely communicate 
with each other, and that the mid gut is open to the general 
blastodermic, or vitelline cavity, until it closes to form the 
umbilicus. 

With this simple description, which is only intended to aid 
the student in his investigations in the more extended and 
detailed works now in print, and urging him to make 
extended investigation of those works, with this as his 
outline, we turn to a few thoughts as to: 

THE FETUS AND DELIVERY 

In the human family the period of gestation is ordinarily 
considered to be nine calendar months, or from two hun- 
dred and seventy to two hundred and eighty days. 
It may be valuable to the student as a comparative fact, 
to know that nine months is also the period of gestation, 
in. those jungle folks most similar to man such as the ape, 
baboon, gorilla, etc. 

The period of gestation includes the whole time from the 
embedding of the impregnated ovum in the mucous wall, to 
the time of the expulsion of the fetus from the uterus so 
Gestation is considered in three periods: the period of the 
Zygote: the period of the Embryo: and the period of the 
Fetus. ^[The end of the period of gestation is called "full 
term," which means that all of the phases of development 
have been passed through, and that the child is ready 
for extra-uterine existence. 

213 



The actual expulsion of the fetus, at full term, is called 
" delivery," which term is equivalent to that of " giving 
birth " in ordinary speech, or terminology; and is tech- 
nically called parturition. 

Up to a few hours before delivery the cervix of the uterus 
remains closed and fixed; then it suddenly undergoes 
relaxation and dilation, and this is the beginning of parturi- 
tion s«» r©» 

Soon after dilation of the cervix of the uterus the amniotic 
sac bursts, with a discharge from the uterus, of the amniotic 
fluid. This discharge is usually referred to as " the waters." $+ 
The amniotic sac is ruptured by the descent of the fetus 
from the abdomen into the pelvis, which is called, " engage- 
ment," or " becoming engaged in the pelvis preparatory 
to delivery." 

From the time the fetus engages in the pelvis until it is 
fully born, the conduct is called " expulsion," which con- 
duct includes that of passage through the vagina out of its 
orifice s& so 

So soon as the fetus is expelled, it must instantly begin 
the processes of extra-uterine existence, which primarily 
consists of breathing, or respiring the atmosphere. 
So soon as breathing begins, the umbilical cord must be 
severed. This cord, it will be remembered, connects the child's 
system with that of the mother through the placenta, which 
becomes inactive at delivery. 

As soon as the placenta becomes inactive, aeration must be 
accomplished by the child by the ordinary extra-uterine 
method of breathing, or death must soon ensue. 
Shortly after delivery of the fetus the conduct called, " after- 
birth " is accomplished. This consists in the separation of 
the placenta from the wall of the uterus, which is, at this 
juncture, in the process of contraction, and the delivery of it, 
with all of its appendages, called the fetal membranes from 
the uterus and vagina, which completes delivery. 



214 



Part Three 

Physiology 

With Anatomic Synopses Sufficient 
for Student Aid 



CHAPTER NO. 18 

How to Study Anatomy 

CONTRARY to the general idea, the acquisition of a 
knowledge of Anatomy is not difficult, if the study is 
pursued from the right standpoint, and by the process 
of deduction. 

This book is not an Anatomy but in order that it may be 
understood it is necessary that the student shall acquire a 
very careful and comprehensive knowledge of that subject, 
and the purpose of this chapter is to offer a few simple sug- 
gestions, which, if followed, will render the task before the 
student very much easier. It will, in any event, place the 
student in the advantageous position of knowing where to 
begin and how to pursue his studies. 

The human body is, in our highest concept of it from a 
physical standpoint, a machine. The student should address 
himself to the work of learning the anatomy and physiology 
of the human body just exactly as he would address himself 
to the work of learning the mechanism and operation of a 
machine so so 

In pursuing the study of anatomy, from the machine stand- 
point, the student is confronted by the wonderful fact, that 
there is a remarkable difference to be given full scope and 
consideration so so 

The ordinary machine is as an adult, that is to say, its parts 
are all full grown and therefore, there is nothing to be taken 
into account except the form, shape and action of each part; 
and the relation of the several parts to each other and the 
modes and methods of their attachment together; while in a 
study of the human machine this is only true of the adult; 
when the subject is referred to the period of the development 
of the machine, or the period of growth, it is true only by 
approximation. 

217 



It will, therefore, be found that before adult anatomy can 
be understood it will be necessary for the student to have 
acquainted himself with what, for use of a better term, I shall 
call developmental anatomy, that is to say, a consideration of 
the details of development or growth leading up through the 
various steps and phases to the adult machine. 
It will be understood that the subjects last referred to are 
biology, bio-embryology, embryology and extra-uterine 
growth. The single purpose of this chapter is to furnish the 
student an outline for a wider development and it is believed, 
that what is here stated is sufficient for the practical needs 
of the student. 

When the student has finished the study of Embryology, he 
should take up a consideration of the subject of tissue and 
should at once bring himself to a realization of the unit of 
tissue, and should understand that what is meant by unit is 
the smallest part of tissue that is conceived, as being capable 
of isolation, or separate consideration, and is commonly called 
an animal cell. At this point it is of the utmost importance 
that the student shall understand that, as to the animal cell, 
there is something approaching an intellectual novelty. It 
must be understood that the animal cell is fully as capable 
of divisibility into its several parts as is a tissue. 
The only reason that the anatomy of an animal cell is not 
discussed by histologists is because, so far, we are not pos- 
sessed of any magnifying machinery by means of which we 
are enabled to make so minute an investigation. 
This fact, however, does not hinder the student who is pur- 
suing the deductive method of study, from comprehending 
the truth. In other words, the same law of size, shape and 
relation applies to the components of an animal cell, just as 
size, shape and relation of animal cells apply to tissue. With 
these thoughts in mind the student will be prepared to take 
up the details of histologic data as he will find them set forth 
in works upon those subjects. 

To complete the student's preparation, to enter the broader 
field of investigation of data, the additional basic terminology 
herein will, it is deemed, be sufficient. When the student has 
218 



brought himself to a comprehensive knowledge of what tissue 
is, he is then prepared to enter upon the real study of the 
human machine, but in doing so he should never for a 
moment lose sight of the biologic and physiologic phases 
which inhere in a consideration of each anatomic part. 
Starting from the standpoint of his knowledge of what tissue 
is, he should carefully take up a consideration of Basic 
Terminology, that is to say, the names of the various classi- 
fications of tissue, that form a part of the human organism, 
and should carefully trace each of such tissues, to its embryo- 
logic origin, to the earliest histologic recognition of it. 
That is to say, bone, cartilage, ligament, tendon, aponeurosis, 
fascia, muscle, membrane, glands, etc., as characters of tissue 
should all be traced back to their first appearance embryo- 
logically s* $&■ 

Having completed the work as outlined in the preceding 
paragraph the student is ready to begin for the first time the 
study of the human organism and as to it, he should remember 
that two phases present themselves for consideration. 
If First: The topography, that is to say, a description of the 
surface appearance of the organism as a whole, or the surface 
aspect of its several parts. This is called descriptive anatomy 
and of course includes the size and shape of the organism, or 
the size and shape of the organs or parts. 
Second: The internal construction of the various organs and 
parts of the anatomy which is usually classified under the 
head of histology, but which it will be clearly seen is only 
another phase of descriptive anatomy of the greatest import- 
ance to the student, for a perfect knowledge of the superficial 
aspects of the parts of an organism would indeed be of little 
value, without an intimate knowledge of the plan of con- 
struction of each part and the relation that each of such plans 
sustains to the organ, and the relation of each of such systems 
to the construction of the whole organism. 
In view of what has been said it is of the utmost importance 
that the student shall systematize his work, and as a primary 
step in doing so, should adopt a terminology of description 
that is plain, simple and exact. 

219 



Anatomists have used two positions in the adoption of their 
terms which the student must understand and remember 
when reading such works. 

Much description is given from the body in the erect position, 
the hands at the sides with the thumbs out, while other 
descriptions are made from the dissection aspect, the cadaver 
upon the back, the hands by the sides with the thumbs outs* 
Descriptions are given from the position of the part, at the 
time of describing, so that the student of descriptive anatomy, 
must always make certain, first, that he understands the 
position of the organism, organ or part, at the time of descrip- 
tion, as well as the position of the describer, to make certain 
that he understands the description. 

The terminology given in the next chapter will apply to the 
organism or any part of it in any position. 



220 



CHAPTER NO. 19 

Descriptives — Anatomic and 
Physiologic 

IT is the object of this chapter to furnish the student with 
terms so exact and simple that he may never be at a loss 
for their meaning, and may never be in doubt as to what 
they describe. 

The terms here given apply equally to anatomic and physio- 
logic description. They are general and classification terms. 
The Mesial line — a line that would divide the normal body, 
lengthwise, in half. A body marked off as to mesial lines, 
presents a ventral mesial line, while the corresponding line 
on the other side of the body will be the dorsal mesial line s«* 
Mesial plane — the surface exposed by dividing a body on the 
mesial line. The mesial plane is obtained by cutting from one 
of these lines to the other; the two surfaces thus presented 
will be mesial plane surfaces. 

The mesial line or one drawn parallel to it, is a sagittal line. 
If a line should be drawn parallel to the mesial line both 
ventrally and dorsally, at any distance therefrom, and then 
one should cut through from one such line, to the other, the 
surfaces thus presented would be sagittal planes. 
Horizontal, as a descriptive term, signifies a line parallel to 
the horizon. This is novel, for it is not a line curved like the 
surface of the earth. 

A horizontal plane, therefore, would be parallel to the horizon, 
and it will be seen, that in order to locate it in a description, 
the student would always have to first ascertain the position 
of the body at the time of the description. 
In order to accurately describe surface or structural points 
lateral from the mesial line one must always have in mind the 
imaginary mesial plane of the organism. 

221 



From the standpoint of the mesial plane, any point or place 
away from it is expressed as being lateral. It must be remem- 
bered that this applies as well to the appendal portions of the 
body as to the trunk. Each leg, for instance, is lateral to the 
imaginary mesial plane. 

In a comparison of two points or places, both of which are 
lateral to the mesial plane, but are differently related to it, 
the one nearer the mesial plane is described as being mesial, 
while the other is described as being lateral; therefore, the 
ulnar side of the forearm is described as being mesial, while 
the radial side is described as being lateral. 
The anterior, front, under side, or belly, of a part is described 
as being ventral, while the opposite side, sometimes apparently 
without reason, is described as being dorsal. To illustrate the 
lack of reason for this last differentiation, the top of the foot 
is called the dorsum, because it is opposite the plantar, or 
ventral surface. 

Headward, signifies toward the head. Feetward toward the 
feet, from any given point. 

Combination terms are as follows: Head-ventral, means an 
oblique line, toward the head and ventrum. Feet-ventral, 
signifies an oblique line, toward the feet and ventrum. Head- 
dorsal, means a line obliquely toward the head and dorsum. 
Feet-dorsal means a line, obliquely toward the feet and dor- 
sum. Head-ventro-lateral, means a line toward the head and 
ventrum, that is also oblique to the mesial plane. Head-dorso- 
lateral, means a line toward the head and dorsum, that is 
also oblique to the mesial plane. Toward the feet these last 
descriptions are the same, except that they begin with, feet s+ 
Anatomically there are two positions of the body from which 
certain descriptions are given that the student must carefully 
fix in mind to avoid confusion. The first, are given from the 
idea of the body being in the erect position, in which points 
or places compared toward the top of the head are called 
headward; and opposite points or places are called feetward. 
T[ Sometimes instead of these words, there will be found 
cephalic, pre-axial or superior which are equivalents of head- 
ward, and caudal, post-axial or inferior which are the 

222 



equivalents of feetward. I wish, however, to discourage the 
use of such terms since the object of all should be to encourage 
the selection of single technical terms, that are exact, where 
that is possible. 

Terminology is applied to the body in the dissection position, 
that is, lying upon the back, with the thumbs out. Anatomists 
describing certain organs and parts from this position 
frequently fall into the error of using the term superior for 
ventral and inferior for dorsal. The student must always 
be on guard for this error. 

Proximal is used to indicate a place near a given point of 
description, while distal refers to a point or place farther 
away. These words are frequently used in anatomical 
descriptions generally, but they should be confined wholly to 
the extremities, thus; the tuberosity of the humerus is 
proximal to the shoulder joint, while any point selected 
farther down the bone will be distal. 

Each cavity, shaft or part is described as having an axis 
which is a line extending through it lengthwise, equidistant 
from its surfaces, therefore all parts of a body are described 
as presenting certain relations to its axis, or axial line. The 
line around which a part turns is called its axis. 
Movements are classified from the standpoint of their axes, 
therefore, a part that moves in but one line is described as 
having axial movement, a part that moves two ways is said 
to have bi-axial movement, a part that moves in many ways 
is said to have ?nulti-axial movement, sometimes described 
as poly-axial — the first term being preferred. 
A part that moves in any axis around a center is said to have 
circumductory movement. 

When a part is moved from the axis or mesial plane it is said 
to be abducted. A part moved from a point more distant, 
toward the axis or mesial plane, is said to be adducted. 
With these descriptive terms well in mind the student is 
ready to begin the actual task of investigating the parts or 
segments of the body, and his attention should be directed: 
^[ i. To the denser, more resistant, and least animal parts, 
which are classified as the skeletal system and includes bone, 

223 



with certain cartilages, and ligaments and receives the general 
classification name of Osteology. 

i. The articulatory or joint system, which includes the 
extremities or edges of bones, certain cartilages and ligaments 
and is called Arthrology . 

3. The muscular system, which includes the study of the 
muscles, their membranous coverings, fascia, aponeuroses, 
ligaments and tendons, classified as Myology. 

4. The nerve system, which includes the brain, vertebral cord, 
nerve trunks, nerves, ganglia and plexuses, all of which is 
considered under the general title of Neurology. 

5. The vascular system, which includes the heart, arteries, 
veins, capillaries, intercellular lymph spaces, canaliculi, 
lymph capillaries, lymph vessels, lymph ducts, and lymph 
glands, all of which is classified under the head of Angiology. 

6. The respiratory system, in which is included, the ventral 
nares, respiratory nares, dorsal nares, naso-pharynx, oral 
pharynx, larynx, trachea, bronchial tubes, bronchioles, in- 
fundibula, alveoli and the lungs. All of these are considered 
under the head of Aerotology. 

7. The digestive system, which consists of the alimentary 
canal, or food tube, and the glands, which by their function, 
are accessory thereto; and are the salivary, at the mouth; 
gastric, at the stomach; spleen, liver and pancreas at the 
intestine; and should be considered under the head of 
Aliment ology . 

8. The urinal system, which requires a consideration of the 
kidneys, pelvis of the kidneys, ureters, urinary bladder and 
urethra st> s& 

9. The integumentary system is a study of the skin and its 
appendages. In this study care should also be given to the 
skins of the inner surfaces of the body termed serous and 
mucous membranes. 

The urinal system, and the integumentary system, together 
with all organs that perform similar functions are compre- 
hended under depuratology . 

10. The reproductive system, which requires a careful study 
of the ovaries, Fallopian tubes, uterus, vagina and pudendum 

224 



of the female; and the testes, vas deferens, seminal vesicles, 
ejaculatory ducts, urethra and penis of the male. Many details 
of these organs are not here indicated. The whole system 
should be considered as incident to Bio-Embryology. 
ii. The study of all of the internal organs or viscera is class- 
ified under that comprehensive term called Splanchnology sx* 

12. It should be remembered that the infinitesimal micro- 
scopic structure of all these organs is considered under that 
branch termed Histology. 

13. In addition to the terms already given the student should 
remember that the divisions of cavities and parts are said to 
be of two characters: 

The first is based upon the morphology or structure of the part, 
which is said to be a morphologic or structural demarcation 
or separation, such for instance as occurs in the alimentary 
canal, at the pyloric orifice of the stomach — there structur- 
ally the stomach ends and the intestine begins. 
The second is called an arbitrary demarcation or separation, 
such for instance as that where the jejunum ends and the 
ileum begins, the point being arbitrarily fixed as being eight 
feet from the duodenum, there being nothing structural to> 
mark the place. 

In morphological description we have the word homology, 
which indicates the same organ produced in different animals.- 
T[ The organs in one animal that in function correspond to 
those of another are said to be analogous and all such parts 
are considered under the term Analogy. 

The vertebrates, of which man is presumed to be the highest 
type, are classified as being homologous in structure, and 
analogous in function. 

A more extended description of these terms will be found in 
general books on anatomy, histology and physiology; but 
those given will be sufficient for the practical needs of the 
student s<* $0 



225 



CHAPTER NO. 20 

The Human Organism 

n^HIS book does not assume to state anatomy. The 
anatomic synopsis at the beginning of each department 
of Physiology will direct the student to a proper investi- 
gation of the necessary anatomy, to understand what is 
herein stated. 

The classification as given in this chapter will materially aid 
the student in acquiring an understanding of Physiology; 
that is, an understanding of how the human machine works 
in its various departments, and how those departments work 
co-ordinately s& s«* 

The student of anatomy should address himself to the 
structure of the body as a mechanic does to the structure of 
a machine, keeping constantly in mind the whole machine, 
while giving comprehensive study to its minute parts in 
detail s* &&■ 

History discloses the fact that anatomy has not been studied 
nor developed upon that basis. The science of Chiropractic 
has introduced that innovation. The human organism, when 
looked at as a whole, is seen to constitute a very complete 
machine, the material elements of which comprise its entire 
study. The student of anatomy need not consider it in any 
other light. 

It is only when the student leaves the study of anatomy and 
addresses himself to the study of physiology or function, 
under whatever head designated, that he needs to take into 
account phases, nor necessarily material or mechanical s^ 
Anatomists have considered the human organism under the 
following divisions: — head, trunk, upper and lower extremi- 
ties. It is only necessary to say in passing that this division 
relates wholly to the bones, or skeletal frame, and that since 
226 



it is not sufficiently comprehensive to include all of the bones, 
and not so regulated as to aid in the description of all of the 
parts, it is therefore incompetent and should be discarded. 
^[ The Skeletal Frame is divided for convenience of considera- 
tion into the bones of the head, bones of the cervical region, 
bones of the trunk, and bones of the upper and lower extremities. 
The Bones of the Head comprise those of the skull, which 
include those of the ear and the bones of the face. 
The Bones of the Cervical Region include the cervical 
vertebrae and the hyoid bone. 

The Bones of the Trunk include the thoracic vertebrae, lumbar 
vertebrae, sacrum and coccyx, with ribs, sternum, scap- 
ulae and clavicles above, and the innominate bones below so 
It will be observed that the scapulae and clavicles have 
formerly been classified as the shoulder girdle, and as such 
have been included with the upper extremities; while the 
innominate bones, classified as the pelvic girdle, have been 
included with the lower extremities. It is very clear that 
all of these are properly bones of the trunk, and they are so 
classified so so 

The Bones of the Upper Extremities are the bones of the 
arms, forearms, wrists, hands and fingers. 
The Bones of the Lower Extremities are those of the legs, 
which include those formerly designated as bones of the 
thighs, and those of the ankles, feet, and toes. 
The Bones of the Skeletal Frame are so arranged that they 
constitute several important cavities, which have been 
named, but the reader is cautioned not to jump to the con- 
clusion that the cavities named comprise all of the cavities 
of the body, for such a conclusion would be a long way aside 
from the truth. 

The principal cavities, however, are: The skull cavity, 
auricular cavities, nasal cavity, mouth, pharynx, cervical cavity, 
thorax, and the abdominal, arbitrarily divided into the 
abdominal cavity proper and the pelvic cavity. 
The Skull Cavity and the Auricular Cavities are in that 
division of the head called the cerebral cranium. The Skull 
Cavity is occupied by the brain, and a large portion of nerves 

227 



and also by the so termed meninges of the brain, with their 
very rich vascular and nerve systems. 

The Auricular Cavities are in the petrous portion of the 
temporal bone of each side, and are occupied in part by the 
external meatus, and by the middle ear with its mastoid 
antrum, Eustachian tube, and by the inner ear. 
In the visceral cranium are the Nasal Cavity, the Mouth and 
part of the Pharynx. The Mouth Cavity is occupied by the 
teeth, alveolar processes, gums, and tongue. It should be 
added that contiguous to the cranium on each side is the 
external meatus of the ear; and on each side of the median 
line in front, the quasi-cavity, the orbit of the eye. 
The Cervical Cavity is occupied by the larynx, part of the 
pharynx, trachea and esophagus. 

The Trunk encloses one vast cavity, so far as its skeletal bones 
and walls are concerned, which extends from the body of the 
first thoracic vertebra to the pelvic outlet. This cavity, how- 
ever, is morphologically divided into two very important 
compartments by the largest and most important and power- 
ful muscle of the body, called the diaphragm. 
The Diaphragm attaches to the ensiform cartilage, or feetward 
segment of the sternum ventrally, and to the costal extremi- 
ties and ribs on each side, extending dorsalward and attach- 
ing to the body of the twelfth thoracic vertebra, while its 
crura attach to the vertebrae, down to and including the 
fourth lumbar. 

The diaphragm is so shaped and placed as to constitute an 
irregular dome on each side of the median line, with a bi- 
convex surface looking headward, and a bi-concave surface 
looking feetward, and is so large and broad as to form a 
complete septum in the great cavity of the trunk, which is 
thereby separated into two principal cavities. 
The cavity headward from the diaphragm, enclosed by the 
ribs, with their costal cartilages, the thoracic vertebrae and 
sternum, has been named the Thorax. 

The Thorax is again arbitrarily divided into three cavities: — 
the right and left pleural, and the mediastinum which extends 
longitudinally throughout the length and depth ot the thorax 
228 



in a median area. If The Right Pleural Cavity is occupied 
by the right lung. The Left Pleural Cavity is occupied by 
the left lung. 

The Mediastinum is encroached upon by part of the right 
lung. It is occupied by the bronchial tubes, esophagus, the 
great thoracic arteries and veins, the nerves, the pericar- 
dium, and the heart. 

The cavity feetward from the diaphragm has been named 
Abdomen, and is enclosed partly by the ribs and their costal 
cartilages, the lumbar vertebrae, the sacrum, coccyx, and 
innominate bones. However, the greater part of this cavity is 
enclosed by soft tissue, which is comprehended under the 
term parietes of the abdomen. 

The x^bdominal Cavity, so called, is arbitrarily divided into 
the Abdominal Cavity Proper and the Pelvic Cavity. This 
division has been made at a line extending around from the 
pubes and across the sacrum, which is called the Ileopectineal 
Line so $f> 

The Abdomen Proper is that portion headward from the 
plane of the ileopectineal line. 

The proper abdominal cavity is occupied, in the order 
named, beginning at the diaphragm, by the liver, stomach, 
spleen, pancreas, duodenum, transverse colon, small intestine, 
and the cecum, ascending and descending colon. 
The pelvic cavity is found within the embrace of the innom- 
inate bones, except their broader or iliac portions, which 
cavity is closed behind by the sacrum and coccyx. 
The Pelvic Cavity is occupied in part by the small intestine, 
part of the sigmoid colon and rectum. And, in the male by 
the bladder, prostate gland, vas deferens, and seminal vesi- 
cles. In the female, by the ovaries, ova-ducts, uterus, vagina, 
and bladder. Contiguous to the wall of the pelvis ventrally 
are the external sex organs of the male and female respect- 
ively so so 

It is hoped that this general outline will furnish to the student 
a valuable hasty reference, which will be of considerable aid 
in his analysis of the parts hereinafter referred to, and to an 
understanding of function. 

229 



CHAPTER NO. 21 

Anatomic Arrangement for 
Physiology 

IF we are to understand the physiology of the human 
body, it must be expected that certain other things must 

be understood, which in themselves tend to clarify the 
situation that it is desired to investigate. Of course, no one 
would hope to understand physiology, who did not fully 
understand anatomy in all of its details, for, of course, a 
knowledge of anatomy is at the threshold of physiology. How- 
ever, an understanding of anatomy will not be sufficient to 
put the student in position to make deductions therefrom, 
unless he has further definite information of many things s+ 
In order to understand physiology, it is necessary in addition 
to anatomic knowledge, that the student shall have an 
understanding of physics, as that subject relates to the 
application of force to matter, in all of its details. 
The student must also have a thorough working knowledge 
of analytic chemistry, as that subject relates to the applica- 
tion of force to matter, and to the general subject of trans- 
mutation, or chemical elaboration. 

The student must understand mechanical structures and the 
operation of mechanical appliances, which tend to the easy 
operation of the same, and those things which may oppose 
such operations. 

In addition to the knowledge already indicated, the student 
must have a well-defined idea of the analysis of the human 
machine in order that, in any emergency he may always 
deduce from the facts under consideration, to those facts 
which may stand in the relation of cause, or effect, and that, 
therefore, may aid or retard function, or furnish an explana- 

230 



tion of the problem at hand, ^f To this end, it is conceived to 

be well to divide the physiologic conceptions of the body into 

the following several departments: 

i. The department of force. 

i. The department of raw material intake. 

3. The department of transportation. 

4. The department of use. 

5. The department of output. 

The department of force , as has been heretofore indicated in 
this work, is composed of two parts; the immaterial, psychic 
or causative, and the material expression or effect. 
The psychic department has been fully discussed in Part One 
of this work, and incidentally discussed and applied in Part 
Two, and nothing more need be said of it here, except that, 
of course, it must always be reverted to for the cause of 
animation; or changes in function in the human body. 
The material department of force is comprehended in the 
brain and nerve system, for an understanding of which, it is 
necessary to make a very careful and deep study of all 
anatomic structures; and of course, the statements here made, 
will be based upon the thought, that the student has made 
such preparation. The physiology of the brain and nerve 
system, however, is briefly given in this work, with sufficient 
anatomic review for the immediate needs. 
To understand physiology, the student must realize at this 
juncture that he must first understand the physiology of the 
brain and nerve system in all of its details, but particularly 
must he understand the animating phase of nerve stimulus 
when applied to tissue elements at the ends of organized 
channels, or nerves. 

The department of raw material intake consists of the ali- 
mentary system and the respiratory system. The alimentary 
system is composed of the alimentary canal, a tube extend- 
ing from the lips to the anus, which is the largest and longest 
tube in the human organism, and the accessory organs of 
digestion; being the salivary glands at the mouth, the 
gastric glands at the stomach; and the spleen, liver and 
pancreas at the intestine. Of course, in addition to these, 

231 



there is also, the mucous glands of the entire canal. The 
respiratory system consists of the tubes that begin at the 
ventral nares, and extend thence, through the nasal meatus, 
the dorsal nares, the naso-pharynx, the isthmus of the 
pharynx, the oral pharynx, the larynx, the trachea, the 
bronchi, the bronchioles, down to and including the infundi- 
bula and alveoli. 

As a paramount, physiologic proposition, the student must 
remember at all times, when studying the alimentary and 
respiratory systems, that in a sense, figuring from the stand- 
point of operation of the organism, they constitute but one 
system, and that the system of raw material intake. All 
substances that are found in the human organism, if they 
have entered it by normal processes, have entered through 
either the alimentary or respiratory system. Any other sub- 
stance that may be found in the body economy must have 
entered it by some abnormal process. In connection with the 
subject of raw material intake, it would be well for the student 
to keep in mind that there are several ways by which sub- 
stances may enter the body by abnormal processes, such as 
injection, inoculation, endosmosis, and the like. 
The department of transportation includes all phases of liquid 
movement in the organism, which is generally comprehended 
under the lymph vascular and blood vascular systems s» 
The lymph vascular system, it will be remembered, is co- 
extensive, with the entire animate body. Animation can not 
be maintained in the organism without lymph. It is a colloid 
carrying different amounts of solid particles. It is, therefore, 
the basis of all liquids of the body, with the exception of 
blood, and it composes the serum of blood. 
Lymph is the liquid that receives all of the substances, 
whether gases or otherwise, from the department of raw 
material intake, and transports them to the blood. Lymph 
receives all substances from the blood, at the capillaries and 
carries them into the channels of depuration and elimination, 
or into the elaborations preparatory to assimilation. Lymph 
is also the avenue of movement of disintegrated, or morbid 
substances, from the area of their accumulation, into channels 
232 



of depuration and elimination, or back into the veins and 
blood. From these statements, it will be seen, that lymph is 
the most important liquid or substance, of the entire body; 
and that it is the liquid in which, and from which, all of the 
ultimate functions of the body are carried on. 
The blood system is a common carrier, that functions between 
lymph of intake and lymph of extrusion. It receives all 
characters of substance absorbed from the alimentary system, 
or transfused through the respiratory system, and gives them 
off, with its serum, at the winking valves of the capillaries; 
where it receives all characters of gases from the lymph of the 
intercellular spaces and all characters of substances, in that 
lymph, when it re-enters the veins. It will be seen that the 
one important office of blood is that of, common carrier, and 
that it performs but one sole function, and that is transporta- 
tion. This may seem a little strange to those educated to the 
blood theory, but it is a physiologic fact. 
The department of use is the department of assimilation, 
or tissue construction; and consists in the final elaboration of 
substances in the spaces of the body, and their cohesion under 
force, or nerve stimulus, into animate structure. Assimilation 
receives extended discussion later, and will, therefore, not be 
given further attention here. 

The department of output includes all of the depuratory 
channels, and channels of liquid transmission, but especially 
the tubes of the nose, ears, eyes, mouth, the pulmonary tube, 
the alimentary canal, the tubes of the skin, uterus and vagina, 
and the tubes of the kidneys including those of urination so* 
All of the tubes mentioned in the last paragraph, that open 
by orifices at the periphery of the body, are both depuratory 
and eliminating. Those that do not open directly to the 
periphery of the body, by means of orifices, are depuratory 
tubes so s*» 

The nose, ears, eyes and mouth are eliminating. The aliment- 
ary canal is depuratory and eliminating. The accessory glands 
of the alimentary canal are only depuratory, for their 
excretions are only discharged into the alimentary canal, 
and may or may not be eliminated. 

n -33 



The respiratory tubes are depuratory, and may be eliminat- 
ing, and are, as to some substances. 

The kidney tubes are depuratory and may be eliminating, 
and are always directly eliminating; but it sometimes happens 
that occlusion occurs along the uriniferous tracks. 
The sudorific and sebaceous tubules of the skin, are depura- 
tory and eliminating, as are also, those of the uterus and 
vagina and the uriniferous tubes. 

In connection with all of these statements, it should be 
recalled, that all of the ductless glands of the body, are 
depuratory and may, to some extent be eliminating; but they 
have no organized tubes, and their excretions leave their sub- 
stance, in gas or liquid transportation, at first into lymph, 
and sometimes, through lymph into blood. That must depend 
on whether the lymph channel entered is directly eliminating 
or otherwise. 

If these physiologic departments are well remembered by the 
student, as he pursues his study, he will avoid confusion and 
need not be long in obtaining a comprehensive knowledge of 
physiology e«» s& 



234 



CHAPTER NO. 22 

Basic Principles of Physiology 

PHYSIOLOGY is a description of the functions of the 
various organs of the body independently or collectively. 
T[ Taking the view of the organism as presented in the 
former chapter, we see only a machine with all of its ele- 
mental parts operating in harmony one with another, which 
is termed co-ordinance. 

Viewing the human machine in its approach to perfection, we 
cast about for some appropriate term by which that condi- 
tion shall be properly designated. 

The term, natural, has been much abused by being used as a 
name for this condition. It is incorrect and is not a term that 
can be applied to this condition in any sense because all that 
is, is natural. 

No matter how unusual a condition may be, it is none the 
less natural. If a twig were bent gradually so as to form a 
circle, and became a tree in that shape, the condition would 
be perfectly natural, although remarkably unusual. 
Scientists would apply the term unnatural to such condition,, 
or any unusual condition, but it is as completely apparent, 
since all phenomena are natural, that there is no condition 
which can be properly designated as unnatural, and the word 
should be eliminated from our language. 
The term, usual, very nearly expresses the idea, with the term, 
unusual, to express the exception met with. However, there is 
a more comprehensive term which, because of its somewhat 
general usage relative to physical conditions, has been adopted, 
If The term referred to is the word, normal. The only criti- 
cism that may be applied to this term, is that it presupposes a 
condition not existing. That is, that there is a standard of 
normality, which there is not. 

135 



It is conceivable, however, that there is in Formative Intelli- 
gence an image of what each human organism should be, and 
that image would be the normal. 

Our knowledge, however, of the normal may not rise higher 
than an approximation. We conceive the organism to be 
normal, when all of its organs are performing their functions 
in such manner, that their co-ordinance results in a process 
without pain or uneasiness, free, active, and strong in every 
part. Any departure from such a process is correctly styled 
abnormal s«* jx* 

It will be clearly seen that each individual is a law unto 
himself, as it were, and that the approximation, as to his 
normal process, and hence his phases of abnormality must be 
arrived at, as a separate and isolated study, aided only by 
relative deductions. 

It is the duty of the student of physiology to form as com- 
plete a knowledge as possible of normal function, and in 
order to do so, it is very clear that his approximations must 
be made with respect to laws of abnormality as well as those 
of the normal, which includes that branch of study denomi- 
nated pathology. 

It is clearly apparent that physiology can not be studied 
abstractly by an observance of the function of the whole 
organism as an entirety, but the organism must be analyzed 
and its parts known and understood, not only relative to their 
own activities, but the activities of each must be understood 
with relation to those of each co-ordinating. It therefore 
becomes necessary, first to ascertain to what point the 
organism can be reduced, or in other words, to know, so near 
as possible, of what the organism consisted, in our first 
knowledge of it, and from that point to study its growth; the 
production of its various organs, and the reason therefor; the 
purpose of the formation of each, and the general object to 
be attained by all. 

The application of this rule necessarily takes us back to the 
foundation of material existence, the dawn of zygotic life, or 
the impregnated ovum. 

A person begins so far as physiology is concerned, in a 
236 



single cell, or cell element, composed of protoplasm, the 
lowest form of organized matter, and a clear water-like sub- 
stance which is not well known or understood, and all of the 
laws of normality are seen to apply as completely to that 
substance in that humble origin, as to the most complete 
organism known. 

Upon that physiologic fact is predicated the deduction, that 
behind the impregnated ovum, there must be an organized 
intelligence constructive and maintaining, producing and 
acting through the material parts of the ovum. 
It is found that from this cellular center the organism is 
completed by a process of evolution, or the formation or pro- 
duction of additional cells, the distinguished and remarkable 
part of which is that these cells are produced and arranged 
apparently to fit a plan, which results in the formation of an 
organism, separate, distinct, and individual in all of its parts, 
but still in co-ordination and appearance similar, to other 
organisms produced under like circumstances. 
Physiology of the organism, therefore, primarily consists in 
a knowledge of its cell elements or cells: (i). In the law of 
their production; (2). Their growth; (3). Their relation; 
(4). Their co-ordinance in conduct. It will be found necessary, 
before an understanding of these things can be had, to know 
the anatomy of the organism very thoroughly. 
In beginning, a study of the physiology of the organism, 
therefore, it must never be lost sight of, that there is a central 
intelligence acting through all of the cells, or cell-elements of 
the body, by virtue of some process, which brings them into 
harmonious activity, in such way as to produce an individual. 
Therefore, while we speak of the different parts of the body, 
the different substances of which the body is composed, that 
is, bone, cartilage, ligament, brain, pulmonary, liver and 
kidney tissue, including every structure, it must be remem- 
bered that all of such parts are alike in being composed of 
cells or cell elements. 

The differentiation of tissues consists wholly in the structure 
and arrangement of their cells, or cell elements, and that the 
names applied to them is only a more or less abortive attempt 

237 



to give a separate name to each characteristic structure, which 
is only valuable to the student, when such names assist in a 
clearer description of a part, and render a more comprehensive 
knowledge of its structure and, therefore, its function 
obtainable. If Physiology, consists in an analysis of all of 
the various structures of which the organism is composed, 
for the purpose of developing the laws of their production, 
growth, reproduction, relation, and co-ordinance. 
The student must never lose sight of the fact, while investi- 
gating a few cells of a given area, that they must of necessity 
bear direct relationship to the cells of any area of the organ- 
ism, and that knowledge with respect to the one set of cells is 
comparative knowledge with respect to all of the cells of the 
organism. 

Knowledge of the production of one cell is comparative knowl- 
edge, as to the production of every other cell; and knowledge 
of relation of one cell to another, is comparative knowledge as 
to the relation that exists between all cells. Knowledge 
of the co-ordinance, or conduct of two cells is comparative 
knowledge of the co-ordination of all of the cells of the body, 
or of the entire physiology of the organism. Generally speak- 
ing, there is a remarkable unanimity, in the physiology of all 
animate things, whether animal or vegetable. 
The processes by which plants, and the so-called lower 
forms of animals exist, are so exactly similar as to render the 
material distinctions, so far attempted, very unsatisfactory. 
If It is in animals where evolution has made the element of 
intelligence prominent that differentiations become marked; 
but these, under analysis, furnish little or no aid because the 
element of intelligence, after all, is an unknowable quantity. 
If Intelligence does not depend for its existence upon material 
in any sense which physiologists understand; that is to say, 
it leaves no marks on matter that can be isolated or described. 
Tf The physiologic aspect of intelligence is, that it acts 
through matter; but that matter is not a necessity to its 
existence, In other words, that intelligence is original and 
formative, and matter is but the vehicle through and by 
means of which it secures expression. 
238 



Based upon what has been said, it will be seen that physiology 
is the most important study in which a human being can 
engage. It is necessarily a study of himself, his origin, andjiis 
physical destiny, incidentally comprehending his ability to 
approach the normal constantly, or to constantly deviate 
from it, sinking into the labyrinth of abnormality, which 
means untimely decay and death. 



239 



CHAPTER NO. 23 

Anatomic Synopsis of Nerve System 

THE nerve system is said to consist of the brain and 
nerves s& $*> 

The brain consists of two principal parts, the cerebrum 
and cerebellum. These are each considered as being, in two 
lateral halves, called hemispheres. The fissure separating the 
hemispheres of the cerebrum is called the longitudinal. The 
so-called fissure that separates the cerebrum from the cere- 
bellum is called the transverse fissure. 




Schema showing the connections of the several parts of the brain (Cunningham) 
Fig. 8 — Mesencephalon 
The space between the black lines drawn across the picture indicates the mesencephalon, 
which is that portion that lies between the pons upon the one hand and the cerebrum upon 
the other. 

Both the cerebrum and cerebellum are enclosed within the 
three coverings of the brain, called from the brain out, the 
pia mater, the arachnoid mater and dura mater. These three 
maters construct two water sacs, that enclose the brain, and 
240 



outside of the dura mater, the skull also, completely covers 
the brain. 

The cerebrum lies in the headward chamber of the skull, 
above and ventral to the tentorium. The cerebellum lies in the 
dorso-feetward chamber, below the tentorium. These two 
principal parts of the brain are connected through the 
mesencephalon and the headward and feetward peduncles of 



Great 
horizontal 
fissure. 
V 



Ala lobuli &nir*lis Post-central 
I^obnlus centralis. % \ ^fissure. 



Pre clival fissure. 

Pnst-clival fissure. 





Post 
pyramid 

fissure 



RS?*" 



Fia. 9 — Headward and Feetward Surfaces of Cerebellum 
A, Headward surface, showing convolutions and lobes; B, Feetward surface, showing lobes, 
also divisions of Mesial feetward surface. 



24I 




the cerebellum, which arrange- 
ment necessarily includes thePons 
Varolii, and Medulla Oblongata so 
The mesencephalon is principally 
composed of the crus cerebri, and 
quadri-geminal bodies. These 
structures are mostly composed of 
nerves extending from the brain 
toward the body, incidentally the 
headwardpedunclesof cerebellum, 
extend toward the cerebrum. 
The nerves and ganglionic cells of 
the crus cerebri, together with 
those of the middle peduncles of 
the cerebellum, compose the pons 
varolii, which is a gangliated 
plexus for the rearrangement of 
nerves, to form cranial nerve 
trunks. The nerves and gangli- 
onic cells, from this structure, 
together with the feetward pe- 
duncles of the cerebellum, compose 
the medulla oblongata, which is 
another ganglionic plexus, for the 
rearrangement of nerves, to form 
cranial nerve trunks. The nerves 
left after the formation of the 
twenty-four cranial trunks, com- 
pose the vertebral cord. 



Fig. 10— Dorsal View Vertebral Cord and 
Intervertebral Trunks 
The student will note that the figure is turned 
slightly to the left. The dorsal part of the arch and 
fa y) s P mes °f the vertebrae have been removed so that 
the membranes around the cord and the location 
of the cord can be seen. Also, the intervertebral 
trunks may be seen and some of the primary ar- 
rangement of trunks outside the foramina. 



242 



The cerebrum and cerebellum are composed, on their outside 
surfaces of layers of gray cells, which are called, the cortex, and 
from which all nerves of the system have origin. These struc- 
tures have what is called the white medullary center, which is 
composed of myelin, and is a sustentacular tissue, to support 
and protect, the extension and rearrangement of nerves. 



OCCIPITAL 
POLE 



I I 



LONGITUDINAL 
FISSURE 




(SAd/frhoh) 



LONGITUDINAL 
FISSURE 



Fig. 11 — Cerebral Hemispheres— Top View 
The student is requested to note carefully the longitudinal fissure which, if open, would reveal 
the corpus callosum and also to note the convolutions of the cerebral cortex. One is looking 
down on this picture as though the skull and meninges of the top of the head have been removed. 

243 



The white medullary centers of these structures are almost 
wholly occupied by large ganglionic plexuses; in the cerebrum 
these are principally, the caudate and lenticular nuclei, 
claustrum and the Island of Reil, the amygdaloid nucleus and 
the optic thalamus. In the cerebellum, the dentate nucleus and 
the several smaller nuclei. The fact that these structures are 
called nuclei or thalami, does not change the fact, that they 
are ganglionic plexuses. 

The nerves have origin in the cortex and extend to, inter- 
convolutional, interlobular, interhemispherical and interbrain 
ramification. Nerves that are not engaged in these phases of 
ramification, extend to different parts or the organism s«* 



:. ieto- | 
occipital' 




Ascending fissure 
of Sylvius. 

Fissure 
of Sylvius, x 



'ORAU 



Fig. 12 — Brain — Side View 
This cut shows the left lateral surface of the left hemisphere of the cerebrum and also the 
cerebellum and f eetward from the cerebellum part of the pons jind headward half of the med- 
ulla. Note that the cut discloses and names the important fissures and lobes that are revealed 
from this aspect. 



It has already been stated, that the pons varolii and medulla 
oblongata, are the centers, of rearrangement for extension, of 
244 



eight pairs,' or sixteen cranial nerve trunks. The nerves left 
over from these are called," the vertebral cord, which extends 
feetward through the foramen magnum into the neural canal 
of the vertebral column to the level of the intervertebral 
substance between the first and second lumbar vertebrae, 
where it ends in the filum terminate, which attaches to the 
sacrum within the sacral canal and to the coccyx. 
The vertebral cord gives off thirty-one pairs, or sixty-two 
intervertebral, nerve trunks. These trunks are for the supply, 
in a general way, of the whole organism. 
Just outside of the intervertebral foramina, the intervertebral 
nerve trunks, divide into two principal divisions, the dorsal 
one of which, extends dorsally, from the foramina and rami- 
fies the general tissues of the dorsum to the median line. 
The other principal trunk, immediately divides in two 
primary divisions, one set of which, extend laterally and 
ramifies the wall of the body around to the median line at the 
venter. The other primary divisions are the visceral branches, 
and extend ventrally into the trunk cavity and enter into the 
composition of the visceral, ganglionic nerve trunks, which 
compose, the basis of the system, so long known as the 
" sympathetic." 

The arrangement just described applies to all of the inter- 
vertebral nerve trunks, except those from the eighth cervical, 
headward. The visceral division of these cervical trunks, 
instead of extending directly as visceral branches, as in the 
other cases, extend up inside of the neural canal within 
the dura-matral sheath, through the foramen magnum, 
where, as the vertebral contributions to the vertebral, 
accessory cranial trunks, they enter the sheaths of the 
pneumogastric trunks, and extend to supply the cervical and 
thoracic viscera by this protected route. 
The visceral branches from the seventh cervical feetward, 
after having extended into the cavity of the body, and into 
the visceral nerve trunks, are rearranged to construct several 
very important ganglionic plexuses, the principal ones of 
which are, the cardiac, solar, hypogastric and sacral. Before 
describing these, it should be stated that after rearrangement, 

245 



Sttptpior Ctrvlrnf Cfni/lion — V-^7 

Middle Cervionl Gai/yFto 
Inferior Cervical Ganglion 




eat Branch** 



Card in a BrS 



rrp Cardiac Plexus 
..Superficial ^ardia\ Plexus 



Solar Plrxus 



Hypogastric Plei.140 



Sacra? Ganfflt 



Gjuiahon Imj> 



Fig. 13 — Viscehal, Nerve System 
Cut shows a sagittal section slightly to the right of the vertebral column, showing, therefore, 
the right visceral trunk, its segments of origin from the intervertebral trunks and the several 
large ganglia and plexuses formed by trunks that are made up from it. 



through the ganglia of the visceral trunks, there is a very rich 
ramification, not involved in the centers just referred to, but 
classified as being immediate. 

The visceral nerve trunks, from the headward five thoracic, 
intervertebral trunks, generally extend headward in the 
visceral trunks, and compose three large cervical ganglia, 
called the superior, middle and inferior. The first being ventral 
to the atlas and axis, the second, ventral to the fifth and 
sixth cervical vertebrae and the third, ventral to the seventh 
and first thoracic vertebrae, relative to the head of the first 
rib. After rearrangement through these ganglia, there is a very 
rich immediate ramification to the relative tissue, extending 
to the eyeballs in the headward direction and to all of the 
viscera within the face and immediate cervical region s» 
From the headward ganglia two large cardiac trunks are 
formed, called the headward cardiac trunks, that extend into 
the thorax and aid in the formation of the cardiac plexus s& 
After rearrangement through the middle cervical ganglion, 
the nerves immediately ramify cervical viscera, and a second 
pair of trunks are formed, which extend into the thorax and 
also aid in the formation of the cardiac plexus. 
From the feetward cervical ganglia, there is a rich immediate 
ramification, and the third pair of trunks, called the cardiac, 
extend into the thorax and complete the cardiac plexus, 
which, it is seen, is composed from six trunks, two from the 
headward cervical ganglia; two from the middle cervical 
ganglia and, two from the feetward cervical ganglia. In con- 
nection with what has been said of the visceral nerve trunks, 
it must be understood that there is, from them, a rich ramifi- 
cation, to all parts of the brain. 

Nerves from the intervertebral trunks, from the third 
thoracic to, and including, the first lumbar, after being 
rearranged through the ganglia, of the visceral trunks, extend 
in three large trunks from each cord, called the splanchnic 
trunks ventro- feetward, through the diaphragm, where they 
form the great ganglionic arrangement, called the solar 
plexus, from which, after rearrangement, nerves extend to 
ramify substantially the entire abdominal viscera; the rami- 

247 



fication being considered generally as hepatic, splenic, gastric, 
pancreatic, suprarenal, renal, intestinal and mesenteric. A 
feetward sub-division of this ganglionic plexus is called the 
aortic, from which nerves especially ramify vessels of liquid 
movement, principally the blood vascular. 
Feetward from the aortic plexus, and at the bifurcation of the 
iliac artery, there is another large ganglionic plexus composed 
principally of nerves that extend from the solar plexus, but 
also from lumbo-sacral contribution, called the hypogastric 
plexus, from which the feetward abdominal, and headward, 
pelvic viscera are largely ramified. 

Further feetward in the pelvis, there is another ganglionic, 
plexiform arrangement, composed chiefly of lumbar and 
sacral, visceral nerves, called the sacral plexus, through which 
is accomplished ramification of the remainder of the pelvic 
viscera, with the exception of that ramified by the pudic 
nerve trunks, which are an arrangement from the sacral 
trunks s*> &d» 

The cranial trunks taken in their order from the headward 

aspect, are: 

ist Pair — Olfactory. 7th Pair — Facial. 

2nd Pair — Optic. 8th Pair — Auditory. 

3rd Pair — Motor Oculi. 9th Pair — Glosso-pharyngeal. 

4th Pair — Trochlear. 10th Pair — Pneumogastric. 

5th Pair — Trifacial. nth Pair — Vertebral accessory. 

6th Pair — Abducens. 12th Pair — Hypoglossal. 

The twenty-four cranial nerve trunks, are both somatic and 
visceral; that is, they ramify wall structures and visceral tis- 
sues. They are generally confined in their ramifications to the 
head and face; none extending beyond that except the hypo- 
glossal, the glossopharyngeal, the pneumogastric and ver- 
tebral accessory. The last two ramify as far feetward as the 
thoracic viscera, the pneumogastric extending through the 
diaphragm, to the solar plexus, through which it is rearranged 
to the stomach. 

Nerves, from the dorsal and lateral, primary divisions of the 
intervertebral trunks in the cervical region ramify the tissues 
248 




LI/ I AN 
S>uRE 

ANTERIOR PER- 
FORATED SPACE 
NFUNDI- 
BULUM 

POSTERIOR PER- 
FORATED SPACE 
.JCR'JS CEREBRI 



.OBLONGATA 



RtSELLUia 



Fig. 14 — Feetward Surface of Brain 
Cut shows the median aspect, the olfactory tracts and bulbs, the optic tracts and commissure, 
the mammillary bodies, the crus cerebri, pons and medulla, together with the apparent origin 
of all of the cranial trunks in order as indicated in this chapter. 

of the feetward part of the head, up to the vertex and into the 
temporal regions at the side, and feetward to the region of the 
thorax, both ventral and dorsal. This arrangement is called 
the cervical, somatic plexus, and includes the first, second, 
third and fourth pairs of trunks. 

Nerves from fifth, sixth, seventh, and eighth cervical, and 
first and second thoracic trunks, compose what is called the 
brachial plexus, and being rearranged in the axilla of each 
side, ramify the thorax dorsally and ventrally, and furnish 
the entire ramification to the shoulders, arms, forearms, 
wrists, hands and fingers. 

The ramification of the dorsal and lateral, primary divisions 
of the thoracic, intervertebral nerve trunks, have been indi- 

249 



cated. They ramify the trunk in rings, as it were, obliquely 
dorso-ventrally. These series interlap over the whole trunk. 
This arrangement is continuous and without exception to 
the lumbar trunks; there the scheme indicated is partly 
carried out sufficient to supply the wall of the trunk, but other 
nerve trunks are rearranged for extension to the lower 
extremities, and these make up the lumbo-sacral, somatic 
plexus, through the medium of which the thighs, legs, ankles, 
feet and toes are ramified. 



250 



CHAPTER NO. 24 

Physiologic Analysis of Nerve 
System 

IN this chapter the Brain and Nerves will be discussed 
together. 

Anatomy teaches that the difference between brain and 
nerve tissue consists in the shape of the cells. In the brain the 
cells are nearly round while those in the nerves are elongated, 
forming what is called the gray axis cylinders. Nerves begin 
at brain cells, in gray axis cylinders and extend from that 
point to their terminal cells, which are in relation with the 
tissue elements to be stimulated. 

Nerve stimulus is an original, elemental energy. It is not 
manufactured, generated, or composed, but has a continuous, 
non-varying, eternal existence, not differing in that respect 
from other phases of force. However, its origin is from the 
source of animation, and is as bountiful as electricity, 
although in no sense similar. 

Nerve stimulus is an intelligent energy transmitted through 
the Soul of the individual, directly from the central intelli- 
gence of the universe, or Creator. 

The most important function of brain cells is to receive, by 
what process can only be conjectured, this elemental, original 
energy, and convey it into certain channels, the nerves, that 
transmit it to every atom of the organism. 
Another important function of the brain is the production of 
Mind, which, so far as can be ascertained, is a direct emana- 
tion or implantation from this original or kenetic energy $+■ 
Physiologically, it is known that Mind exists, as a result of 
the peculiar functioning of certain brain cells, but just how 
that function is performed must, in all probability forever 

251 



remain undiscovered. It is, however, well known that Mind 
function, no matter how accomplished, is performed under 
the direct influence of nerve stimulus. 

It is the function of the nerves to receive the stimulus from 
the brain, and convey it to many ganglionic points through- 
out the, body, and from thence to the cell elements of the 
entire organism. 

Nerve trunks are usually spoken of by anatomists and phys- 
iologists as nerves. 

A nerve is a single thread, beginning at a cortical cell, in the 
brain, and ending in relation with cells in tissue. 
A nerve is composed of a jelly-like, protoplasmic substance, 
and is covered with neuroglia, or nerve paste, which is a pro- 
tection, and also an insulation, so that each single nerve 
conveys its stimulus without interference, throughout its 
entire length, when in normal condition. 
When two or more nerves are enclosed in neuroglia, or any 
form of nerve covering, they constitute a fasciculus, or trunk. 
TI When a fasciculus of nerves are enclosed in myelin or the 
white substance, they constitute a medullated trunk; but a 
single fasciculus or a nerve trunk may be medullated, or non- 
medullated s& $*■ 

In nerve trunks the fasciculi or bundles are not only separated 
from each other by neuroglia, but by septa given off from the 
epineurium, which is the sheath of the nerve trunk. 
The nerves of a fasciculus are separated by neuroglia and 
supported and bound together by a delicate connective tissue 
called endoneurium. The tubular sheath of a nerve trunk is 
called neurilemma. 

Ganglia are aggregations of nerve cells at certain parts of the 
organism, each ganglion cell being individual to its nerve. 
Ganglia act as reservoirs of nerve stimulus. The function 
of a ganglion is to supply, at times of emergency, their 
stored stimulus for immediate local use. 

The great ganglia of the organism are, therefore, placed at 
places where most effective, when such emergencies occur, 
which centers will be referred to particularly in the physi- 
ology of the various organs. 
252 



Nerves are also described as constituting plexuses at different 
parts of the system. 

A nerve plexus is a concentration and network of nerves, for 
rearrangement, and for the formation of new trunks, in which 
they are to further extend. 

A nerve plexus, must be carefully distinguished from a nerve 
trunk plexus, for they are wholly different. A nerve plexus 
being a network of rearranging nerves, while a trunk plexus 
is a network of rearranging nerve trunks. 
A nerve may extend through several ganglia and plexuses 
before reaching the area to be stimulated. Nerve plexuses 
and ganglia always occur together. * 

Stimulation, or delivery of nerve stimulus to cell elements of 
the body is not accomplished, by the nerve carrying the force 
into the cell; but is accomplished by the process of transmis- 
sion of stimulus from the bare terminal cell of the nerve to 
the tissue cell elements, the process requiring relationship, 
within a certain distance. Nerves are all bare gray cells at 
the ends, and in case of stimulation of the contents of vessels, 
the distance may be considerable. 

Sufficient has been said to make it clear that the brain is not 
only the principal organ of every function of the body, but 
is the primary organ of the body, and that while the brain 
must rely for the maintenance of its structure upon the ordi- 
nary processes of nutrition, yet that process has nothing to 
do with the principal function of the brain- — that of receiving 
the original, elemental energy that causes all animation so 
Nerves are only of slightly less importance than the brain, 
and from a functional standpoint of no less importance, for 
the reception of stimulus would be valueless without trans- 
mission and application, and these depend upon the nerves so 
The physiology of the tissues of the brain and nerve system 
will be apparent after the development of the various pro- 
cesses of nutrition, which will be found to begin with the 
digestive system. 

In passing, however, it can not be too deeply impressed that 
the tissues, of the brain and nerves, are to all intents and 
purposes like those of any other structure, and receive their 

z$3 



nutriment from the same processes, as do other classes of 
tissue si* so 

One physiologic law of the tissues of the brain and nerves 
must be noticed at this time. It is a law that is general in its 
application to tissue; and is that the more highly refined and 
delicate a tissue is, the greater the per cent of water entering 
into its composition. In some parts of the nerve system this 
amounts to some ninety per cent, in others eighty-three per 
cent, and in ordinary nerve tissue about eighty per cent. 



254 



CHAPTER NO. 25 

Physiologic Analysis of 
Alimentation 

ANATOMIC SYNOPSIS, 

THE digestive system is composed of a Principal Part \ 
which contains or is directly engaged in the conduct 
of substances introduced as food through it; and an 
Accessory Portion, which furnishes some aid to the process 
called Digestion, but does not come in contact with the 
contained or passing substances. 

The principal part of the digestive apparatus is an irregular 
tube, extending from the lips to the anus, called the Aliment- 
ary Canal, because it is the tube in which the aliment or food 
is conducted while undergoing its various processes, and from 
which its surplusage and residue is finally eliminated from 
the body. 

The accessory part of the digestive apparatus is composed of 
the salivary glands at the mouth; the gastric glands at the 
stomach, and the spleen, liver and pancreas at the small 
intestine s& so 

The alimentary canal is about thirty feet in length and is 
divided for convenience of description into the mouth, 
pharynx, esophagus, stomach and intestine. 

PHYSIOLOGIC ANALYSIS 

Digestion consists of all the various functions by which sub- 
stances used as food are prepared to be absorbed. Its primary 
step, therefore, is that termed Ingestion, which consists of 
taking substances for food into the body. 
So far as known, there are three digestive locations in the 

155 



alimentary canal; the mouth, the stomach, and the small 
intestine s^ s*» 

Each place is either directly in relation with the accessory 
organs which aid in its office, or in relation with a part of 
their machinery. These are: At the mouth, the ducts of the 
salivary glands; at the stomach, the gastric glands, which, by 
this reasoning, are accessory; and at the small intestine, the 
duct from the liver, which organ receives accessory contribu- 
tion from the spleen through the splenic vein, and from the 
pancreas through the pancreatic duct. 

The parts of the alimentary canal, between and beyond the 
digestive points mentioned, are primarily conducting tubes, 
but from the beginning of the small intestine, there is a con- 
stant absorption from the contents. 

The substances, beyond the digestive points, called feces, are 
largely eliminated from the body, as being unfit for further 
use in its economy, but it must be noted that much by-prod- 
uct lymph is absorbed here. 

Analytical chemists by consensus of opinion, have declared 
that the chemical formula of the human body is approxi- 
mately: Oxygen 72, hydrogen 9.10, nitrogen 2.5, carbon 13.50, 
phosphorus 1 . 1 5, calcium 1.30, sulphur .147, sodium .10, 
potassium .026, chlorin, .085. Traces in small and variable 
amounts of fluorin, iron, magnesium and silicon, with evi- 
dences of others not isolated. 

Of course the formula given, is not pretended to be correct, 
but is only an approximation induced from many analyses. 
Tf It will be understood that the combination and elaboration 
of the chemicals named, with others not yet known; and 
certain elements which are incapable of isolation, constitute 
an always varying compound which it is the office of certain 
functions, later to be described, to elaborate and use, looking 
to the necessities of the organism at the given time. 
As multitudinous as are the combinations of these original 
chemicals, with others not known, which can not even be 
conceived or approximated; the organism is possessed of the 
power,under normal conditions, to produce elaborations neces- 
sary to equilibrium and to its existence, growth and health s» 
256 



It is the primary office of the digestive system to properly 
prepare substances, taken into the body as food, in such a 
manner that its chemical elements shall be freed, elaborated, 
and brought to such consistence as to be absorbable by the 
organs having charge of that function, which are the villi of 
the small intestine, and the lymph glands generally of the 
entire intestinal tract. 

The physiology of absorption and its object will be fully 
described, as an incident to liquid movement, but at this time, 
in passing, it can not be too deeply impressed that prepara- 
tion for absorption is the primary object of digestion, and 
that absorption is the primary office to nutrition. 
Physiologists have always placed much emphasis upon the 
proposition that the mouth is the organ with which we eat; 
the mouth is only the first organ of ingestion, and thatproperly 
considered, the organism eats through its intestinal absorbents. 
\ It must also be remembered that many substances are 
taken into the liquids of the body through the absorbents, 
that can not enter into the economy of the body and, there- 
fore, are only substances for elimination. 
Since it is to furnish to the absorbents of the alimentary tube 
the chemicals necessary to material existence, that digestion 
is performed, it will be seen that those substances, other 
things being equal, which contain the greatest number of 
original chemical elements of which the organism is com- 
posed, so contained as to be easily freed, are the best sub- 
stances for food, and such combination of substances, as to 
reach the same chemical result or formula, is next in orders 
To secure these conditions, however, it will be found necessary 
to make radical changes in the substances used for food 
often, being careful not to mingle substances containing 
uncongenial or antagonistic chemicals at the same time s^ 
It must, however, be understood that there is no positive 
law as to food selection that can be laid down. As to food 
selection, each individual is a law unto himself, and the law 
will be found to inhere, in his ever varying physical economic 
needs, and the ability of his digestive and absorptive pro- 
cesses to meet the requirements. 

257 



What is food to one person may not be food to another, but 
by adverse chemical combination constitute a poison. 
A substance that will meet with congenial conditions through- 
out the digestive parts of one system, may meet with antago- 
nistic conditions throughout those parts, of another system, 
both of which are considered to be in normal condition $t> 
Therefore, the selection of food must always be made, at best, 
as an advised guess, the advices arising from the experiences 
of the individual relative to eating. 

Eating is a process of medication, as well as nutrition, and 
must bear its share of dangers from error, which luckily are 
reduced to the minimum in the careful, because food products 
are not concentrated, as are the substances known to Materia 
Medica &&■ so 

There are certain attitudes that enter into, and largely con- 
trol digestion, which must not be overlooked at any point of 
the process. Anger, sorrow, mental excitement, fear, etc., 
render the machinery incapable of digestion, for reasons to be 
described, in connection with the physiology of such organs. 
Tf Therefore, no matter how erroneous the selection of an 
article for food may be, if it is going to be ingested, it should 
be taken without fear and it should not be feared after it has 
been swallowed. 

Many dietetic mistakes are made with relation to the various 
emotions, which it is impossible to describe and illustrate in 
this connection; but it will be sufficient to say, that one 
should not eat when emotionized, or while performing mental 
labor. The practice, therefore, of carrying on active, brilliant, 
or witty conversation at table, such as society requires, very 
much retards digestion. 

The proper attitude for the act of eating is entire passivity, 
so far as the emotions are concerned, with the whole mind 
forces, such as are active, centered upon the act of eating. It 
is very injurious and very considerably retards digestion to 
permit the Mind to be diverted from a keen, concentrated 
enjoyment of the viands, during the process of eating. 
From what has been said of food, it follows that water is really 
the leading food product, since it is the quickest and readiest 
258 



means, aside from the lungs, of conveying to the body the 
chemicals of which it is composed. Water is mentioned in 
this connection because it has not heretofore been considered 
as a food product. All other substances for food, will be found 
to be largely composed of water, with other incidental sub- 
stances s* s«» 

Another function performed under the influence of intuition 
is worthy of specific mention, not to say prominence, and that 
is the flow, at the proper time, of the so-called digestive 
juices; especially those of the salivary and gastric glands, as 
well as those of the spleen, liver and pancreas. 
The digestive glands, in their normal condition, when diges- 
tion is not going on, do not excrete or discharge their various 
digestive substances. It is true, there is a constant moistening 
of the mucous lining of the alimentary canal, but this is 
accomplished by the mucous glands. 

Immediately upon taking food into the mouth, or indeed, on 
coming in contact with the odor of viands, preparatory to 
eating, the various digestive glands become active, and upon 
taking food begin to discharge their liquids copiously; but 
however, in just sufficient amounts to accommodate the 
necessities of the occasion. When the process performed by 
each organ has been finished the juice from it ceases to flow. 
1f In this connection, it must be called to the attention of the 
student that the process of digestion is continuous until the 
ingested substance has passed through the three locations of 
the canal already mentioned. 

The admixture of the chemicals of the food, with the chemi- 
cals from the glands, in each of the three locations, aids in 
digestion, and the final admixture in the small intestine of 
the whole, which of course, contains the three separate 
elaborations, finally makes up the sum total and is digestion; 
the digested substance being called chyle. 



259 



CHAPTER NO. 26 

Digestion — Mouth 

ANATOMIC SYNOPSIS 

THE mouth is the cavity, behind the lips and in front of 
the pillars of the fauces, and between. the cheeks. It 
consists of two departments, the vestibule, outside of 
the teeth, and the oral cavity, within the embrace of the 
rami of the mandible. 

The digestive machinery of the mouth, is the teeth and the 
tongue. There are two sets of teeth, the temporary and 
permanent. The tongue has three sets of taste buds: 1, con- 
ical; 1, fungiform; and 3, circumvallate. It is an organ of 
taste and mastication. 

The accessory glands of the mouth are the six salivary, 
arranged in three pairs, the parotid, the submaxillary, and 
the sublingual. The parotids discharging their excretion into 
the vestibule, opposite the second molar tooth of the head- 
ward jaw, while the other two discharge, on the floor of the 
mouth, at the sides of the tongue. In addition to these there 
are the mucous glands, of the lining membrane of the mouth. 
\ The mouth opens dorsalward, through the isthmus of the 
fauces, into the oral pharynx, then feetward into the laryngeal 
pharynx and from that into the esophagus, which leads to 
the stomach. 

Nerves — The mouth is chiefly ramified by the pharyngeal 
branch of the superior maxillary division of the tri-facial, the 
lingual branch of the inferior maxillary division, the glosso- 
pharyngeal, the hypoglossal, with contributions from the 
pneumogastric and the so-called sympathetic, also from the 
third and fourth thoracic and first and second cervical trunks. 
260 



PHYSIOLOGIC ANALYSIS 

Two processes are included in mouth digestion; the first 
mastication, and the second, insalivation. 
Mastication is the process by which food products are manip- 
ulated by the mouth, including incising it from other sub- 
stances where that function is necessary. 
The process of mastication consists in grinding the food 
between the teeth, against which it is held by the lips, cheeks, 
gums and tongue, and by the manipulations of the tongue, it 
is carried from side to side of the mouth, projected into the 
vestibule, and brought back into the mouth proper, with the 
aid of the muscles of the cheeks and labial folds. 




Fig. 15 — Tongue and Papillae 
The sulcus terminalis surrounded by the circumoallate pipillae, next filliform papillae and 
finally fungiform papillae. 

This process of mixing is not performed by itself, but is 
materially aided by the saliva, which is, by the process just 

261 



described, thoroughly admixed with the food, which is called 
Insalivation so so 

The saliva is obtained from the salivary glands, and certain 
incidental glands of the same character, the principal saliva 
reaching the mouth through the several ducts described in 
the anatomy of salivary glands. 

Saliva is a transparent lymphoid fluid with a specific gravity 
of 103 to 105, having usually an alkaline reaction. It will be 
at once understood, however, that saliva, on being discharged 
from the duct of each gland, is at once admixed with that 
from the other glands, as well as that from the mucous glands, 
which is also discharged into the mouth, so that without 
mechanical interference it is impossible to get pure saliva so 




Fig. 16 — Salivary Glands 
The student will note that, the cut shows the right parotid, the right sub-maxillary and sub- 
lingual glands practically in situ. A right portion of the mandible has been removed. The 
sub-maxillary gland is pushed down to show its arterial supply; to bring it to situ, it should 
be turned up so as to hide the artery. 

262 



To obtain saliva by mechanical interference is to produce 
excitement, changing the consistency of saliva, so that it is 
impossible to obtain normal saliva for examination, and if it 
could be done, it will at once be seen that an analysis of it, 
could only be made of morbid substance, after the life ele- 
ment had escaped, or in other words, after all those elements, 
which constitute the difference between living and dead 
saliva, had passed from it. 

So that an analysis of saliva could not be correct, and 
could in no sense be a guide, to its consistency as an animate 
substance, and could rise no higher in value than, an 
unsatisfactory approximation. 

However, physiologists have professed to analyze saliva and 
say that it consists of 994.1% water, with 5.9% solids, in 
which they claim to have isolated ten distinct chemicals, in 
varying parts, which are not quoted here, because any 
analysis of. saliva, for the reasons stated, is not sufficiently 
reliable to be of value. 

However, the fact remains that saliva does contain certain 
chemical elements which are not found at other points in the 
digestive tract. 

Saliva is a constantly varying fluid, the saliva of each indi- 
vidual depending for its consistency upon the condition of 
that organism, at a given time; and it is well known that the 
chemistry of the organism is constantly varying. 
It is, therefore, quite impossible to state, just what effect the 
admixture of saliva has upon the food. It is probable that it 
has a markedly varying effect, since we know that it is some- 
times alkaline, and sometimes acid in its reaction, which could 
not be true if its reaction upon food was always the same st> 
It has been found, however, that in its varying conditions 
it is a necessary element to proper digestion, the mingling of 
its water and chemical parts, with the chemical elements of 
food, being absolutely necessary, to prepare food for further 
elaboration in the stomach. It is probably true that the most 
important effect of saliva upon food is its solvent and diluent 
quality so so 

The statement usually made by physiologists, that the 

263 



reaction of saliva converts starch into sugar, is not reliable. 
It may do so, but must not be relied upon as being in any 
sense, always true. 

It will be remembered that the ducts from the parotid gland, 
Stenson's, discharge on each side into the mouth in the upper 
part of the vestibule from the wall of the cheek opposite the 
second molar tooth. This will be observed to be immediately 
above the grinding teeth of the upper and lower jaws. 



ftajsed through 
■St&no'j druct 




Seotional^'iew oi tlic Nose, Moutb, Pharynx, /etc. 



Fig. 17 — Mooth, Pharynx and Esophagus 
It will be noted that lines are drawn, to schematically illustrate, the separation of the pharynx 
in the order from above downward. The left side of the larynx and epiglottis are also shown. 



It will also be remembered that the ducts from the Sub- 
maxillary and Sublingual glands discharge upon the floor of 
264 



the mouth at each side of the jraenum linguae^ which is inside 
the walls of the mandible, and immediately below the grind- 
ing teeth of the jaws. 

It will be seen that the salivary glands are so situated that 
each movement of the tongue from the median line toward 
the jaw, forces the saliva from below upward into the grinding 
process, and that each contraction of the muscles of the cheek, 
forces saliva from above downward, into the grinding process. 
If These liquids are augmented by that from the incidental 
salivary glands, and a large number of mucous glands situated 
in the lining of the mouth. \ The process of insalivation is 
slighted, through ignorance, by the great majority, who rarely 
masticate their food, properly speaking, at all, or but little, 
and force it down by the use of liquids. 

No liquid should be taken into the mouth while there is food 
substances therein, that require mastication. Primarily, 
because to do so aborts the "process of insalivation, and 
secondly because to furnish such artificial aid to mastication, 
is to artificially perform a function for the salivary glands, 
which will soon result in those organs failing to perform that 
function normally when relied upon to do so, following the 
law, that applies equally to all parts of the body, that inac- 
tivity or lack of proper exercise results in loss of power so 
The process of insalivation, from the mechanical aspect, 
should be continued until starchy food substances, in the 
mouth are of the consistency, generally speaking, of paste. 
This, of course, referring to solid foods. 

Meats require much less mastication, the rule being that the 
finer the meat the more it must be chewed. Coarse meat, like 
beef, needs very little chewing, it is usually over-masticated. 
Liquid food, if taken at all, should be retained in the mouth 
and moved about by the tongue, until it has had an oppor- 
tunity to be thoroughly admixed with saliva. 
When food has been properly masticated in either event, it 
should be deglutited, a process which is performed principally 
by the tongue, aided somewhat by the relative muscles of the 
mouth. ^[ Deglutition consists in passing the food dorsalward 
from the mouth into the pharynx. 

265 



CHAPTER NO. 27 

Digestion — Stomach 

ANATOMIC SYNOPSIS 

THE stomach is the most dilated portion of the alimen- 
tary canal. It has a fundus, body, and pyloric portions. 
^[The stomach is a somewhat pear-shaped organ, flat- 
tened on the ventral and dorsal aspects, and is from eight to 




Fig. 18 — Stomach, Showing Muscular Coats 
This is a good cut. The student should note the short curvature and long curvature as indi- 
cated. The fundus is that portion headward to the line drawn from the cardia across. The 
body lies between that and the next line and the pyloric antrum is the remainder of the stomach. 

266 



twelve inches long, and is the link of connection, between the 

esophagus and duodenum. Its orifices are, the cardiac and 

pyloric, both of which are closed by sphincters. 

The wall of the stomach is composed of six coats, which from 

the outside are; the serous, the longitudinal muscular layer, 

the circular muscular layer, the oblique muscular layer, the 

submucous layer, and the mucous lining. 

The glands of the stomach are the Cardiac and Pyloric, which 

are large mucous glands; the common mucous gland, and the 

true Gastric glands. 

Nerves — The stomach is ramified principally by nerves from 

the fourth thoracic trunks, but also by nerves from the fifth 

and a few nerves from the third thoracic trunks. Also from the 

pneumogastric trunks and contributions from the vertebral 

accessory and phrenic. 

PHYSIOLOGIC ANALYSIS 

After deglutition the food passes through the pharynx and 
esophagus, receiving from the mucous membrane of these 
tubes mucous fluids, with which it intermingles. At the termi- 
nation of the esophagus it passes through the cardiac orifice 
into the stomach; which is but a dilation or pouch to contain 
the food during stomach digestion. 

Liquid substances taken for food pass directly along the 
short curvature of the stomach to the pyloric portion of the 
stomach; through the pyloric orifice of which, they are soon 
discharged into the intestine. 

That portion of food classified as solid, is retained in the 
stomach, occupying the body and fundus. At the conclusion 
of ingestion the sphincters of the cardiac orifice, as well as of 
the pyloric orifice, contract, closing the stomach, after which 
a muscular operation, somewhat analogous to that by which 
food was propelled through the esophagus, called peristalsis, 
begins s» s& 

The three layers of muscular fibres of the stomach contract- 
ing and relaxing alternately cause the food substances in the 
stomach to be carried around the walls of the stomach, being 

267 



turned over and over, so that each part is thoroughly inter- 
mingled with all other parts, the external surface of the con- 
tained mass being constantly kept in contact with the mucous 
wall of the stomach over the fundus and body in such way as 
to receive the juices from the gastric and mucous glands s^ 
The process is seen to resemble very considerably that of an 
old fashioned churn. As the parts are thus intermingled, those 
more easily soluble soonest become liquid and ready for 
passage into the intestine. These substances, by reason of the 
peculiar muscular arrangement, movement, and form of the 
stomach, are carried into the pyloric portion, from which, 
when accumulated in sufficient quantity, that the pyloric 
orifice opens, they are discharged into the intestine, after 
which that orifice closes again. 

The stomach continues this operation until all of the sub- 
stances possible to be reduced to liquid have been so reduced, 
and passed through the pylorus into the intestine. This 
process usually requires two or three hours. 
In this connection, reference is necessary to the power the 
stomach has of freeing itself, through the channel described, 
of substances of considerable size which do not become liquid 
by its manipulations. The reference is to the resistant skins or 
coverings of many fruits and vegetables; also to marbles, but- 
tons, pieces of money, etc., that are sometimes swallowed. 
These must await the passage of substances reducible, and 
then are passed when the stomach entirely reduces its cavity. 
^ The gastric juice is a composite fluid, principally derived 
from the so-called true gastric, cardiac and pyloric glands, 
and a large number of other glands, situated generally over 
the mucous membrane of the stomach. 

There have been many attempts to secure chemical analysis 
of gastric juice, but like saliva, it is a constantly changing 
substance; normal when the organism is normal, abnormal at 
other times; and since there is no standard of normality, there 
is no standard of consistence of this juice. 
Most physiologists now base their analysis, upon certain 
experiments made by Beaumont upon a man named St. 
Martin, in whose stomach there existed, as the result of a 
a68 



gun shot wound, an opening leading directly into the stomach 
near its upper part, about three inches from the cardiac 
orifice so» s^ 

In describing the process, Kirke says that the introduction of 
any mechanical instrument, as the bulb 'of a thermometer, 
into the stomach through this opening, " at once excited the 
secretion of gastric fluid," which was drawn off, and from it 
analysis was made. 

Other experiments have been tried through fistulas, and it is 
upon the analyses of morbid gastric juice made after this 
manner that we must depend for any knowledge of that 
subject $* s& 

These very unreliable analyses have been given to us, by 
physiologists as being correct, and the proportionate per cent 
of chemicals of each substance as being correct component 
parts, of gastric juice, entirely overlooking the fact that 
gastric liquid discharged on account of excitement, such as 
mechanical irritation or otherwise, would of necessity pro- 
duce abnormal juice and also overlooking the fact, that the 
juices exuded from the walls of a wounded stomach would not 
be normal, and that mechanical interference necessary, to 
draw off the liquid, would result in its abnormality. 
But last and most important of all, even if the normal liquid 
could be obtained, it would be inanimate when analyzed, and 
its chemistry changed, having lost those substances which 
constitute the difference between animate and inanimate 
gastric juice. 

The juices of the alimentary canal have all been analyzed and 
their constituents announced, by the devotees of internal 
medicine, for the purpose of deceiving the laity into a belief 
in the value of internal medicine. 

Devotees of medicine hope that some day they may reach 
such knowledge of chemical consistence as to enable them to 
intermingle medical chemicals with the juices and foods in 
the stomach advantageously, and with certainty of results, 
which has not, and will not be attained. 
The so-called standard analysis, made as indicated, declares 
that, in the gastric juice of the human stomach, there are 

269 



994-4 parts water, with 5.6 parts solids; the solids being 
classified as consisting of pepsin and free hydrochloric acid, 
and containing calcium, sodium, potassium, magnesium and 
iron phosphates. 

However unreliable the figures just given may be, it is true 
that the cells in the wall of the stomach, excrete much water 
containing a diversity of chemical elements, which constitute 
an ever changing formula, exerting a marked influence upon 
the substances for digestion in the stomach. Just what these 
influences are, or how they are accomplished, is unknown so 
It is known, that the result of such intermingling is the reduc- 
tion of the food solids into liquid, and the admixture of the 
chemicals of the gastric juices with those of the food in such 
manner as to produce a substance ordinarily milky in color, 
depending somewhat upon the coloring matter of the foods 
eaten, and about the density of cream, called chyme. 
The stomach may, therefore, be said to be a laboratory for 
the admixture of its juices with the food, the muscular 
manipulation aiding materially in that operation. 
Chyme is not a digested substance, but is a chemically elab- 
orated substance, ready for further processes of digestion in 
the small intestine. The quantity of gastric juice excreted 
daily, of course, can only be approximated. It varies remark- 
ably, with the condition of the individual, but in the average 
adult, it may be said to vary from ten to twenty pints each 
twenty-four hours. 

Proper digestion in the stomach is facilitated by the taking 
of a considerable portion of water at eating times. This, 
however, should never be taken when there is solid food 
in the mouth, and indeed, the better time to take the liquid is 
after finishing the solids at the close of the meal, and just 
before retiring from the table. 

Sufficient liquid should be taken following the meal, that the 
individual need not drink again, within two or three hours, to 
the end that when the stomach has closed its orifices, and 
commenced its process of digestion, it need not be interrupted 
and that process stopped and its normality largely, if not 
entirely destroyed, by taking liquids into the stomach. Of 
270 



course this applies to taking anything into the stomach at 
such times. 

Vomiting is not a part of digestion, but since it is a phenom- 
enon largely of the stomach, it need only be said that it is 
performed by reversed peristalsis, beginning with the walls of 
the stomach, accelerated and aided by the violent contraction 
of the muscles of the abdomen, lessening that cavity head- 
wardly and thus forcing the stomach violently against the 
rigid diaphragm. 



271 



CHAPTER NO. 28 



Digestion — Small Intestine 



ANATOMIC SYNOPSIS 

THE small intestine begins at the pyloric orifice of the 
stomach and ends at the ileo-cecal orifice, where it 
extends into the large intestine. It is about twenty feet 
in length, beginning with a diameter of about two inches, and 
ending; with a diameter of one inch. 



Transverse colon (rut) 



Hematic ri?xure 01 



Common orifice of bile and 
pancreatic ducts 




Fig. 19 — Small Intestine 
Schematic arrangement to show not only the 
small intestine and convolutions but the remain- 
der of the intestine. The parts have been dis- 
torted by separation. The small intestine is 
closely infolded by the large intestine. The 
splenic flexure here is good, although it is too 
low by comparison with the hepatic 

272 



Pancreatic duct 



^kSplehix fltfcure of colon 



The small gut is in three divisions; duodenum, the length of 
the width of twelve fingers, about ten inches; the jejunum, 
arbitrarily eight feet long, and the ileum, the- rest of the gut, 
about twelve feet. Five layers of tissue compose its walls, 
which from the outside are; the serous c6vering, the longi- 
tudinal muscular layer, the circular muscular layer, the sub- 
mucous layer, including the muscularis mucosae, and the 
mucous lining. The mucous lining is in shelf-like invagina- 
tions called, valvulae conniventes, which retard substances in 
their passage. 



Mesentery^? 
[le.fl leaf 



Hoot of mesen-% 
ten/ 



Sigmoid flexure 
Ocum 




Fig. 20 — Root op Mesentery 
The small intestine is here gathered up and lifted headward and to the right so as to show, 
the line of reflection of the peritoneum, from the dorsal abdominal wall, from a point to the 
left of the second lumbar, obliquely down across to the right inguinal fossa. This is called the 
mesentery. 



The absorbents of the small intestine are: the villi, which are 
food substance absorbers, the simple follicles, the solitary 
glands, which are large lymph glands, and Pyer's patches, 
which are only aggregations of solitary glands. The mucous 
glands of the intestine are: Brunner's glands, which are 
found in the duodenum, and the common mucous glands, 
which are found quite thickly, in the mucous lining, of the 
whole gut. 

The small gut is retained to the dorsal abdominal wall, by 
folds of membrane called, the mesentery, between the layers 
of which, the nerves and arteries extend to supply the 
intestine, and the lymph vessels and veins extend away 
from the intestine. 

Nerves — The small intestine is principally ramified by nerves 
derived from the fourth, fifth, sixth, seventh, and eighth 
pairs of thoracic trunks, which reach the solar plexus through 
the great splanchnic trunks, there being rearranged, and 
ramifying the various parts of the intestine as follows: The 
duodenum, principally from the fourth to the sixth pairs 
inclusive; the jejunum and ileum from the sixth to eighth 
pairs inclusive. Some of the lower convolutions, of both are 
ramified from the trunks further down, including the second 
lumbar pair. 

THE SPLEEN 

is accessory to the liver, and is the largest ductless gland. It 
is about five inches in length, three in width, and one inch in 
thickness, and lies in relation with the dorso-headward 
aspect of the stomach. 

The spleen is rich in lymph glands and vessels, and is capable 
of containing much lymph and blood, for its size. The 
Splenic Vein is the largest radicle of the Portal Vein of the 
liver s«* so 

Nerves — The nerves, which ramify the spleen, are derived 
from the sixth, seventh, eighth and ninth thoracic trunks. They 
are conveyed through the great splanchnic trunks to the solar 
plexus, and there rearranged, entering the spleen through 
its hilum. 
274 




Fig. 21 — Spleen 
Cut shows gastric and renal surfaces, also shows the hilum — the splenic artery and its divisions, 
entering the substance of the spleen and the splenic veins, emerging from the substance of 
the spleen and converging to form the splenic vein. 



THE LIVER 

is the largest ductile gland in the body. It lies under the 
diaphragm, in the right hypochondriac region, extending to 
the left nearly across the headward part of the epigastric 
region. It has a right and left lobe, and is covered with serous 
membrane, except where it lies in relation with the dia- 
phragm. Under the serous coat, it has a fibrous coat, which 
at its hilum is called the Capsule of Glisson, which enters 
the liver substance and aids in forming the portal canals s+ 
Through the hilum of the liver, called the transverse fissure, 
the nerve trunks, portal vein, and artery extend, into its 
substance, and the hepatic duct, extends out of it. The liver, 
like all glands has a cortex and medullary center, its specific 
gravity is 1.05. It is a soft-solid, friable and easily lacerated. 

275 




End of right suprarenal vein 
Suprarenal impression 

Right end of caudate lobe 

Uncovered area of right lobs 
Renal impression 

Attachment ofrigb. 
1 ligament 



>^|Por(Al fissure 
"% Umbilical n 



Fig. ii — Headward and Fbetward Surfaces of Liver 
], Headward surface looked at from behind, showing lobes and ligaments; 2, Shows feetward 
surface tipped up from the dorsum, showing the uncovered area — transverse fissure — bladder 
— lobes — impressions and fissures. 



Nerves — The whole substance of the liver is very richly 
ramified by nerves which, generally speaking, follow the 
vessels of liquid movement. They are derived from the fifth, 
276 



sixth, seventh and eighth pairs of thoracic trunks, which, con- 
tributing to the great splanchnic trunks on each side, reach 
the solar plexus, and are there rearranged and extend to and 
ramify the liver, entering its substance at the transverse 
fissure. It also receives a ramification from the pneumogastric 
and phrenic trunks, but principally from the fifth, sixth, and 
seventh thoracic trunks. 



THE PANCREAS 

is a compound, racemose gland, much like the salivary, only 
much softer, and less compactly arranged. It is placed dorsal, 
to the feetward part of the stomach, and extends from the 
right side of the vertebral column, across it to the left, a 
distance of from, five to six inches, its breadth is about an 
inch and a half, and its thickness about one inch. It is irreg- 




Inferior mesent 
artery 



fsnjjcrtor niesenteric 
aiter)/ 



Fig. 23 — Duodenum, Pancreas and Spleen 
The student's attention is especially called to the pyloric sphincter, as indicated; also to the 
duodeno-jejunal flexure — note carefully the sharpness of its angle. 

In looking at this picture, the student should remember that if the liver were turned feetward 
to normal position it would entirely hide the kidney and most of the duodenum and bring the 
gall bladder so that it would rest between the kidney and duodenum as indicated. 

2W 



ularly prismatic in shape. Its head extends to the right of the 
duodenum in the curve of which, is its neck. The tail of the 
pancreas lies in relation with the spleen. Its duct, the canal 
of Wirsung, begins in its tail, and extends through its length, 
ending at the intestine. 

Nerves — The pancreas is principally ramified by nerves from 
the sixth, seventh and eighth pairs of thoracic trunks, which 
reach the solar plexus through the great splanchnic trunks, 
and thence, after rearrangement, extend to and ramify the 
pancreas so so 

PHYSIOLOGIC ANALYSIS 

Intestinal digestion is performed in thatpart of the alimentary 
canal between the pyloric orifice and the ileo-cecal valve so 
As will be remembered, this is a peculiarly constructed tube 
about twenty feet in length. The digestive function is very 
largely performed in the duodenum and upper third of the 
jejunum. However, it may be well conceived that the process 
continues throughout the whole tube. 

During the active process of digestion, not only is the pyloric 
orifice closed, but the ileo-cecal valve, is closed, completing a 
very remarkable compartment of the alimentary canal, to 
retain food properties entering it, from the stomach as 
chyme, until the digestive office has been performed, and 
also until absorption has had opportunity to take place. 
These processes normally require from three to five hours. 
II The construction of the inner surface of the tube aids very 
materially in the retention of the substances to give time for 
the digestive process. 

Reference here is to the valvulae connivences, which are 
described in the chapter on the anatomy of the small intestine. 
It will be found that those valve-like structures are so 
arranged, that during the process of digestion, the contents 
are moved spirally around the wall of the intestine, being 
pressed closely against the surface of its lining membrane, 
thus bringing it directly in contact with the orifices of the 
absorbents, and also in contact with the composite, digestive 
278 



substances discharged into the tube from the spleen and 
liver through the bile duct, and from the pancreas through 
the pancreatic duct, and from the mucous glands of the 
intestinal wall. 



Two mesenteric lymphatic gland 
Mesentery 



- Lymphatic 



Peritoneal coat 



Circular 
muscular fibres 



Longitudinal muscular fibres 




A B 

Fig. £i— Arrangement of the Mesentery and Valvulae Conniventes 
1, The larger portion of a convolution of small intestine is shown, a portion of it covered by the 
mesentery entire. To the right there is a portion from which the mesentery or serous coat, 
as to the ventral layer, is removed, showing the arteries, veins and lymph vessels and the 
longitudinal muscle layer. To the extreme right — longitudinal muscle layer is removed to 
show the circular layer. 

A, Segment of intestine hardened in situ, showing the valvulae conniventes; B, shows the 
same, only in the soft condition. However, the segment B is cut out of the side of the intestine. 
The cut must be turned top to the right, to see it as it should be. 

279 



These liquids descend in the intestine between its contents 
and the mucous lining, until the chyme is completely reduced 
to liquid or passes out of the small intestine. 
The so-called peristalsis of the intestine is characteristically 
like that of the stomach, except that, on account of there 
being no oblique fibres, its vibration is more completely 
vermiform s©» s& 

Intestinal digestion is performed by the union, or mingling of 
the chemic juices, from the abdominal accessory glands, with 
the chemic ingredients of chyme, or food elements. These are 
augmented by the chemic liquid exuded from the mucous 
glands a«* s«* 

It will be seen that the elements for this function are brought 
from a wide area of the body> and that, from quite a number 
of viscera are brought the substances which go into the 
formation of these several juices, a full understanding of 
which, can only be had by a separate description of the func- 
tions of the accessory organs of digestion. 

THE SPLEEN AND LIVER 

The physiology of these organs will be discussed together, 
because so far as digestion is concerned, the spleen is acces- 
sory to the liver. 

All contributory digestive offices of the spleen to the liver are 
not known; but the fact that the spleen is a very prominent 
place for the disintegration of red blood corpuscles, which 
having been re-carbondioxidized until they are no longer 
capable of taking on oxygen, proves that the liquids from the 
spleen are rich in that by-product, haemoglobin, which is one 
of the principal elements of bile. 

The fact that the spleen becomes very considerably con- 
gested, with blood and lymph, upon the gustatory impulse 
being aroused or upon the actual ingestion of food, is a very 
significant fact, as to its value as a digestive organ; for it will 
be readily understood that in the economy of nature an organ 
will not, normally, continuously act in a given way, unless 
such action is of the first importance. 
280 




Fig. 25 — Structure of Spleen 
Cut shows the schematic arrangement of the veins of the spleen, the trabeculae lymph areas 
and splenic pulp. 

The congestion of lymph and blood in the spleen is, not only 
to furnish to the liver the large amount of, carbon dioxide 
already mentioned, but to furnish a large amount of all the 
products elaborated in the liver; such as, glycogen, uric acid 
and perhaps others not yet isolated. 

It is now well established that the spleen is the place where a 
very large amount of the red corpuscles are disintegrated; the 
congestion is, therefore, also to furnish to the liver a large 
amount of freed haemoglobin and other coloring matter and 
chemicals to enter into the formation of bile. 
It must also be remembered in this connection that during 
the congestion of blood and lymph in the spleen, preparatory 
to intestinal digestion, that there is produced in the lymph 
walls of the splenic blood sinuses or splenic capillaries a very 
great number of leucocytes that pass immediately with the 
blood through the splenic and portal veins into the liver, and 
these being young and virile take up through the winking 
valves of the capillaries of the liver a large amount of gases, 
and in this manner aid in making possible the production of 
normal bile and other liver products. 

281 



The spleen, therefore, through its vein, which is the largest 
radicle to the portal, conveys to the liver, a large amount of 
carbon dioxide, and the principal coloring matter of bile, 
with some lesser chemicals not so well understood. 
There is also conveyed to the liver, from the capillaries of the 
intestines, mesentery, pancreas and stomach, as well as the 
omenta, a considerable amount of blood, which, from the 
additional fact, that a large part of it comes from the capil- 
laries of the large intestine, having received a large contribu- 
tion from its absorbents, is richly supplied with by-products; 
the whole being loaded with certain solid residues depurated 
from places of assimilation throughout the whole area just 
described se» s^ 

The veins draining the region referred to, it will be remem- 
bered, form the other radicles of the portal vein, through 
which the blood from that region together with the splenic 
blood, enters the liver through its various branches and 
extensive capillary systems. 

It is from the portal blood that the lymph is extruded, which 
when contributed to, by the hepatic cells, elaborates the sub- 
stances which form the primary constituents of bile, as well 
as glycogen and uric acid; substances to be more fully con- 
sidered in another chapter. 

Incidental constituents of bile, are also derived from the 
lymph extruded from the blood, reaching the liver through 
the hepatic artery. 

The machinery for the elaboration of bile, is described in the 
anatomy of the liver. It need only be stated here, that after 
the production of this substance, it is discharged through the 
ducts of the liver into the middle portion of the second divi- 
sion of the duodenum, there to begin the office of digestion s«* 
The bile is a highly reactive chemical substance, the con- 
stituent elements of which are only speculatively known. The 
consensus of supposed authority gives the chemical composi- 
tion of bile as being, in one thousand parts, 

Water 859.2 

Solids 140.8 

the solids being said to consist of: 
282 



Bile salts 91.5 

Fat 9.2 

Cholesterin » 2,6 

Salts 7.7 

Mucous and coloring matters 29.8 

For reasons heretofore stated, this must not be taken as 
authoritative. It is an analysis of inanimate bile, and there- 
fore does not pretend to give all of the chemicals, or nearly 
all, entering into the composition of bile. 
The analysis will, however, serve us for an approximation, 
until some method is devised, by which we can, without dis- 
turbing a normal system, analyze the bile while it is active 
in function. It seems improbable that such a result will ever 
be reached. 

Bile is, however, a viscid, reddish yellow, or brownish green 
liquid; bitter to the taste; and having just a perceptible odor; 
with a specific gravity of about 1020. 

It must, however, be remembered that bile is a constantly 
varying fluid, and that probably there are no two periods in 
the existence of an individual when an analysis of the bile, 
if it could be made, would be exactly the same. 
Bile is no more fixed, as to normality of consistence than the 
body, and will be as abnormal, generally speaking, as the 
body; but it will be especially abnormal with the abnormal- 
ity of the substance of the liver. 

The bile, as it approaches the duodenum, in the duct from the 
liver, becomes thicker and denser; this owing to the inter- 
mingling of its several chemicals and the lessening of the 
proportion of liquid ingredients. 

Bile not used at once in digestion, is stored, by the parts 
described in the anatomy of the ducts, in the gall bladder, 
and considerably densifies, and becomes of a deeper yellowish 
or reddish color and of more bitter taste, being called gall so 
The primary office of bile, in the duodenum, seems to be to 
emulsify fats and to furnish a cleansing or antiseptic influence, 
and to prevent fermentation. It is, however, to be remembered 
that it is in elaboration, with all of the other substances in the 

283 



intestine, that its functions are completed, and therefore they 
can not be separately known. 

THE PANCREAS 

It is the office of the pancreas to produce and project through 
its duct into the duodenum the pancreatic juice, which is a 
clear, slightly viscid liquid, probably alkaline in reaction, 
from the fact that the structure of the pancreas is much like 
that of the salivary glands, with a specific gravity of about 

IOIO. 

Speculative investigation has approximated that the com- 
ponent elements of one thousand parts of pancreatic juice are: 

Water 975 

Solids 25 

The solids consisting of ferments, proteids, leucin and tyrosin, 
fats, soaps, and inorganic residues, especially sodium carbonate . 
Pancreatic juice as will be remembered, is discharged into 
the duodenum in relation with the bile; and its chemicals are 
immediately mingled with those of the bile and food in the 
intestine, in which they aid in emulsifying fats and converting 
starch into sugar and performing such other functions as are 
necessary to further reduce the chyme, free its chemical 
elements and properly elaborate them so that they may be 
absorbed s& s«* 

When these offices have been accomplished, aided by the 
intermingling processes impelled by nerve stimulus, so that 
all of the elements of the contents of the intestine are 
thoroughly admixed, the portions more quickly liquefying 
pass rapidly ahead of the denser mass, in relation with the 
lining membrane, thus furnishing an undisturbed opportun- 
ity for absorption. 

The more solid portions are retained in the upper part of the 
tube until more thoroughly reduced by the juices. This 
process is continued until all is reduced if there is time, but 
if the intestine is too full or the substance is incongenial, the 
mass may reach the end of the ileum not digested and con- 
taining much nutrient substance. 
284 



At the proper time in the process; that is, when there is a 
sufficient accumulation pressing against the ileo-cecal valve, 
it opens, which is an office performed as a result of tissue 
sense and permits the passage of those substances into the 
cecum, then closes again; and so on, until digestion, or in 
case of failure of digestion, conduction from the intestine is 
completed $* s«* 

The liquid substance resulting from the digestive process in 
the small intestine, is called chyle, and when the substance 
has all been absorbed, or passed into the cecum, the process 
of intestinal digestion is terminated. 

It seems hardly necessary in this connection to mention that 
in case of excessive eating, a surplus is absorbed, resulting in 
an excess of lymph and blood and therefore a congestion at 
the places of assimilation and depuration, furnishing an 
active base, for toxins and other disintegrating processes, 
while uncongenial combinations of food, necessitate the 
direct absorption of toxins. 

It will be observed that in the normal condition the entire 
process of digestion requires from five to eight hours. Under 
our modern methods of eating, eight hours is the better 
approximation. That is to say, mouth digestion, thirty 
seconds to one minute; stomach digestion, two to three hours; 
intestinal digestion, three to five hours. 



285 



CHAPTER NO. 29 

Digestion — Large Intestine 

ANATOMIC SYNOPSIS 

THE large intestine extends from the ileum to the anus, 
with the exception that the cecum is feetward from the 
orifice of the ileum. 
The large intestine is about five feet long and begins with a 
diameter of about three inches, and ends with a diameter of 
about one inch. 
Its wall is constructed like the small intestine, as to its coats. 




Fig. 26 — Large Intestine 
1, shows sacculations — appendices and taenia. 2, shows interior of sacculations. The student 
should note the arrangement carefully. 3, shows cecum with aperture of ileum closed by ileo- 
cecal valve and aperture of appendix. The student should note that pressure toward the 
ileum serves to close instead of open the valve. The orifice of the appendix is constructed in 
like manner, although not shown in this cut. 

286 



The inside of the tube is different, its wall is sacculated, on 
account of the irregularity of the circular fibres, and there are 
no villi, the absorbents being the common follicles, and the 
solitary glands. The mucous glands are large and plentiful. 
The mucous lining is less blood vascular, and paler, than that 
of the small intestine. The longitudinal muscular fibres are in 
three bands called taenia. ^[ The gut is considered, under 
these divisions: cecum, colon, sigmoid colon and rectum. 
The cecum is considered under cecum proper and the vermi- 
form appendix, which is a wormlike hollow tube extendingaway 
from the gut, ending blindly, but discharging into the cecum. 
^[ The colon is composed of the ascending, transverse, and 
descending portions, with the hepatic flexure, joining the 
ascending and transverse portions, while the splenic flexure 
connects the transverse and descending portions. The 
sigmoid flexure connects the descending and sigmoid portions 
of the colon. It will be observed that the large intestine forms 
two almost complete circles in its extent, the encirclement of 
the small intestine by the large, and the pelvic loop of the 
sigmoid colon. The rectum is considered in two divisions, the 
rectum proper and the anal canal. The rectum extends from 
the third sacral segment to the anal canal. The anal canal 
completes the gut and penetrates the wall of the body and 
ends at the anus. 

Nerves — The cecum and appendix are principally ramified 
by nerves from the right second lumbar and twelfth thoracic 
trunks, with some nerves from the right first and third 
lumbar trunks. 

\ The ascending colon is principally ramified by nerves from 
the twelfth and eleventh thoracic and first and second lumbar 
trunks of the right side. 

The transverse colon is principally ramified by nerves from 
the sixth, seventh, eighth, ninth, and tenth thoracic trunks; 
and receives its richest supply from the seventh, eighth, 
ninth and tenth trunks. 

The descending colon is principally ramified by nerves from 
the eleventh and twelfth thoracic, and first and second lumbar 
trunks of the left side. 

287 



The sigmoid colon is principally ramified by nerves from the 

second and third lumbar trunks of both sides, but principally 

from the left side. 

Arteries — The rectum is principally supplied with blood from 

the hemorrhoidal branch of the inferior mesenteric artery; 

the middle hemorrhoidal from the internal iliac, and the 

inferior hemorrhoidal from the pudic artery. 

Veins — The veins correspond to the arteries and discharge 

their blood into the superior and inferior mesenteric veins, 

which are two radicles of the portal vein. 

The rectum is ramified by nerves from the first, second, third, 

fourth and fifth pairs of lumbar trunks, many of which extend 

to the hypogastric plexus and are there rearranged before 

ramifying the rectum. The rectum is also ramified by nerves 

from all the sacral and coccygeal trunks. 

This is especially important as to nerves from the three 

inferior sacral and coccygeal trunks in displacement of the 

sacrum or innominates. 

PHYSIOLOGIC ANALYSIS 

Generally speaking, physiologists are silent, or practically so, 
with relation to the physiology of the large intestine and 
for the reason that in experimental dissection the large 
intestine, constituting such an obnoxious part, is usually 
thrown away without examination. However, from the small 
fragment of anatomy of the large intestine that we have 
obtained, and from demonstrations upon the living body, we 
derive sufficient information to develop certain physiologic 
facts so so 

A consideration of the large intestine at the very outset 
presents to our view a situation so remarkable, as to render 
it necessary for a scholar to analyze it, and reach some con- 
clusion at once, and that is the fact that the large intestine 
is about five feet in length placed in such position as to form 
two almost complete circles, at least from its origin to its 
termination, when, if its only office, as suggested by physiolo- 
gists, was to convey the feces from the body, a nearly straight 
288 



tube eight to twelve inches in length would have accomplished 
the purpose just as completely and much more surely. 
Another thing! The lumen of this intestine begins with a 
diameter of about three inches, which decreases throughout 
its length, indicating that it was intended to contain much 
more at its beginning than at any point throughout its 
course, except its accommodative reservoir, in its last division, 
the rectum. 

The lumen at the beginning is very considerably encroached 
upon by the sacculations, so arranged that the feces, or con- 
tents, are passed spirally around the surface, in such manner 
that its progress is very much retarded. The sacculations 
become smaller throughout the extent of the intestine and 
cease at the upper part of the rectum. 

The intestine beginning with a diameter of three inches, at 
the level of the ileo-cecal valve is decreased to two and a 
half inches at the commencement of the colon, but the lumen 
of the tube here extends directly away from gravity for a 
distance varying from six to nine inches. 
The hepatic flexure, on the right side of the body bends the 
gut across to the splenic flexure, on the left side, while the 
sigmoid flexure bends the gut into the pelvis where a com- 
plete loop is formed between that point and the rectum, 
called the sigmoid loop. 

All of these morphologic obstructions to retard the passage 
of substances in this gut, clearly indicate important offices to 
be accomplished during their passage. In addition, it will be 
recalled that the solitary glands, which are absorbents, are 
quite thickly scattered in the mucous surface of the lumen; 
that they are of large size, being more numerous in the 
beginning, or so-called upper portion of the intestine; while 
the common follicles, also absorbents, are not so numerous 
and of so large size at the beginning, but increase in number 
and size throughout the intestine, being especially large in 
the rectum, so that their orifices can be seen with the naked 
eye $&■ s& 

There is also a large number of mucous glands thickly 
scattered over the whole mucous surface of this intestine, 

289 



which discharge their substance, between the wall and the 
feces, where it acts as a lubricant and, in the normal, prevents 
impaction or adhesion of that substance to the wall of the gut. 
The important function, performed in the large intestine is 
absorption, from its semi-liquid contents, of the residuary 
by-products left over from the compound called chyle, in the 
small intestine. 

The gaseous by-products are transfused through the winking 
valves of the capillaries of the mesenteric veins, and small 
lymph vessels discharge the lymph absorbed into the small 
mesenteric veins, and in this manner aid in the composition 
of bile and other by-product elaborations in the liver. 
These facts clearly indicate the value of normal conditions in 
this intestine, and should be sufficient to challenge the human 
family to its proper care. 

The cecum, being the great pouch in which the feces are first 
discharged from the small intestine, is a point from which a 
large absorption takes place. This sac is supplied with a small 
lubricator, the vermiform appendix, which excretes a thick 
mucous, that is discharged into the cecum, to moisten its 
walls, and thus to aid the passage of substances, while 
mingling its chemical parts with the elaboration there going 
on, and to prevent the contents of the cecum from sticking to 
its walls. 

Sufficient has been said of the remainder of the tube, except 
the rectum, at the beginning of which the sacculations disap- 
pear; but in the middle and lower part of the headward 
division of which, there is a large reservoir, to accommodate 
emergencies of accumulation of feces. 

It is arranged so that defecation can be postponed for many 
hours, permitting a constant accumulation in this reservoir. 
However, its normal need is to be emptied at once, upon feces 
accumulating. It was not intended that substances should be 
here retained, except in emergency. 

The accommodative powers of the rectum have led, through 
ignorance, to very destructive abuses of this portion of the 
tract, by individuals forming the habit of retention till toxins 
form, with material disbenefit to many portions of the body, 
290 



SUPERIOR 
HEMORRHOIDAL 

ARTERY 




MlOOLE 

HEMORRHOIDAL 

ARTER* 



INFERIOR 

HEMORRHOIDAL 
ARTERY 



'ah rcr 
(Chanty) 



Fig. 27 — Rectum 
Cut shows posterior view, curvatures, sacculations and anal canal, but principally shows the 
schema of the arteries and veins. 



through absorption of toxins, and scattering them, through 
the large glands, to the whole body. 

It is one of the considerable functions of the large intestine to 
conduct the substances, discharged through the ileo-cecal 
valve, throughout its length and to eliminate their somewhat 
solid residues from the body. 

This process is called defecation, a function which is per- 

291 



formed by virtue of a peculiar peristalsis of the rectum, aided 
by constrictions of the abdominal muscles and the immediate 
muscular tissue. 

Much injury is done to the tissues of the rectum, by the 
pernicious habit of water injection called enema. It should 
be, at all times understood, that the least mechanical inter- 
ference with the rectum the better. 

When the nerves to the rectum are free from occlusion, it 
should be left alone, except in last emergencies, to perform 
its function undisturbed. 

By last emergency, is meant toxic conditions, where because 
of impaction, or other obstruction, the toxic substance must 
be removed quickly, to accommodate other parts of the body. 



292 



CHAPTER NO. 30 

Physiologic Phases of Absorption 

THE phenomena of absorption has challenged the atten- 
tion of the human family from the dawn of intelligence. 
^[ Scientists have expended much time in investigations, 
looking to a disclosure of the laws involved in the operations 
which make up this branch ot physiology to render a descrip- 
tion thereof possible. 

Theorists have written volumes upon the subject of absorp- 
tion with a theory for an hypothesis , and a series of logical 
reasons, all theories, for a result. 

All of this energy and these volumes have been apparently 
wasted, for at the present time they are as far from a descrip- 
tion of the machinery by which absorption is accomplished, 
as they were in the beginning, and also from a description of 
the manner in which this function is performed. 
It is a remarkable physiologic fact, that the machinery and 
operation at the point of function, no matter at what place or 
in what relation, or of what character, is without description 
and is unknown. This includes the most infinitesimal and all 
parts of the entire organism. 

Absorption, depuration and assimilation, so far as demonstra- 
tion has gone, represent the ultimate objects of all the 
machinery of the body. All other machinery is accessory to 
one or more of these functions. 

That is to say, all of the machinery, which enters into the 
preparation of substances for absorption is accessory to that 
function, which is itself accessory to liquid movement, 
aeration and assimilation. 

All of the machinery, which takes part in the function of 
depuration, is accessory to it and also to assimilation. 

293 



Function classified under the three heads, absorption, depura- 
tion and assimilation, really comprehends the phenomena of 
animation, and is the most wonderful theme that could pos- 
sibly engage the attention of the mind. 

These three functions are all performed in areas too small 
for the microscope; performed in what are called, by the 
anatomists and physiologists, spaces of the body. That is to 
say, between the walls of cells, and in inter-molecular spaces, 
where there is absolutely no tissue, and therefore no machin- 
ery, which has ever been isolated and described. 
Yet absorption, depuration and assimilation are performed, 
with a regularity and thoroughness, such as to call for the 
greatest admiration of which we are capable. These spaces 
are co-extensive with the entire organism; are innumerable; 
and would compose a number incomprehensible if known so 
The difficulty which the student meets at this point, is to 
fully comprehend and appreciate the fact, that one or more 
of these functions are constantly going on to some extent 
in every atom of tissue of the body all the time, from the 
impregnated ovum, to the instant of dissolution, at no matter 
what age. The old physiologists are largely responsible, 
because of their egotistical desire for aggrandizement, for the 
limited concepts, generally held with respect to these func- 
tions So so 

Deduction from the basic principle of animation, which 
accounts for all phenomena, upon an actual mechanical basis, 
disassociated from theoretic reasoning, has shed much light 
upon these important functions. 

Beginning with the development of the fact that nerve 
stimulus is not a manufactured product, but is an original 
energy, which is collected by the brain, and is conveyed 
through nerves into relation with the atoms of the body, and 
stimulates them, without the use of any machinery that has 
ever been isolated, demonstrates that by the same process 
the intercellular and intermolecular spaces of the body are 
supplied with stimulus which acts there without discernible 
nerve organization, as well as it does in other matter. 
The facts stated demonstrate that the wonderful functions, 
294 



absorption, depuration, and assimilation are performed by 
this intelligent energy, acting through the cpII walls, fluid and 
liquid substances, in the intercellular and intermolecular 
spaces of the body; possibly through the medium of machin- 
ery which we have not discovered, but much more likely 
without the necessity for machinery as we understand it s& 
Absorption, like any function, is a process, too frequently 
looked upon as a condition. It has been generally considered 
to be the process, or series of processes, whereby liquids, 
colloids and other substances, are taken through the mem- 
branes or tissues of the body 

That is erroneous. Such action should be classified as osmosis, 
which is such passing through in either direction, not in 
normal channels. Endosmosis means such passing from with- 
out into a cavity or vessel; exosmosis means such passing out 
of a cavity or vessel. 

Absorption, however, in its primary and functional sense, 
relates to the bringing of original substances, through organ- 
ized channels, into the machinery of the body, for the pur- 
pose of elaboration and use in its economy, which function is 
performed solely through the villi of the small intestine; 
through the general absorbents of the entire intestine; and 
through the walls of the injundibula and alveoli of the lungs. 
\ It will therefore beunderstood that where the term absorption 
is used in this book, it relates to taking of original substances 
into the body; and wherever other functions are performed, 
which might, under old classifications have been called absorp- 
tion, they will be classified as osmosis of the various kinds s* 
Preparation for absorption, through the intercellular spaces 
of the epithelial surface of the lacteals and intestinal absorb- 
ents generally, has been fully described. It is only necessary 
here to say that absorption is accomplished solely under the 
direct and specific influence of nerve stimulus, which is 
proved, by a number of instances in the organism, to be pos- 
sessed of the power to propel liquids under certain conditions 
through parts ot the body, even directly against gravity so 
The principal illustrations of the propulsion of nerve stimu- 
lus are found, in the passage of fecal matter from the inferior 

295 



extremity of the cecum to the hepatic flexure of the colon, all 
the way against gravity; the liquid in the vessels of movement 
from the feet to the heart; the conveyance of seminal liquid 
from the testes to the seminal vesicles; and the follicular 
liquid from the surface of the ovary, into and through the 
Fallopian tubes into the uterus. 

It is by operation of this same law, that certain elements of 
chyle are impelled through the spaces of the surface of 
intestinal mucous membrane, through organized channels 
called intestinal absorbents, into the blood, constituting the 
substantial source of its volume. 

That nerve stimulus is an intelligent and accommodative 
energy in this regard, is proved by the fact that persons can, 
by practice, learn to work for long periods of time, without 
apparent injury, with the body inverted, which, if attempted 
at once, would result in grave congestion in the brain and 
tissues of the head. 

It is quite certain that little of the substance absorbed by the 
villi of the intestine enter the blood through the thoracic duct. 
It is certain that substances absorbed through the general 
absorbents of the intestine, are to a considerable extent dis- 
charged into the mesenteric blood, that from the large intestine, 
containing a larger per cent of by-products. 
It has been demonstrated that through the absorbents of the 
large intestine, the organism can, to a small degree, be 
nourished. However, it must be understood, that this is pri- 
marily, from sustaining the volume of lymph, blood and the 
gases and not the introduction of food. 

Absorption through the lungs, will be sufficiently described 
under the physiology of respiration, and it will only be here 
stated, that through absorption the lymph receives oxygen 
and water, with probably some other elements not known, 
which is passed through, the winking valves of the pulmonary 
capillary walls, into the blood. 

One other medium of entrance, of substances into the body, 
is through the skin, and this word skin as used includes the 
skin of the outside, or integument, and the skin of the inside, 
or mucous and serous membranes. 
296 



In order for substance, to pass through the skin, the condi- 
tions must be abnormal. That is to say, the skin itself must 
be abnormal in its relaxation; in the injury of its outer part; 
in the paralysis of its glands; or its surroundings must be 
sufficiently abnormal, to break down the resistance of the 
skin a©» s«* 

It is known that extreme thirst will be allayed usually, by 
immersing the body for a considerable length of time in water, 
which is a sufficiently abnormal condition to result in a 
temporary paralysis of the external cells of the skin, together 
with the periphera of nerves, so that the radiation of stimulus 
is occluded, and the cells thus rendered inactive, and normal 
resistance temporarily suspended. 

In the condition described, the entrance of liquid is an endos- 
mosis, because the elements are forced, by extrinsic pressure, 
into the machinery of the body, and not impelled into it, by 
nerve stimulus, as is the case in absorption. 
It is by the process of endosmosis that powerful chemicals, 
such as alcohol and turpentine, so quickly pass through the 
skin s«* si* 

It is by the process of endosmosis that substances enter the 
machinery of the body, through mucous membranes, not 
supplied with absorbents; such as the nasal meatus, pharynx, 
esophagus, and stomach. It is a great mistake to suppose that 
absorption, through the walls of the stomach, ever takes 
place; osmosis may, but absorption never. 
The serous membranes have been supposed to be supplied, 
with some kind of absorbents, because following abnormal 
conditions, in which there has been filtration into serous 
cavities, with the return of normal stimulus, the accumu- 
lated liquids are quickly passed through the membranes, into 
the lymph system, of the affected area, and carried away s* 
Removal of these liquids is accomplished by exosmosis, forced 
by the pressure of the contained fluid, acting in conjunction 
with lymph movement, under restored stimulus. Special 
reference is made to the cavities of the thorax, pericardium, 
and abdomen, as well as the meninges and ventricles of the 
brain and cord. 

297 



CHAPTER NO. 31 

Physiology of Lymph System 

ANATOMIC SYNOPSIS 

THE machinery of the lymph system begins with the 
villi, common follicles, and solitary glands of the 
intestine, and consists of lacteals, lymph spaces, canali- 
culi, capillaries, vessels and ducts, which include, depuratory 
tubes in the mucous and serous membranes, and the sudorific 
and sebaceous tubes of the skin. To these should also be 
added the lymph glands proper. 

The lacteals are the tubes that drain the villi of the intestine. 
Lymph spaces occur in every part of the animate body so 
Canaliculi are quasi-tubes that drain lymph spaces. Lymph 
capillaries are the beginnings of actual tubes for conveyance 
of lymph. Large lymph vessels are nearly always called ducts 
without any reason therefor. The tubes, through which 
mucous and serous membranes and the skin eliminate, extend 
direct from small lymph glands. These glands are called 
excretory so so 

Lymph glands are composed of a peculiar glandular sub- 
stance, and are globular or elongated. They have sinuses on 
the inside, or medullary portion, lined with epithelium. 
Among the cells of this epithelia, there grows a peculiar 
cell that has no tissue forming power, called a leucocyte so 
Lymph glands are very numerous throughout the body and 
compose the chief part of all the large glands of the body. 
They are specially aggregated in the cervical region, along on 
both sides of the vertebral column of the trunk, in the axilla 
and inguinal regions; in the femoral sheath and Hunter's 
canal; in the interosseous areas of the forearm and leg and 
within the skull relative to the sutures. 
298 



These statements, however, must not be permitted to lead 
the student's mind from the fact, that lymph glands are very 
richly supplied to all parts of the body. 
A leucocyte, when fully matured, separates from its nest of 
epithelial cells and floats in the lymph of the sinus, and 
passing out of the gland, travels in the lymph to its entrance 
into the blood, when it immediately becomes a white blood 
corpuscle, and then by the changes incident to aeration, it 
gradually becomes a red blood corpuscle and as such goes 
on to old age and disintegration. 

The two principal ducts of the lymph system are, the 
thoracic, which extends from the receptaculum chyli in front 
of the first lumbar vertebra, headward for fifteen to eighteen 
inches, where in relation with the seventh cervical vertebra 
it bends to the left and feetward, entering the left subclavian 
vein at its juncture with the mesial jugular, its diameter being 
about that of a goose quill; and the right lymphatic duct, 
which enters the right subclavian vein in the same manner 
as already described. 

The lymph movement may be conceived as occurring in two 
parts; primary lymph or lymph of immediate absorption; 
and secondary lymph, being that which has passed into and 
out of the blood. Secondary lymph, therefore, being generally 
found in the lymph spaces, canaliculi and vessels aside from 
those of the mesenteric region. 

Nerves — The lymph system is as extensive as the nerve 
system and, therefore, the only nerve ramification that can 
be given as to it is the ramification of any selected area, 
which must be left to the anatomic resource of the student. 

PHYSIOLOGIC ANALYSIS 

Primary lymph is a clear, or colored liquid, depending upon 
the activity of the digestive system, which furnishes to liquid 
movement its entire volume. 

The greater volume of primary lymph is derived from the 
villi of the small intestine, however, it must be recalled that 
lymph is absorbed through all of the intestinal absorbents «» 

299 




Fig. 28 — Thoracic Duct 
Cut not only shows thoracic duct, but receptaculuin chyii, the discharge point — the right 
lymphatic duct and also shows ti large number of vertebral lymph glands and lymph vessels. 

300 



During the process of digestion in the small intestine, it will 
be recalled that the chyle, as rapidly as fermed, is given a 
pressure and direction that brings it into close contact with 
the mucous lining, or as it were, with the villi of the intestine. 
Tj Nerve stimulus acting through the intercellular spaces and 
follicles of the villi and other absorbents, impels the sub- 
stance of the chyle into the lacteals, etc. The substances thus 
taken from chyle, should comprise the original elemental 
chemicals of which the organism is composed. 
The liquid solids, and a large amount of water, intermingled 
in the lacteals is termed lacteal fluid, which is to some extent 
carried into the receptaculum chyli and thoracic duct, 
through the lymph vessels of the mesentery, and thence 
headward to be intermingled with the blood at the angle of 
junction between the left subclavian and left mesial jugular 
vein s& s* 

It is believed by some physiologists, that certain of this liquid 
reaches the blood through the walls of the capillaries im- 
mediately adjacent to the lacteals, and in this manner reaches 
the portal circulation by way of the mesenteric circulation. 
This is the strongest reason for this blood going directly to 
the substance of the liver instead of returning to the heart, 
as is the usual method, for blood that has passed through one 
set of capillaries. 

At the points of intermingling of primary lymph with the 
blood, it becomes blood plasma, and enters the right auricle of 
the heart, and passes through the right auriculo-ventricular 
orifice into the right ventricle, and then through the pul- 
monary arteries to the lungs, where certain of its gases, 
principally carbon dioxide, are given off, and certain sub- 
stances, principally oxygen, are added. 

The blood plasma is then conveyed to the left auricle of the 
heart through the pulmonary veins, then through the 
auriculo-ventricular orifice into the left ventricle, and then 
through the aorta, finally reaching the capillaries of aortic 
branches, where it is extruded from the blood through the 
winking valves of capillary walls, carrying its nutritive ele- 
ments, which are to be used in rebuilding, and replacing, 

301 



debilitated and disintegrated cells, and to supply the exuber- 
ant qualities of the body. This process is later to be more 
fully described under the head of assimilation. 
After assimilation, the residuary, or remaining lymph passes 
into the canaliculi and lymph vessels and finally, at some 
point, enters the veins and mingles again with the blood, and 
is the lymph from which the larger portion of by-products, is 
given off in the lungs and elsewhere. 

It will be seen that lymph constitutes the origin and termina- 
tion of liquid movement. It is the primary liquid of the body, 
from the period of the beginning of liquid movement in the 
embryo, throughout the remainder of the existence of the 
organism && &&■ 

Lymph contributes to the blood all of its nutrient elements, 
even those, which are received through the lungs, in the form 
of gases, principally oxygen, and certain small portions, which 
may, by abnormal process, occasionally, reach it through the 
skin, which, in both instances, first enter lymph spaces, and 
from thence the blood, through the walls of veinules. 
There is one portion of primary lymph which, by reason of 
the location of its absorption, deserves somewhat prominent 
notice, because of the very important influence it exerts on 
the health of the organism. This is the lymph, absorbed from 
the feces in the large intestine, and which conveys to the liver, 
largely through the mesenteric blood, much of the by-prod- 
ucts, from which it elaborates bile, glycogen, and uric acid s& 
Situated, at almost all parts of the lymph system, there are 
lymph glands. The anatomy of lymph glands has been given 
very briefly. 

At certain locations of the body these glands are massed 
together in great aggregations. This is especially true of the 
inguinal region, the posterior wall of the abdomen, along the 
sides of the vertebral column, in the neural canal, in the 
mesentery, spleen, pancreas, liver and stomach. Also in the 
cervical region and axilla. There are also many of these 
glands in the medullary portion of bones and in the meninges. 
*f[ It is the function of the lymph gland to produce, by a 
process of gemmation lymph corpuscles which, when suffi- 
302 



ciently mature, drop off into the lymph and float in it from 
the gland, into lymph channels and finally into the blood, 
where they are classified as white blood corpuscles and 
finally, by the process to be later described, they are further 
matured and converted into red blood corpuscles. 
Primary lymph, immediately after being absorbed, does not 
contain lymph corpuscles, but in the mesentery some of it 
passes through lymph glands, and lymph corpuscles begin to 
appear in it. The more it is intermingled with lymph that has 
passed through lymph glands, the more numerous, become 
the lymph corpuscles in it. 

By the time lymph has reached the thoracic duct, it has been 
sufficiently elaborated by intermingling with other lymph, 
that it is capable upon exposure, of forming a clot similar to 
blood clot, without red corpuscles. Lymph clot is softer and 
moister than blood clot, with the lymph corpuscles entangled 
in it, and the nutrient matter forming a white or creamy film 
on the surface of the serum. 

There are certain conditions, such as heat, cold, and associa- 
tion of materials, that will prevent lymph, like blood, from 
clotting so so 

It will be seen that all of the elements of blood are in lymph, 
immediately before its admixture with blood, except solely 
the red corpuscles. 

It will be recalled, that lymph glands in the spleen are very 
numerous, and that the spleen is classified as one of the prom- 
inent sources of the white corpuscles, and also that the 
machinery of its liquid movement is such, that many lymph 
corpuscles, produced in the spleen are at once delivered to the 
blood, and pass through the splenic vein, into the portal 
transportation, and by that route reach the general blood 
movement so so 

The movement in the primary lymph system may be 
described as being from periphery to, center, or in other 
words from the absorbents to the points of discharge into 
secondary lymph and blood. 

The secondary lymph movement, it must be remembered, 
begins at intercellular spaces in the tissues generally, and 

3°3 



ends with the depuratory glands, skin, lining membranes, 
and the blood. 

The phenomena of the movement of lymph, through its 
vessels, beginning with its spaces, will be described in con- 
nection with the movement of blood, a little further on so 
The student, before leaving this chapter, should bring him- 
self to a realization, that lymph is the all-important liquid of 
the organism, and that it enters, as the basic substance, into 
the composition of all of the twenty-four or more liquids. 
^f He should bring himself to understand, that lymph is the 
liquid of vital function of the organism, and that it is the 
only liquid directly and primarily involved in the three ulti- 
mate functions of animation, to wit: absorption, depuration, 
and assimilation. 

Some idea of the relative volume of the lymph to the blood, 
may be had, by recalling the fact, that the body is about 
seventy-five per cent liquid, and blood is only about one- 
twelfth of the body weight. 

Of course the other twenty-two or more liquids are not 
called lymph, but Ivmph is their principal ingredient so 



3°4 



CHAPTER NO. 32 

Physiology of Blood System 

ANATOMIC SYNOPSIS 

THE machinery of the blood vascular system is the 
heart, arteries, arterioles, capillaries, veinules, and 
veins $& $& 
The heart is about five inches in length, three and a half 
inches in breadth, and two and a half inches in thickness, 
situated in the thorax, extending about an inch and a half to 
the right of the median line, and three and a half inches to 
the left of the median line, its position being oblique; occupy- 
ing the distance between the second and sixth intercostal 
spaces; the base of the heart looking headward and to the 
right, while the apex points ventro-feetward and to the 
left s+ $0 

The heart is divided into four muscular chambers, the two 
basilar chambers being thin-walled, and called the auricles; 
the two apical chambers being thick-walled, and called the 
ventricles. These chambers are separated from each other in 
the transverse by the auriculo-ventricular septum, and are 
separated lengthwise by a septum that extends the whole 
length of the heart; the septum between the auricles being 
very light and deficient before birth, having the foramen ovale 
through it, which closes at birth; the inter- ventricular septum 
being very heavy; the right ventricle is very heavy, com- 
pared with the auricles, but less so compared with the wall 
of the left ventricle, which is three times as thick. 
The heart is considered, as being a right and left heart, com- 
posed of the right auricle and right ventricle, connected 
through the auriculo-ventricular orifice, which is guarded by 
the tri-cuspid valve; and, the left auricle and left ventricle, 

305 



connected through the left auriculo- ventricular orifice, which 
is guarded by the mitral valve. 

The right auricle receives the ascending vena cava and 
descending vena cava, the two large veins which drain the 
entire system; and the coronary sinus, which drains the blood 
from the substance of the heart itself. 

The right ventricle discharges through the conus arteriosus 
and pulmonary artery, which after about two inches, divides 
into the right and left pulmonary, and carry the blood for 
aeration to the lungs; which arteries, after dividing into the 
pulmonary capillaries, reconverge into the four pulmonary 
veins, two in each lung, which extend to the left auricle of the 
heart; therefore, carrying all of the aerated blood, from the 
lungs, to the heart. 

The left ventricle is drained, through the conus arteriosus and 
the aorta, the systemic artery, that by branching, supplies 
blood to the entire organism, which after subdividing to its 
systemic capillaries, converges to the formation of two great 
systemic veins already mentioned, that enter the right 
auricles of the heart. The valves that guard the bases of the 
pulmonary and aortic arteries respectively, are the pul- 
monary semilunar valve and the aortic semilunar valve s* 
It will be seen that the right ventricle, the pulmonary arteries, 
arterioles, capillaries, veinules and veins, together with the 
left auricle of the heart compose the pulmonary system; while 
the left ventricle, the aorta and all of its branches, the arter- 
ioles, systemic capillaries, veinules and veins, terminating 
with the ascending vena cava, and the descending vena cava 
and the right auricle of the heart, compose the machinery of 
supply to the entire system. 

PHYSIOLOGIC ANALYSIS 

The blood is a reddish liquid, consisting most largely of almost 
colorless lymph, called plasma, in which are minute somewhat 
disc-shaped masses of protoplasm, called blood corpuscles. 
These are classified as being red and white, and it is owing to 
the presence of the red corpuscles that the blood has its color. 
306 



Blood is an incidental substance, occupying a position be- 
tween lymph of supply, upon the one h&nd and secondary 
lymph upon the other, ^f It carries in suspension in its liquid 
part, all of the nutritive substances, from intestinal absorp- 
tion, and the gaseous elements, for use in sustaining the 
body, and also disintegrated matter, usually termed worn out 
tissue; waste substances; gases for elimination, and in its 
corpuscles gases, especially oxygen and carbon. 
The blood at no place supplies substance to tissue directly, 
and it at no place receives any of its nutrient elements 
directly. Those liquid solids which are derived from food, 
reach the blood through primary lymph, which also carries 
oxygen. The blood's principal supply of oxygen and other 
gases are derived from the lymph system, immediately sur- 
rounding the alveoli and infundibula of the lungs, which 
primarily receive these gases from the atmosphere, and into 
which are discharged the gases for elimination. Blood receives 
liquid and gases from the intestinal absorbents generally so» 
The blood, therefore, can in no sense be said to be a functional 
substance, except that it is simply a safe, convenient, and 
ready vehicle for the transportation of nutrient elements, to 
the capillaries of the various parts of the organism, in relation 
with which, the spaces of the lymph system are situated, and 
which receive from the blood through the winking valves of 
the capillaries, those nutrient elements and convey them to 
the places of function. 

The blood, as a common carrier, receives certain gases from 
the lymph directly through the intercellular spaces of its 
capillaries, and liquid solid residues of tissue, from lymph 
vessels at different parts of the body; but especially from the 
thoracic and right lymphatic ducts. 

Blood also conveys these substances, to the various depura- 
tory glands, and again extrudes them, with other substances, 
through the capillary walls into lymph spaces, from which 
places, the machinerv of the glands, under stimulus direct 
them into the channels of elimination. 

The blood derives its white corpuscles from lymph corpuscles, 
with which they are in every respect identical. 

307 




Brittle passed rkrouy 
Right Auricula V,„trir,lfar cp,n,» 9 

Fig. 29 — Right Auricle and Right Ventricle 
Cut shows the heart in situ. Its relation to all of the parts is good. The student should notice 
the name of each part is printed upon it. 

The white corpuscles mature by adding the element of hemo- 
globin, which finally constitutes about ninety per cent of their 
bulk ■<* • o> 

By repeated passages through the lungs, subjected to the 
transfusion of gases, in the process of being aerated, and 
through the capillaries, subjected again to the transfusion of 
gases in the process of being carbonated, the white cor- 
puscles finally become red blood corpuscles, varying in the 
density of their color, with age, and perhaps also with 
activity $* s«* 

When red corpuscles have reached that stage of maturity, 
in which they can no longer perform the function of receiving 
oxygen, or discharging carbon, they pass to the various 
ductless glands of the body, principally the spleen, suprarenal 
308 



capsules, and thyroid glands, where they are disintegrated s«* 
Part of the substance of red corpuscles is used, as coloring 
matter in different parts of the body; their freed by-products 
going into the composition of various substances, produced 
by the glands of the body, which have been incorrectly 
termed internal secretions; the residues passing from the 
body in general elimination. 

It must not be overlooked that corpuscles classified as white 
have an affinity for oxygen, and carry it. It will also be 
understood that oxygen is to a large extent carried in the 
serum (lymph) of the blood and that a portion of the carbon 
dioxide is thus carried. 

However, the gases generally are carried by the red and white 
blood corpuscles. It is not by any means unlikely that the 
white, on account ofyouth and virility, carry more than the red. 




tie patted thr. 



passed thr. Jiurtti' opening 



Fig. 30 — Left Auricle and Left Ventricle 
This figure is rolled on its axis almost half way to the right. 



P9 



The specific gravity of normal blood, so far as is known is 
about 1058. Its reaction is faintly alkaline, and it is of a 
saltish taste; its normal temperature in the living body is 
about 100 degrees Fahrenheit. The temperature of the blood, 
however, must be understood to vary somewhat, in different 
individuals, and in the same individual at different times, 
owing to the condition of the body. That portion of blood in 
the more external capillaries of the body will also be cooled, 
over that in the deep interior. This change by reason of the 
rapidity of liquid movement is substantially imperceptible so 
From the most reliable experiments that have been made 
and which of course can not be considered reliable, but from 
which an approximation can be made-, the blood in an indi- 
vidual in a reasonably normal condition is said to amount 
to about one-twelfth of the total weight of the body. 
If to this approximation, the student relates the fact that the 
volume of blood changes remarkably, from the normal to 
abnormal condition, and is reduced very much more, in all 
those phases of abnormality, which affect absorption, espe- 
cially from the small intestine, he will not find himself with- 
out a basis for reasoning, with respect to this phenomenon so 
It is, however, very doubtful whether a satisfactory estimate 
of the volume of blood in the body will ever be reached. It 
can be easily seen that it can not be reached by bleeding an 
individual to death, for during that process, a very great 
volume of lymph would be added, and there would be a 
residue in the blood vessels. If the blood was extracted 
from an individual suddenly killed, without loss, much of 
it would escape into the tissues of the body and evaporate 
before it could be obtained. 

The only method, therefore, is the one which has been 
employed, to remove the blood as quickly as possible from the 
dying individual, and guess at the difference, between that 
volume, and the amount immediately preceding death so 
One of the peculiar properties of blood is coagulation or 
clotting. This occurs when blood is exposed to the atmosphere. 
The process of clotting generally begins instantly upon the 
exposure of blood to the air. It is due to the development of 
310 



a meshwork of fine fibriles, called fibrin, which entangle the 
corpuscles and indeed at first include the whole constituents 
of the blood. In a few minutes, however, drops of pale straw- 
colored liquid begin to exude from the mass, which propor- 
tionately lessens in size, and in the course of an hour or two 
the solid part floats in liquid. 

The liquid is the serum of the blood, or more properly the 
lymph, from the emulsified albumen of which, the fibrin of 
the clot is composed. 

Coagulation is increased by (i) moderate warmth, (2) being 
undisturbed, (3) contact with a foreign substance, and (4) 
free exposure to the air. 

Coagulation is retarded or suspended by (1) cold, (Blood 
kept at 32 degrees Fahrenheit will not coagulate), (2) water 
added to it, in more than twice its bulk, (3) the addition of 
neutral salts, and (4) by pronouncedly imperfect aeration 
immediately before death. 

The corpuscles by weight are said to be about forty-five per 
cent of the blood. The proportion of white corpuscles to the 
red is generally stated as being one to five hundred. It must 
be understood that this estimate is far from correct. 
The reason for the error lies in the fact, that a red corpuscle 
taken by itself is of a pale yellowish tinge, and its transition 
from white to that color is very gradual. It is only the great 
aggregation of these corpuscles that gives the deep red color 
to aerated blood. 

In the experiments upon which the estimate stated was based, 
white corpuscles in the early state of transition were un- 
doubtedly classified as being red. 

It must be remembered that white corpuscles begin turning 
red, at the first passage through the lungs, and in aggrega- 
tion, show red after the first oxygenation. 
A full grown corpuscle is about 1-3000 of an inch in diameter, 
and 1-12000 of an inch in thickness. 

Generally speaking, the gases contained in the blood are 
carbonic acid, oxygen, and nitrogen. One hundred parts of 
blood generally contain about fifty to sixty volumes ol these 
gases collectively. 

3" 



All of these gases are found in the blood, no matter whether 
in the arteries or veins, ^f However, in the systemic artery 
and pulmonary veins, the oxygen is relatively greater than 
in the pulmonary artery and systemic veins. 
In the aorta and its branches and in the pulmonary veins, 
the ratio is: 

Oxygen 20 per cent 

Carbonic acid 39 per cent 

Nitrogen 1 to 2 per cent 

In the pulmonary artery and the systemic veins: 

Oxygen 12 per cent 

Carbonic acid 46 per cent 

Nitrogen -. . . 1 to 2 per cent 

These, of course, are only approximate ratios, and will be 
understood to vary materially in different cases, with rela- 
tion to normal, or abnormal conditions and location, sur- 
roundings, atmospheric conditions, etc., as well as with 
activity. There will also be a greater per cent of carbon- 
dioxide in the veins of the portal system. \ From what has 
been said it will be seen that the blood has the following uses: 

(1) It is the medium for the reception and storage of all 
nutrient substance, under proper circumstances, of which the 
organism stands in need, which it receives from the outer 
world through primary lymph. 

(2) It is the medium of transportation of these substances, 
to all blood capillaries, in relation with the places where they 
are used and the extrusion of them, by the impulsion of nerve 
stimulus, through the winking valves of the capillary walls && 

(3) It is the medium, into which a large part of the residuary, 
or refuse matters and gases from the tissues of the body, are 
finally brought, for transportation to the capillaries in the 
various depuratory glands, and extruded through their walls, 
so that the glands, acting in response to stimulus, may 
direct them into the various channels of depuration. 

(4) It is liquid, and has the quality of quickly receiving, and 
eliminating heat; it is constantly moving about through the 
body; and for these reasons, is an aid in maintaining equilib- 
rium of temperature. 

312 



CHAPTER NO. 33 

Physiology of Blood Trans- 
portation 

ANATOMIC SYNOPSIS 

THE machinery of blood movement consists of the heart, 
arteries, arterioles, capillaries, veinules and veins. 
The arteries are cylindrical tubes, the walls of which 
remain patent at all times. They are composed of three coats, 
the inner, middle and external. 

The inner coat consists of yellow elastic tissue in the form of 
a serous membrane; the middle coat is composed of muscular, 
elastic and white fibrous tissue; the external coat is fibrous 
and contains elastic and muscle tissue. Between the external 
and middle coats, there is the circular elastic membrane so 
The nerves which ramify the middle and inner coats are 
called vasomotor nerves. 

In arterioles these walls are very thin. Capillaries connect, 
the ends of arterioles with the beginnings of veinules. An 
arteriole ends by becoming a capillary. A capillary ends by 
becoming a veinule. The capillary wall is composed of one 
layer of cells, between which there are winking valves, where 
the edges are not attached by cellular cement. 
Capillaries vary in diameter from one three-thousandth to 
two-thousandth of an inch; in length, from one-thirtieth to 
one-twentieth of an inch. 

The aorta is the great systemic artery. It ascends from the 
heart for about two inches and bends dorsally and to the left 
in the arch, from which it gives off three branches, the 
innominate, left common carotid and left subclavian. These 
extend to tissues headward from the heart, and through these 

3*3 



and their branches, their head and upper extremities are sup- 
plied. After the arch, the artery extends feetward in what is 
called the thoracic aorta, through the diaphragm, into what is 
called the abdominal aorta, to the level of the fourth lumbar 
vertebra, where it divides into the right and left common 
iliac arteries. From the thoracic, abdominal and iliac arteries, 
the general trunk viscera and feetward appendal structures 
are supplied. 

Incident to the systemic blood movement, there is the portal 
system, which is made up of veins, the splenic, inferior and 
superior mesenteric, cystic and gastric, these by joining, 
compose the portal vein, which enters the liver through the 
portal fissure, and breaks up into the. portal, hepatic capil- 
laries, which by extrusion furnish the principal by-products, 
out of which bile and uric acid are elaborated in the liver. 

PHYSIOLOGIC ANALYSIS 

There has been much speculation, since the pronouncement 
by Harvey, A. D. 1616, that the blood actually circulated 
through the body, as to how that phenomenon is accom- 
plished $0 so 

It has been advanced that it is accomplished or at least 
materially aided by atmospheric pressure through the lungs 
and upon the body; that it is at least aided by muscular 
activity; that it is accomplished by electricity or magnetism, 
and many other theories, of which space forbids the mention, 
since none of them appear to be of value. 
The last and therapeutically accepted theory of circulation is 
that the heart is a pump, and pumps the blood through the 
arteries from itself, thence through the capillaries and veins 
back to itself; it being generally accepted, that muscular 
activity aids the heart in accomplishing this feat. 
Harvey did not attempt to explain this phenomenon in any 
way. He only proclaimed that the blood actually circulated, 
that is, passed from the heart into the arteries, thence through 
the capillaries and veins into the heart again. 
Great and far-reaching as was the discovery of Harvey, from 
3H 



Ductus ArteriorM 




Fig. 31 — Heart and Arteries 
The student will observe that the names of the important structures here are printed upon 
them. This cut is worthy the most profound study, for the parts are well related. The knowl- 
edge to be obtained is accurate. 

The student will remember that he is looking at the ventral aspect. The median line of the 
body is indicated by dotted line at the bottom of the cut. 



which it is not the purpose here to detract, yet it must be 
stated, that from the standpoint of value to functional 
knowledge it was quite unimportant. 

For to know that the blood moves and not know how it does 
so, that is what causes it to do so, leaves the student in as 
helpless a situation, practically as though he did not know 
that the blood moves. 

I find it impossible to agree with Harvey that the blood cir- 
culates. It is true that the red corpuscles and the white also, 
do in a general way, continue to circulate through the blood 
vascular system; but circulation of blood is not a fact so 
Sufficient lymph is being constantly received, in a so-called 

3*5 



normal individual, into the blood vascular system, from 
various lymph entrances, to maintain the volume of the 
blood, and to compensate for the volume, that is constantly 
being extruded through the winking valves of the capillaries, 
into the lymph spaces of tissue, to keep up the volume of 
functional lymph, from which all nutritive substances are 
obtained, and into which all depuratory substances are received. 
Tf Sufficient has been said, in the physiology of the lymph sys- 
tem, and in the paragraph preceding this to disclose, at this 
juncture that, it is the movement, not only of the blood 
through its vessels, but the lymph through its spaces, vessels, 
ducts and tubes, that is being definitely considered. 
This comprises, as the student will recall, an explanation of 
the movement of the twenty-four or more liquids in the 
human organism; for it is clear that it is just as important, to 
know how lymph is raised from the feet to its points of en- 
trance into the blood, generally against gravity; how sweat is 
conveyed to the surface of the body; how seminal fluid is 
impelled from the cul-de-sacs of the tubules of the testes and 
through the vas deferens into the seminal vesicles and from 
thence to the completion of its functional office; the follicular 
fluid is carried and directed from the Graafian follicles of the 
ovary into the fimbriated extremity of the Fallopian tubes, 
and thence to its functional offices, and so on throughout all 
of the liquids of the body, as it is to know how blood moves; 
for it is clear that each of these liquids moves in the scope of 
its function, in the same way, and by operation of the same 
force, applied in the same way. 

I desire to announce to the world for the first time, clearly 
and definitely, that the blood, and all of the liquids of the body, 
that move through vessels, ducts, or spaces, do so by the applica- 
tion of an intelligent force that biologically should be desig- 
nated as, telekenetic or kenetic energy, which force acts 
through the materials of which the human organism is com- 
posed, in the first instance, in a way to cause them to form 
into animate structure, and in the second instance to main- 
tain that animate structure. That force or energy, I have 
named the force of life, or nerve stimulus. 
316 



It is by the operation of the force of life through the organism 
that motion is obtained. Motion thus caused is individual 
vibration $+ $& 

Beyond that the phenomena are divided, for our considera- 
tion, into as many aspects as we are capable of differentiating 
functional operation. 

The radiation of nerve stimulus through the nerves, causes 
parastalsis, respiration, contraction of muscles, and other 
functions. Indeed, all movement, incident to animation, is 
caused by the application, in the normal way, of nerve 
stimulus 5^ $i» 

The movement of the blood, and all other liquids presents to 
us the same phenomena. Blood moves through its vessels by 
the propulsion of nerve stimulus, in just the same manner, 
that the particles of muscles respond to that same force in the 
process of contraction and extension. 

We can not think of force, applying itself to the substance of 
muscles, any more easily than we can conceive of a force, 
applying itself to the particles of a liquid; only we have been 
prepared by a long line of materialistic training to consider, 
not very closely, the former; but to be shocked into disbelief 
at the mere statement of the latter, which upon the closest 
investigation will be found to recommend itself to our 
acceptance as completely as any phenomenon, which we are 
capable of accepting. 

I claim for the disclosure of this truth, no honor; but I recom- 
mend it to the careful and painstaking study of the student, 
as the most profound fact in the study of junction, and of so 
much more importance than the discovery of Harvey, as by 
comparison, to cause his discovery to sink into insignificance. 
\ The movement of the blood, is accomplished through the 
heart, arteries., arterioles, capillaries, veinules and veins. The 
fact that challenges attention is, that the movement is a 
continuous process. 

The heart has always been considered as the principal organ 
of circulation, and has been considered to be always active s«* 
The first mistake is in the theory that the heart is the prin- 
cipal organ of blood movement. As has been before suggested, 

317 



it is but the central organ of the blood vascular system &&■ 
The second error is, that the heart is constantly in motion. 
Upon close investigation it is found to rest about one-third 
of the time, and that while these periods of rest are short, and 
constantly alternating with great activity, yet they are, 
generally speaking, uniform, and are relatively the periods of 
rest, which are necessary to the organism in its normal 
condition or one-third of the time. 

The blood movement presents two important phases for 
consideration. The first is the action of the heart and its 
accessory vessels, and the second is the sounds of the heart. 

ACTION OF THE HEART 

The primary organ of liquid movement, it will be seen, is 
the brain, which, with its nerve system, is the medium 
through which the heart receives its cardiac and vasomotor 
stimulus causing it, and its vessels, including their contents, 
to have motion. Recalling the anatomy of the heart, it will be 
remembered that the blood enters the right auricle, through 
the descending and ascending venae cavae, and the coronary 
sinus; and enters the left auricle through the four pulmonary 
veins s& $» 

It will be understood that immediately following every 
contraction or systole of the auricles, to project their contents 
into the ventricles; the blood which is held back by the 
systole, so as to fully distend or stretch these veins, rushes 
into the auricles filling them almost at once. 
At this time the ventricles diastole, while the great arteries 
leading from them systole in unison with the systole of the 
auricles, snapping shut the semilunar valves of the arteries, 
while the plunge of the blood from the auricles, gives to the 
ventricles a throb-like distension. 

Immediately following the termination of the systole of the 
auricles, their diastole, together with the diastole of the 
arteries, begins in unison with the systole of the ventricles, 
thus quickly closing the valves of the right and left auriculo- 
ventricular orifices. 
3i8 



These alternate movements of the heart, with the periods of 
rest stated under " Sounds of the Heart " are continuous, 
differing in rapidity in different individuals, and differing in 
the same individual, under different conditions of health, 
food, activity, location, heat, elevation and atmosphere so 
It will be remembered that all of the true valves, in the heart, 
are so constructed that blood, coming against their flaps, with 
the sudden systole of the heart or arteries, closes them 
abruptly, and that their flaps are so arranged by muscular 
and tendinous fibres, as to prevent them from passing too far 
into the orifice which they are to close. 

With the succeeding diastole, the pressure is removed, the 
flaps are relaxed and float back into a position of rest, and in 
such manner as not to obstruct the orifices of the chambers, or 
arteries so so 

The heart and arteries are so constructed that with each 
systole of the ventricles there is a diastole of the arteries, 
which passes in a wave-like impulse throughout their length, 
including their branches. 

It will be observed that one of these wave-like impulses, 
occupies the same time as that of the systole of the ventricle. 
This not only results in stretching the artery to its full size, 
but the impulse actually distends it, so that if the finger be 
placed upon a superficial artery, at any point, the wave-like 
diastole is plainly felt, and has been called the pulse so 
The diastolic wave was formerly supposed to be the stretch- 
ing of the artery, from pressure of blood projected by the 
heart, but a moment's contemplation of the estimated blood 
moving force of the systolic impulse of the heart, which is 
said to be, from the left ventricle, 3.21 foot-pounds and from 
the right ventricle, .822 foot-pounds, makes it apparent that 
such force is not sufficient in any event to produce the phe- 
nomenon SO SO 

If the artery, with all of its branches, was full of blood, it is 
very clear that the resistance would neutralize the force as 
stated, in a very short distance, and if the arteries were not 
full of blood, that amount of force, so far as it would carry 
the blood, would not be sufficient to produce the impulsive 

3*9 



distension of the thick walls, and by the time the blood 
reached the smaller and more superficial arteries the wave- 
like impulse would have been overcome by friction. 
It is therefore clear, that the diastolic wave-like movement, 
is caused by nerve stimulus applied to the tissues of the 
arterial walls, and the molecules of their contents, in the same 
way. Diastolic and systolic waves, follow each other at equal 
distances. The dilations and compressions of the arteries, can 
not be said to aid in the onward flow of the blood in any 
manner; for it will be seen, that the freedom gained by the 
blood in the diastole will be, exactly compensated for or lost 
in the systole, distance only being considered, and that the 
tendency of the systoles, in the ever-decreasing diameter of 
the artery, will be to check, rather than facilitate the flow of 
blood £©► so 

The checking of the speed of the arterial blood stream, by this 
process, is permitted by the continual branching of the 
arteries thus increasing their capacity, and comports with the 
necessities of function at the capillaries. It also comports, with 
the fact, that blood flows slower in the smaller arteries than 
in the larger ones. 

The function value of the systolic and diastolic waves, is to 
completely admix the contents of the arteries, preventing 
separation into distinctive substances. This continual mixing 
process, insures the presentation, at the winking valves of the 
capillaries, for extrusion, of a homogeneous liquid. 
The vasomotor impulse, acting not only on the tissues of the 
artery but upon its contained liquid, projects the blood, 
already in the artery forward, making room for that pro- 
jected from the ventricle, which constantly follows it so 
It will be seen that this process, regardless of the quantity of 
blood in the body, within the limit of normal variance, serves 
to keep constant pressure at all of the capillaries, sufficient to 
keep them constantly distended and full of blood. 
The capacity of the capillaries, it is estimated, represents the 
proportion of four hundred to one with the arteries. 
In this connection it must be remembered, that the flow of 
blood in the main arteries, especially those near to the heart, 
320 



is very rapid, representing twenty inches in a second, while 
the flow of blood in the small arteries is very much slower. 
In the capillaries it is exceedingly slow, and indeed at times 
is, for short periods, substantially at a standstill. 
When the function of blood, at the capillaries is recalled, that 
of extruding, through the winking valves of their walls, the 
nutritive elements, of plasma into lymph spaces, it will be 
understood why, blood at these places flows so slowly. From 
almost standing, or at most, slowly moving blood in the capil- 
laries, blood in the veinules, flows more rapidly and continues 
to increase, in the rapidity of its current till it reaches the 
heart. Blood in large veins flows rapidly. 
In normal conditions the diastole and systole of the arteries 
end with them and are not observable in the capillary or 
vein. However, that such a vibratory influence is in the 
capillaries and veins, is proven by the fact, that in certain 
abnormal conditions, they present such pulse-like move- 
ments in a perceptible degree. 

As a result of the continued movement of the walls of the 
artery, together with direct impulsion from the ventricle, 
and also the influence of the vasomotor stimulus upon the 
blood, the pressure rises to such a remarkable height, that if 
one of the large arteries is perforated, especially at some 
distance from the heart, the blood will spurt from it to a 
height of some feet, and the impulses of the stream will be 
seen to correspond, with the systoles and diastoles, of the 
ventricles and arteries. 

If a capillary is opened, the blood oozes from it slowly. If, on 
the other hand, a small vein is opened, the blood runs from 
it slowly; but if a larger vein be opened, the blood runs much 
more rapidly, but would only rise, in a tube of the same size, 
a few inches from the vein. 

The explanation of this phenomenon is, that the functional 
relation of blood to the tissues of the body, is at the capil- 
laries, and from them back to the heart force sufficient to 
move the blood, is all that is required. Therefore, the vaso- 
motor stimulus is only a little more than sufficient to insure 
that function. 

321 



In this connection it should be remarked that muscular 
activity over the arteries, veins and capillaries of the body, 
so far from aiding in the flow of the blood, actually has a 
tendency to retard its flow. 

The phenomenon of increased flow of blood, under muscular 
exercise, applies equally to all vessels of transportation, being 
fully explained upon the basis of increased stimulus; the 
increased disintegration of cells, transfusing gases, etc., call- 
ing for an increased activity of all of the organs of supply s*» 
The blood movement, being incident, as carrier to the supply 
process is increased in flow by the use of additional stimulus, 
and may be increased to the limit of nerve capacity. 
The diastolic wave of the artery, has long been held to be the 
pulse; and it has also been held that counting the pulsations 
furnished accurate information as to the rapidity of the 
heart beat, which is generally approximately true; but it is 
the diastoles of the arteries that are counted, and not the 
heart beats, and under certain phases of occlusion, there will 
be marked variance in these. 

SOUNDS OF THE HEART 

Under the supposition that the heart is the principal organ of 
circulation it has long been the custom of therapeutists to 
place much importance and reliance upon the so-called 
sounds of the heart as a diagnostic feature. 
Sounds of the heart are well enough, in their way for the 
Chiropractor, but from a diagnostic standpoint, are much 
lessened in prominence. The phenomenon, however, will con- 
tinue to challenge attention of the human family always. Upon 
application of the ear to the thorax, directly over the heart 
two impulsive vibrations, or so-called sounds will be observed. 
% One, which may be designated as first, being a dull and 
somewhat muffled sound, which may be illustrated by lubb, 
followed after an instantaneous interval, by a short flapping, 
or thudding sound, which may be illustrated by dup. 
The impression one gets is that of hearing alternately, the 
syllables lubb-dup — lubb-dup — . 
322 



Considering these sounds, in relation with* their pauses or 
intervals, the whole as occupying ten periods of time, the 
relation will be expressed as follows: The time occupied by 
the first sound is four-tenths; followed by an interval of one- 
tenth; followed by the second sound, occupying two-tenths; fol- 
lowed by a second pause of three-tenths. These are heard, or 
as properly felt, to be constantly repeated. 
The first sound of the heart is that produced, by the systole 
of the ventricles, and the sudden closing of the valves at the 
auriculo-ventricular orifices. 

The second sound of the heart, as described, is produced by 
the diastole of the auricles and arteries, rapidly closing the 
semilunar valves of each artery. This is completed, just 
before the beginning of the systole of the ventricles. 
At every systole of the ventricles, the heart rolls to the right 
on its axis, projecting its apex against the diaphragm, thus 
visibly moving the wall of the thorax over it. This is plainly, 
seen in thin persons, but not so much so in those having a 
greater amount of flesh. 

The normal pulse of an adult is about seventy per minute. 
This, of course, varies slightly in different individuals. 
Shortly before birth the pulsations are about one hundred 
and fifty. During the latter part of the first year about one 
hundred and thirty. During the third year about one hundred. 
At the seventh year about ninety. In decrepitude about 
sixty-eight. These figures, of course, are only approximations 
of individuals at rest, and presumed to be in normal condition. 
Tf The posture of the body, has much to do with the pulse. 
The more energy expended, to sustain a position, other 
things being equal, the more rapid the pulse. 
The movement of the blood, presents many temptations to 
speculate, and this, especially, because it has been a field of 
such extravagant theory. 

The foregoing, however, will be found sufficiently compre- 
hensive, to include all' that is positively known with respect 
to blood movement and will be sufficient to answer all the 
purposes of the student of function, at least for the present, 
and until opportunity for further proof has been had. 

3^3 



CHAPTER NO. 34 

Physiology of Respiration 

ANATOMIC SYNOPSIS 

THE respiratory system consists of tubes, the ventral 
nares, nasal meatus, dorsal nares, nasopharynx, isthmus 
of the pharynx, oral pharynx, larynx, bronchial tubes, 
bronchioles, alveoli and infundibula; and, in addition to these, 
the parenchyma or substance of the lung proper. Accessory to 
these the mouth should be mentioned. 

It will be observed, that the different parts of the nose are, 
from the respiratory standpoint but tubes. Behind the nose, 
the superior chamber of the pharynx and the isthmus of the 
pharynx, are really but another tube leading to the oral 
pharynx which lies behind the mouth, thence through the 
rima-glottis into the larynx, which is the tube leading to the 
trachea or wind-pipe. 

The larynx is also, the organ of voice, and is important in 
that it shapes the column of air, to strike down through the 
center of the trachea, which is a musculo-membranous tube 
composed of cartilaginous rings, so that it always remains 
patent, extending to its bifurcation on a level with the fourth 
dorsal vertebra, where it divides into the right and left 
bronchi, the right bronchus being about one inch long, the 
left one, about two inches long; these extending into the lungs 
respectively, branch into the bronchioles and end in the 
atria, which contain the alveoli and infundibula, through the 
walls of which, and the pulmonary capillaries, aeration is 
accomplished s*» s«* 

The lungs are two in number, and occupy respectively, the 
right and left thoracic cavities on each side of the mediastinal 
structures. The right lung is divided into three lobes, the 
324 



left lung into two lobes, the right lung being about one inch 

longer than the left. 

The bronchus of each side, together with the bronchial 

artery, the pulmonary veins, the pulmonary nerve trunks, 

lymph vessels, etc., compose the roots of the lungs. 

The kings are enclosed by a membrane, called the pleura, 

which turns back from the roots of the lungs onto the walls 

of the thorax, enclosing, and lining the pleural cavities so 




Fig. 32— The Longs 
A, showing the right lung, its lobes and fissures; B, showing the left lung, its lobes and fissures. 

Nerves — The lungs are ramified from the seventh and eighth 
cervical trunks and from the first, second, third and fourth 
thoracic trunks. They also receive nerves from the pneumo- 
gastric trunks, and incidental ramifications from all of the 
thoracic trunks, to the twelfth. 



PHYSIOLOGIC ANALYSIS 

The atmosphere is a composition of oxygen, nitrogen, carbon 
dioxide, and watery vapor, with many other unknown gases 
and substances. The principal gases, however, are found to 

3^5 



be nitrogen and oxygen in the relation of four parts of nitro- 
gen to one of oxygen; the other gases and substances being in 
small quantities; the watery vapor changing materially, with 
temperature, altitude, and nearness to extensive evaporation. 
However, fluid is an essential to atmosphere. 
Respiration is that process, by which certain elements of the 
atmosphere, are carried into the liquids of the body by 
transfusion, through the intercellular spaces of the walls, of 
the alveolar ducts, alveoli and infundibula of the lungs, and 
certain gases are in like manner passed out through them. 
The machinery for respiration has been briefly described in 
the anatomic synopsis of the respiratory organs. 
The atmosphere is properly taken into the body, through the 
nares, but is occasionally, and too often, taken through the 
mouth. In either event, it passes into the pharynx, thence 
into the larynx, and into the trachea, bronchial tubes, bron- 
chioles, alveoli and infundibula. 

The passage of air to the extremities of the infundibula is 
called inspiration. The return from the air passages out of the 
body, is called expiration. The processes of inspiration and 
expiration are performed by the combined activity of very 
many muscles. 

Expiration is completely finished, by a muscular impulse, 
that reduces the lung in size, and lessens, from the alveoli 
and infundibula, all of the air passages, and by a reduction 
of the thorax. 

When the limit of expiration is reached, which it must be 
understood never excludes all of the air from the lungs, a 
reversed activity is set up by the same and additional 
muscles s«* $*> 

The muscular walls of all the air passages in the lungs undergo 
dilation, the lungs expanding with the thorax in advance. This 
is accomplished by the muscular elevation of the sternum, the 
increase of the spaces between the ribs, by the action of the 
intercostal muscles. Also by projecting the dome of the dia- 
phragm feet ward. 

In addition to the muscular operation in expiration, there is 
a wave-like movement or impulse of the air tubes of the lungs, 
326 



L»»YN«IAV. NDtVE 




Fig. 33 — Roots of Lungs from Behind 
The student should note, that the vertebral column, from the first to the eleventh thoracic is 
removed. A large portion of the dorsal part of the lungs has also been removed, showing the 
dorsal muscular aspect of the bronchi and trachea and the position of the thoracic aorta, 
pulmonary arteries and pulmonary veins. This is a good cut from which to study the diaphragm 
and heart. 



327 



extending throughout the trachea and bronchial tubes, aiding 
inspiration. The nostrils are enlarged, the orifice of the larynx 
relaxed, the chink of the glottis distended, the muscles of the 
trachea and bronchial tubes relaxed to their infundibular 
extremities, and the tubes dilated, throughout their length. 
T[ It will be seen, that it is of first importance, that there are 
no obstructions to the breathing process. 
The points at which obstruction may occur, without the use 
of artificial means, are the nares, especially the dorsal 
nares, the larynx at the epiglottis, or in the rima glottis, 
between the vocal cords, which may be tightened or loosened, 
by muscles arranged to move the cartilages to which, the 
vocal cords are attached, so constricting them as to close the 
passage between them; the trachea and bronchial tubes by 
constriction of their walls and by exudations, clotting together 
and clinging to the walls. 

Substance clinging to the walls particularly applies to the 
bronchioles, alveoli and infundibula, which may be in this 
manner closed. Constriction of these tubes is greatly facili- 
tated, by abnormal constriction, or constriction with fixation 
of the thorax, which, of course, includes the diaphragm $&■ 
There are several terms in connection with respiration which 
may be used with some value in description. These are 
adopted from the standpoint of the individual at rest and are: 
H (i) Tidal air, which is the quantity habitually or uni- 
formly changed in each act of breathing, being estimated at 
30 cubic inches in the normal adult. 

(2) Complemental air, which is the quantity over and above 
tidal air which can be drawn into the lungs in the deepest 
inspiration. This amount, it will be readily understood, varies 
greatly, the average perhaps being nearly 100 cubic inches s«* 

(3) Reserve air, which is that left in the lungs after the ordi- 
nary expiration, will also vary much in different individuals, 
the average being in the neighborhood of 200 cubic inches «•» 

(4) Residual air, which is the quantity that still remainsjn the 
lungs after the most profound expiratory effort. This amount 
will greatly differ, in different individuals, and can in no 
sense be accurately estimated. 

328 



(5) Respiratory capacity — This is indicated ,by the quantity 
of air which an individual at rest may expel from the lungs by 
the most forcible expiration following the deepest inspiration 
possible. This, like all other estimates, will vary in the normal 
adult, being about 250 cubic inches. 

The amount of air which passes, into and out of the lungs, in 
an adult at rest, in twenty-four hours, is said to be about 
686,000 cubic inches, which, of course, will be greatly 
increased by excitation. 

The amount of air used, by a hard-working laborer, being 
estimated at 1,568,390 cubic inches. These estimates are 
without value to the student as actualities, but furnish an 
excellent basis as a reasoning hypothesis. 
The process of respiration is to bring certain elements of the 
atmosphere into the body, and to carry certain elements out 
of it, and since, at rest the amount of air used is found to be 
remarkably less than that used in activity, the necessity for 
certain activity is fully established. 

The amount of exercise must be governed by other laws, 
which will be noted at other parts of this work. 
The object of respiration is: (1) to carry into the body 
economy, oxygen and certain other substances not known 
and, (2) to carry out of it carbon dioxide and some other sub- 
stances which are not known, and since this transfusion is 
constantly, essential to the organism, it is of primary impor- 
tance to understand how this function is accomplished $+■ 
It must be recalled in this connection that there is not suf- 
ficient air inhaled or exhaled at one time to fill or empty the 
lungs, but that there is a volume of air constantly in the 
lungs which the physiologists term stationary air, which term, 
however, is erroneous. 

It must be understood that the air tubes of the lungs, to their 
extremities are constantly in a vibratory movement, keeping 
their contents in activity, and therefore in process of function. 
^ Air added by inspiration, intermingles with the contained 
vibrating air by diffusion, and the expiratory air passes by a 
process of exfusion; the oxygenated and carbonated air 
remain in distinct volume and pass by each other. 

3 2 9 



It will, however, be seen that as a result of this operation, 
there is pressed against the mucous lining of the air cells and 
infundibula, a volume of air, which is constantly seeking a 
pathway of escape, urged on by the expansion of the lung 
substance, thorax, and incoming air, during the whole process 
of inspiration. 

Throughout the entire lining of the air cells, and only sepa- 
rated from the air itself, by the most delicate membrane, are 
the lymph spaces of the intertubular tissues, constantly filled 
with lymph. Through the intercellular spaces of this thin 
membrane oxygen, borne in a small quantity of atmospheric 
fluid, escapes into the intercellular or intertubular lymph $&■ 
At the termination of inspiration the whole muscular and 
atmospheric operation is reversed; the air pressure is with- 
drawn from the walls of the alveoli and infundibula, during 
the entire period of expiration, thus permitting the escape 
of carbon dioxide, borne in a small quantity of lymph 
through the intercellular spaces into the alveoli and infundi- 
bula s& s^ 

The lymph spaces transmit oxygen thus received, through the 
so-called winking valves of the walls of the immediately 
adjacent pulmonary blood capillaries. The lymph carries the 
carbon dioxide, from the blood through the winking valves of 
the capillaries, into the adjacent lymph spaces, that intervene 
between blood capillaries and air cells of the lung lobules s«* 
The elimination of carbon dioxide and the oxygenation of 
blood, after the manner described, is called aeration. 
From the facts stated it will be observed that the process of 
respiration is four-fold in its purpose. That is to say, it 
accomplishes aeration, depuration, nutrition and absorption, 
which are discussed under separate heads. 



330 



CHAPTER NO. 35 

Physiology of Kidneys 

ANATOMIC SYNOPSIS 

THERE are two kidneys, situated in the dorsal wall of 
the abdomen under cover of the peritoneum; each held 
in its muscular seat by the fatty capsule. Each kidney is 
covered with a fibrous capsule. The right kidney is about an 
inch lower than the left. 

The right kidney lies in the space between the intercostal area 
of the eleventh and twelfth ribs, and the headward margin of 
the fourth lumbar vertebra; it lies behind the transverse 
colon, mesial to the hepatic flexure, dorsal to the gall bladder, 
and lateral to the duodenum. 

The left kidney, about an inch lower than the right, is dorsal 
and mesial to the splenic flexure of the colon. 
The kidneys are about four and a half inches in length, two 
and a half inches in breadth, and one inch in thickness. On 
the mesial border of each kidney, which is also the vertebral 
border, is a deep fissure, called the hilum. 
In the hilum lies the pelvis of the kidney; and extending into- 
the hilum outside the pelvis of the kidney are the nerves and 
arteries to the kidney. And in the same relation, veins and. 
lymph vessels extend out of the kidney. 

The extension of the pelvis, beyond the kidney, is called the 
ureter. The ureters extend from each side respectively into 
the urinary bladder. The outside part of each kidney is 
called the cortex, which is considered as being divided into 
pyramids and cortical columns. The inner part of each 
kidney is called the medullary center. 

Throughout the cortex are situated tubules, for the excretion 
of urine. These tubules extend up the pyramid toward the 

331 





iNysuon 

Fig. 34— Hilum of Kidneys 
1, shows half of kidney with pyramids, cortex and cortical columns, sinus with the papillae 
and the pelvis, also the suprarenal capsule in position; 2, shows kidney with the part removed 
to disclose tissues in sinus, towit: the pelvis with the emerging tubules and the artery. To 
this, in imagination, the student must add the veins, lymph vessels and nerve trunks. 



pelvis of the kidney to the calices, through which they extend 
into the pelvis of the kidney; these are called uriniferous 
tubules, or the tubes of Henley, jf The renal arteries are very 
large, compared with the size of the kidneys, showing the 
value of function of the kidneys, to the general organism s* 
Nerves — The kidneys are ramified from the twelfth, eleventh 
and tenth thoracic trunks, and nerves from the same source 
ramify the entire uriniferous tract. 



PHYSIOLOGIC ANALYSIS 

The office of the kidneys is to separate, from the lymph that 
is extruded from the blood, certain elements which, in their 
united state, are called urine. 

Urine consists of water holding normally in solution, certain 
organic and saline substances, with many other substances, 

33 2 



during abnormal processes, of the body. The proportions of 
these substances have been approximated, and so far as an 
analysis of morbid substance can be accurate, are of some 
value, and are therefore given. ^| The relative proportions in 
one thousand parts are estimated to be as follows: 



c- 




Fig. 35 — Kidneys from Dorsum 
The student will observe that the lumbar region of the body is cut away to disclose a portion 
of the twelfth dorsal, the first, second, third, fourth and fifth lumbar vertebrae and the upper 
portion of the sacrum. The kidneys are in splendid relative position. The ascending colon, 
however, should be to the right, the full width of itself, and the descending colon, nearly so, 
to the left. 

The student will carefully place these according to description but will fix the relative posi- 
tion of the kidney to the innominates as being about usual. 

333 



Water 967 

Solids 33 

The solids consist of the following substances: 

Urea [ 14 . 230 



Other nitrogenous crystalline bodies, uric acid, 
principally in the form of alkaline urates, a trace 
only free; creatinin, xanthin, hypoxanthin, hip- 
puric acid, mucus, pigments and ferments 

Salts, inorganic; principally sulphates, phosphates 
and chlorides of sodium and potassium, with 
phosphates of magnesia and calcium, traces of 
silicates and chlorides 

Salts, organic; lactates, hippurates, oxalates, ace- 
tates and formates, which only appear occasion- 
ally 



f 10.635 



r 8.135 



Sugar, in varying amounts; gases (nitrogen and carbonic 
acid principally). 

It must not be thought that the constituents of urine, as 
given in the foregoing table are a reliable criterion, as to the 
conditions of the body, and it is not for that purpose that this 
table is given; but to give some hint as to the extensive scope 
of elimination of by-products, that is accomplished by the 
kidneys, and therefore to bring to mind the very great 
importance of the function of the kidneys, and the importance 
of an accurate knowledge of that function. 
The kidneys are very richly supplied with aerated blood 
through the renal arteries. The volume of this blood is very 
great in proportion to the size of the organs. It contributes 
to a dual function in the kidneys. 

In its primary or first system of capillaries the blood furnishes 
to the substance of the kidney, through the medium of the 
lymph, nutrient properties. At the termination of the capil- 
laries, having charge of this office, small veins are formed 
which break up into capillaries in the cortical portion of the 
kidney, and extrude the lymph from which urine is extracted. 
At their termination they again form veins which finally con- 
334 



centrate to form the renal vein. This double capillary system 
may be said to be analogous to the portal blood system in the 
liver s*> s«* 

The blood in the second system of capillaries, is brought into 
very close contact, through the very delicate walls, with the 
cells of the kidney. 

External to the capillaries, and indeed all around them, are 
lymph spaces into which they extrude lymph, carrying with 
it the substances to be acted upon by the cells of the 
kidneys so s«> 

The lymph spaces, being also intercellular spaces, contain 
these substances, in immediate contact with the substance of 
those cells, sufficiently long for the function of separation or 
excretion to be performed, and it is by reason of the forces 
acting through these cells, that the depuratory elements are 
separated and impelled into the tubules of elimination. It will 
also be seen that in this process, certain by-products, espec- 
ially carbonic acid, are carried through the winking valves 
of the capillaries, and finally into the renal vein, and are thus 
carried through the body generally. 

Certain residuary solids are carried away to the body through 
the lymph vessels themselves. These substances enter into 
other chemical elaborations, so that the kidneys are organs 
of affirmative junction, and not excreting organs only. 
That portion of the chemicals contained in the lymph, that 
is extruded through the winking valves of the blood capillary 
walls into the lymph spaces, is collected in those spaces, and 
finally enters the uriniferous tubules and is thus carried 
through the calices into the pelvis of the kidney, and thence 
through the ureters into the urinary bladder and finally 
through the urethra out of the body. 

The process of excreting urine is continuous in the kidneys, 
hence the bladder is a very important reservoir, since with- 
out it, urine would always be flowing from the body. 
The volume of excretion is variable; but is usually greater 
during periods of exhilarated liquid movement. It is also 
greatly increased, by taking large amounts of liquid, either as 
a beverage or food. Generally speaking, the amount of urine 

335 



excreted is reduced, by continuous eating of solid foods and 
abstaining from liquids. 

The excretion of urine, however, varies in different indi- 
viduals, under any phase of diet, and differs in the same 
individual in the same way, depending on the conditions, and 
functional processes. 

The excretion of urine is greatly reduced, during periods of 
rest, and especially during sleep. 

From the bladder, by the relaxation of its sphincter muscles 
at its urethral orifice, sometimes termed the neck of the 
bladder, the urine discharges through the urethra by virtue 
of a muscular activity in its walls, much like peristalsis, 
aided by the constriction of the bladder and certain muscles 
of the abdomen. 

The urine of a normal individual is a salty, clear, amber 
colored liquid, with a slight odor, and acid reaction; its 
specific gravity is about 1020. 

Instantly upon being voided, urine changes its chemical 
composition, and the inaccuracy of approximations based 
upon an analysis of it, are in proportion to the time that 
elapses between its leaving the body, and that of the analysis, 
and the degree of chemical change incident to its abnormal 
consistence s& s& 

The normal amount of urine passed in a given period must, 
of course, vary, not only with the health of the individual, 
but very largely with the diet and activities. It has however, 
been estimated to be about fifty-three fluid ounces in an 
average sized, normal adult in a period of twenty-four hours. 
\ The urine may be found to contain, as a result of certain 
excesses, or errors in food selection, the following substances: 
Serum-albumin, globuline, ferments, proteoses, peptone, 
blood, sugar, bile acids, pigments, casts, fats and various 
salts and micro-organisms, and many other substances 
which have not been isolated. 



336 



CHAPTER NO. 36 

Physiology of Skin 

ANATOMIC SYNOPSIS 

THE skin is an organized tissue that covers the periphery 
of the body. 

The linings of the tubes and vessels of the body are 
really skin also, but they are classified under mucous and 
serous membrane, and are sufficiently discussed under that 
head s«* s«* 

Mucous membrane, is that skin which lines tubes and cavi- 
ties exposed to the air, while serous membrane is said to line 
tubes and cavities not exposed to air. In other respects these 
membranes are alike and, mechanically, are not dissimilar in 
any respect from the skin. 

The skin consists of two layers; the dermis or true skin and 
the epidermis or superficial skin. Occasionally these are 
called respectively cutis vera and cuticle. The skin is a tough 
flexible, contractile and highly elastic structure; it consists of 
fibrous connective tissue, with a rich admixture of uncolored 
muscle and elastic fibres. It is richly supplied with blood and 
lymph vessels in its deeper parts, and also with nerves $» 
The superficial parts of the skin are not supplied with blood 
vascularity at all and nerves do not extend into it; all parts 
of it, however, that are animate are stimulated from near 
nerve terminals, and has lymph movement. The deep layer 
of the skin, contains sebaceous glands, sudorific glands and 
hair follicles. These are the sweat and oil glands of elimination 
and for occupancy of the roots of the hair. 
The appendages of the skin are said to be the hair and nails. 
However, since these are but differentiations of skin, it is 
hardly correct to so classify them. 

337 



The skin is occupied by little tubules that extend to its sur- 
face, and excrete fluid, liquid and oil. These are especially, 
richly aggregated in the axilla, groin, palms of the hands and 
soles of the feet. They are much less thickly, but nevertheless, 
are found thickly placed all over the skin. The total number, 
for the skin of an average adult is estimated to be 2,381,248. 
The combined area of these is estimated to be, eight inches 
square $0 so 

The arteries and veins of the skin represent, substantially all 
of the arteries and veins of the body. 




Fibrous 
Hague 



Sebaceous 
Glands 



Sweat-Glandt 



Nutrient Artery 



Fig. 36 — Section of Skin Greatly Magnified 
Cut discloses hair follicles, sebaceous glands, sweat glands and the various layers of the skin. 



Nerves — The nerves of the skin represent the periphery of 
practically all nerve trunks of the system. Nerves reach the 
338 



skin by being arranged through the subcutaneous, areolar 
tissue, which attaches the skin to the subjacent body so 

PHYSIOLOGIC ANALYSIS 

The skin must be considered as being a part of the body. It 
has been treated by physiologists as though its relations, to 
the organism generally, were somewhat distant, not to say 
indistinct so so 

The skin performs to the body several very valuable offices. 
That is to say, it is an organ of 'touch, protection, depuration, 
osmosis and perhaps beauty. 

The skin is the principal organ ol touch, or at least it is so 
classified in the physiologies. A careful analysis of this term, 
however, will disclose it to be erroneous for it will be found, 
upon the removal of the skin that the underlying tissue has 
much more acute sensibilities than the skin. 
It is not in this sense, however, that the classification is made, 
the name organ of touch, being applied to the skin, without 
thought as to relative function. 

The skin contains the periphera of a very great number of 
so-called sensory nerves. These are not equally distributed 
over the skin, but are thicker at those points where appre- 
hension is most needed and thinner at other parts of the skin. 
The rich aggregations of sensory periphera do not, as would 
at first be thought, occur more thickly upon the delicate parts 
of the skin, but occur in places, to fill certain specific offices, 
without regard to the texture of the skin at such places so 
The skin of the palmar surface of the hands and plantar 
surface of the feet is very thick and tough, but it is richly 
supplied with sensory nerves. 

The skin of the nipples and lips is very delicate, yet tor 
functional purposes it is also very richly supplied with sensory 
nerves. This law is carried out throughout the whole skin so 
The ability of apprehension, through the sensory nerves of 
the skin, like any other brain function, can be greatly 
disciplined, as is proven by the touch of the blind, and by the 
accuracy, with which a person that has had much practice 

339 



can locate a point touched upon" his back, a power which is 
scarcely possessed in any degree by individuals that have 
not practised such location. 

It will be found that sensory nerves, to the skin, are very 
largely, if not entirely, derived from the vertebral trunks, 
which ramify the immediately subjacent tissues of the 
body. In this connection it must not be forgotten nor over- 
looked, that sensory nerves sometimes extend for great 
distances, and are not always confined to the immediate area 
of the general ramification of the trunks from which they 
are derived. 

It will be understood, that in addition to other numerous 
functions, which the quality of touch facilitates, not the 
least is protection, which properly comes under that head. 
Without the quality of touch the skin could be very greatly 
injured, by exposure and different forms of contact, and the 
individual not know it. 

The skin protects the body through the medium of touch by 
preparing the underlying tissues, as well as itself, by motor 
reaction for all sorts of blows, jolts, and jars. Being a highly 
elastic and muscular organ, not rigidly, but loosely attached 
to the underlying tissue, the skin is by its very adaptability, 
a very important protection. 

At parts of the body constructed to come into contact with 
the rigor of environment, such as the shoulders, back of the 
neck, upper part of the back, the scalp, the dorsal surface of 
the sacrum and gluteal region, the ventral surface of the 
thorax, the elbows and knees, palmar surface of the hands 
and plantar surface of the feet, the skin is thick, tough, heavy, 
and so constructed as to compensate in protection for that 
lost by the necessities of form. 

In those parts of the body where, by their shape, the skin is 
protected, it is thin and protects the parts it covers, by its 
great adaptability to changes of position. 
The so-called appendages, especially the hair and nails, 
furnish perhaps its strongest element of protection to the 
parts covered. These are usually the head, axilla and pubes. 
To these must be added the beard on the face of the male, 
340 



hair on the breast, and incidental growths of hair on various 
parts, of both male and female. 

The beauty of the skin need not be discussed further than to 
say, that the term beauty is but the name of a mental habit, 
which has been formed, because of the numerous relation- 
ships of the skin, with emotional idealism. Without under- 
standing why, probably the great majority of human beings 
think, that certain parts of the skin, such as the cheeks, brow, 
throat, hands, etc., are beautiful, and in so far as an inaccurate 
term can be applied, one of the attributes of the skin is 
beauty s«* so» 

It must be remembered, however, that the skin, by itself, is 
far from beautiful. It is only association that makes us think 
the skin, as to any part of it, is beautiful. 
The principal function of the skin, however, is elimination. 
This function is accomplished by the sudorific and sebaceous 
glands, which have been described in the anatomy of the 
skin e^ $o 

Ordinarily the function of these glands are described separ- 
ately as though they were separate and distinct functions. 
This, however, is a mistake, for while elimination from 
the sebaceous glands, is largely of an oily character, and that 
from the sudorific glands largely water, yet the function of 
each is to eliminate substances no longer usable in the 
economy of the body. 

Excessive eating, will produce an excess of substances, to be 
eliminated through the skin. 

To recall the description of the lymph system, and the fact 
that it has a system of terminal ends in the skin, and that 
from the places of assimilation much colloid is not returned 
into the blood, but is carried to certain channels of elimina- 
tion, will be to understand how such substances reach the 
skin and are excreted, through the sebaceous and sudorific 
glands, from the body. 

Both the sebaceous and sudorific glands are parts of the 
lymph system. The chemicals eliminated through them, go 
very widely, into all of the by-products formed in the labora- 
tories of the body, and of course, vary in a remarkable degree 

341 



in different conditions. The elimination through the sudorific 
glands is technically called perspiration. Perspiring is a con- 
tinuous process. Ordinarily the fluid eliminated, evaporates 
as rapidly as it is presented to the surface of the skin, and 
therefore exists without the knowledge of the individual and 
in that sense may be called insensible perspiration. 
Under proper conditions, such as heat, moisture, and exer- 
tion, perspiration is eliminated so rapidly, that it accumu- 
lates in liquid upon the surface of the body. This liquid is, 
sensible perspiration, properly and technically called sweat s©» 
There has been an attempt on the part of physiologists to 
analyze sweat and to declare its consistence. The sweat of 
each individual is as distinct, from that of any other, as the 
individual is distinct, and it will be understood that this 
exudation will differ widely, never being found of the same 
consistence in two individuals, or in the same individual at 
different periods, but varies constantly with the physical 
condition of the individual, influenced by the normal or 
abnormal operation of other organs, and also by substances 
ingested, activity, or the lack of it, etc. 

The analysis given aids us in forming an approximation, and 
in that sense is of considerable value. Of a thousand parts it 
is said to consist of: 

Water 995 

Solids, organic acids (formic, acetic, butyric, 

propionic, caproic, caprylic) 0.9 

Salts, chiefly sodium chloride 1.8 

Neutral fats and cholesterin 0.7 

Extractives, (including urea) with epithe- 
lium 1.6 5 

1000 
Sweat is a clear, or amber colored liquid, which may be 
neutral, alkaline, or acid in its reaction. It usually has a 
saline taste and always has a peculiar characteristic odor 
which is markedly changed, with all abnormal processes of 
the body, in which sweating occurs, or can be produced &t> 
In the more usual phases of abnormality, these odors can 
342 



be learned, until they can at once be detected. They chiefly 
arise from the elimination of carbonic acid and uric acid. The 
quantity daily eliminated as perspiration or sweat, varies 
from one to ten pounds. It will be clearly seen that these 
amounts are only stated as approximations, since there is no 
method, by which, this elimination can be measured with 
anything like accuracy. 

The volume of elimination from the body is very excessive 
in certain, abnormal processes, its suspended solids being 
much increased in proportion to the eliminated water s«» 
The sebaceous excretion contains a greater proportion of 
solids, than the sudorific, which are principally disintegrated 
cells with oily substances, carrying with them much of the 
same chemicals found in the sudorific excretion, which give 
to sebaceous substance a peculiar changing odor, concerning 
which the same is true, as of the sudorific excretion. 
The substance of these excretions is projected from the 
blood, through the winking valves of the capillaries, into the 
lymph spaces, where it receives contributions from immediate 
disintegration, and is conveyed into the canaliculi and other 
vessels of the lymph system, through which it finally reaches 
the glandular apparatus of the skin, by the function of which 
it is passed to the surface, or from the body. 
This elimination is a means of carrying off an immense 
amount of heterogeneous substances from the tissues of the 
body so so 

The liquid upon the surface, exercises a marked tendency to 
cool the body. The principal value of the elimination, how- 
ever, is the removal of substances, no longer of value to the 
organism, therefore foreign and dangerous to it. 
It has been said that the skin is endowed with the power of 
absorption. The skin has no such power. It is, however, quite 
clear that under certain abnormal processes many sub- 
stances can enter the body through the skin. 
It is quite clear that before entrance can be accomplished, 
through the skin, its external portion must be either removed, 
or rendered powerless to perform its resisting function; for 
substances, in order to enter the body, through the skin, 

343 



must reach the lymph system, by the process of endosmosis, 
or paralysis of the external walls of the sebaceous and 
sudorific glands. 

The rapid entrance through the skin of powerful drugs, 
such as alcohol, is performed in this way. 



344 



CHAPTER NO. 37 

General Depuration 

DEPURATION is the name of that process, or series of 
processes, by which substances that are disintegrated, 
and those that can not longer be used in the economy 
of the body, are carried toward some of the exit orifices, and 
finally ejected through, one or more of them, from the body. 
Depuration is a continuous process. However, a depufatory 
substance is not necessarily conveyed in the direct line of 
depuration, until eliminated from the body, but it may enter 
into one or more functional combinations, or elaborations in 
the various glands, on its way to elimination from the body s* 
Perhaps the most marked illustration of delayed elimination 
of depuratory substance, occurs in the blood in the radicles 
of the portal vessels, that is known to be peculiarly loaded 
with by-products, or depuratory substances which, because 
of their peculiar properties as such, are fitted to enter into 
elaborations in the liver necessary to the production of bile, 
glycogen, and uric acid. 

The depuratory substances contained, in the composition of 
the bile, pass directly with that elaboration, into a direct 
channel of elimination, through which the elements of it, 
that are not absorbed are finally eliminated. However, much 
bile is absorbed from the intestine. 

The uses of glycogen, and uric acid, are not known inde- 
pendently, but it is known that they enter into certain im- 
portant elaborations necessary to the production of normal 
tissue, after which their residuary, depuratory elements, are 
eliminated, principally through the kidneys and lungs, and 
to a considerable extent through the skin. 
Depuration is everywhere in the body, in every atom of 

345 



tissue, it always immediately precedes assimilation, and by 
its office, prepares the way for assimilation, for it will be seen 
that the disintegrated elements of cells, or cells themselves, 
which constitute morbid liquid solids, must be removed 
before they can be restored or replaced with new parts. 
Therefore, in this limited sense, depuration is primary, to 
assimilation. Again this office is performed in less than 
microscopic spaces, under the intelligent propulsion of nerve 
stimulus, by a process, which is readily understood, but is not 
known in a machinic sense. 

By that force and process, depuratory elements are separated, 
and directed into lymph canaliculi, from which gaseous ele- 
ments pass, into the blood by transfusion through the capil- 
lary walls, while the remainder is carried, through lymph 
channels to other points of entrance into the venous system. 
H From these interatomic, less than microscopic points, of 
such vast number as to be incomprehensible, the various 
elements finally, through the lymph and blood systems, reach 
one of the four great channels of the body which are classified 
as depuratory organs. Each of these, by the way, has numer- 
ous other functions aside from that of depuration. 
It will be understood that depuratory elements, therefore, 
may pass through the lymph and blood systems several 
times, before finally reaching the depuratory system, that 
primarily has charge of eliminating that kind of substance. 
These four systems are: The ali?nentary canal, the respiratory 
system, the urinary system, and skin system. 

ALIMENTARY SYSTEM 

The alimentary canal has not usually been considered as a 
depuratory organ throughout its extent. Physiologists refer 
to the intestines as depuratory organs. This classification, 
however, is not sufficiently inclusive. Many substances are 
taken into the mouth, which, by reason of their consistence, 
can not enter into the economy of the body, and therefore 
are only taken as depuratory elements. 

The reference is to marbles, pieces of metal, such as money, 
346 



etc., as well as to certain other substances which are taken as 
food, such as the skins of certain fruits, and grains, and like 
indigestible substances. 

It must also be remembered that the whole alimentary canal, 
is the place of discharge, of depuratory mucous glands, so that 
really from its very beginning to its ending it may be classified 
as performing the office of a sewer to the body, in that it con- 
stantly receives and carries elements for depuration only s* 
It is true that the amounts of depuratory matter, are mater- 
ially augmented in the intestine, but that does not in any 
sense lessen the force of what has been said. 
It will be remembered also, that through the alimentary 
canal, the accessory glands of digestion, the salivary at the 
mouth, the gastric glands at the stomach, the spleen, liver, 
and pancreas at the intestine, discharge certain elements that 
are wholly depuratory, into the alimentary canal. 

RESPIRATORY SYSTEM 

The lungs furnish an area for the depuration of gases, con- 
tained in a small quantity of fluid, which can no longer be 
used in the economy of the body. 

It must be explained that the term lungs here is not suffi- 
ciently comprehensive, but that all of the air passages, in the 
lungs and from them, to the external orifices, which are the 
mouth and nostrils, must be included. 

The depuration from the respiratory tubes aside from gases, 
is very important, and is some character of mucous discharge, 
no matter by what name classified. 

URINARY SYSTEM 

The kidneys are depuratory organs, the elements depurated, 
and the method of depuration also, is sufficiently described 
under the physiology of the kidney. To this statement the 
explanation should be added, that the areas of depuration, 
in the kidney are less than microscopic, and that function is 
performed without any known machinery. 

347 



Again, while the kidneys are mentioned as depuratory organs,, 
it will be understood that, this must also include their tubes 
of elimination, the ureters, bladder, and urethra, to the ex- 
ternal orifice of the body. Here again the mucous exudations,, 
are a prominent element of the depuration. 

SKIN SYSTEM 

The skin is a depuratory organ, and this includes not only the 
integument, but the mucous and serous membranes. Depura- 
tory substances from the latter reach very largely, the ali- 
mentary canal, the tubules of the kidneys and the air tubes 
of the lungs, in quantity, in the order named. The integument 
performs the office of depuration, to what might be called the 
superficial body. That is to say, generally speaking, its elimi- 
nations are from itself, and the subjacent tissue. 
It will be seen, however, because of the very extensive area 
of the skin, the opening for depuration alone being estimated 
to form a combined area, of eight inches square, that its 
function is very extensive, and because of its extension over 
certain thin parts of the body, its depuration is almost com- 
prehensive of the elimination from such parts. Reference is 
to the hands and feet, the scrotum, the ears, the nose, and 
such other isolated portions of the body. 



The substances depurated, through the four channels, pass 
under specific names. Those from the intestines, feces; from 
the lungs, fluids, gases and vapors; from the kidneys urine, and 
from the skin, perspiration, sweat and sebaceous substance. 
\ The names given in the preceding paragraph, however, are 
in no sense comprehensive, since under abnormal conditions, 
any depuratory organ, may eliminate almost any chemical 
known to the body. 

It is a fact well understood, viewed in the light of the move- 
ment of the lymph and blood, that each depuratory organ can 
to a large extent, for a limited time, perform much of the func- 
tion of others. This is an accommodation that aids much in 
abnormal processes of the body; but it must also be remem- 
bered, that it is destructive, under prolonged abnormality &+■ 
348 



The depuration from the serous membranes, lining the vessels 
of liquid movement, is primarily into the liquids of such 
vessels and later through, one of the four, eliminating chan- 
nels. In many phases of abnormality this becomes a v.ery 
important factor in the process; morbidity sometimes accum- 
ulating in the capillary systems, in sufficient quantities to 
exert a profound irritation and motor reaction. 
Depuration, from the lining membranes of the vesicles of the 
body, is into their contents and passes with the same, through 
their tubes of elimination, from the body. 



349 



CHAPTER NO. 38 

Assimilation 



ASSIMILATION is the process by which inani?nate 
chemical elements are changed or converted into ani- 
mate > tissue elements. 
It is, of course, very clear that the process, of making animate, 
has never been seen, and is performed wholly without the 
office of any structure, which we recognize as machinery, and 
therefore, the manner in which this function is accomplished, 
from a mechanical standpoint, is not, and probably never 
will be, known. It is, however, easily understood. 
To know the process of conversion of inanimate materials, 
into animate substances would be, to solve the mystery of 
the universe, and to fully understand original formation, to 
use the term of the dogmatist, or original emanation, to use 
the - term of the evolutionist, both of which, in the last 
analysis, mean precisely the same thing. 
In order to understand this function, it must be recalled that 
it is, without exception, performed in an area too small for 
observation, and in relation with disintegration, or original 
depuration. It is, however, quite clear that as to depuration, 
this was not true, as to the original formation of cells, but is 
true in the organism ever after. 

It must be conceived that the area, in which these functions 
take place, is divided for that purpose, and that stimulus acts 
through these, in such a way, as to separate the elements for 
depuration, from those for assimilation and conducts each to 
its area, and at the same time, impels the elements, for 
assimilation to the proper place and into such relation, with 
other elements, that the elaboration produced, is of a con- 
sistence that stimulus, acting through the composite, results 
35° 



in animation. The process of assimilation is constantly going 
on in every atom of the body, co-extensive and in relation 
with depuration. 

Assimilation is the primary function of the entire organism, 
and is second only to the reception and transmission of stim- 
ulus in the brain. It is the process by which the organism 
was constructed from its beginning. 

Assimilation is the process by which original material crea- 
tion, emanation, or formation, took place, under the force of 
the same original elemental energy, and therefore every 
organ which has to do with the bringing of the minutest por- 
tion of nutriment into the body, is accessory to this function, 
and since it must have existed primary to every other func- 
tion, even depuration is accessory to it. 

Approximate analyses have been attempted of the juices of 
the various digestive points of the alimentary canal, and of 
the foods and liquids of the body, but of the substances enter- 
ing into assimilation, the ultimate, all important, wonderful 
elaboration, no effort at analysis has ever been made, and it 
is possible that none will ever be attempted, because it can 
not be seen by anything so far invented, and to disturb the 
process, even though it could be seen, would be to destroy 
the consistence of the materials involved. It is therefore, at 
present, unknowable. 

Assimilation is a function that is performed under the direct 
control of an intelligent, energy or force, without the inter- 
vention of mind, and therefore can only be understood, and 
in that sense known, by drawing upon the storehouse of 
intuition s» s& 

It has been demonstrated that assimilation is always normal, 
when there is undisturbed nerve stimulus radiating through 
organized channels, or nerves, and that it immediately be- 
comes abnormal under occlusion of stimulus which, how- 
ever, is no more true of the function of assimilation than, 
that of any other process of the body. 

The office of assimilation, as we view it, is only the recon- 
struction of parts of cells following disintegration. However, 
when the mind is directed to the process of growing, it will be 

35* 



seen there is, not only that assimilation, but that there is a 
constant exuberance of assimilation which, in addition to 
repair, constructs tissues in conformity with an apparent 
plan, or image, for the maturity of the organism, and for the 
accomplishment of many incidental things, needing tem- 
porary tissue. 

The same phase of assimilation is also seen in lacerations and 
fractures and in those wounds where tissue has been to a 
considerable extent destroyed. 

In such conditions, not only must the ordinary tissue cells be 
replaced and their elemental parts restored, but there must 
be an additional assimilation as nearly in conformity with the 
original plan, as the condition of the nerves, with respect to 
radiation of stimulus and other circumstances, will permit. 
In restorative assimilation, nerve tissue is always primarily 
composed, followed by other tissues in the order of their 
importance s* $&■ 

The awesome phase of assimilation comes home to the scholar, 
when he realizes that by these same processes, the particles 
of the cells of the brain, are replaced and restored while they 
are receiving and transmitting stimulus, and were so orig- 
inally composed, by virtue of which process the whole phe- 
nomena of material, animal life is produced and maintained. 
The student should remember that his present ability to 
think, about these congeries of phenomena, is dependent 
upon the fact, that new particles are being, right now, woven 
into the cortical cells, in that part of his brain, where the 
portion of his mind, he is now using, is produced. 



352 



CHAPTER NO. 39 

Physiology— Touch, Taste and Smell 



T 



ANATOMIC SYNOPSIS 

Touch 
HE organ of touch is recognized as the skin and has 
been briefly described in the anatomic synopsis to 
physiology of the skin. 



Taste 
The tongue is said to be the organ of taste. It is a very mobile 
organ and is a part of the mouth. It occupies the floor, 
between the rami of the mandible, and is about three and a 
half inches long, and has a body, base, and apex. A 
dorsum and venter, connected by a margin. The tongue is 
attached, by its root to the hyoid bone and epiglottis. The 
apex is the ventral point; the dorsum is what would be called 
the top. See cut of Tongue No. 15. 

The tongue is constructed in two halves, connected by the 
median septum, to and from which muscles attach in every 
direction, so that the tongue may be moved in any direction. 
The dorsum of the tongue is covered with papillae or taste 
buds. Those occupying the tongue generally, but especially 
the tip third, are called the fungiform; those of the general 
dorsum of the tongue, filiform; those around the foramen 
cecum, circumvallate. 

Nerves — The tongue is ramified by nerves from five pairs of 
cranial trunks, also from the third, and fourth thoracic trunks. 

Smell 
The nose is classified as being the organ of smell. It consists 

353 



of the outer or visible part, and the inner or nasal fossae. 

The outer nose is composed of bone and cartilage, which gives 

form and character to the face. It is covered with the nasal 

skin s& so 

The nasal fossae consist of two tubes, separated by the nasal 

septum and called the ventral nares, the nasal meatus, and 

the pharyngeal nares. 

The nasal meatus is divided for function, into the olfactory, 

and respiratory portions. The mucous lining of the olfactory 

portion is very richly supplied with olfactory nerves. 

The nose is supplied with muscles so that the column of air 

may be directed through the olfactory or respiratory portions 

at will. 

Nerves — The nose is ramified from three pairs of cranial 

trunks; also from the second and third pairs of cervical 

trunks, and the third pair of thoracic trunks. 




Fig. 37 — The Nose 
1, shows bones and cartilages of which the nose is composed; 2, shows median septum of nose. 
3, shows ramification of olfactory nerves, schematically, of course. 



PHYSIOLOGIC ANALYSIS 

The physiology of the organs of special sense will be given 
briefly; the intention being to furnish a sufficient basis that 
the student may readily understand, not only the ultimates 
of the office of each organ, but to understand the general 
care of each and the phases of their abnormality. 



Touch 

The skin is recognized as the organ of touch and its physiol- 

354 



ogy has been given, generally under the physiology of the 
skin sn» $* 

It will be sufficient for the purposes here to say that mem- 
brane covering a surface, whether such surface is outside or 
inside, is the organ of touch to surfaces immediately under it, 
where such membrane, is supplied with nerves of apprehen- 
sion a«* £«*■ 

Membranes are supplied with the quality of touch only, 
where they serve as a protection, in what is ordinarily called 
feeling, such as is exhibited by the integument, or where a 
similar quality, acts in such way as to produce unconscious 
brain responses, which result in motor action, producing con- 
striction and sometimes fixation. 

This is true of extensive areas of mucous and especially of 
serous membrane. These areas are indicated in connection 
with either the physiology or pathology of the various parts 
of the body, and need no further remark at this time. 

Taste 
The tongue enters into many important offices carried on in 
and through the mouth. It is the organ of taste. It is also the 
organ of articulation. It enters into many offices as accessory. 
T[ The tongue is one of the controlling factors in the produc- 
tion of the music of the voice, controlling as it does the direc- 
tion and application of the column of air from the rima 
glottis, to the roof of the mouth, against the teeth, or from 
the mouth. 

Much space could be advantageously devoted to this func- 
tion of the tongue, but such a dissertation belongs to the 
department of voice culture, and will be passed here with the 
statement that to learn to control the tongue, in speech and 
song, and to never strain it, or incorrectly use it is one of the 
fine arts. 

The incorrect use of the tongue, whereby the tissues of the 
throat are strained, often results in grave motor reaction and 
occlusion causing much abnormality in the tissues of the 
larynx and pharynx. 

The tongue is also a very important organ of mastication. 

355 



Without it, that office could not be performed at all. It holds 
the food against the teeth from the oral aspect, it puts it into 
the vestibule and brings it back, and forces the saliva into 
the food and retains the food and saliva in such relation as 
to cause intermingling to take place readily, and when 
mastication is completed the tongue is the sole organ of 
deglutition. 

The tongue as an organ of taste is of great value to us in the 
selection and rejection of substances for food, in the deter- 
mining of temperature, and many other such offices. 
The tongue needs no especial care as such, but incident to the 
care of the mouth the tongue should be kept clean. It is so 
richly supplied with glands of excretion upon its dorsum that 
in any phase of abnormality affecting the nerves that ramify 
it, the dorsum retains, in the mucous surface depuratory 
substances. These are usually referred to as the coating of the 
tongue and the several different characters of appearance 
produced by these morbid exudations is considered by thera- 
peutists to be of important diagnostic value. 
Such accumulations should be removed from the tongue as 
far as possible, and for such purpose it is sometimes advisable 
to use a dull blade, an instrument that will not cut the 
tongue, but will remove the accumulation from it. 
The frenulum linguae frequently extends too far toward the 
apex of the tongue, causing the condition called tongue-tied, 
in rare cases needing the attention of proper surgery. 

Smell 
The nose, like the tongue, is an organ constructed to perform 
several functions. 

Its appendal or external part aids in giving character and 
perhaps beauty to the face and also serves as a thorough 
protection in the matter of respiration and smell. 
One of the important functions of the nose is that of respira- 
tion. All inspiration should be performed through the nose. 
The nostrils are so constructed, as to shape the column of 
ingoing air, which is also warmed, while passing through the 
nose and naso-pharynx, so that it will strike within the 
35 6 



aperture of the larynx, in such way as not to strain that 
organ, or roughen the edges of the rima. 

It must be admitted that the nose is too seldomly used in 
inspiration, but that fact does not remove the adverse effect 
of the error. An individual that does not inspire through the 
nose must pay the penalty, for not doing so, by abnormality 
of the larynx, trachea or bronchial tubes, or perhaps the 
whole of the air passages. 

The nose is the organ of smell and the part of it devoted to 
that office, should be most carefully guarded and protected, 
and therefore should be used as little as possible, except for 
the specific purpose for which it is constructed. That is, the 
olfactory portion should, so far as possible, be protected from 
the current of air, incident to ordinary inspiration. 
This protection may be accomplished by controlling the 
muscles of the nose so as to direct the column of air below the 
olfactory areas of the nasal fossae. By observing this rule, the 
olfactory portions of the fossae will be kept highly sensitive 
and keen; whereas, if respiration is generally performed 
through them, their powers will become dulled and weakened. 
^[ The first essential, in the care of the nose is to keep it clean, 
and this should be accomplished by using its depuratory 
offices in a normal way, and not by mechanical interference 
and the projection of foreign substances into the nose ac» 
The habit of many persons, of projecting the fingers and 
thumbs into the nose is very injurious and should not be 
followed s*> so 

Generally speaking, all forms of nasal douche, etc., are to be 
avoided, save only in the last emergency. It is a law, that all 
tubes of elimination that open to the surface are constructed 
to cleanse themselves without assistance, and are injured by 
being entered with any foreign substance for the purpose of 
assisting in elimination. 

The nose has been a place, where commercial surgeons have 
fattened on an ignorant public. Except in cases of fracture, 
and possibly malignant fibrous tumors, there is never any 
occasion for surgery, in the normally formed nose. 
It should be the object of each individual, to keep the nerves 

357 



ramifying the nose free from occlusion, in order that blood 
and lymph movement may be maintained freely. 
This fact must be impressed upon those that wear glasses in 
this spectacle ridden age, for all kinds of glasses have the 
one serious defect, no matter what the form of their appliance, 
of occluding nerve stimulus to the nose and for this reason, 
and for general reasons as well, a thorough and deep massage 
of the appendal nose, on its whole exterior should be fre- 
quently performed. 



358 



CHAPTER NO. 40 

Physiology — Seeing and Hearing 

ANATOMIC SYNOPSIS 

Seeing 

THE eyes are the specific and immediate organs for the 
function of seeing. 

There are two eyes, situated in the orbital cavities. The 
eye is divided for consideration into the orbit, the eyeball, the 
refracting media, and the covering of the eyes. 
The orbit is a quasi-cavity, into which the optic nerve trunk 
of each side extends. It is lined and cushioned with a deposit 
of fatty substance, and also with a membrane called the 
capsule of Tenon, which after lining the cavities, is reflected 
to the eyeball, enclosing the perisclerotic lymph space in 
which the eyeball moves easily. 

The eyeball is about an inch in the transverse diameter, and 
about nine-tenths of an inch, in the dorso-ventral diameter, 
being almost a sphere flattened slightly at the dorso-ventral 
poles &» s«. 

The wall of the eyeball is composed, from without in, of the 
following coats, sclerotic, choroid and retina. 
The retina is the inside coat and is the coat in which the 
optic nerves ramify. 

The choroid is the middle brown coat, which shuts out all 
light, except in that part of it called the iris, through which 
there is an aperture called the pupil. 

The sclerotic is the outside opaque coat and is tough, and 
invests the posterior five-sixths of the ball and is finished 
ventrally, by a transparent area, called the cornea. 
The inside of the eyeball is separated into two chambers by 

359 




ORA SF.RRATA 



Fig. 38— Eyeball and Coats 
The student will observe all of the parts are plainly named on this eut. He should also note 
the difference between the optic axis, which is the axis of the eyeball, in comparison with the 
visual axis which is several degrees removed from it. The cut represents the right eye. 



360 



ANTERIOR CILIRRY ARTERIES 




LONG CILIARY 
S) ARTERY 



ANTERIOR CILIARY ARTERIES 



Fig. 39— Iris 
This figure is intended to show the blood supply of the iris but when that subject is taken into 
consideration in connection with the lymph movement, the student will readily understand, 
how morbid accumulations mark the iris and how the death of cells in it, can be seen through 
the clear liquid. 



the crystalline lens and its circular ligament. The ventral 
chamber is occupied by aqueous humor; the dorsal chamber 
by vitreous, humor. These three constitute the refracting 
media. The ventral chamber is almost divided again by the 
iris, all refraction taking place through the pupil thereof so 
The coverings of the eye are the headward and feetward eye- 
lids, which are bordered with hairs, called lashes; and, lined 
with a refined skin, called conjunctiva. The area thus lined is 
called the fornix. 

In the headward lateral aspect, each eye is supplied by the 
lachrymal gland, the excretion from which is called tears, and 
tend to cleanse the eyes. 

Nerves — From the first, second and fifth cranial trunks, and 
from the fourth and twelfth thoracic trunks ramify the eyes. 

361 




Fig. 40 — Lachrymal Apparatus 
The figure shows the apparatus'of the right eye, the lachrymal gland lying head-lateral to 
the eyeball, its duets discharging onto the headward part of the conjunctiva, the fluid finally 
reaching the mesial canthus, and being discharged into the nasal duct and then into the nose. 



Hearing 
The ear is said to be the organ of hearing, and is divided for 
consideration into the external, middle, and internal ear a«* 
The external ear is composed of the pinna and auditory 
meatus. The pinna is the appendal part of the ear. The 
auditory meatus is partly cartilaginous and partly osseous, 
and extends to the middle ear, from which it is separated by 
the tympanum. 

The middle ear is a prolongation, dorsalward from the 
Eustachian tube, through the petrous portion, into the 
mastoid portion of the temporal bone. The middle ear, com- 
posed of the mastoid cells and middle ear chamber, which 
opens laterally into the auditory meatus and mesially into 
the inner ear, both of which orifices are closed by diaphragms; 
the lateral- one called the tympanum; the mesial one, the 
fenestra ovalis. 

The two diaphragms of the middle ear are connected, by 
three bones, the hammer, anvil and stirrup, which carry 
vibrations of the tympanum, through to the inner ear. 
The inner ear is called the vestibule, cochlea and labyrinth. 
362 



Tympanic cavity, with cliain of ossicles 
Semicircular canal 
Utriclo ' 
Ductus endolym phaticus 
Saccule 

Cochlea 




ruina 



Eustachian lul,- 

Membrana cympan 

Recessus epityinpanicus 

External auditory meatus 



Fig. 41— The Ear 

The schematic arrangement here shows the left ear, the headward part of the meatus, Eusta- 
chian tube, etc., is cut away, showing portion of the external ear, the whole middle ear and 
inner ear. The opening into the mastoid cells is not shown but it is in the head dorsal part 
of middle ear dorsal to articulation of the ossicles shown. 



These are cavities in the petrous bone, and are occupied 
respectively by the utricle and saccule; the cochlear tubes and 
the tubes of the semi-circular canals. It is these structures that 
the auditory nerves ramify. 

The osseous tube around these membranous tubes is full of 
lymph so that the tubes substantially float therein. 
Nerves — The ears are ramified by nerves from three pairs of 
cranial trunks, and from the third thoracic and first and 
second pairs of cervical trunks. 



PHYSIOLOGIC ANALYSIS 

Seeing 
The eye is the organ through which vision is accomplished. 
The value of this special sense needs no emphasis. It is 
perhaps the most valuable of any of the special senses. 
The eye is a machine of very delicate construction and its 

363 



care should at all times receive the best attention of which 
the individual is capable. Without going into any consider- 
able detail, so-called rays of light, falling into the eye, 
through the transparent cornea, aqueous humor, crystalline 
lens and viterous humor, are so refracted as to concentrate 
upon the retina of the eye, which contains the optic nerves, 
producing the vibration, translated into the sense of sight. 
^[ In order that the amount of rays falling into the eye shall 
be controlled, the pupil must be contracted or dilated to 
meet the needs. 

It is this muscular effort, when incorrectly or unadvisedly 
performed, that produces " eye strain," a form of irritation 
that affects, by motor reaction, brain cells and nerves, that 
in turn affect the stomach, upper small intestine, the liver, 
kidneys and heart; not always in the same degree but always 
to some extent and usually one of these organs gravely s* 
To the end that " eye strain " may be avoided the rays to 
the eye should be carefully regulated, and the habit of read- 
ing by uncertain light, such as twilight, or dim light should be 
avoided and also the habit of using the eyes in a certain 
manner for long periods without rest should be avoided s©» 
The eyes should be kept clean, but in accomplishing this, 
foreign substances should not be put into them, excepting 
pure, and preferably soft water. 

The best liquid with which to cleanse the eye, in its normal 
condition, is distilled water, of the temperature of spring 
water; drugs, especially antiseptics, should never be used in 
the eye, except as the very last resort, and the condition 
must indeed be grave before such need is reached. 
The eyeballs should never be pressed heavily, nor rubbed and 
squeezed. The muscles of the eyeballs should be carefully 
exercised by rapid and frequent movements of the eyeball 
in every direction. 

The tissues around the margins of the orbit, and in the 
immediate region, and over the temporal area and forehead, 
including the eyelids should be daily massaged, for the pur- 
pose of securing free radiation of stimulus and movement of 
liquids in these tissues. 
3 6 4 



The eye is not only an organ of vision; it is an organ of power, 
control and persuasion, to say nothing of beauty; but its 
most wonderful value is the fact that the iris faithfully pre- 
sents functional conditions of all parts of the body. This is 
fully explained in " diagnosis from the eye," in Carver's 
Chiropractic Analysis. 

Hearing 
The ear is the machine through which vibrations are trans- 
mitted, that are translated into the sense of sound. Cleanli- 
ness and freedom of the parts are prime factors in the care of 
the ear. As to the inner ear, nothing can be done, by the 
individual, except to keep the nerves to it free from occlusion. 
*\ The middle ear is a tube-like structure, beginning dorsally 
in the mastoid antrum, or spaces in the mastoid part of the 
temporal bone, and extending, generally ventral and mesial 
through the middle ear proper, and the Eustachian tubes into 
the naso-pharynx, all of which, is lined with mucous mem- 
brane, quite richly supplied with mucous glands. 
It is of the greatest importance that the Eustachian tubes 
shall be kept free and open, in order that air may pass freely 
in and out of these cavities and therefore press equally on 
both sides of the tympanic membrane. 

To secure this condition sometimes requires, removal of 
occlusion of stimulus to the nerves that ramify the dorsal 
walls of the naso-pharynx. Instrument interference with the 
Eustachian tubes, and the middle ear should be carefully 
avoided s& so 

It is with the appendal ear and external auditory meatus, 
that the individual has most to do in the proper care of the 
ear s+ s& 

The appendal portion, and the attached cartilaginous meatus, 
should at all times be kept thoroughly exercised, to the end 
that no solid residues of elimination shall deposit around 
them, making them inactive. A thorough ear massage is 
productive of removal of occlusion, from the nerves to the 
external ear and meatus and is valuable and essential s«* 
Such massage also aids, in the- elimination of accumulated 

365 



wax, from the deeper part of the external meatus. It is 
essential that the cerumen or wax, which is a mucoid exuda- 
tion from the walls of the meatus, shall be freely eliminated, 
but where that function is not accomplished by the ear itself, 
under proper manipulation, the wax should be very gently 
removed so so 

If the cerumen is accumulated near the orifice of the meatus, 
it may be removed by some instrument well adapted to that 
purpose; but otherwise it should be gently washed from the 
meatus by a soft-nosed rubber syringe, the water should be 
projected, so as to never strike directly upon the tympanic 
membrane, but should be so directed as to reduce the force 
and current along the dorsal wall of the meatus, so that it will 
eddy across the membrane and thus return along the other 
wall so so 

Injection of water into the ear should very seldom be neces- 
sary, and where the need for such application occurs fre- 
quently, it is proof that the meatus is in very abnormal con- 
dition so so 

Generally speaking, the rule is that no foreign substance 
should ever be put into the ear for any purpose. 
It seems hardly necessary to add that the ear should be pro- 
tected as far as possible from violent shocks and so-called 
sounds so so 



366 



CHAPTER NO. 41 

Physiology— Male Procreation 

ANATOMIC SYNOPSIS 

THE male and female procreative organs, together con- 
stitute a complete system of procreation. 
The external procreative organs of the male are the 
penis, testes, scrotum and parts of the urethra, spermatic 
cord and vas deferens. The internal organs are, parts of the 
vas deferens and urethra, and the seminal vesicles, ejacu- 
latory ducts, prostate gland, and sinus pocularis. 
The testes are tubulated glands, that produce spermatozoa. 
They are suspended from the spermatic cords, which con- 
tain the nerves and arteries to the testes, and the veins and 
lymph vessels away from them. 

The testes are two in number and are contained in the sac 
or dartos called the scrotum. The tubules of the testes have 
been variously estimated at three hundred, with a length of 
sixteen feet, to eight hundred with a length of two and one- 
fourth feet. 

The tubules are estimated to be of a diameter of from one 
two-hundredths to one-fiftieth of an inch. This fact accounts 
for there being some doubt as to their length. The lobules of 
each testis have been estimated at from two hundred fifty to 
four hundred. 

The testes, like all glands, have a cortex and medullary por- 
tion. At the base of the testis is the epididymis from which 
extends the vas deferens, about eighteen inches in length, 
through the spermatic cord, external abdominal ring, inguinal 
canal, ventral abdominal ring to the dorsal aspect of the 
pelvis, ending in the seminal vesicle. 

The vas deferens convey the spermatozoa, produced in the 

367 




A B 

Fig. 42 — A — Vertical Section of Testis. B — Testis and Coverings. 
A — 1, Vas deferens; 2, Spermatic artery; 3, Vas aberrans; 4, Body of epididymis; 5, Globus 
minor; 6, Rete Testis; 7, Mediastinum; 8, Vasa recta; 10, Tunica vaginalis; 13, Tunica albu- 
ginea; 9, Its septa; 11, Vas efferentia; 12, Globus major; 14, 14, etc., lobuli. 
B — 1, Testis; 2, Head of epididymis; 3, Body of same; 4, Tunica vaginalis, parietal layer; 
5, Cremaster; 6, Artery of spermatic cord; 7, Spermatic cord; 8, Tail of epididymis. 



tubules of the testes, in their liquid, called semen, to the 
seminal vesicles. 

The ejaculatory ducts, one from each side, extend through 
the prostate gland for a distance of three-fourths of an inch, 
discharging into the sinus pocularis, at about the middle por- 
tion of the dorsal wall of the prostatic urethra, by from 
twelve to twenty slit-like orifices. 

The urethra extends from the bladder through the prostate 
gland, and membranous diaphragm of the pelvis, and thence 
throughout the entire length of the spongy body of the penis 
to the glans, ending in the urinary meatus. 
The prostate gland is fitted, by its base, to the cervix of the 
bladder, while its apex extends almost directly feetward, and 
is supported by the triangular ligaments. The prostate 
structure, separates the bladder, seminal vesicles and rectum 
368 




Fig. 43 — Right Side View of the Viscera of the Male Pelvis 
1, Divided surface of the os pubis; 2, Divided surface of the sacrum; 3, Body of the bladder; 
4, Its fundus; from its apex is seen passing upward the urachus; 5, Base of the bladder; 6, 
Ureter; 7, Neck of the bladder; 8, 8, Pelvic faseise; 9, Prostate gland; 10, Membranous 
portion of the urethra; 11, Triangular ligament; 12, One of Cowper's glands lying beneath 
the membranous portion of the urethra; 13, Bulb of corpus spongiosum; 14, Body of corpus 
spongiosum; 15, Right crus penis; 16, Upper part of the first portion of the rectum; 17, Recto- 
vesical fold of peritoneum; 18, Second portion of the rectum; 19, Right vesicula seminalis; 
20, Vas deferens; 21, The rectum covered by the descending layer of the pelvic fascia; 22, 
Part of the levator ani muscle investing the lower part of the rectum; 23, External sphincter 
ani; 24, Interval between the superficial perineal fascia and triangular ligament. 



from each other, and is supported by the perineal body. 
The penis is a prismoid organ, from four to seven inches in 
length, placed about an inch below the symphysis pubis. It is 
composed of the root, body and glans. 

The body of the penis is composed of the corpora cavernosa, 
which have origin from the rami of the pubes and extend 
ventral, side by side, ending by a blunt point, which is capped 
by the glans or terminal structure of the corpus spongiosum. 
1[ The skin of the penis extends forward to the glans. That 
part of it covering the spongy body extending forward to the 
meatus, in a fold, is called the frenum. The remainder of the 
skin of the penis that extends to or over the glans is called, 
the prepuce. 

The two bodies called the corpora cavernosa and the corpus 
spongiosum are so constructed as to contain vascular cavities, 
which, upon arousement of the procreative emotion, become 

369 



highly congested with blood, which results in what is called 
an erection. This process is aided by the erectile musculature 
that also applies itself to the penis. 

Nerves — In the order of importance — second and first 
lumbars, and twelfth thoracic to the testes especially. The 
twelfth and eleventh thoracics to the urethra, seminal vesicles 
and the prostate gland, and the erectile tissue relative 
thereto; also to the spermatic cord and vas deferens. The 
second and fourth lumbars to the erectile tissues, spermatic 
cords, vas deferens and perineal body; and as to the perineal 
body, corpus spongiosum, scrotum and integument over the 
area described, the pudic nerves. 

PHYSIOLOGIC ANALYSIS 

The prime function of the male organs of procreation is to 
produce spermatozoa and semen and, under proper circum- 
stances, deposit the same within the procreative apparatus 
of the female, in such manner that impregnation of ova may 
occur s& $&> 

This function begins in the epithelial lining of the tubules of 
the testes by the production of a peculiar cell, that when 
matured is called a spermatozoon. These cells grow among 
the epithelial cells, from which they are characteristically 
different. 

The remarkable thing about a spermatozoon is, that it has 
no independent power of reproduction until it has impreg- 
nated an ovum. At the same time these cells are produced, 
there is produced in the tubules a peculiar light colored liquid 
called semen, into which, when sufficiently matured, the 
spermatozoa drop and float until they have performed the 
office of impregnation; have been disintegrated, or have been 
discharged from the body. 

Semen is a viscid, whitish liquid of characteristic odor. It is 
water with about eighteen per cent of solids, varying in 
formula, but containing fat, cholesterin, lectithin, proteids, 
nuclein, xanthin, chlorides, sulphates, phosphates of sodium 
and potassium. It will be observed that semen contains 
sufficient of the elements of the body to compose a substantial 
370 



nutriment for the spermatozoa for the period of their exist- 
ence, as such. 

The production of semen and spermatozoa, is a continuous 
process, in the human male. During the period of procreative 
ability many millions of these cells are produced. They are 
produced more rapidly under sexual excitation, and during 
periods of sexual activity. 

The production of spermatozoa is greatly reduced during 
sexual abstinence, and the absence of sexual excitation. This 
function of the testes has been known to be wholly lost, by 
non-use, and to be wholly lost, by excessive use. 
The law, with respect to these organs, as with others, is that 
normal and correct use is essential to health, and virility, and 
that any other phase, or degree of use is injurious and 
debilitating s& s«* 

The impulse to procreate is practically continuous with the 
normal male during the entire period of sexual ability. This 
emotion, like others, should be carefully safeguarded and 
kept under the control of mind, which should be stored with 
the essential facts pertaining to the use, health and resistance 
of these organs. 

It will be seen, that the essential organs of male procreation 
are the testes. These are suspended from the body, below the 
pubis, by the spermatic cords, which contain arteries, veins, 
lymph vessels, nerves and the seminal ducts, all bound 
together and supported by a musculo-membranous substance. 
T[ The spermatic cords have great contractility, as do the 
scrotal tissues. In order that these tissues shall retain their 
power they should be thoroughly protected, and yet in their 
protection they should not be debilitated. Appliances should 
never be used, to suspend the carrying function of the cord, 
except under great debility, and then as an emergency 
measure to be dispensed with upon returning virility. 
The scrotum should be exposed to the free passage of air as 
much as is possible in civilized dress. Care should be taken 
that the clothing shall not be tight about this part of the 
body, and the scrotum should never be wrapped in the 
clothing. This is especially true in warm climates. 

37 1 



It will not be necessary, to more than refer to the fact, which 
is fully suggested by their protected position on the body, 
that the testes should never be subjected to blows, violent 
shocks, or unusual pressure. 

The penis next to the testes, is essential to procreation, and is, 
generally speaking, the best cared for by the least attention 
to it, provided always that it is normally constructed. It must 
however be remembered that this organ especially the glans, 
must be kept in sanitary condition. The glans of the organ 
become a subject of constant care, where the prepuce is suf- 
ficiently long to cover it. 

There is a rich exudation of mucoid, and sebaceous sub- 
stances, from the inner surface of the prepuce, around the 
neck of the glans, which is of a chemical character, liable 
under heat and close confinement, to quickly become rancid, 
and in this state the substance is an active irritant, pro- 
ducing much excitation and widespread motor reaction ao» 
The long prepuce quite frequently occurs. In children, it 
requires the most scrupulous attention, on the part of the 
mother or nurse, since the irritation described, not only 
operates to seriously affect the health of the child, but is a 
fruitful source of infantile masturbation, with all its dread 
consequences, not infrequently resulting in insanity and very 
frequently in perversion and mental degeneracy. 
If the prepuce is unusually long and especially if tight, or 
banded so as to squeeze the glans, or the neck of the penis 
dorsal to the glans, circumcision by an expert operator is 
indicated, as early as possible, the earlier the better. 
No attention on the part of the individual can be directly 
given to the internal organs, farther than has already been 
suggested in this chapter, but an understanding of them will 
aid the individual materially in their protection. 
The seminal duct or vas deferens, as has already been stated, 
conveys the semen, carrying within itself, spermatozoa up 
the spermatic cord through the external abdominal ring, the 
inguinal canal, through the visceral abdominal ring and down 
along the walls of the pelvis to the seminal vesicles. 
Much of this distance is against gravity and it will be 
372 



observed, that this fluid is moved by the direct force of nerve 
stimulus, a phenomenon not before pointed out in physiology. 
It is mentioned here to direct the student's mind to the value 
of keeping the nerves, that control this function, free from 
occlusion so so 

The seminal vesicles are dorso-headward to the prostate 
glands, between the rectum and bladder. It will be seen that 
the prostate gland, supports these vessels, and also the 
urinary bladder, protects the prostatic urethra, and aids in 
keeping in proper relation the sphincters of the bladder and 
the erectile tissue of the sinus pocularis. 

It is frequently overlooked, that the sinus pocularis is the 
analogue of the uterus, and its normal shape and freedom is 
essential to the undisturbed ejaculation of semen into the 
urethra, on its way to the point of function, in the act of 
procreation so so 

No operation can be performed on the prostate gland, ure- 
thral orifice of the bladder or relative tissue, without in part, 
destroying this function. 

Generally speaking the function of ejaculation, and the 
erectility of the tissues, will be interfered with in ratio with 
the number of nerves cut, destroyed or rendered inoperative by 
any instrumental interference. 

It is hardly necessary to add, that the transmission of semen 
from the sinus pocularis to the meatus of the glans, could not 
be accomplished, without the co-operation of the erectile tis- 
sues along the entire tract, and since the function of these 
tissues is always lost in ratio with occlusion of stimulus in 
the nerves to them, the student will grasp the importance 
of situ of the sacro-iliac and lumbar articulations. 
All that has been said as to the urethral tract and bladder, 
applies as fully to the urinary function as to that of procrea- 
tion, except that in the transmission of urine from the bladder 
to the meatus the accelerator and compressor muscles are 
involved instead of the erectile tissues. 

Too much emphasis can not be placed upon, the value of the 
support of the prostate to the seminal vesicles and bladder. 
It will be recalled that the prostate is headward from the 

373 



perineal body, which rests upon the dorsal aspect of the 
triangular ligaments headward from the transverse perineal 
muscle, and in this position, so long as these tissues maintain 
their size, and occupy their proper relation, proper function 
is assured. 

This fact explains the agonizing conditions, and the frequent 
loss of function, incident to the weakening of the transverse 
perineal muscles and the triangular ligaments, and the 
debility or atrophy of the perineal body. 
These conditions are frequent in old men; and as a result of 
the frequency of venereal disease are often present in the 
young. 

In such conditions, a prostatic support, pending recovery of 
virility is always indicated. Such a support would avoid much 
agony in old age, and would frequently avoid suppression of 
urine and failure of function in other respects. The glandular 
structure of the prostate and Cowper's glands exude rich 
lubricants into the urethra which prevent the semen and 
spermatozoa from adhering to the walls or in any manner 
being checked in passage. 



374 



CHAPTER NO. 42 

Physiology — Female Procreation 

ANATOMIC SYNOPSIS 

THE female organs of procreation are partly external 
and partly internal. 

The external organs are the mons veneris, labia majora, 
labia minora, urethra, vaginal orifice, vestibule and clitoris so* 
The internal organs are the ovaries, Fallopian tubes, uterus 
and vagina. 

The ovaries are, in every sense analogous, to the testes. They 
are oval, elongated bodies, situated on each side of the uterus, 
against the dorso-lateral wall of the pelvis, between the layers 
of the broad ligament. They are attached to the uterus by 
the ovarian ligaments. These glands occupy the recess in the 
soft tissue of the sciatic notch, and are overhung ventrally, by 
the psoas muscles. 

The normal axis of the ovary is almost head-feetward, the 
tubular end headward, while the polar or fimbriated end is 
leetward, the fimbriated end being attached to the fimbria 
of the Fallopian tubes, which are the oviducts, and carry 
follicular liquid and ova, from the surface of the ovary, into 
the uterus and vaginal tract. 

The ovaries contain many small vessels, called Graafian 
follicles, which are about one one-hundredth of an inch in 
diameter. At puberty these follicles begin development, and 
continue to develop and discharge ripened ova throughout 
the fruitful period of the woman. 

Generally there is but one ovum ripens at the same time, but 
several may be discharged within a very short period s— 
The epithelial cells, of the Graafian follicles become nests in 
which ova develop; one primordial ovum developing in each 

375 



nest. As the ovum grows, the sac deepens into the substance 
of the ovary and approaches the surface also. At maturity of 
the ovum, the vessel ruptures and the ripened ovum with its 
follicular fluid, which is analogously the same as semen, comes 
out upon the surface of the ovary and from thence by nerve 
stimulus, is impelled into the fimbriated extremity of the 
Fallopian tube, and into its ampulla, from which it is used in 
copulation s«* so* 




T-Tcr-rrtA OF FEMALE PELVIS. 

Fig. 44 — Viscera of Female Pelvis 
1, Vagina; 2, Bladder; 3, Interior of rectum; 4, The Uterus: a. fundus; b, cervix; c, c, os uteri; 
d, dorsal portion; e, ventral portion; 5, Rectum, here covered by peritoneum; 6, 6, 6, 
Sacrum; 7, Coccyx; 8, Labia minora; 9, Labia majora; 10, Urethra; 11, Symphysis pubis; 
l u 2, Clitoris; 13, Mons Veneris; 14, Urachus; 15, Section of peritoneum; 10, Last lumbar 
vertebra; 17, Broad ligament; 18, Ovary. 



376 



The uterus is a hollow, muscular organ in which gestation 
takes place. It occupies a position between the bladder and 
rectum. The uterus is very thick walled and generally is a 
very mobile organ within certain, fixed limits. It is classi- 
fied as being composed of a. fundus, body and neck. The neck 
is called the cervix; the entrance from the neck into the body 
is called the internal os, while the end of the tube in the 
vagina is called the external os. 

The virgin uterus is a pear shaped, flattened organ, with its 
fundus directed head-ventral, while its cervix looks feet- 
dorsal, standing upon a slant of about forty-five degrees. 
The adult uterus measures about three inches in length, two 
inches in breadth, one inch in thickness. 

The uterus extends into the vagina, which is attached around 
its cervix. The vaginal fold around the attachment is called 
the fornix. It is considered therefore as the headward fornix 
and feetward fornix. 

The uterus is retained relatively near its position by its 
ventral and dorsal ligaments; its right and left broad liga- 
ments; its sacro-uterine ligaments, and the two round liga- 
ments. Anatomically, the uterus is not suspended in any 
manner, but in its position, is a buoyant organ. 
The vagina is a musculo-membranous tube, extending from 
the cervix of the uterus to the vaginal orifice, at the puden- 
dum. It is very richly supplied with erectile tissue. It is about 
two and a half inches long on its headward surface and three 
and a half inches long on its feetward surface. It is very 
elastic, and is capable of great elongation and great disten- 
sion. In this connection it must be remembered, that it is 
through this tube, that the fetus is projected at delivery s& 
Dorso-feetward to the vagina, and feetward to the cervix of 
the uterus is the perineal body, which furnishes much sup- 
port to the buoyancy of these organs. 

The clitoris is an erectile structure and is in every sense, 
analogous to the penis, except that it is not traversed by the 
spongy body and urethra. It is composed of the corpora caver- 
nosa, which end bluntly, and are capped by the glans clitoris, 
a small substance very richly supplied with sensory nerves so» 

377 



The clitoris is about one and a fourth inches in length. It is 
enfolded by the labia minora, which from the lateral folds 
form its prepuce. That extending on the feetward aspect of 
the clitoris forms the frenum clitoris. 
The urethra extends from the bladder in the headward wall 




Fig. No. 45. The Vulva. 
1, 1, Labia minora, or Nymphse; 2, 2, Labia majora; 3, Clitoris prepuce; 4, Glans 
clitoris; 5, [5, Caruncula myrtiformes; 6, Orifice of vagina; 7, Fourchette; 8, Fosas 
naviculars; 9, Posterior commissure; 10, Perineum; 11, Anus, 12 Mons veneris; 
15, The vestibule; 16, Meatus urinarius. 



378 



of the vagina, and opens just headward to the vaginal orifice. 
The labia minora furnish a soft, moist protection, to the 
vaginal and urethral orifices, and should be covered by the 
labia majora. 

The labia majora are two prominent folds of skin, underlaid 
by a considerable fatty tissue that extends over the pubes, 
constructing the mons veneris, dying away to practically level 
structures at the dorsal aspect of the vaginal orifice. These 
labia are thickly covered with strong, crisp hairs, and are for 
the protection of the pudendal slit, and its sensitive structures. 
\ The external organs of the female, considered as a whole, 
are called the vulva. 

In addition to these, as accessory, there are the mammaries, 
composed of two aggregations of glands, one at each side of 
the thorax, extending longitudinally from the third to the 
seventh ribs, and laterally from the sternum to the axillae. 
*\ Nerves — In order of their importance; first and second 
lumbars to the vagina and labia; the second and first lumbars 
and twelfth thoracic to the ovaries, Fallopian tubes and uterus; 
the fourth and fifth lumbars and first and second sacral to 
the erectile tissues of the vagina and vaginal orifice, and to 
the crura of the clitoris, the pudic nerve trunks to the perineal 
body, integument of the vulva, prepuce, glans clitoris and the 
immediate skin in this area. 

The mammary glands are ramified by nerves from the second 
to the sixth thoracic trunks inclusive, but principally from the 
second, third and fourth thoracic trunks. 

PHYSIOLOGIC ANALYSIS 

The function of female procreation, begins with the pro- 
duction of ova, in the Graafian follicles of the ovaries. 
Here an ovum is produced by a process of budding among 
the epithelial cells, lining the Graafian follicles. 
The remarkable thing, in connection with this process is, 
that the ovum, is not characteristically like the cells among 
which it grows, but in itself, has no power of reproduction 
and only exhibits this power when its oolemma or outside 

379 



covering is pierced by a spermatozoon in the process of 
impregnation. 

When an ovum is matured, the follicle ruptures and the 
follicular liquid, which is of the same consistence as semen, 
escapes to the abdominal surface of the ovary, bearing the 
ovum with it; from which place it is propelled by nerve 
stimulus, usually against gravity, into the fimbriated extrem- 
ity of the Fallopian tube, and thence into the ampulla of the 
tubes, which are analogous to the seminal vesicles, and act 
as reservoirs of emergency, to the function of procreation. 
From the ampulla, ova in follicular liquid, are projected into 
the cavity of the uterus, and thence through the cervix into 
the vagina. 

Some discussion is still indulged as to where impregnation 
takes place; some authors suggest the Fallopian tubes. It 
seems, however, perfectly clear that impregnation may take 
place, at any point from just within the vaginal orifice to the 
ovarian surface. 

The entire experience of the human family, however, tends to 
prove that, impregnation generally takes place at or near the 
external os of the uterus. Nothing further will be cited to sus- 
tain this position than the relationship of the meatus of the 
glans, to the os in the act of copulation. 

The production of ova, in the ovaries of the female, generally 
speaking, is continuous throughout the fruitful period of the 
woman, that is from puberty to the menopause. 
The number of ova produced by different females differ 
greatly, depending upon hereditary tendency, normality of 
construction, health and sexual activity or sex excitement &o- 
The number of ova produced, however, are very few in com- 
parison with the number of spermatozoa produced by the 
male s** so- 

A normal woman is not constantly the subject of the pro- 
creative impulse. Given normal construction of the parts, 
and removed from adverse hereditary, mental tendency, a 
woman should be the subject of the procreative impulse, but 
for a short time, from a few hours to a day or two, once each 
twenty-eight days. 
380 ^ 



It is with profound regret, however, that it must be admitted, 
that under the abuses, that men have inflicted upon women 
for perhaps thousands of generations, women have become 
sufficiently abnormal, mentally and physically, to generally 
entertain much the same attitude to the procreative act, as 
that of men. 

However, before the human family can evolve to the physical 
splendor to which it is entitled, all this must be changed and 
women must come to know, that in order to be proper 
mothers of the race they must, during the fruitful period of 
their lives, live undisturbed, according to the animalistic 
laws of procreation. I do not seek to explain how this will be 
brought about, but only state the scientific fact, and leave the 
social problem to others. 

At the end of the fruitful period, the ovaries cease to produce 
ova and shrink somewhat in size. However, the Fallopian 
tubes, always remain as depuratory channels, discharging 
into the uterus. 

The uterus is an organ of dual function. During the fruitful 
period, it is a sort of reservoir of follicular liquid bearing ova, 
which fact, converts it into a depuratory receptacle, which 
depuratory substance, should normally be eliminated each 
twenty-eight days. 

It is because of this fact, as well as others directly incident 
thereto, that suppression of the menses is so deleterious, and 
results in such profound irritation, producing so much motor 
reaction and wide spread occlusion to different parts of the 
body sfr so 

Too much emphasis can not be placed upon the necessity for 
regular menstruation, during the fruitful period, and free 
drainage from the uterus subsequently, during life. 
The uterus, as has already been stated, in the chapter on 
embryology, is the receptacle, in the wall of which, the 
impregnated ovum develops, until its expansion occupies 
the uterine cavity, and until the embryo has passed through 
the stages of development to a fetus, which is called full term 
or until expulsion from the uterus. 

It needs only to be observed in passing that the uterus is a 

381 



very mobile organ, and that its freedom of movement within 
the scope of its normal area should be maintained at what- 
ever cost. 

Teaching upon this subject, has led to the assumption that 
the uterus is a fixed organ, and commercial surgery has 
acquired much advantage as a result thereof. There has been 
much exploitation of the proposition of uterine displacement. 
In the abstract, this is all wrong and has had a very injurious 
effect upon the human family. 

An abnormal uterus is sometimes displaced, but when it is, it is 
so because of displacement of relative tissue; generally the 
result of occlusion of nerves, primarily produced, by dis- 
placement of the bones composing the dorsal pelvic wall, as 
well as the changes in the position of those bones, forcing a 
change in the position of the pelvic viscera. 
A normal uterus is never displaced, and a normal uterus 
always moves readily in any direction, by the application of 
gentle force. Because of this fact, the dress of females, has 
gravely influenced the position of the uterus. 
In some way which it is not necessary to discuss, civilized 
human beings, generally, got the concept, that the waist of a 
woman should be small and for thousands of generations, 
have sought to mould her to that form, when she should be 
relatively broader through the back, at the waist than the 
man, in proportion to her height. 

The dress, incident to the abnormal concept of woman's 
form, has resulted in the compression of the abdominal viscera 
into the pelvis, forcing the uterus to occupy a deeper position 
in the pelvis, and nearer the pubis than normal; thus render- 
ing the organ less mobile than it should be, making it a 
center of irritation, with constant traction on nerves, pro- 
ducing occlusion, which in turn causes all forms of tissue 
debility, in the uterus itself, and relative erectile tissues, as 
well as catarrh, cysts, tumors, etc. 

The vagina, as has been stated in the anatomic synopsis is a 
musculo-membranous tube, extending from the cervix of the 
uterus to its orifice at the vulva. 

Aside from its function of carrying depuratory substances, 
782 



from the Fallopian tubes and uterus to the surface of the 
body, and delivery of the fetus, it is constructed solely, for 
the projection of the penis of the male into it, in the act of 
copulation, and is so fashioned, that, under reasonably 
normal conditions, its application to that organ is sufficiently 
intimate to assure the delivery of semen and spermatozoa at 
the orifice of the uterus. 

Comparatively speaking, the mucous lining of the vagina is a 
very extensive surface, when considered from the richness of 
its nerve supply. Its function is a delicate one, and it is a 
delicately constructed organ, not from the standpoint of its 
strength or resistance, but from the standpoint of its great 
sensitiveness. 

Aside from its function in copulation, it is the passage through 
which at term, the delivery of the fetus is accomplished, and 
in the accomplishment of that function, by traction the 
nerves are occluded sufficiently to render it practically non- 
sensitive, for that time. 

The vagina is not constructed for entrance into it, of other 
foreign substance, than that necessary to procreation, and 
generally speaking the pernicious habit of douches, and the 
application of any substances in it, are injurious to it — not 
only to it, but because of its richness of nerve supply by 
motor reaction, to many vital centers of the body. 
There is no one adverse habit, that will more generally and 
subtly injure the health of a woman, than regularity of the 
vaginal douche. In anything like health, this tube will per- 
fectly cleanse itself. When it does not do so the individual 
may know that she is far from well. 

The clitoris performs much the same function in the pro- 
creative relation as the glans of the male. Nothing further 
need be said of it except to say that its glans is remarkably 
sensitive. The same precautions with regard to it should be 
observed as those suggested as to the glans penis. 
The prepuce, composed of the folds of the labia minora, 
should at all times be kept in a sanitary condition, and if 
found to be constricted or sufficiently abnormal to press upon 
or irritate the glans, or to prevent free depuration from about 

383 



them, then such surgical assistance as will accomplish that 
result, is indicated, but surgical interference is a last resort 
in emergency, and should not be resorted to freely; and in 
any event not until all other, proper means, have been tried. 
*\] As to the tissues of the vulva, all that need be said, is that 
they should be kept clean and free from all forms of irritation; 
submitted as much as possible to the influence of the air, and 
not enfolded, in the clothing, in such manner as to debilitate 
or irritate them. 

Clothing that draws through, or into the pudendal slit should 
be especially avoided, because of their general irritating 
tendency, and in children and young girls, because they often 
induce the habit of masturbation. 



384 



